00 04 40 request for substitution - rfs - AC Transit

GENERAL OFFICES-HVAC RENOVATION 1600 FRANKLIN STREET

CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland

Section 00 04 40- page 1 of 4

SECTION 00 04 40 - REQUEST FOR SUBSTITUTION (RFS) DESIGN INTENT

A. In preparing these Specifications, the AC TRANSIT has named those products which to his knowledge can meet the Specifications and are equivalent in construction, functional efficiency, and durability.

B. The first-named manufacturer is the basis for the project design and the use of unnamed manufacturer’s products may require modifications in the project design and construction. If such alternatives are proposed by the Contractor and are favorably reviewed by the AC TRANSIT, the cost of all modifications including utilities and support systems will be borne entirely by the Contractor.

Project RFS No. Submitted By: Date: Spec. Section: Paragraph(s): Drawing Sheet: Detail(s): Proposed Substitution: Manufacturer/Address/Phone: Trade Name/Model No.: On-Site Representative/Address/Phone: Installer/Address/Phone: Product History: New 2-5 years old 5-10 years old More than 10 years old Differences between proposed substitution and specified product (attach required point by point comparative data using the specifications as an outline guide for minimal listing): Reason for not providing specified item:

Similar installation where proposed substitution has been used (Project/Address/Architect and Contact telephone number/Owner and contact telephone number/Date Installed): Proposed substitution affecting other parts of Work: ___ No ___ Yes: explain Changes or modifications needed to coordinate other parts of the Work that will be necessary to accommodate the proposed substitution. Use drawings as outline for what will need to change:


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


Proposed substitution changes Contract Time: ___ No ___ Yes: Add/Deduct_________________

calendar days.

Supporting data attached: ___ Product Data ___ Drawings ___ Test Reports ___

Samples ___ Other:

C. Supporting Data: Provide complete data similar to that required for the product originally specified, including drawings, samples, literature or detailed information sufficient to demonstrate that the proposed substitution is equal in quality and utility to the product or equipment originally specified.

1. Provide information regarding the effect of the substitution, if any, on the construction schedule.

2. Name and address of similar projects on which the substituted product or equipment has been used, and date of installation.

3. Complete breakdown of costs, indicating the amount to be deducted from the Contract Sum if the proposed substitution is accepted.

4. Signed statement that the proposed substitution is in full compliance with the Contract Documents and applicable regulatory requirements.

5. List of other work, if any, which may be affected by the substitution. • Contractor shall be responsible for the effect of a substitution upon

related work, and pay the additional costs generated thereby, including the AC TRANSIT design services associated therewith.

6. Information on availability of maintenance service and source of replacement materials.

7. Sample of manufacturer’s standard form of warranty or guarantee for the proposed substitution.

8. Where required, itemize comparison of proposed substitution with product or equipment specified and list significant variations.

9. Submit data relating to changes in contract schedule. 10. Include accurate cost data comparing proposed substitution with product or

equipment indicated or specified and amount of net change in Contract Sum. • Include costs to other Contractors and costs for revisions to Drawings,

Details or Specifications.

11. Provide complete details regarding changes in requirements for power or other support facilities, auxiliary equipment or structural modifications.

The undersigned certifies that:

The proposed substitution has been fully investigated and determined to be equal or superior in all respects to specified product. The proposed substitution conforms in all respects to the requirements of the Contract Sections and is appropriate for the applications intended. The same warranty will be furnished for proposed substitution as for specified product. The proposed substitution will not affect or delay progress schedule. The cost data as stated above is complete. There shall be no claims to AC Transit for additional costs related to an accepted substitution. The proposed substitution does not affect dimensions and functional clearances.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


Will coordinate the installation of an accepted substitution into the Work and make such other changes as required to complete the work in accordance with the Contract Documents and applicable regulatory requirements. Contractor shall bear the cost of making all mechanical, electrical, structural, utility, or other changes required to accommodate the proposed substitution. Upon approval of the request for substitution, Mechanical, electrical, structural and architectural changes shall be designed and documented sealed and wet signed by the appropriate engineer and/ or architect currently licensed in the state of California including substantiating calculation. Such design documents shall be submitted to AC Transit for review and approval. The burden of proof as to the type, function, and quality of proposed substitutions shall be upon the Contractor. Waives claims for additional costs associated with the substitution which may subsequently become apparent. Will pay costs of changes to Contract Documents required by accepted substitutions. The AC TRANSIT will determine the quality and utility of the Contractor’s proposed substitutions. The AC Transit’s decision shall be final. The AC TRANSIT may require the Contractor to furnish at the Contractor’s expense, a special performance guarantee or other surety with respect to any substituted product, equipment item or service. Submitted by: Signature: Firm: Date: Attachments AC Transit’s REVIEW AND ACTION

Substitution accepted - Make submittals in accordance with Division 1. Substitution accepted as noted - Make corrections and submit in accordance with Division 1. Substitution rejected - Use specified materials and equipment. Substitution Request received too late - Use specified materials.

Signed Date Note: AC Transit’s acceptance of Contractor’s submittal of shop drawings, product data, or samples supporting this Substitution Request shall not constitute approval of submittals which do not conform to the requirements of the Contract Sections. Additional Comments:

END OF SECTION 00 04 40 REQUEST FOR SUBSTITUTION FORM


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


This page intentionally left blank.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 01 10 00 SUMMARY

PART 1 -GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Project information.

2. Work covered by Contract Documents.

3. Phased construction.

4. Access to site.

5. Coordination with occupants.

6. Work restrictions.

7. Specification and drawing conventions.

8. Miscellaneous provisions.

1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION

A. Project Identification: General Offices-Hvac Renovation 1600 Franklin Street

B. Project Location: Ac Transit General Offices- 1600 Franklin Street Oakland, California

C. Owner: AC Transit.

1. AC Transit Representative: Craig Michaels.

D. Architect/ Engineering: Jacobs.

1. Structural Engineering: OLMM

1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents. The following is a brief sum-mary description of the work that is not meant to be an all inclusive listing of tasks. Refer to all contract documents for complete project scope. The summary consists of but is not lim-ited to the following:

1. Demolition of existing trellis on the Parking level 6. Construction on Parking Level 6 of new refrigeration machinery room and equipment and cooling tower enclosure and equipment. The new room consists of a partial inside remodel of a portion of an exist-ing parking floor of the existing GO Building and new construction on the exterior por-tion of the existing parking deck including EIFS walls and standing seam metal roofing system. The cooling tower enclosure is an open air louver screen system. Tie in to ex-isting fire sprinkler main and install new fire sprinkler piping in new refrigeration ma-chinery room. Installation of a gas detection and ventilation in new refrigeration ma-chinery room.

2. Installation of new chilled water piping from parking level 6 new refrigeration machin-ery room up to existing 10th floor mechanical room and tie into existing chilled water mains. Install controls conduit from parking level 6 new refrigeration machinery room and cooling tower enclosure up to existing temperature control panel on 10th floor.

3. Installation of controls from basement DDC controls to parking level 6 new refrigera-


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


tion machinery room and cooling tower enclosure.

4. Installation of conduit and controls wiring from parking level 6 new refrigeration ma-chinery room and cooling tower enclosure up to existing temperature control panel on 10th floor. Provide controls conduit from the existing 10th floor temperature control panel to the new air handler on the roof.

5. New electrical power from basement electrical room to new distribution equipment on 10th floor roof. Provide power to existing HVAC equipment on the 8th floor, 9th floor and on the roof from new electrical distribution equipment. Install new power connections, new DDC controls to new air handler.

6. Demolition of the existing refrigeration equipment machinery and remodel of the exist-ing equipment room on the existing GO Building Penthouse floor Level 10. Installation of structural steel supports for new air handler and raised ductwork. Removal of exist-ing cooling tower off roof existing 10th floor mechanical room. Installation of new air handler on 10th floor. Installation of new concrete utility pads for electrical power and new motor control center for new air handler. Installation of new ductwork from new air handler up to existing building supply and return mains.

B. Type of Contract:

1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.

1.4 SEQUENCE OF WORK GROUP PARAMETERS

A. The entire AC Transit General Office building must remain operational Monday through Fri-day from 6 AM to 6PM during the entire construction period. In addition, 1 day per month the building must remain operational from 6 AM to 12PM during the entire construction pe-riod. AC Transit will provide the exact schedule for those dates after Notice to Proceed is issued to the contractor. Utilities and cooling for this area must remain functional during these times with no interruption. Contractor is responsible for providing temporary meas-ures including all required temporary cooling and temporary power.

B. The AC Transit Information Services Data Center must remain operational 24 hours per day, 7 days per week during the entire construction period. Utilities and cooling for this area must remain functional during this time with no interruption. Contractor is responsible for providing temporary measures including all required temporary cooling and temporary power.

C. The Work shall be conducted sequentially. Groups of work parameters must be completed in sequence at specific milestones, with each group substantially complete prior to the next group beginning.

D. Before commencing Work of each grouping, submit an updated copy of Contractor's con-struction schedule showing the sequence, commencement and completion dates, and commissioning and decommissioning of equipment for all phases of the Work. Clearly indi-cate any planned interruptions of building services that may affect the comfort of AC Transit employees. The schedule must be submitted a minimum of 14 days prior to commence-ment of that work and must be approved in writing by the AC Transit Representative.

E. All new equipment and controls must be fully operational prior to shutdown of the existing equipment including testing, adjustments and corrections, retesting and written acceptance by the AC Transit Representative and the Engineer.

F. Work that must be performed during Monday through Thursday from 6 PM to 6 AM, and Friday from 6 PM to 6 AM Monday to achieve these goals will not be considered for addi-


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


tional compensation and must be included in the base bid.

1.5 ACCESS TO SITE

A. General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations by the Contract limits and as indicated by requirements of this Section.

B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.

1. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways parking lots, loading areas, and entrances serving premises clear and available to AC Transit, AC Transit's em-ployees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.

2. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction op-erations.

3. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site.

C. Condition of Existing Building: Maintain portions of existing building affected by construc-tion operations in a weather tight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations.

1.6 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS

A. Full AC Transit Occupancy: AC Transit will occupy the site and existing building the during entire construction period. Cooperate with AC Transit Representative during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate AC Transit usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with AC Transit's day-to-day operations. Maintain existing exits unless oth-erwise indicated.

1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used fa-cilities without written permission from AC Transit Representative and approval of au-thorities having jurisdiction.

2. Notify AC Transit Representative in writing not less than 48 hours in advance of activi-ties that will affect AC Transit's operations.

B. AC Transit Limited Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: AC Transit may oc-cupy and place and install equipment in completed portions of the Work, prior to Final Sub-stantial Completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and limited occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work.

1. AC Transit will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each completed se-quence of work group portion of the Work to be occupied prior to AC Transit accep-tance of the completed Work.

2. Before limited AC Transit occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On occupancy, AC Transit will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of Work.

3. On occupancy, AC Transit will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of Work.

1.7 WORK RESTRICTIONS


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.

1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of au-thorities having jurisdiction.

B. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by AC Tran-sit or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify AC Transit Representative not less than seven days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.

2. Obtain AC Transit Representative's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions.

C. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and vibration, odors, or other disruption to AC Transit occupancy with AC Transit Represen-tative.

1. Notify AC Transit Representative not less than seven days in advance of proposed disruptive operations.

2. Obtain AC Transit Representative's written permission before proceeding with disrup-tive operations.

D. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet of en-trances, operable windows, or outdoor-air intakes.

E. Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances within the existing building is not permitted.

F. Employee Identification: AC Transit coordinated by its Representative will provide identifi-cation tags for Contractor personnel working on Project site. Require personnel to use identification tags at all times.

G. Employee Screening: Comply with AC Transit requirements for drug and background screening of Contractor personnel working on Project site.

1. Maintain list of approved screened personnel with AC Transit Representative.

1.8 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:

1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are im-plied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise.

B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications.

C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products:


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections.

2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations scheduled on Drawings.

3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes.

1.9 DATE OF STANDARDS AND CODES

A. Reference made to standard specifications or codes refer to the latest edition on the date of this Project Manual, unless otherwise specified. Such reference includes correct addenda and errata, if any.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 -EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION 01 10 00


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland




CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 01 15 40 – PROTECTION OF PROPERTY

PART 1 - PROTECTION OF PROPERTY

1.1 GENERAL

A. SECTION INCLUDES BUT IS NOT LIMITED TO:

1. Locating Existing Utilities and Improvements Indicated on drawing sheets by means of Non destructive testing.

2. Locating Existing Utilities and improvements that are not indicated on drawing sheets by means of Non destructive testing.

3. Verifying the location of all utilities prior to any operations by physically uncovering the utility using only manual labor.

4. Safeguarding of Existing Facilities

5. Restoration of utilities, underground structures and Pavement.

6. Emergency Work

7. Joint Survey to Establish Authenticity of Potential Claims

1.2 SURVEY DRAWINGS AND AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

A. Survey drawings such as building As-built drawings, site and utility drawings and reference drawings of this AC Transit facility that are current (within 12 months) are not available.

B. In the absence of current survey drawings, Contractor may request from the AC Transit Representative such drawings and other information relative to this facility which have been made available to the AC Transit Representative from past projects.

C. It is understood that the AC Transit Representative makes no representation as to the completeness or accuracy of said reference drawings or other information available to Contractor and assumes no responsibility there for.

1.3 EXISTING UTILITIES AND IMPROVEMENTS

A. AC Transit is not a party to or a participant in the Underground Service Alert (USA). AC Transit will not be providing any field marking service, protecting, and warning the Contractor of the underground facilities.

B. The Contractor shall employ the services of a qualified utility locating service using reliable, non-destructive methods such as Ferro scanning, utilization of portable Ground Penetrating Radar system (GPR), x-ray, electromagnetic induction method (EM) and/or pachometer to locate subsurface targets prior to performing non-destructive testing and location of all subsurface utilities to locate metallic and non-metallic reinforcement and pipes in and below concrete slabs.

C. The Contractor shall verify and satisfy himself that there are no other existing utilities that may not be shown and to locate, probe, determine, and flag or mark all underground facilities including, but not limited to, metal and plastic conduits and pipelines, sprinkler heads, quick couplers, valves boxes, controller boxes, pull boxes, underground lighting, gas, electric and sewer lines, telephone, data, cable, electrical control, and irrigation utilities and reinforcing rebar and post tensioning cables within the project site area including building slabs on grade prior to drilling, saw cutting and excavation.

D. After locating all utilities, the Contractor shall verify the location of all utilities prior to any operations including physically uncovering the utility to verify location. The Contractor


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


shall accurately locate and record the position and depth of a utility. Only manual labor shall be used within five feet of the suspected location of a utility to uncover it.

E. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for protection of the utilities during construction.

1.4 TRENCHING AND SLEEVING

A. All trenching, excavation, sleeving and shoring needed to cross over or under a utility shall be performed in the manner required by the party owning the utility and in such a manner as to ensure no dislocation of the existing utility. The method used to cross under the utility shall ensure it is fully supported at all times. The crossing shall be protected so that water or construction equipment will not dislocate or undermine unsupported sections of the utilities.

B. Reroute, rework or replace existing underground utilities as required for new work. C. Provide reasonable access and do not hinder or otherwise interfere with any company or

agency having underground facilities in removing, relocating, or protecting such facilities. D. Verify the actual locations and depths of all utilities indicated or field marked. Make a

sufficient number of exploratory excavations up to a maximum of eight potholes at Contractor’s expense of all utilities that may interfere with the work sufficiently in advance of construction to avoid possible delays to Contractor's work.

E. Notify the AC Transit if such exploratory excavations show the utility location as shown or as marked to be in error.

F. When utility lines are encountered within the area of Contractor’s operations, notify the AC TRANSIT Representative and the owner(s) of the utility lines sufficiently in advance for the necessary protection measures to be taken to prevent interruption of service or delay to Contractor’s operations.

G. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap utilities indicated to be removed or abandoned in place. Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities.

H. Interrupting Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: Notify AC Transit Representative not less than seven days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without AC Transit Representative's written permission.

I. The Contractor shall protect all existing utilities, facilities, and structures, public or private, and will be held responsible for all damage caused by the Contractor not exercising due care to avoid such damage.

1.5 SAFEGUARDING OF EXISTING FACILITIES

A. The Contractor shall perform all work, including dewatering operations, in such a manner as to avoid damage to existing sewer and water systems, fire hydrants, power poles, lighting standards, and all other existing utilities, facilities, trees and vegetation, and structures. The Contractor will be held responsible for any damage due to its failure to exercise due care.

B. Broken concrete, debris, etc., shall be immediately removed from the property site as the Contractor's property and shall be disposed of in a legal manner.

C. The Contractor shall take adequate measures to prevent the impairment of the sewer system and to prevent construction material, pavement concrete, earth or other debris from entering a sewer, sewer structures, catch basin, or storm water inlet. The Contractor shall restore damaged utilities and facilities to a condition equal to or better than they were prior to such damage.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


1.6 RESTORATION OF PAVEMENT

A. General: All paved areas cut or damaged during construction shall be replaced with similar materials and of equal thickness to match the existing undisturbed areas, except where specific resurfacing requirements are called for in the Contract Documents or in the permit requirements of the agency issuing the permit. All pavements which are subject to partial removal shall be neatly saw cut in straight lines.

B. Temporary Resurfacing: Whenever required by the public authorities having jurisdiction, place temporary surfacing promptly after backfilling and maintain such surfacing in a satisfactory condition for the period of time before proceeding with the final restoration.

C. Permanent Resurfacing: Damaged edges of pavement along excavations and elsewhere shall be trimmed back by saw cutting in neat straight lines. All pavement restoration shall be constructed to finished grades compatible with undisturbed adjacent pavement.

D. Restoration of Sidewalks or Driveways: Wherever sidewalks, curbs and gutters, or driveways have been removed for construction purposes, place suitable temporary sidewalks, curbs and gutters, or driveways promptly after backfilling and maintain them in satisfactory condition for the period of time before the final restoration has been made.

1.7 EMERGENCY WORK

A. The Contractor shall at all times have adequate personnel, materials, and equipment at short notice to protect adjoining property, maintain or make emergency repairs. If during the progress of the Contract, the Contractor’s construction crews should be absent from the location of the work at a time when any failure or faulty condition of the Contractor’s work required emergency action in the public interest, the AC Transit shall have the right to make repairs and corrections as required with its own forces at the Contractor’s expense.

B. The Contractor shall furnish the AC Transit Representative with names and telephone numbers of at least three (3) persons to contact in case of emergencies and these persons shall be authorized to perform such work as deemed necessary by the AC Transit Representative.

1.8 JOINT SURVEY TO ESTABLISH AUTHENTICITY OF POSSIBLE CLAIMS

A. The Contractor shall use such methods and shall take adequate precautions to prevent damage to existing buildings, structures, landscaped areas, and other improvements during the prosecution of the work.

B. After the Contract is awarded and before the commencement of work, the AC Transit Representative will arrange for a joint examination of existing buildings, structures landscaped areas, and other improvements in the vicinity of the work, as applicable, which might be damaged by the Contractor's operations.

C. The Contractor shall photograph and digitally video the site during a pre-construction examination. The survey shall be made using still photographs and DVD videos. The survey shall be considered incidental work and no separate payment will be made therefore.

D. The examination of the landscaped areas, exterior of existing buildings, structures, and other improvements located within twenty-five (25) feet of the construction excavation will be made jointly by authorized representatives of the Contractor and the AC Transit under the supervision of the AC Transit Representative. The scope of examination shall include, but is not limited to, recording of cracks in structures, settlement, leakage and existing condition of landscaped areas.

E. Records in duplicate of all observations will be prepared by the contractor. One copy shall be kept by the Contractor, and one copy shall be delivered to the office of the AC Transit Representative.

F. The above records and photographs are intended for use as indisputable evidence in ascertaining the extent of any damage which may occur as a result of the Contractor's


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


operations and are for the protection of the Contractor and AC Transit, and will be a means of determining whether and to what extent damage, resulting from the Contractor’s operations, occurred during the Contract Work.

G. The photographic survey records shall have a vicinity map showing general location of buildings, a map showing the location of each picture with reference to the general layout of the building, and photograph log by number and description of observation. The digital photographs and digital video shall be in color. Resolution for the digital photography shall be medium picture quality (1024 x 768 pixels) Jpeg format. Resolution for digital video shall be normal (240 x 176 pixels) MPEG 4 format. Each photograph and video shall have a sequential photo number for each location and date. Photographs may be taken as close as two feet and as far as twenty feet. The clarity and contrast must be acceptable to the AC Transit Representative.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)


GENERAL OFFICES- HVAC RENOVATION 1600 FRANKLIN STREET

CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 01 41 00 CUTTING AND PATCHING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DEFINITIONS

A. Cutting: Removal of existing construction to permit installation of or to perform other Work.

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other Work.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 14 calendar days before the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work. The proposal shall include the following information:

1. Identification of the Contract and the Contractor’s name.

2. Description of proposed work: a. Scope of cutting, patching, alteration or excavation. b. The necessity for cutting or alteration. c. Drawing showing location of the requested cutting or alteration, along with radar

or x-ray report if required by the AC Transit Project Representative. d. Trades that will execute the work. e. Products proposed to be used. f. Extent of refinishing to be done. g. Alternatives to cutting and patching.

3. Changes to Existing Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in the building’s appearance and other significant visual elements.

4. Utilities: List utilities that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List utilities that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long service will be disrupted.

5. Proposed Dust Control and Noise Control Measures: Submit a statement or drawing that indicates the measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Identify options if proposed measures are later determined to be inadequate.

6. Effect on the work and other surrounding work or on structural or weatherproof integrity of project

7. Written concurrence of each contractor or entity whose work will be affected.

1.03 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch the following operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance, decreased operational life or safety unless approved by the AC Transit Project Representative:


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


1. Primary operational systems and equipment.

2. Air or smoke barriers.

3. Fire protection systems.

4. Control systems.

5. Communication systems.

6. Conveying systems.

7. Electrical wiring systems.

8. HVAC systems.

B. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch the following elements or related components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or those results in increased maintenance, decreased operational life or safety unless approved by the AC Transit Project Representative:

1. Water, moisture or vapor barriers.

2. Membranes and flashings.

3. Exterior curtain wall construction.

4. Equipment supports.

5. Piping, ductwork, vessels and equipment.

6. Noise control and vibration control elements and systems.

7. Stud walls.

C. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in the AC Transit Project Manger’s sole opinion, reduce the building’s aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactorily manner.

1. If possible, retain the original installer or fabricator to cut and patch exposed Work listed below. If it is impossible to engage the original installer or fabricator, engage another recognized, experienced and specialized firm as approved by the AC Transit Project Representative: a. Processed concrete finishes. b. Stonework and stone masonry. c. Ornamental metal. d. Matched-veneer woodwork. e. Preformed metal panels. f. Firestopping. g. Window wall systems. h. Terrazzo. i. Wall coverings. j. HVAC enclosures, cabinets or covers.

D. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at the Project site with all parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding.

1.04 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. General: All patching material shall be of the type specified for the material being patched. Comply with requirements specified in other Sections of these Technical Specifications.

B. Existing Materials: Use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of existing materials as approved by the AC Transit Project Representative.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed.

1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.

2. Immediately notify the AC Transit Project Representative, in writing, of unsuitable, unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions.

3. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

4. Proceed with patching only after construction operations requiring cutting are complete and inspected by the AC Transit Project Representative.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut to ensure structural value or integrity.

B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of the Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas.

D. Existing Services: Where existing services are required to be removed, relocated or abandoned, bypass such services before cutting to avoid (or minimize) interruption of services to occupied areas.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


3.03 POLLUTION CONTROLS

A. Dust Control: Use water mist, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit the spread of dust and dirt. Comply with governing environmental protection regulations.

1. Do not use water when it may damage existing construction or create hazardous or objectionable conditions such as ice, flooding and pollution.

2. Wet mop floors to eliminate trackable dirt and wipe down walls and doors of demolition enclosures. Vacuum carpeted areas.

B. Disposal: Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.

C. Cleaning: Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to the condition existing before selective demolition operations began.

3.04 PERFORMANCE

A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Execute cutting and demolition by methods that will prevent damage to other work and will provide a proper surface to receive patching.

1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

2. Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide a finished installation to comply with specified products, functions, tolerance and finishes.

3. Restore work that has been cut or removed; install new products to provide complete work in accordance with requirements of the Contract documents.

4. Fit work airtight and fire safe to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit and other penetrations through surfaces as required by the Contract documents.

B. Welding Equipment, Procedures and Constraints

1. Natural gas-powered portable welders or “Powcon Inverter” welders are the only acceptable welding equipment to be used inside of building, mechanical or roof areas. Acceptability of equipment other than the equipment noted above shall be at the sole discretion of the AC Transit Project Representative. If the Contractor proposes other types of inverter welding equipment, testing of equipment for harmonics by the Contractor must be completed prior to the request by the Contractor for use of the equipment.

2. Gasoline or diesel welders may be permitted outside enclosed buildings above grade in properly ventilated areas, providing there are no other fire or environmental constraints to their operation. Acceptability of equipment other than the equipment noted above shall be at the sole discretion of the AC Transit Project Representative.

3. Welding activities inside buildings with operational fire alarm systems require submittal of a System Interruption Request. Prior to welding in any area, the Contractor shall locate smoke detectors and shall request interruption of the fire alarm system. Subsequent to the interruption of the fire alarm system and prior to welding activities, the Contractor shall cover and protect smoke detectors until work is complete. Prior to expiration of each interruption of the system, the Contractor shall


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


uncover the smoke detectors. a. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials.

Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. b. Maintain fire watch during and after flame cutting operations in accordance with

fire protection plan approved by the fire department. c. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.

C. Cutting using Welding Practices: All standard safe welding practices must be followed, including but not limited to the following:

1. Flash protection for personnel in surrounding areas.

2. A Contractor furnished fire extinguisher is mandatory in each area.

3. One person in each welding area shall be solely designated as fire watch for each welder.

4. Protect all equipment, cable trays and contents, etc. in the area.

5. Use fire blankets and other appropriate materials to confine sparks and molten metal from the welding, cutting, and/or grinding activities.

6. All welders shall have been qualified through welding tests in accordance with applicable welding code, such as but not limited to AWS, ASME, API, within one year prior to welding taking place. Evidence of qualification shall be through Welding Performance Qualification Records (WPQR), and these certifications must be submitted and approved prior to any welding on site. All welder qualifications test shall be or shall have been administered and witnessed by an Independent Testing Agency (ITA), AWS Certified Welding Inspector (CWI). If re-certification of welders is required, delay costs and retesting costs shall be borne by the Contractor.

D. Cutting: Cut existing construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and other similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained to adjoining construction. If possible review proposed procedures with original installer and comply with original installer’s written recommendations.

1. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to the size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. Existing Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.

3. Concrete: Use a cutting machine such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill.

4. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

E. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Technical Specifications.

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation.

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. For continuous surfaces, refinish entire unit to the nearest break line. For an assembly, refinish entire unit.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Where patching occurs on a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint

coats over the patch and apply the final coat over the entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until the patch blends with adjacent surfaces.

4. Ceilings: Patch, repair or re-hang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance.

F. Fire Rated Construction: Where rated elements are cut, reconstruct to UL approved designs to provide original fire rating.

3.05 CORE DRILLING

A. The Contractor shall execute a minimum of x-rays or ground penetrating radar at each location planned for core drilling prior to submittal to the AC Transit Project Representative and to utility representatives for approval for core drilling. The request for approval shall be submitted seven days in advance of the planned activity. The request for approval shall indicate on the x-ray or radar information regarding alternate locations or core drilling to avoid structural members and any embedded conduit. Embedded conduit may be metallic or plastic. The x-ray or radar system shall be capable of detecting both types of conduit.

B. Core drilled “cores” and the core-drilled opening shall be inspected by the AC Transit Project Representative prior to installation of any systems in new openings.

C. X-ray activities may not be performed during hours of activity or occupancy in the area of the x-ray system. The Contractor shall provide all manpower and barriers required to secure the areas affected by x-ray activities.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC TRANSIT OAKLAND

SECTION 01 50 00- page 1 of 6

SECTION 01 50 00 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 -GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and pro-tection facilities.

1.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel.

B. Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire-prevention program.

C. Moisture-Protection Plan: Describe procedures and controls for protecting materials and construction from water absorption and damage.

1. Describe delivery, handling, and storage provisions for materials subject to water ab-sorption or water damage.

2. Indicate procedures for discarding water-damaged materials, protocols for mitigating water intrusion into completed Work, and replacing water-damaged Work.

3. Indicate sequencing of work that requires water, such as sprayed fire-resistive materi-als and grinding, and describe plans for dealing with water from these operations. Show procedures for verifying that wet construction has dried sufficiently to permit in-stallation of finish materials.

D. Dust- and HVAC-Control Plan: Submit coordination drawing and narrative that indicates the dust- and HVAC-control measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Identify further options if proposed measures are later de-termined to be inadequate. Include the following:

1. Locations of dust-control partitions at each phase of work.

2. HVAC system isolation schematic drawing.

3. Location of proposed air-filtration system discharge.

4. Waste handling procedures.

5. Other dust-control measures.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for tempo-rary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

B. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and CBC 2007.

1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC TRANSIT OAKLAND


A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to as-sume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before AC Transit Representative's acceptance, re-gardless of previously assigned responsibilities.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire-resistive sheet, 10-mil minimum thickness, with flame-spread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84 and passing NFPA 701 Test Method 2.

B. Dust-Control Adhesive-Surface Walk-off Mats: Provide mats minimum 36 by 60 inches.

2.2 EQUIPMENT

A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures.

B. Air-Filtration Units: Primary and secondary HEPA-filter-equipped portable units with four-stage filtration. Provide single switch for emergency shutoff. Configure to run continuously.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.

1. Use of AC Transit's existing toilet facilities will not be permitted.

B. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction ac-tivities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.

C. Isolation of Work Areas in Occupied Facilities: Prevent dust, fumes, and odors from enter-ing occupied areas.

1. Prior to commencing work, isolate the HVAC system in area where work is to be per-formed according to coordination drawings.

2. Disconnect supply and return ductwork in work area from HVAC systems servicing occupied areas.

3. Maintain negative air pressure within work area using HEPA-equipped air-filtration units, starting with commencement of temporary partition construction, and continuing until removal of temporary partitions is complete.

4. Maintain dust partitions during the Work. Use vacuum collection attachments on dust-producing equipment. Isolate limited work within occupied areas using portable dust-containment devices.

5. Perform daily construction cleanup and final cleanup using approved, HEPA-filter-equipped vacuum equipment.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC TRANSIT OAKLAND


D. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construc-tion from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful ef-fect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation require-ments to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.

1. Provide dehumidification systems when required to reduce substrate moisture levels to level required to allow installation or application of finishes.

E. Electric Power Service: Connect to AC Transit's existing electric power service. Maintain equipment in a condition acceptable to AC Transit Representative.

F. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.

1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system.

G. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all construction personnel. Install one telephone line.

1. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers.

a. Police and fire departments.

b. Ambulance service.

c. Contractor's home office.

d. Contractor's emergency after-hours telephone number.

e. Architect's office.

f. Engineers' offices.

g. AC Transit Representative's office.

h. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices.

2. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when away from field office.

H. Parking: Parking areas for construction personnel is not available on AC Transit property site. Make arrangements for contractor’s personnel to have legal parking while working on site.

I. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdic-tion. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.

1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or ad-joining properties or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.

J. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having juris-diction.

K. Helicopters, Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and person-nel.

1. Existing and new HVAC equipment will not fit inside existing stairs or elevators and must be hoisted from outside the building to and from the installation sites.

2. Contractor is responsible for obtaining and paying for any permits required for lifting


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC TRANSIT OAKLAND


materials and equipment onto and from work installation site.

a. Provide hoisting plan complete with calculations signed by a structural engineer licensed in the state of California for review and approval by AC Transit.

3. Truck cranes, helicopter rental and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities.

L. Existing Elevator Use: Use of AC Transit's existing elevators will not be permitted for mate-rials and equipment except upon written permission by AC Transit.

1. Existing elevators are of limited size and can not accommodate items larger than 7’ high x 4’ wide x 4’ deep weighting more than 1000 lbs.

2. Do not load elevators beyond their rated weight capacity.

3. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect elevator car and entrance doors and frame. If, despite such protection, elevators be-come damaged, engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required.

M. Existing Stair Usage: Use of AC Transit's existing stairs will be permitted, provided stairs are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to AC Transit Representative. At Substantial Completion, restore stairs to condition existing before initial use.

1. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect stairs and to maintain means of egress. If stairs become damaged, restore damaged areas so no evidence remains of correction work.

3.2 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities.

B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possi-ble air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.

C. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having ju-risdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.

D. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in pro-gress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and simi-lar activities. Provide temporary weather tight enclosure for building exterior and roof open-ings.

1. Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire-resistive sheet, 10-mil minimum thickness, with flame-spread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84 and passing NFPA 701 Test Method 2. Lap over curbs and roof for minimum of 12”. Positively attach sheet to sides of curb to withstand high winds and windblown rain conditions.

2. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is incomplete, insulate temporary enclosures.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC TRANSIT OAKLAND


F. Temporary Partitions as required: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas occupied by AC Transit from fumes and noise.

1. Construct dustproof partitions with two layers of 6-mil polyethylene sheet on each side.

a. Basement level and P6 level.

2. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with gasketed dustproof doors and security locks where openings are required.

3. Protect air-handling equipment.

4. Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition.

G. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241; manage fire-prevention program.

1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas.

2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for person-nel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and in-formation.

3.3 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL

A. Contractor's Moisture-Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible signs of mold that may appear during construction.

B. Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect as follows:

1. Protect porous materials from water damage.

2. Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water.

3. Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete.

4. Remove standing water from decks.

5. Keep deck openings covered or dammed.

C. Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows:

1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with high organic content, into partially enclosed building.

2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage.

3. Periodically collect and remove waste containing cellulose or other organic matter.

4. Discard or replace water-damaged material.

5. Do not install material that is wet.

6. Discard, replace, or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold.

7. Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry before


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC TRANSIT OAKLAND


enclosing the material in drywall or other interior finishes.

D. Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the building enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows:

1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in condi-tions.

2. Use permanent HVAC system to control humidity.

3. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, relative humidity, and exposure to water limits.

a. Hygroscopic materials that may support mold growth, including wood and gyp-sum-based products, that become wet during the course of construction and remain wet for 48 hours are considered defective.

b. Measure moisture content of materials that have been exposed to moisture dur-ing construction operations or after installation. Record readings beginning at time of exposure and continuing daily for 48 hours. Identify materials containing moisture levels higher than allowed. Report findings in writing to Architect.

c. Remove materials that can not be completely restored to their manufactured moisture level within 48 hours.

3.4 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.

1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventila-tion, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated re-sults and to avoid possibility of damage.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 05 12 00 - STRUCTURAL STEEL

PART 1 -GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Furnishing and erection of all structural steel items complete, as shown and/or specified in-cluding:

1. Furnishing of anchor bolts for structural steel columns and responsibility for their cor-rect locations; provide templates.

2. Brackets and miscellaneous iron connections shop-connected to structural members.

3. Beam Penetrations as indicated on the drawings.

4. Installing and removing temporary guys, shores, scaffolding and bracing required for steel erection.

1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Wind Loads – Structural Design Basis - See Structural Design Basis (Sheet S0.1)

B. Seismic Design - Structural Design Basis - See Structural Design Basis (Sheet S0.1)

1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Section 03 30 00, Cast-In-place Concrete for grouting of base and setting plates.

B. Section 05 31 00, Steel Deck.

C. Section 09 96 00, High-Performance Coatings

1.4 REFERENCES, CODES AND STANDARDS

A. AISC Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Build-ings, of the American Institute of Steel Construction, latest edition.

B. AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges, latest edition.

C. AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code - Steel.

D. Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts by the Research Coun-cil on Structural Connections.

E. Safety regulations prescribed by O.S.H.A.

F. California Building Code, 2007 Edition.

G. ANSI B18.22.1 – Plain Washers

H. ASTM A36/A36M - Carbon Structural Steel.

I. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


J. ASTM A108 - Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold-Finished, Standard Quality.

K. ASTM A307 - Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 ksi Tensile Strength.

L. ASTM A325 - Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat-Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength.

M. ASTM A354 - Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts, Studs, and Other Externally Threaded Fasteners

N. ASTM A490 - Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength

O. ASTM A500 - Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.

P. ASTM A501 - Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing.

Q. ASTM A572/A572M - High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel.

R. ASTM A578/A578M - Straight-Beam Ultrasonic Examination of Plain and Clad Steel Plates for Special Applications.

S. ASTM A992/A992M - Steel for Structural Shapes For Use in Building Framing.

T. ASTM E329-02 Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction.

U. ASTM F436 - Hardened Steel Washers.

V. ASTM F959 - Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicators for Use with Structural Fasteners.

W. FEMA 350 – Recommended Seismic Design Criteria for New Steel Moment–Frame Build-ings

X. FEMA 353 – Recommended Specifications and Quality Assurance Guidelines for Steel Moment-Frame Construction for Seismic Applications.

Y. FS TT-P-645 - Primer, Paint, Zinc-Molybdate, Alkyd Type.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Welding procedures, welders, welding operations, and tackers shall be qualified in accor-dance with AWS D1.1.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Indicate shop and erection details including cuts, copes, connections, holes, threaded fasteners and welds.

B. Proof of Compliance: Mill Certifications for all steel materials.

C. Welding Procedure Specifications.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


A. Deliver anchor bolts and other anchorage devices which are to be embedded in the work of other trades to the project site in sufficient time to permit their timely installation. Provide proper setting drawings, templates and directions for installation of these items.

B. Structural steel members which are stored at the site or a staging area shall be above ground on platforms, skids, or other supports. Store fasteners and welding electrodes in a weathertight and dry place until ready for use. Store packaged materials in their original containers.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel Wide-Flange Shapes: ASTM A992.

B. Plates: ASTM A36.

C. Other Structural Steel Shapes: ASTM A36.

D. Structural Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B

E. Standard Threaded Fasteners:

1. Threaded Rods: ASTM A572, Grade50.

2. Plain Washers: ANSI B18.22.1, Type A.

3. Beveled Washers: ASTM F436.

F. High Strength Bolts, Nuts and Washers: ASTM A325. See structural connection details for location of bearing-type and friction-type bolts.

G. Direct Tension Indicators (Load Indicator Washers): ASTM F959, Type 325.

H. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A36.

I. Welded Studs (Shear Connectors welded directly to Steel Frames): Low carbon, cold drawn, headed type steel shear connectors for stud welded installation, Fy = 50 ksi, Ft = 60 ksi, conforming to ASTM A108.

J. Welding Electrodes: 70 ksi minimum. E70 xx u.o.n., Except that E70 xx T4 shall not be used.

K. Structural Steel Primer Paint: Zinc chromate alkyd primer (TT-P-645), except as otherwise recommended by the manufacturer of the coating for exposed steel.

2.2 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate structural steel within tolerances specified under Codes and Standards refer-enced in Article entitled “References, Codes and Standards”.

B. Fabricate and assemble structural steel in the shop to the greatest extent possible. Do shearing carefully and accurately using machine equipment where possible.

C. Connections shall be welded or bolted as indicated. Shop connections not otherwise


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


shown shall be welded. Eccentric connections are not permitted unless shown in detail on shop drawings.

D. Surfaces required to be milled or planed are indicated on the drawings.

E. Provide bearing plates for members bearing on footings, piers, and walls.

F. Drift pins may be used for assembling parts provided metal is not distorted or holes enlarged. Holes requiring enlargement to admit bolts shall be reamed. Misaligned holes will subject members to rejection.

G. Welding: Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1.1.

H. High Strength Bolted Construction: See Part 3 - Execution.

2.3 CLEANING, PRIMING, AND GALVANIZING

A. General:

1. Steelwork, including items embedded in concrete, shall receive surface preparation and protective coatings in accordance with Section 09 96 00, High-Performance Coat-ings. Top of steel beams to receive shear studs for composite construction, areas re-quiring welding, and faying surfaces of slip critical high strength bolted connections shall be masked off before applying intermediate coat, see Section 09 96 00

2. All fasteners, anchor bolts, and washers shall be either hot dip galvanized to Class C specification in accordance with ASTM A153 or mechanically galvanized to a Class 50 thickness in accordance with ASTM B695. Apply intermediate and final coats after in-stallation in accordance with Section 09 96 00.

B. Steel Materials to Receive Spray-Applied Fireproofing:

1. Steel materials shall be power-tool cleaned in accordance with SSPC-SP 3 to remove mill scale, rust, grease, oil, and any other foreign matter. Welds shall be thoroughly wire brushed.

2. After cleaning and just before delivery of steel to the jobsite, steel materials shall be washed with solvent to remove dust and residue in accordance with SSPC-SP 1.

C. Galvanize steel members and fabrications in accordance with ASTM A123. Galvanize fas-teners in accordance with ASTM A153.

1. Clean in accordance with SSPC-2, Hand Tool Cleaning and remove all weld flux prior to galvanizing. In no case shall preparation for galvanizing be less than that required by standards or the galvanizer.

D. Hot-dip Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize the following items:

1. All steel.

2. Fasteners which connect galvanized components.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 CONDITION OF SURFACES

A. Before starting work, verify locations and elevations of bearings and anchor bolts. Immedi-


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


ately report inaccuracies. Work under this Section shall include responsibility for accurate bearing of steel and correct location of anchorage.

3.2 ERECTION

A. Erect items of structural steel in accord with applicable provisions of Article entitled “Refer-ences, Codes and Standards”.

B. Erection Tolerances: Structural Steel work erection tolerances shall be in accord with "AISC Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Build-ings" and "AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges".

C. Field connections shall be welded or bolted as indicated.

D. Bolting:

1. As erection progresses, bolt up work to take care of dead loads, construction live loads, lateral forces and erection stresses.

2. Unless otherwise noted, erection bolts used in welded construction may be either tightened securely and left in place or removed and the holes filled with plug welds.

3. High Strength Bolting:

a. Make high strength bolted connections in accord with Reference Standard for "friction-type" connections with threads excluded from shear plane for bearing-type connections.

b. Contact surface with "slip critical (friction) type" connections shall be free of oil, paint, lacquer, or other coatings.

c. Tighten nuts using Direct Tension Indicators. Minimum bolt tension as per Refer-ence Standard for each bolt type and size used. Use beveled washers to com-pensate for parallelism when outer face of bolted parts has a slope greater than 1:20 with respect to a plane normal to the bolt axis.

d. When bolts have been completely tightened, mark with identifying symbol.

E. Temporary Bracing: Introduce wherever necessary to provide for loads to which structure is subjected including erection equipment and its operation. Leave in place until no longer re-quired for safety. Make proper provisions for construction loads, piles of materials, equip-ment, etc., carried by structural frame during erection.

3.3 QUALITY CONTROL, TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Tests for structural steel will be made and reports furnished by AC Transit hired-testing agency in accord with the following requirements:

1. Mill Tests and Inspection of Structural Steel:

a. Test of Mill Order: Where steel, ordered from mill, cut to lengths, is identified by heat or melt numbers and is accompanied by mill analysis test reports, material may be used without further local tests, provided an affidavit is given that materi-als conform with requirements. In case of controversy, tension and bend tests of materials, either locally or at the mill, as required for local stock is mandatory, in which case, such testing will be back-charged to the Contractor.

b. Test of Unidentified Steel: In the event that structural steel cannot be identified by heat or melt numbers and is accompanied by mill analysis and test reports,


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


such stock may be used, provided one (1) tension and (1) bend test is made for each 50 tons or fractional part, of stock as may be used in the work. Complete four-sided surface inspection may be required for materials. Each piece of high-strength local stock steel will be tested and stamped. Costs of such testing will be back-charged to the Contractor.

c. Contractor shall take test specimens under direction of the testing agency and shall be machined by the Contractor, at Contractor’s expense, to dimensions as required by related applicable Standard ASTM Specification.

2. Tests of Welding and Bolting: Testing agency will inspect shop and field welding and inspect high strength bolting. Testing agency will comply with regulations of the Cali-fornia Building Code 2007 Edition and will certify in writing, upon completion of work, that welding and high strength bolting has been performed in accord with Drawings and Specifications and applicable Article entitled “References, Codes and Standards”.

3. Inspection of high strength bolts: Testing agency will check bolt tightness on 100 per-cent of bolts.

4. Continuous Inspection of Welds: In addition to visual inspection, testing agency will inspect groove-welded connections of column-to-column, column-to-girder, or girder-to-girder by ultrasonic or other approved non-destructive tests.

a. Ultrasonic testing will be performed by a specially trained, qualified technician, who will operate equipment, examine welds and maintain a record of welds ex-amined, defects found and disposition of each defect. Defective welds shall be repaired and costs of retesting defective welds shall be borne by the Contractor.

b. Welds requiring ultrasonic testing will be tested at the rate of 100 percent.

c. When ultrasonic indication arising from the weld root can be interpreted as either a weld defect or backing strip, backing strip shall be removed at expense of Con-tractor, and if no root defect is visible, weld will be re-tested. If no defect is indi-cated on this retest and no significant amount of base and weld metal have been removed, joint needs no further repair or welding. If a defect is indicated, it shall be repaired at no expense to the AC Transit Representative.

d. Questionable root indications that prove not to be defective will not count against welder to increase test rates.

e. Ultrasonic instrumentation will be calibrated by a qualified technician to evaluate quality of welds in accord with AWS D1.1, Appendix C.

f. Other methods of inspection, for example, X-ray, gamma ray, magnetic particle, or dye penetrant, may be used on welds if deemed necessary by testing agency with cooperation of Contractor.

5. Ultrasonic Material Inspection:

a. All column material within 1 foot (6 inches either side) of a direct buttweld for girder flange connections will be ultrasonically tested for laminations in accord with ASTM A578-Level II.

b. Material in designated location will be tested for laminations by ultrasonic means prior to fabrication, with written reports submitted to the AC Transit Representa-tive.

c. Detection of Laminations: Rejectable defect discovered by ultrasonic means are defined as follows: Using suitable calibrated ultrasonic equipment, any record-able discontinuity causing complete loss of back-reflection and which cannot be encompassed within a 3-inch diameter circle is unacceptable (Level II Standard


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


of Acceptance). Should such flaws be detected, they may be repaired by weld-ing, subject to the AC Transit Representative’s review.

B. All full penetration groove welds, all partial penetration groove welds and all electroslag welds will be subjected to ultrasonic testing.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland




CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 05 31 00 - STEEL DECK

PART 1 -GENERAL


A. Steel deck work as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein including headed type welded studs (shear connectors) whether welded through the decking or directly to the structure, and accessories. This Section includes miscellaneous metal supports required for the proper installation of steel decking and which are not shown on the Drawings or specified elsewhere.




1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Section 03 20 00, Concrete Reinforcing.

B. Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete.

C. Section 05 12 00, Structural Steel (including miscellaneous supporting angles, channels, etc., specifically shown on the Drawings and not noted as part of the Steel Decking Work).

1.4 REFERENCES, CODES, AND STANDARDS

A. The following references, codes, and standards are hereby made a part of this Section and steel deck work shall conform to the applicable requirements therein except as otherwise specified herein or shown on the Drawings. Nothing contained herein shall be construed as permitting work that is contrary to code requirements.

1. "Specifications for the Design of Light Gage Cold Formed Steel Structural Members" of the American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI).

2. AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code – Steel.

3. AWS D1.3 Structural Welding Code – Sheet Steel.

4. California Building Code, 2007 Edition.

B. ASTM A36/A36M - Carbon Structural Steel.

C. ASTM A108 - Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold-Finished, Standard Quality.

D. ASTM A466/A466M - Weldless Chain.

E. ASTM A653/A653M - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

F. ASTM A1008/A1008M - Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


A. Shop and Erection Drawings: Indicate layout and erection details including welds, me-chanical fasteners, studs, clips, reinforcement, flashings, and closures and accessories which are to be applied or installed under this section.

B. Review of drawings will cover only the general scheme and character of details but not the checking of dimensions; nor will such review relieve the Contractor from responsibility for executing the Work in accordance with the Drawings.

C. Submit certified mill analysis and test report for each heat for review by the AC Transit-hired testing agency.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Steel Decking:

1. Base Metal: Steel decking shall be formed from sheet steel conforming to ASTM A1008 or A 466 and having a minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi.

2. Coating: Sheets shall have received, before being formed, a hot-dipped, zinc protec-tive coating meeting or exceeding the requirements of ASTM A653 for G90 Coating Designation.

3. Physical Properties: Drawings indicate sectional profiles, depths, and minimum gages required.

4. Manufacturer: Verco Manufacturers Inc., the ASC Company, or equal.

5. Steel deck manufacturer shall supply decking free of lubricants or oils which would significantly impair the adhesion of sprayed fireproofing.

B. Miscellaneous Metal Items (as required): ASTM A36, shop primed if not encased in con-crete or sprayed with fireproofing. Apply coating in accordance with Section 09 96 00.

C. Accessories:

1. Flashings, Closures, and Screeds: Galvanized sheet steel as specified for decking, 16 gauge.

2. Venting Devices: Deck units having concrete fill and which are to receive waterproof membranes or weatherproof coatings (roofing, elastomeric coatings, etc.) shall have provisions incorporated into deck fabrication or installation for venting moisture. Indi-vidual separating clips, or built-in venting slots formed as an integral part of deck pro-file, per deck manufacturer’s recommendations.

3. Welding Electrodes and Equipment: As recommended by deck manufacturer and ap-proved for use in accordance with Article “References, Codes, and Standards”.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION OF STRUCTURE

A. Verify that supports for decking are properly aligned and sufficiently level to permit proper bearing and report any discrepancies. Proceeding with final installation implies acceptance of conditions.

3.2 ERECTION


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


A. Erect decking as per governing codes, drawing requirements and manufacturer's specifica-tions and recommendations.

B. Ship deck units to job site in standard widths and cut to proper lengths such that end joints occur over supporting members. Perform field cuts as required.

C. Place deck units on supporting framework and adjust to final position with proper bearing before permanently fastening. Provide a minimum bearing of 2-1/2 inches over supporting beams.

D. Place units in straight alignment for entire length of flute run with close alignment between flute ends.

E. Provide flashings and closure where required to prevent concrete leakage. Fasten in place by welding.

F. Make welds in accord with provisions of AWS Code. Use only welders certified for welding in light gauge metal.

G. Opening reinforcement shall be as detailed on the Drawings. Cutting of holes other than those detailed on the Drawings shall be done only as specifically approved by the Design Build General Contractor. Show holes on shop drawings and coordinate required openings. Holes not shown on Structural Drawings shall be cut and reinforced in accord with details on Drawings. In general, reinforcing is not necessary for holes 6 inches or less in diameter.

H. Touch up abrasions and damaged areas in galvanized coating and painted coatings on metal deck and miscellaneous metal items.

3.3 HANGER LOADS

A. The load on any wire hanger shall not exceed 50 pounds. The total load from all hangers or a single hanger with adequate spreader plate on a deck unit shall not exceed 100 pounds. Do not place such loads within the middle half of deck spans.

3.4 CLEAN-UP

A. After erection, remove metal cuttings and construction debris from flutes for entire length. Remove grease, oil, and other foreign material. Leave deck and cells in proper condition for obtaining bond with concrete fill and spray fireproofing.


A. Testing agency will review mill test reports, welding procedures, qualification of welders and deck and stud welding during erection. Cost associated with retests, qualification of weld-ers and tests of unidentified material will be at Contractor's expense.

B. If material is not identified by certified mill analysis and test reports, one set of tension and bend tests will be made by the testing agency for each 5 tons or fraction thereof for each size or gage. Costs of such testing shall be paid by the Contractor.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland




CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 05 40 00 – COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this section.

1.2 WORK INCLUDED

A. The Work includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the furnishing and erection of all cold formed metal framing, as shown and/or specified including:

1. Furnishing of fasteners and anchors for structural walls, posts, floor/roof and respon-sibility for their correct locations; provide templates.

2. Brackets and miscellaneous connections shop-connected to structural members.

3. Built-up joists and penetrations as indicated on the drawings.

4. Installing and removing temporary guys, shores, scaffolding and bracing required for erection.

1.3 RELATED WORK


B. Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrication.





A. California Building Code (CBC), 2007 Edition.

B. AISI - Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing General Provisions.

C. AISI - Specification the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.

D. ICBO Evaluation report ER-4943-P by Steel Stud Manufacturers Association (SSMA)

E. ASTM A 780 - Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings.

F. ASTM A 1003 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Carbon, Metallic- and Nonmetallic-Coated for Cold-Formed Framing Members.

G. ASTM B 633 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel.

H. ASTM C 955 - Standard Specification for Load-Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs, Runners (Tracks), and Bracing or Bridging for Screw Application of Gypsum Panel Prod-ucts and Metal Plaster Bases.

I. ASTM C 1513 - Standard Specification for Steel Tapping Screws for Cold-Formed Steel


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


Framing Connections.

J. ASTM C1007 - Standard Specification for Installation of Load Bearing (Transverse and Ax-ial) Steel Studs and Related Accessories.

K. AWS D.1.3 - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel.

L. Safety regulations prescribed by O.S.H.A.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Contractor with minimum 5 years experienced in performing work of this section who has specialized in installation of work similar to that required for this project.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer's product literature, data sheets and installation recommendations for specified products.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Submit shop drawings prepared by the manufacturer showing plans, sections, eleva-tions, layouts, profiles and product component locations, including anchorage, brac-ing, fasteners, accessories and finishes.

2. Show connection details with screw types and locations, weld lengths and locations, and other fastener requirements.

3. Where prefabricated or pre-finished panels are submitted, provide drawings depicting panel configurations, dimensions and locations.

C. Proof of Compliance: Unless otherwise noted, submit the following in four (4) copies for re-view by Testing Laboratory and Architect.

1. Certified reports of tensile properties and bend tests for steel shapes, bar, and plates.

2. Affidavit (in duplicate) that structural steel having yield strength greater than 50 ksi conforms to requirements of Drawings and Specifications.


A. Deliver anchor bolts, fasteners and other devices which are to be embedded in the work of other trades to the project site in sufficient time to permit their timely installation. Provide proper setting drawings, templates and directions for installation of these items.

B. Store packaged materials in their original containers. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.

C. Store materials protected from exposure to rain, snow or other harmful weather conditions, at temperature and humidity conditions per the recommendations of ASTM C955.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Formed Steel Sheet: Complying with ASTM A 1003/A; unless indicated otherwise.

B. Galvanized Coating: G90 coating weight minimum, complying with ASTM C 955.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


2.2 MEMBER COMPONENTS

A. Provide member components as required by design drawings, meeting properties listed in SSMA product technical guide and other referenced standards:

1. Studs, roof joists, runner-track, clips, clip-angles, U-Channel, bridging/spacer bars, web stiffeners, etc. by Dietrich, or United States Gypsum Co., or equal member of SSMA.

2. Framing Component Accessories: Provide the following accessories as required for a complete system.

a. Flat strapping.

b. Angles, plates, sheets.

c. Custom brake-formed shapes.

3. Fasteners: Self-drilling, self-tapping screws; Steel, complying with ASTM C1513; Galvanized coating, plated or oil-phosphate coated complying with ASTM B 633 as needed for required corrosion resistance.

4. Touch-Up Paint: Zinc rich, containing 95-percent metallic zinc, ZRC 350 as manufac-tured by ZRC Worldwide, Marshfield, MA.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. General: Framing components may be pre-assembled into panels prior to erecting.

B. Fabricate panels square, with components attached in a manner so as to prevent racking or distortion.

C. Cut all framing components squarely for attachment to perpendicular members, or as re-quired for an angular fit against abutting members. Hold members positively in place until properly fastened.

D. Provide insulation as specified elsewhere in all double jamb studs and double header mem-bers, which will not be accessible to the insulation contractor.

E. Axially Loaded Studs:

1. Install studs to have full bearing against inside track web (1/8 inches (3.2 mm) maxi-mum gap) prior to stud and track attachment.

2. Splices in axially loaded studs are not permitted.

F. Fasteners: Fasten components using self-tapping screws or welding.

G. Welding: Welding is permitted on 18 gauge or heavier material only.

1. Specify welding configuration and size on the Structural Calculation submittal.

2. Qualify welding operators in accordance with Section 6.0 of AWS D.1.3.

3. Touch up all welds with zinc-rich paint in compliance with ASTM A 780.

PART 3 -PRODUCTS

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Prior to installation, inspect previous work of all other trades. Verify that all work is complete


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


and accurate to the point where this installation may properly proceed in strict accordance with framing shop drawings.

B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatis-factory preparation before proceeding.

3.2 ERECTION

A. General Erection Requirements:

1. Install cold-formed framing in accordance with requirements of ASTM C1007.

2. Weld in compliance with AWS D.1.3.

3. Install in compliance with applicable sections of the AISI Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing General Provisions.

B. Wall Systems:

1. Erect framing and panels plumb, level and square in strict accordance with approved shop drawings.

2. Handle and lift studs, tracks and prefabricated panels in a manner so as not to cause distortion in any member.

3. Anchor runner track securely to the supporting structure as shown on the erection drawings. Install concrete anchors only after full compressive strength has been achieved. Provide a sill sealer or gasket barrier between all concrete and steel con-nections. Complete, uniform and level bearing support shall be provided for bottom runner.

4. Butt all track joints. Securely anchor abutting pieces of track to a common structural element, or butt-weld or splice them together.

5. Align and plumb studs, and securely attach to the flanges or webs of both upper and lower tracks except when vertical movement is specified.

6. All double jamb studs not accessible to contractors, insulation equal to that specified elsewhere shall be provided.

7. Install jack studs or cripples below window sills, above window and door heads, at freestanding stair rails and elsewhere to furnish support, securely attached to support-ing members.

8. Attach wall stud bridging in a manner to prevent stud rotation. Space bridging rows according to manufacturer's recommendations.

9. Frame wall openings to include headers and supporting studs as shown in the draw-ings.

10. Provide temporary bracing until erection is completed.

11. Provide stud walls at locations indicated on plans as "shear walls" for frame stability and lateral load resistance.

12. All shear walls shall have diagonally braced studs.

a. Install 2” wide steel sheet diagonal bracing straps to both stud flanges, terminate at and fasten to reinforced top and bottom tracks. Fasten clip-angle connectors to multiple studs at ends of bracing and anchor to structure.

13. Splices in axially loaded studs shall not be permitted.

14. Where indicated in the drawings, provide for structural vertical movement using a ver-


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


tical slide clip or other means in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

C. Steel Joists: 1. Uniform and level joist bearing shall be provided at concrete floor by means of

shims and/or non-setting grout. 2. Provide end blocking where joist ends are not otherwise restrained from rotation. 3. Provide web stiffeners at reaction points and/or points of concentrated loads. 4. Provide joist bridging as shown in drawings. 5. Locate joists directly over bearing studs or provide a suitable load distribution

member at the top track.

D. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

1. Inspection: Periodic special inspections are required.

2. Owner will hire and pay inspection agency.

3. Submit schedule showing when the following activities will be performed and resubmit schedule when timing changes.

4. Notify inspection agency not less than 3 days before the start of any of the following activities.

5. Inspections are required during welding operations, screw attachment, bolting, an-choring and other fastening of components within the force resisting structural system, including struts, braces, and hold-downs.

E. PROTECTION

1. Protect installed products until completion of project.

2. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland




CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 -GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions, Division 1 Specification Sections and other Applicable Technical Sections apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment.

2. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Paint products.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.

2. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections.

3. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal fabrications without field measurements. Coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

2. Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver components, sheets, metal wall panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal wall panels for protection during transportation and handling.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


B. Unload, store, and erect metal wall panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.

C. Stack metal wall panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal wall panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal wall panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

B. Coordinate installation of steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete that are specified in this Section but required for work of another Section. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

C. Coordinate metal wall panel assemblies with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction of studs, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 METALS, GENERAL

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

2.2 FERROUS METALS

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing.

C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads.

D. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal channels with continuous slot complying with MFMA-3.

1. Size of Channels: 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 inches.

2. Material: Steel complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, structural steel, Grade 33; 0.0966-inch minimum thickness; coated with rust-inhibitive, baked-on, acrylic enamel. Provide channels with manufacturer’s “Permagreen II” finish consisting of thermally-cured, rust inhibiting acrylic enamel applied by electrodeposition after cleaning and phosphating, color No. 14109 per Federal Standard 595a.

2.3 FASTENERS, GENERAL


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners or zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

B. Miscellaneous Metal Framing, General: ASTM C 645, cold-formed metallic-coated steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120) hot-dip galvanized or coating with equivalent corrosion resistance unless otherwise indicated.

1. Zee Clips: 0.079-inch (2.01-mm) nominal thickness.

2. Base or Sill Angles or Channels: 0.079-inch (2.01-mm) nominal thickness.

3. Fasteners for Miscellaneous Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten miscellaneous metal framing members to substrates.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.

2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

D. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts, unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


conspicuous.

G. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated.

1. Furnish inserts if units are installed after concrete is placed.

B. Finishes: Section 09 96 00Duplex System For Painting Over Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel

2.7 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES

A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM

A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible.

B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work.

C. Finishes: Section 09 96 00Duplex System For Painting Over Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel

2.9 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES, GENERAL.

A. Pre finish metal items in shop prior to assembly using after-fabrication hot dipped galvanizing. Coordinate maximum size of fabricated items with selected venders to fit facility dipping tank.

1. Local hot dip galvanizing service providers:

B. Prepare surfaces for galvanizing per ASTM D 6386. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications:

1. Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


C. Hot-dip galvanize welded parts after-fabrication and prior to shipping to construction site.

D. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items unless specifically indicated otherwise to comply with applicable standard listed below:

1. ASTM A 123/A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron products.

2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.

E. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20.

1. Site repair of galvanized components shall be done only with permission and inspection from the AC Transit Representative.

2. Comply with ASTM A 780, Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings.

3. Use for all metal fabrications exposed to view.

4. Provide duplex system for painting from one source and verify compatibility of galvanized substrates with manufacturer.

5. Finish color: As indicated on finish schedule or where color not indicated:

a. Paint manufacturer: Sherman Williams,

b. Color: White Heron SW7627

PART 3 -EXECUTION


A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:

D. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

E. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

F. Remove welding flux immediately.

G. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


H. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors.

3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.

B. Anchor supports for operable partitions securely to and rigidly brace from building structure.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 05 53 00 METAL GRATINGS

PART 1 -GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal bar gratings.

2. Metal frames and supports for gratings.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 05 Section "Structural Steel Framing" for structural-steel framing system components.


A. Structural Performance: Gratings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the follow-ing loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated below and per require-ments noted in the 2007 CBC.

1. Walkways and Elevated Platforms Other Than Exits: Uniform load of 60 lbf/sq. ft. (2.87 kN/sq. m).

2. Limit deflection to L/360 or 1/4 inch (6.4 mm), whichever is less.

B. Seismic Performance: Provide gratings capable of withstanding the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer registered in the state of California responsible fro their preparation.


A. Metal Bar Grating Standards: Comply with NAAMM MBG 531, “Metal Bar Grating Manual.”

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


gratings by field measurements before fabrication.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for gratings, grating frames, and supports. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

B. Coordinate grating openings and penetrations with other trades. Coordinate grating attach-ment with mechanical anchorage attachments.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 FERROUS METALS


B. Steel Bars for Bar Gratings: ASTM A36/A36M.

2.2 FASTENERS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers.

C. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1 (ASME B18.22M).


A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy that is welded.

B. Shop Assembly: Fabricate grating sections in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

C. Cut, drill, and punch material cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

D. Form from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated, but not less than that needed to support indicated loads.

E. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


F. Welding: Comply with AWS recommendations and the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corro-sion resistance of base metals.



G. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and space the anchoring devices to secure gratings, frames, and supports rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.

2.4 METAL BAR GRATINGS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Alabama Metal Industries Corporation; a Gibraltar Industries company.

2. All American Grating.

3. BarnettBates Corporation.

4. Borden Metal Products (Canada) Limited.

5. Fisher & Ludlow; Division of Harris Steel Limited.

6. Grating Pacific, Inc.

7. Grupo Metelmex, S.A. de C.V.

8. IKG Industries; a division of Harsco Corporation.

9. Marwas Steel Co.; Laurel Steel Products Division.

10. Ohio Gratings, Inc.

11. Seidelhuber Metal Products; Division of Brodhead Steel Products.

B. Welded Steel Grating:

1. Bearing Bar Spacing: 1-3/16 inches (30 mm) o.c.

2. Bearing Bar Depth: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) As required to comply with structural per-formance requirements.

3. Bearing Bar Thickness: 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) As required to comply with structural per-formance requirements.

4. Crossbar Spacing: 4 inches (102 mm) o.c.

5. Traffic Surface: Serrated.

6. Steel Finish: Section 09 96 00 Duplex System For Painting Over Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel.

C. GRATING FRAMES AND SUPPORTS

1. Frames and Supports for Metal Gratings: Fabricate from metal shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive gratings. Miter and weld connections for perimeter angle frames. Cut, drill,


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


and tap units to receive hardware and similar items.

2.5 STEEL FINISHES

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Finish gratings, frames, and supports after assembly.

C. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.

1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint ad-hesion.

PART 3 -EXECUTION


A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where nec-essary for securing gratings to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for con-crete and masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors.

B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing gratings. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from estab-lished lines and levels and free of rack.

C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete or masonry.

D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints.

1. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of exte-rior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

E. Attach toeplates to gratings by welding at locations indicated.

F. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:




3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up shop-painted surfaces.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness.

B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 09 painting Sections.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland




CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 05 12 00 - STRUCTURAL STEEL

PART 1 -GENERAL


A. Furnishing and erection of all structural steel items complete, as shown and/or specified in-cluding:

1. Furnishing of anchor bolts for structural steel columns and responsibility for their cor-rect locations; provide templates.

2. Brackets and miscellaneous iron connections shop-connected to structural members.

3. Beam Penetrations as indicated on the drawings.

4. Installing and removing temporary guys, shores, scaffolding and bracing required for steel erection.




1.3 RELATED WORK


B. Section 05 31 00, Steel Deck.

C. Section 09 96 00, High-Performance Coatings


A. AISC Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Build-ings, of the American Institute of Steel Construction, latest edition.

B. AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges, latest edition.

C. AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code - Steel.

D. Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts by the Research Coun-cil on Structural Connections.

E. Safety regulations prescribed by O.S.H.A.

F. California Building Code, 2007 Edition.

G. ANSI B18.22.1 – Plain Washers

H. ASTM A36/A36M - Carbon Structural Steel.

I. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


J. ASTM A108 - Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold-Finished, Standard Quality.

K. ASTM A307 - Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 ksi Tensile Strength.

L. ASTM A325 - Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat-Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength.

M. ASTM A354 - Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts, Studs, and Other Externally Threaded Fasteners

N. ASTM A490 - Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength

O. ASTM A500 - Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.

P. ASTM A501 - Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing.

Q. ASTM A572/A572M - High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel.

R. ASTM A578/A578M - Straight-Beam Ultrasonic Examination of Plain and Clad Steel Plates for Special Applications.

S. ASTM A992/A992M - Steel for Structural Shapes For Use in Building Framing.

T. ASTM E329-02 Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction.

U. ASTM F436 - Hardened Steel Washers.

V. ASTM F959 - Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicators for Use with Structural Fasteners.

W. FEMA 350 – Recommended Seismic Design Criteria for New Steel Moment–Frame Build-ings

X. FEMA 353 – Recommended Specifications and Quality Assurance Guidelines for Steel Moment-Frame Construction for Seismic Applications.

Y. FS TT-P-645 - Primer, Paint, Zinc-Molybdate, Alkyd Type.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Welding procedures, welders, welding operations, and tackers shall be qualified in accor-dance with AWS D1.1.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Indicate shop and erection details including cuts, copes, connections, holes, threaded fasteners and welds.

B. Proof of Compliance: Mill Certifications for all steel materials.

C. Welding Procedure Specifications.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


A. Deliver anchor bolts and other anchorage devices which are to be embedded in the work of other trades to the project site in sufficient time to permit their timely installation. Provide proper setting drawings, templates and directions for installation of these items.

B. Structural steel members which are stored at the site or a staging area shall be above ground on platforms, skids, or other supports. Store fasteners and welding electrodes in a weathertight and dry place until ready for use. Store packaged materials in their original containers.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel Wide-Flange Shapes: ASTM A992.

B. Plates: ASTM A36.

C. Other Structural Steel Shapes: ASTM A36.

D. Structural Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B

E. Standard Threaded Fasteners:

1. Threaded Rods: ASTM A572, Grade50.

2. Plain Washers: ANSI B18.22.1, Type A.

3. Beveled Washers: ASTM F436.

F. High Strength Bolts, Nuts and Washers: ASTM A325. See structural connection details for location of bearing-type and friction-type bolts.

G. Direct Tension Indicators (Load Indicator Washers): ASTM F959, Type 325.

H. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A36.

I. Welded Studs (Shear Connectors welded directly to Steel Frames): Low carbon, cold drawn, headed type steel shear connectors for stud welded installation, Fy = 50 ksi, Ft = 60 ksi, conforming to ASTM A108.

J. Welding Electrodes: 70 ksi minimum. E70 xx u.o.n., Except that E70 xx T4 shall not be used.

K. Structural Steel Primer Paint: Zinc chromate alkyd primer (TT-P-645), except as otherwise recommended by the manufacturer of the coating for exposed steel.

2.2 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate structural steel within tolerances specified under Codes and Standards refer-enced in Article entitled “References, Codes and Standards”.

B. Fabricate and assemble structural steel in the shop to the greatest extent possible. Do shearing carefully and accurately using machine equipment where possible.

C. Connections shall be welded or bolted as indicated. Shop connections not otherwise


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


shown shall be welded. Eccentric connections are not permitted unless shown in detail on shop drawings.

D. Surfaces required to be milled or planed are indicated on the drawings.

E. Provide bearing plates for members bearing on footings, piers, and walls.

F. Drift pins may be used for assembling parts provided metal is not distorted or holes enlarged. Holes requiring enlargement to admit bolts shall be reamed. Misaligned holes will subject members to rejection.

G. Welding: Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1.1.

H. High Strength Bolted Construction: See Part 3 - Execution.

2.3 CLEANING, PRIMING, AND GALVANIZING

A. General:

1. Steelwork, including items embedded in concrete, shall receive surface preparation and protective coatings in accordance with Section 09 96 00, High-Performance Coat-ings. Top of steel beams to receive shear studs for composite construction, areas re-quiring welding, and faying surfaces of slip critical high strength bolted connections shall be masked off before applying intermediate coat, see Section 09 96 00

2. All fasteners, anchor bolts, and washers shall be either hot dip galvanized to Class C specification in accordance with ASTM A153 or mechanically galvanized to a Class 50 thickness in accordance with ASTM B695. Apply intermediate and final coats after in-stallation in accordance with Section 09 96 00.

B. Steel Materials to Receive Spray-Applied Fireproofing:

1. Steel materials shall be power-tool cleaned in accordance with SSPC-SP 3 to remove mill scale, rust, grease, oil, and any other foreign matter. Welds shall be thoroughly wire brushed.

2. After cleaning and just before delivery of steel to the jobsite, steel materials shall be washed with solvent to remove dust and residue in accordance with SSPC-SP 1.

C. Galvanize steel members and fabrications in accordance with ASTM A123. Galvanize fas-teners in accordance with ASTM A153.

1. Clean in accordance with SSPC-2, Hand Tool Cleaning and remove all weld flux prior to galvanizing. In no case shall preparation for galvanizing be less than that required by standards or the galvanizer.

D. Hot-dip Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize the following items:

1. All steel.

2. Fasteners which connect galvanized components.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 CONDITION OF SURFACES

A. Before starting work, verify locations and elevations of bearings and anchor bolts. Immedi-


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


ately report inaccuracies. Work under this Section shall include responsibility for accurate bearing of steel and correct location of anchorage.

3.2 ERECTION

A. Erect items of structural steel in accord with applicable provisions of Article entitled “Refer-ences, Codes and Standards”.

B. Erection Tolerances: Structural Steel work erection tolerances shall be in accord with "AISC Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Build-ings" and "AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges".

C. Field connections shall be welded or bolted as indicated.

D. Bolting:

1. As erection progresses, bolt up work to take care of dead loads, construction live loads, lateral forces and erection stresses.

2. Unless otherwise noted, erection bolts used in welded construction may be either tightened securely and left in place or removed and the holes filled with plug welds.

3. High Strength Bolting:

a. Make high strength bolted connections in accord with Reference Standard for "friction-type" connections with threads excluded from shear plane for bearing-type connections.

b. Contact surface with "slip critical (friction) type" connections shall be free of oil, paint, lacquer, or other coatings.

c. Tighten nuts using Direct Tension Indicators. Minimum bolt tension as per Refer-ence Standard for each bolt type and size used. Use beveled washers to com-pensate for parallelism when outer face of bolted parts has a slope greater than 1:20 with respect to a plane normal to the bolt axis.

d. When bolts have been completely tightened, mark with identifying symbol.

E. Temporary Bracing: Introduce wherever necessary to provide for loads to which structure is subjected including erection equipment and its operation. Leave in place until no longer re-quired for safety. Make proper provisions for construction loads, piles of materials, equip-ment, etc., carried by structural frame during erection.


A. Tests for structural steel will be made and reports furnished by AC Transit hired-testing agency in accord with the following requirements:

1. Mill Tests and Inspection of Structural Steel:

a. Test of Mill Order: Where steel, ordered from mill, cut to lengths, is identified by heat or melt numbers and is accompanied by mill analysis test reports, material may be used without further local tests, provided an affidavit is given that materi-als conform with requirements. In case of controversy, tension and bend tests of materials, either locally or at the mill, as required for local stock is mandatory, in which case, such testing will be back-charged to the Contractor.

b. Test of Unidentified Steel: In the event that structural steel cannot be identified by heat or melt numbers and is accompanied by mill analysis and test reports,


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


such stock may be used, provided one (1) tension and (1) bend test is made for each 50 tons or fractional part, of stock as may be used in the work. Complete four-sided surface inspection may be required for materials. Each piece of high-strength local stock steel will be tested and stamped. Costs of such testing will be back-charged to the Contractor.

c. Contractor shall take test specimens under direction of the testing agency and shall be machined by the Contractor, at Contractor’s expense, to dimensions as required by related applicable Standard ASTM Specification.

2. Tests of Welding and Bolting: Testing agency will inspect shop and field welding and inspect high strength bolting. Testing agency will comply with regulations of the Cali-fornia Building Code 2007 Edition and will certify in writing, upon completion of work, that welding and high strength bolting has been performed in accord with Drawings and Specifications and applicable Article entitled “References, Codes and Standards”.

3. Inspection of high strength bolts: Testing agency will check bolt tightness on 100 per-cent of bolts.

4. Continuous Inspection of Welds: In addition to visual inspection, testing agency will inspect groove-welded connections of column-to-column, column-to-girder, or girder-to-girder by ultrasonic or other approved non-destructive tests.

a. Ultrasonic testing will be performed by a specially trained, qualified technician, who will operate equipment, examine welds and maintain a record of welds ex-amined, defects found and disposition of each defect. Defective welds shall be repaired and costs of retesting defective welds shall be borne by the Contractor.

b. Welds requiring ultrasonic testing will be tested at the rate of 100 percent.

c. When ultrasonic indication arising from the weld root can be interpreted as either a weld defect or backing strip, backing strip shall be removed at expense of Con-tractor, and if no root defect is visible, weld will be re-tested. If no defect is indi-cated on this retest and no significant amount of base and weld metal have been removed, joint needs no further repair or welding. If a defect is indicated, it shall be repaired at no expense to the AC Transit Representative.

d. Questionable root indications that prove not to be defective will not count against welder to increase test rates.

e. Ultrasonic instrumentation will be calibrated by a qualified technician to evaluate quality of welds in accord with AWS D1.1, Appendix C.

f. Other methods of inspection, for example, X-ray, gamma ray, magnetic particle, or dye penetrant, may be used on welds if deemed necessary by testing agency with cooperation of Contractor.

5. Ultrasonic Material Inspection:

a. All column material within 1 foot (6 inches either side) of a direct buttweld for girder flange connections will be ultrasonically tested for laminations in accord with ASTM A578-Level II.

b. Material in designated location will be tested for laminations by ultrasonic means prior to fabrication, with written reports submitted to the AC Transit Representa-tive.

c. Detection of Laminations: Rejectable defect discovered by ultrasonic means are defined as follows: Using suitable calibrated ultrasonic equipment, any record-able discontinuity causing complete loss of back-reflection and which cannot be encompassed within a 3-inch diameter circle is unacceptable (Level II Standard


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


of Acceptance). Should such flaws be detected, they may be repaired by weld-ing, subject to the AC Transit Representative’s review.

B. All full penetration groove welds, all partial penetration groove welds and all electroslag welds will be subjected to ultrasonic testing.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland




CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 05 31 00 - STEEL DECK

PART 1 -GENERAL


A. Steel deck work as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein including headed type welded studs (shear connectors) whether welded through the decking or directly to the structure, and accessories. This Section includes miscellaneous metal supports required for the proper installation of steel decking and which are not shown on the Drawings or specified elsewhere.




1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Section 03 20 00, Concrete Reinforcing.

B. Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete.

C. Section 05 12 00, Structural Steel (including miscellaneous supporting angles, channels, etc., specifically shown on the Drawings and not noted as part of the Steel Decking Work).

1.4 REFERENCES, CODES, AND STANDARDS

A. The following references, codes, and standards are hereby made a part of this Section and steel deck work shall conform to the applicable requirements therein except as otherwise specified herein or shown on the Drawings. Nothing contained herein shall be construed as permitting work that is contrary to code requirements.

1. "Specifications for the Design of Light Gage Cold Formed Steel Structural Members" of the American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI).

2. AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code – Steel.

3. AWS D1.3 Structural Welding Code – Sheet Steel.

4. California Building Code, 2007 Edition.

B. ASTM A36/A36M - Carbon Structural Steel.

C. ASTM A108 - Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold-Finished, Standard Quality.

D. ASTM A466/A466M - Weldless Chain.

E. ASTM A653/A653M - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

F. ASTM A1008/A1008M - Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


A. Shop and Erection Drawings: Indicate layout and erection details including welds, me-chanical fasteners, studs, clips, reinforcement, flashings, and closures and accessories which are to be applied or installed under this section.

B. Review of drawings will cover only the general scheme and character of details but not the checking of dimensions; nor will such review relieve the Contractor from responsibility for executing the Work in accordance with the Drawings.

C. Submit certified mill analysis and test report for each heat for review by the AC Transit-hired testing agency.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Steel Decking:

1. Base Metal: Steel decking shall be formed from sheet steel conforming to ASTM A1008 or A 466 and having a minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi.

2. Coating: Sheets shall have received, before being formed, a hot-dipped, zinc protec-tive coating meeting or exceeding the requirements of ASTM A653 for G90 Coating Designation.

3. Physical Properties: Drawings indicate sectional profiles, depths, and minimum gages required.

4. Manufacturer: Verco Manufacturers Inc., the ASC Company, or equal.

5. Steel deck manufacturer shall supply decking free of lubricants or oils which would significantly impair the adhesion of sprayed fireproofing.

B. Miscellaneous Metal Items (as required): ASTM A36, shop primed if not encased in con-crete or sprayed with fireproofing. Apply coating in accordance with Section 09 96 00.

C. Accessories:

1. Flashings, Closures, and Screeds: Galvanized sheet steel as specified for decking, 16 gauge.

2. Venting Devices: Deck units having concrete fill and which are to receive waterproof membranes or weatherproof coatings (roofing, elastomeric coatings, etc.) shall have provisions incorporated into deck fabrication or installation for venting moisture. Indi-vidual separating clips, or built-in venting slots formed as an integral part of deck pro-file, per deck manufacturer’s recommendations.

3. Welding Electrodes and Equipment: As recommended by deck manufacturer and ap-proved for use in accordance with Article “References, Codes, and Standards”.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION OF STRUCTURE

A. Verify that supports for decking are properly aligned and sufficiently level to permit proper bearing and report any discrepancies. Proceeding with final installation implies acceptance of conditions.

3.2 ERECTION


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


A. Erect decking as per governing codes, drawing requirements and manufacturer's specifica-tions and recommendations.

B. Ship deck units to job site in standard widths and cut to proper lengths such that end joints occur over supporting members. Perform field cuts as required.

C. Place deck units on supporting framework and adjust to final position with proper bearing before permanently fastening. Provide a minimum bearing of 2-1/2 inches over supporting beams.

D. Place units in straight alignment for entire length of flute run with close alignment between flute ends.

E. Provide flashings and closure where required to prevent concrete leakage. Fasten in place by welding.

F. Make welds in accord with provisions of AWS Code. Use only welders certified for welding in light gauge metal.

G. Opening reinforcement shall be as detailed on the Drawings. Cutting of holes other than those detailed on the Drawings shall be done only as specifically approved by the Design Build General Contractor. Show holes on shop drawings and coordinate required openings. Holes not shown on Structural Drawings shall be cut and reinforced in accord with details on Drawings. In general, reinforcing is not necessary for holes 6 inches or less in diameter.

H. Touch up abrasions and damaged areas in galvanized coating and painted coatings on metal deck and miscellaneous metal items.

3.3 HANGER LOADS

A. The load on any wire hanger shall not exceed 50 pounds. The total load from all hangers or a single hanger with adequate spreader plate on a deck unit shall not exceed 100 pounds. Do not place such loads within the middle half of deck spans.

3.4 CLEAN-UP

A. After erection, remove metal cuttings and construction debris from flutes for entire length. Remove grease, oil, and other foreign material. Leave deck and cells in proper condition for obtaining bond with concrete fill and spray fireproofing.


A. Testing agency will review mill test reports, welding procedures, qualification of welders and deck and stud welding during erection. Cost associated with retests, qualification of weld-ers and tests of unidentified material will be at Contractor's expense.

B. If material is not identified by certified mill analysis and test reports, one set of tension and bend tests will be made by the testing agency for each 5 tons or fraction thereof for each size or gage. Costs of such testing shall be paid by the Contractor.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland




CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 05 40 00 – COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this section.

1.2 WORK INCLUDED

A. The Work includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the furnishing and erection of all cold formed metal framing, as shown and/or specified including:

1. Furnishing of fasteners and anchors for structural walls, posts, floor/roof and respon-sibility for their correct locations; provide templates.

2. Brackets and miscellaneous connections shop-connected to structural members.

3. Built-up joists and penetrations as indicated on the drawings.

4. Installing and removing temporary guys, shores, scaffolding and bracing required for erection.

1.3 RELATED WORK


B. Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrication.





A. California Building Code (CBC), 2007 Edition.

B. AISI - Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing General Provisions.

C. AISI - Specification the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.

D. ICBO Evaluation report ER-4943-P by Steel Stud Manufacturers Association (SSMA)

E. ASTM A 780 - Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings.

F. ASTM A 1003 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Carbon, Metallic- and Nonmetallic-Coated for Cold-Formed Framing Members.

G. ASTM B 633 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel.

H. ASTM C 955 - Standard Specification for Load-Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs, Runners (Tracks), and Bracing or Bridging for Screw Application of Gypsum Panel Prod-ucts and Metal Plaster Bases.

I. ASTM C 1513 - Standard Specification for Steel Tapping Screws for Cold-Formed Steel


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


Framing Connections.

J. ASTM C1007 - Standard Specification for Installation of Load Bearing (Transverse and Ax-ial) Steel Studs and Related Accessories.

K. AWS D.1.3 - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel.

L. Safety regulations prescribed by O.S.H.A.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Contractor with minimum 5 years experienced in performing work of this section who has specialized in installation of work similar to that required for this project.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer's product literature, data sheets and installation recommendations for specified products.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Submit shop drawings prepared by the manufacturer showing plans, sections, eleva-tions, layouts, profiles and product component locations, including anchorage, brac-ing, fasteners, accessories and finishes.

2. Show connection details with screw types and locations, weld lengths and locations, and other fastener requirements.

3. Where prefabricated or pre-finished panels are submitted, provide drawings depicting panel configurations, dimensions and locations.

C. Proof of Compliance: Unless otherwise noted, submit the following in four (4) copies for re-view by Testing Laboratory and Architect.

1. Certified reports of tensile properties and bend tests for steel shapes, bar, and plates.

2. Affidavit (in duplicate) that structural steel having yield strength greater than 50 ksi conforms to requirements of Drawings and Specifications.


A. Deliver anchor bolts, fasteners and other devices which are to be embedded in the work of other trades to the project site in sufficient time to permit their timely installation. Provide proper setting drawings, templates and directions for installation of these items.

B. Store packaged materials in their original containers. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.

C. Store materials protected from exposure to rain, snow or other harmful weather conditions, at temperature and humidity conditions per the recommendations of ASTM C955.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Formed Steel Sheet: Complying with ASTM A 1003/A; unless indicated otherwise.

B. Galvanized Coating: G90 coating weight minimum, complying with ASTM C 955.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


2.2 MEMBER COMPONENTS

A. Provide member components as required by design drawings, meeting properties listed in SSMA product technical guide and other referenced standards:

1. Studs, roof joists, runner-track, clips, clip-angles, U-Channel, bridging/spacer bars, web stiffeners, etc. by Dietrich, or United States Gypsum Co., or equal member of SSMA.

2. Framing Component Accessories: Provide the following accessories as required for a complete system.

a. Flat strapping.

b. Angles, plates, sheets.

c. Custom brake-formed shapes.

3. Fasteners: Self-drilling, self-tapping screws; Steel, complying with ASTM C1513; Galvanized coating, plated or oil-phosphate coated complying with ASTM B 633 as needed for required corrosion resistance.

4. Touch-Up Paint: Zinc rich, containing 95-percent metallic zinc, ZRC 350 as manufac-tured by ZRC Worldwide, Marshfield, MA.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. General: Framing components may be pre-assembled into panels prior to erecting.

B. Fabricate panels square, with components attached in a manner so as to prevent racking or distortion.

C. Cut all framing components squarely for attachment to perpendicular members, or as re-quired for an angular fit against abutting members. Hold members positively in place until properly fastened.

D. Provide insulation as specified elsewhere in all double jamb studs and double header mem-bers, which will not be accessible to the insulation contractor.

E. Axially Loaded Studs:

1. Install studs to have full bearing against inside track web (1/8 inches (3.2 mm) maxi-mum gap) prior to stud and track attachment.

2. Splices in axially loaded studs are not permitted.

F. Fasteners: Fasten components using self-tapping screws or welding.

G. Welding: Welding is permitted on 18 gauge or heavier material only.

1. Specify welding configuration and size on the Structural Calculation submittal.

2. Qualify welding operators in accordance with Section 6.0 of AWS D.1.3.

3. Touch up all welds with zinc-rich paint in compliance with ASTM A 780.

PART 3 -PRODUCTS

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Prior to installation, inspect previous work of all other trades. Verify that all work is complete


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


and accurate to the point where this installation may properly proceed in strict accordance with framing shop drawings.

B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatis-factory preparation before proceeding.

3.2 ERECTION

A. General Erection Requirements:

1. Install cold-formed framing in accordance with requirements of ASTM C1007.

2. Weld in compliance with AWS D.1.3.

3. Install in compliance with applicable sections of the AISI Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing General Provisions.

B. Wall Systems:

1. Erect framing and panels plumb, level and square in strict accordance with approved shop drawings.

2. Handle and lift studs, tracks and prefabricated panels in a manner so as not to cause distortion in any member.

3. Anchor runner track securely to the supporting structure as shown on the erection drawings. Install concrete anchors only after full compressive strength has been achieved. Provide a sill sealer or gasket barrier between all concrete and steel con-nections. Complete, uniform and level bearing support shall be provided for bottom runner.

4. Butt all track joints. Securely anchor abutting pieces of track to a common structural element, or butt-weld or splice them together.

5. Align and plumb studs, and securely attach to the flanges or webs of both upper and lower tracks except when vertical movement is specified.

6. All double jamb studs not accessible to contractors, insulation equal to that specified elsewhere shall be provided.

7. Install jack studs or cripples below window sills, above window and door heads, at freestanding stair rails and elsewhere to furnish support, securely attached to support-ing members.

8. Attach wall stud bridging in a manner to prevent stud rotation. Space bridging rows according to manufacturer's recommendations.

9. Frame wall openings to include headers and supporting studs as shown in the draw-ings.

10. Provide temporary bracing until erection is completed.

11. Provide stud walls at locations indicated on plans as "shear walls" for frame stability and lateral load resistance.

12. All shear walls shall have diagonally braced studs.

a. Install 2” wide steel sheet diagonal bracing straps to both stud flanges, terminate at and fasten to reinforced top and bottom tracks. Fasten clip-angle connectors to multiple studs at ends of bracing and anchor to structure.

13. Splices in axially loaded studs shall not be permitted.

14. Where indicated in the drawings, provide for structural vertical movement using a ver-


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


tical slide clip or other means in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

C. Steel Joists: 1. Uniform and level joist bearing shall be provided at concrete floor by means of

shims and/or non-setting grout. 2. Provide end blocking where joist ends are not otherwise restrained from rotation. 3. Provide web stiffeners at reaction points and/or points of concentrated loads. 4. Provide joist bridging as shown in drawings. 5. Locate joists directly over bearing studs or provide a suitable load distribution

member at the top track.

D. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

1. Inspection: Periodic special inspections are required.

2. Owner will hire and pay inspection agency.

3. Submit schedule showing when the following activities will be performed and resubmit schedule when timing changes.

4. Notify inspection agency not less than 3 days before the start of any of the following activities.

5. Inspections are required during welding operations, screw attachment, bolting, an-choring and other fastening of components within the force resisting structural system, including struts, braces, and hold-downs.

E. PROTECTION

1. Protect installed products until completion of project.

2. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland




CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 -GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions, Division 1 Specification Sections and other Applicable Technical Sections apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment.

2. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


1. Paint products.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.

2. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections.

3. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal fabrications without field measurements. Coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

2. Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site.


A. Deliver components, sheets, metal wall panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal wall panels for protection during transportation and handling.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


B. Unload, store, and erect metal wall panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.

C. Stack metal wall panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal wall panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal wall panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

B. Coordinate installation of steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete that are specified in this Section but required for work of another Section. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

C. Coordinate metal wall panel assemblies with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction of studs, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 METALS, GENERAL

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

2.2 FERROUS METALS


B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing.

C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads.

D. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal channels with continuous slot complying with MFMA-3.

1. Size of Channels: 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 inches.

2. Material: Steel complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, structural steel, Grade 33; 0.0966-inch minimum thickness; coated with rust-inhibitive, baked-on, acrylic enamel. Provide channels with manufacturer’s “Permagreen II” finish consisting of thermally-cured, rust inhibiting acrylic enamel applied by electrodeposition after cleaning and phosphating, color No. 14109 per Federal Standard 595a.

2.3 FASTENERS, GENERAL


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners or zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

B. Miscellaneous Metal Framing, General: ASTM C 645, cold-formed metallic-coated steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120) hot-dip galvanized or coating with equivalent corrosion resistance unless otherwise indicated.

1. Zee Clips: 0.079-inch (2.01-mm) nominal thickness.

2. Base or Sill Angles or Channels: 0.079-inch (2.01-mm) nominal thickness.

3. Fasteners for Miscellaneous Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten miscellaneous metal framing members to substrates.


A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.


A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

D. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.



4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts, unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


conspicuous.

G. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated.

1. Furnish inserts if units are installed after concrete is placed.

B. Finishes: Section 09 96 00Duplex System For Painting Over Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel

2.7 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES

A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM

A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible.


C. Finishes: Section 09 96 00Duplex System For Painting Over Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel

2.9 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES, GENERAL.






CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland







1. Site repair of galvanized components shall be done only with permission and inspection from the AC Transit Representative.




5. Finish color: As indicated on finish schedule or where color not indicated:

a. Paint manufacturer: Sherman Williams,

b. Color: White Heron SW7627

PART 3 -EXECUTION


A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:

D. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

E. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

F. Remove welding flux immediately.

G. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


H. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors.

3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.

B. Anchor supports for operable partitions securely to and rigidly brace from building structure.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 05 53 00 METAL GRATINGS

PART 1 -GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal bar gratings.

2. Metal frames and supports for gratings.


1. Division 05 Section "Structural Steel Framing" for structural-steel framing system components.


A. Structural Performance: Gratings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the follow-ing loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated below and per require-ments noted in the 2007 CBC.

1. Walkways and Elevated Platforms Other Than Exits: Uniform load of 60 lbf/sq. ft. (2.87 kN/sq. m).

2. Limit deflection to L/360 or 1/4 inch (6.4 mm), whichever is less.

B. Seismic Performance: Provide gratings capable of withstanding the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer registered in the state of California responsible fro their preparation.


A. Metal Bar Grating Standards: Comply with NAAMM MBG 531, “Metal Bar Grating Manual.”

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


gratings by field measurements before fabrication.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for gratings, grating frames, and supports. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

B. Coordinate grating openings and penetrations with other trades. Coordinate grating attach-ment with mechanical anchorage attachments.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 FERROUS METALS


B. Steel Bars for Bar Gratings: ASTM A36/A36M.

2.2 FASTENERS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers.

C. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1 (ASME B18.22M).


A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy that is welded.

B. Shop Assembly: Fabricate grating sections in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

C. Cut, drill, and punch material cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

D. Form from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated, but not less than that needed to support indicated loads.

E. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


F. Welding: Comply with AWS recommendations and the following:




G. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and space the anchoring devices to secure gratings, frames, and supports rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.

2.4 METAL BAR GRATINGS


1. Alabama Metal Industries Corporation; a Gibraltar Industries company.

2. All American Grating.

3. BarnettBates Corporation.

4. Borden Metal Products (Canada) Limited.

5. Fisher & Ludlow; Division of Harris Steel Limited.

6. Grating Pacific, Inc.

7. Grupo Metelmex, S.A. de C.V.

8. IKG Industries; a division of Harsco Corporation.

9. Marwas Steel Co.; Laurel Steel Products Division.

10. Ohio Gratings, Inc.

11. Seidelhuber Metal Products; Division of Brodhead Steel Products.

B. Welded Steel Grating:

1. Bearing Bar Spacing: 1-3/16 inches (30 mm) o.c.

2. Bearing Bar Depth: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) As required to comply with structural per-formance requirements.

3. Bearing Bar Thickness: 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) As required to comply with structural per-formance requirements.

4. Crossbar Spacing: 4 inches (102 mm) o.c.

5. Traffic Surface: Serrated.

6. Steel Finish: Section 09 96 00 Duplex System For Painting Over Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel.

C. GRATING FRAMES AND SUPPORTS

1. Frames and Supports for Metal Gratings: Fabricate from metal shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive gratings. Miter and weld connections for perimeter angle frames. Cut, drill,


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


and tap units to receive hardware and similar items.

2.5 STEEL FINISHES


B. Finish gratings, frames, and supports after assembly.

C. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.

1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint ad-hesion.

PART 3 -EXECUTION


A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where nec-essary for securing gratings to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for con-crete and masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors.

B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing gratings. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from estab-lished lines and levels and free of rack.

C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete or masonry.

D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints.

1. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of exte-rior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

E. Attach toeplates to gratings by welding at locations indicated.

F. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:





A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up shop-painted surfaces.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness.

B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 09 painting Sections.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland




CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 06 16 00 - SHEATHING

PART 1 -GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Structural Wall sheathing.

2. Wall sheathing.

3. Roof sheathing.

4. Sheathing joint and penetration treatment.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International (ASTM):

1. ASTM C472 Standard Test Methods for Physical Testing of Gypsum, Gypsum Plas-ters and Gypsum Concrete.

2. ASTM C473 Standard Test Methods for Physical Testing of Gypsum Panel Products.

3. ASTM C518 Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus.

4. ASTM C840 Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.

5. ASTM C1177 Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing.

6. ASTM E96 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.

7. ASTM E661 Standard Test Method for Performance of Wood and Wood-Based Floor and Roof Sheathing Under Concentrated Static and Impact Loads.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate compo-nent materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.


A. Stack panels flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect sheathing from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdic-tion.

1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory.".


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


2.2 STRUCTURAL WALL SHEATHING

A. Sure- Board Steel Framing Series 200 laminated to DensGlass Gold Sheathing:

1. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 1/2 inch.

2. No Known Equal.

3. Requests for substitution must be submitted prior to bid for approval by AC Transit Representative.

2.3 WALL SHEATHING

A. ½” plywood where indicated.

2.4 ROOF SHEATHING

A. Location: Above Refrigeration Machinery Room.

B. Fiberglass-Mat Faced Gypsum Roof Board:

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch.

2. Width: 4 feet.

3. Length: 8 feet.

4. Weight: 2.5 psf.

5. Surfacing: Fiberglass mat with low perm coating.

6. Flexural Strength, Parallel (ASTM C473): 100 lbf, minimum.

7. Flute Span (ASTM E661): 8 inches.

8. Permeance (ASTM E96): Not more than 2 perms.

9. R-Value (ASTM C518): Not less than 0.67.

10. Water Absorption (ASTM C1177): Less than 10 percent of weight.

11. Compressive Strength (Applicable Sections of ASTM C472): 500 - 900 pounds per square inch.

12. Surface Water Absorption (ASTM C473): Not more than 1 gram.

13. Acceptable Products:

a. DensDeck DuraGuard, Georgia-Pacific Gypsum.

b. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard.

c. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board.

14. Thickness: 5/8 inch type X.

2.5 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements speci-fied in this article for material and manufacture.

B. For roof and wall sheathing, provide fasteners of Type 304 stainless steel.

C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


D. Screws for Fastening Gypsum Sheathing to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Steel drill screws, in length recommended by sheathing manufacturer for thickness of sheathing to be attached, with organic-polymer or other corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray re-sistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117.

E. For steel framing less than 0.0329 inch thick, use screws that comply with ASTM C 1002.

F. For steel framing from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick, use screws that comply with ASTM C 954.

2.6 SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. Sealant for Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing: Silicone emulsion sealant complying with ASTM C 834, compatible with sheathing tape and sheathing and recommended by tape and sheathing manufacturers for use with glass-fiber sheathing tape and for covering ex-posed fasteners.

B. Sheathing Tape: Self-adhering glass-fiber tape, minimum 2 inches wide, 10 by 10 or 10 by 20 threads/inch, of type recommended by sheathing and tape manufacturers for use with silicone emulsion sealant in sealing joints in glass-mat gypsum sheathing and with a history of successful in-service use.

PART 3 -EXECUTION


A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces do not span between fewer than three support members.

B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction unless otherwise indicated.

C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.

2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's "International Building Code."

3. Table R602.3 (1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3 (2), "Alternate Attachments," in ICC's "International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings."

D. Coordinate wall and roof sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly.

E. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements.

F. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is forecast.

G. Wall and Roof Sheathing:

1. Provide a continuous bead of glue applied to framing at edges of wall sheathing pan-els to seal panel joints so sheathing functions as an air barrier.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


2. Screw to cold-formed metal framing.

3. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends.

3.2 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION

A. General: In accordance with ASTM C840 and the manufacturer’s recommendations.

1. Manufacturer’s Recommendations:

a. Current “Product Catalog”, Georgia-Pacific Gypsum.

2. Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws.

3. Install boards with a 3/8-inch gap where non-load-bearing construction abuts struc-tural elements.

4. Install boards with a 1/4-inch gap where they abut masonry or similar materials that might retain moisture, to prevent wicking.

B. Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against face of sheathing, but do not cut into facing.

C. Horizontal Installation: Install sheathing with V-grooved edge down and tongue edge up. Interlock tongue with groove to bring long edges in contact with edges of adjacent boards without forcing. Abut ends of boards over centers of studs, and stagger end joints of adja-cent boards not less than one stud spacing. Attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each steel stud.

1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and ends of boards.

2. For sheathing under stucco cladding, boards may be initially tacked in place with screws if overlying self-furring metal lath is screw-attached through sheathing to studs immediately after sheathing is installed.

D. Vertical Installation: Install board vertical edges centered over studs. Abut ends and edges of each board with those of adjacent boards. Attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each stud.

1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and ends of boards.

2. For sheathing under stucco cladding, boards may be initially tacked in place with screws if overlying self-furring metal lath is screw-attached through sheathing to studs immediately after sheathing is installed.

E. Seal sheathing joints according to sheathing manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Apply glass-fiber sheathing tape to glass-mat gypsum sheathing joints and apply and trowel silicone emulsion sealant to embed entire face of tape in sealant. Apply seal-ant to exposed fasteners with a trowel so fasteners are completely covered. Seal other penetrations and openings.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 07 18 00 TRAFFIC COATINGS PART 1 -GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes traffic coatings.

B. Scope of work: Roofing areas:

1. Area A is: a. The entire existing roof that is on Level 10 Penthouse that is covered with an ex-

isting traffic coating manufactured by Tremco (refer to Plan 1 on drawing sheets AD1.2 and A1.2.)

b. Partial areas of the existing roof over the Penthouse where new duct support sleepers will be installed on the existing roof that are covered with an existing traffic coating manufactured by Tremco (refer to drawing sheet A1.2 Plan 2 Up-per Penthouse.)

2. Area B includes the basin area and surrounding curb where the existing cooling tower was removed and new metal grate landing is. (refer to Plan 1 on drawing sheets AD1.2 and A1.2.) a. Area does not have a traffic coating manufactured by Tremco. b. Area B: Preparation of existing surface. Prime existing surface with epoxy primer

as recommended by Tremco. Install new traffic coating base coat and new traffic coating top coat providing a non-skid surface per requirements of this section.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Refer also to Section 07 51 13 ROOFING MODIFICATIONS for additional requirements.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show extent of traffic coating. Include details for treating substrate joints and cracks, flashings, deck penetrations, floor to curb/wall transitions, door sill and other termination conditions.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing colors, textures, and pat-terns available for each type of product indicated.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of traffic coating required, prepared on rigid backing and of same thickness and material indicated for the Work.

E. Material Test Reports: From a qualified independent testing agency indicating and inter-preting test results for compliance of traffic coatings with requirements, based on compre-hensive testing of current product formulations within the last three years.

F. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that traffic coatings comply with re-quirements, based on comprehensive testing of current product formulations within the last three years.

G. Maintenance Data: To include in maintenance manuals. Identify substrates and types of


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


traffic coatings applied. Include recommendations for periodic inspections, cleaning, care, maintenance, and repair of traffic coatings.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized and certified representative who is an experienced applicator who has specialized in installing work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, trained and approved for installation of traffic coatings required for this Project.

B. Source Limitations:

1. Obtain primary traffic coating materials, including primers, from traffic coating manu-facturer. Obtain secondary materials including aggregates, sheet flashings, joint sealants, and substrate repair materials of type and from source recommended in writing by primary material manufacturer.

1) Use traffic coatings of a single manufacturer.

C. Mockups: Apply each coating to at least 200 sq. ft. of each substrate to demonstrate sur-face preparation, joint and crack treatment, thickness, texture, color, and standard of work-manship.

1. Remove and reapply mockups until they are approved by owner/inspector

2. Keep approved mockups undisturbed during construction as a standard for judging completed traffic coatings. Undamaged mockups may be incorporated into the Work.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Meetings."

1. Before installing traffic coatings, meet with representatives of authorities having juris-diction, manufacturer's technical representative, Owner, Architect, consultants, inde-pendent testing agency, and other concerned entities. Review requirements for traffic coatings. Notify participants at least seven days before conference.


A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers with seals unbroken and bearing manufacturer's labels showing the following information:

1. Manufacturer's brand name.

2. Type of material.

3. Directions for storage.

4. Date of manufacture and shelf life.

5. Lot or batch number.

6. Mixing and application instructions.

7. Color.

B. Store materials in a clean, dry location protected from exposure to direct sunlight. In stor-age areas, maintain environmental conditions within range recommended in writing by manufacturer.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


A. Environmental Limitations: Apply traffic coatings within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended in writing by manufacturer. Do not apply traffic coatings to damp or wet substrates, when temperatures are below 40 deg F, when relative humidity ex-ceeds 85 percent, or when temperatures are less than 5 deg F above dew point.

1. Do not apply traffic coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist, or when such weather condi-tions are imminent during the application and curing period. Apply only when frost-free conditions occur throughout the depth of the substrate.

B. Do not install traffic coating until items that will penetrate membrane have been installed.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under re-quirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which traffic coating manufacturer agrees to repair or replace traffic coatings that deteriorate during the specified warranty pe-riod. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of traffic coating due to unusual weather phenomena, failure of prepared and treated substrate, formation of new substrate cracks exceeding 1/16 inch in width, fire, vandalism, or abuse by snowplow, maintenance equipment, and truck traffic.

1. Deterioration of traffic coatings includes the following: a. Adhesive or cohesive failures. b. Abrasion or tearing failures. c. Surface crazing or spalling. d. Intrusion of water, oils, gasoline, grease, salt, deicer chemicals, or acids into

deck substrate.

2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Traffic Coatings: Complying with ASTM C 957.

B. Material Compatibility: Provide primers; base, intermediate, and topcoats; and miscellane-ous materials that are compatible with one another and with substrate under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field ex-perience.

C. VOC Content: Provide traffic coatings, for use inside the weatherproofing system, with VOC content of 150 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2.2 TRAFFIC COATING

A. Drawing Designation: TRAFFIC COATING

B. MATERIALS


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


1. Physical Requirements: Provide traffic coatings complying with ASTM C 957.

2. Material Compatibility: Provide primers; base, intermediate, and top coats; and mis-cellaneous materials that are compatible with one another and with substrate under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by the manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

C. TRAFFIC COATING

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

2. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Tremco PTM pedestrian traffic system

D. Primer: Manufacturer's standard factory-formulated primer recommended for substrate and conditions indicated.

1. Material: Epoxy EP120 Decktite epoxy primer

E. Preparatory and Base Coats: Single-liquid urethane elastomer.

1. Color: Gray

2. Top Coat : White

F. Component Coat Thicknesses: As recommended by manufacturer for substrate and ser-vice conditions indicated, but not less than the following (measured excluding aggregate):

1. Base Coat: thirty [30] wet mils

2. Top Coat: fifteen [15] wet mils

G. Aggregate: Uniformly graded washed silica sand, or natural quartz of particle sizes, shape, and minimum hardness recommended in writing by traffic coating manufacturer.

1. Spreading Rate: As recommended by manufacturer for substrate and service condi-tions indicated, but not less than the following: a. 25 to 50 lb/100 sq. ft. To refusal


A. Joint Sealants: Multicomponent urethane sealant recommended in writing by manufacturer for substrate and joint conditions indicated and for compatibility with traffic coatings; com-plying with ASTM C 920, Type M, Class 25, Grade NS for sloping and vertical applications or Grade P for deck applications, and Use T where subject to traffic or Use NT elsewhere.

B. Adhesive: Manufacturer's recommended contact adhesive.

C. Reinforcing Strip: Manufacturer's recommended fiberglass mesh.

D. Flexible membrane sheet: 45 mil polyester reinforced Hypalon flexible membrane meeting ASTM D751.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and for other conditions affecting performance of traffic coatings.

1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detri-mental to performance.

2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates.

3. Begin coating application only after minimum concrete curing and drying period rec-ommended by traffic coating manufacturer has passed, after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected, and after surfaces are dry.

4. Verify that substrates are visibly dry and free of moisture. a. Test for moisture vapor transmission by plastic sheet method according to

ASTM D 4263. b. Test for moisture content by method recommended in writing by manufacturer.

5. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean and prepare substrates according to ASTM C 1127 and manufacturer's written rec-ommendations to produce clean, dust-free, dry substrate for traffic coating application.

B. Mask adjoining surfaces not receiving traffic coatings, deck drains, and other deck substrate penetrations to prevent spillage, leaking, and migration of coatings.

C. Concrete Substrates: Mechanically abrade concrete surfaces to a uniform profile according to ASTM D 4259. Do not acid etch.

1. Remove grease, oil, paints, and other penetrating contaminants from concrete.

2. Remove concrete fins, ridges, and other projections.

3. Remove laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, concrete hardeners, form-release agents, and other incompatible materials that might affect coating adhesion.

4. Remove remaining loose material to provide a sound surface, and clean surfaces ac-cording to ASTM D 4258.

3.3 TERMINATIONS AND PENETRATIONS

A. Prepare vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through traffic coatings and at drains, and sleeves according to ASTM C 1127 and manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Provide sealant cants at penetrations and at reinforced deck-to-wall butt joints.

C. Install angled sheet flashing at deck-to-wall joint lapping 3 inches in each direction, and bond to deck and wall substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations. Lap mesh at each edge embedded into base coat.

D. Terminate edges of deck-to-deck expansion joints with preparatory base-coat strip.

E. Install sheet flashings at deck-to-wall expansion and dynamic joints, and bond to deck and wall substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.4 JOINT AND CRACK TREATMENT


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


A. Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrates according to ASTM C 1127 and manufacturer's written recommendations. Before coating surfaces, remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks according to ASTM D 4258.

1. Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for joint-sealant installation.

2. Sealant: As recommended in writing by manufacturer of traffic coating Tremco.

3.5 TRAFFIC COATING APPLICATION

A. Apply traffic coating material according to ASTM C 1127 and manufacturer's written rec-ommendations.

1. Start traffic coating application in presence of manufacturer's technical representative.

2. Verify that wet film thickness of each component coat complies with manufacturer’s requirements every 100 sq. ft.

3. Apply traffic coatings to prepared wall terminations and vertical surfaces to height in-dicated, and omit aggregate on vertical surfaces.

4. Using tape, line out and square up all coating at walls, doors, etc.

B. Cure traffic coatings according to manufacturer's written recommendations. Prevent con-tamination and damage during application and curing stages.

C. Sleeper detail: Apply liquid waterproofing membrane: Apply base coat of liquid membrane @ the rate of 30 mils over surface. Embed flexible membrane into liquid and trowel in for maximum adhesion. Sheet shall extend six [6] inches on horizontal surface past base of sleeper in all directions. Apply coating system as specified.

D. Round penetrations: At base of penetration/projection, apply a cant bead around perimeter. Furnish and install coating system up the face of the penetration/project four [4] inches.

E. Drains: Remove strainer and/or perimeter ring. Clean area of all loose, non adhered mem-brane. Clean to expose shiny metal. Run new traffic coating system into drain per manufac-turer’s recommendations and standard details, set strainer/ring in a continuous bed of caulking or flashing tape. Re-install new washered fasteners and secure.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing: Contractor shall engage and pay for a qualified testing agency to perform the fol-lowing field quality-control testing:

1. Samples of material delivered to Project site shall be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of AC Transit Representative and Contractor.

2. Testing agency shall perform tests for characteristics specified, using applicable ref-erenced testing procedures or, if not referenced, using tests cited in manufacturer's product data.

3. Testing agency shall verify thickness of coatings during traffic coating application.

B. If test results show traffic coating materials do not comply with requirements, remove non-complying materials, prepare surfaces, and reapply traffic coatings.

C. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


3.7 PROTECTING AND CLEANING

A. Protect traffic coatings from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.

B. Clean spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recom-mended by manufacturer of affected construction.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland




CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 07 21 00 BUILDING INSULATION

PART 1 -GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Concealed Building Insulation For Sound Attenuation and Thermal Improvement.

2. Acoustical Panel Insulation For Refrigeration Machinery Room Walls and Underside of Roof Structure For Sound Attenuation.

3. Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Insulation Fasteners.

4. Radiant Barriers.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a quali-fied testing agency for insulation products.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source from a sin-gle manufacturer.

B. The resilient sound isolation clips shall be designed and fabricated at the facilities of a manufacturer having a minimum of five years’ experience in furnishing similar sound control products.

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to au-thorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable test-ing and inspecting agency.

1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84.

2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119.

3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.


A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soil-ing, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's writ-ten instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION

A. Use: For sound attenuation and thermal improvement in partitions.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


B. Available Manufacturers:

1. Johns Manville.

2. Knauf Fiber Glass.

C. For partitions:

1. Reinforced-Foil-Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type III (reflec-tive faced), Class A (faced surface with a flame-spread index of 25 or less); Cate-gory 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier), faced with foil scrim, foil-scrim kraft, or foil-scrim polyethylene.

2.2 ACOUSTICAL INSULATION PANELS

A. Identified as “ACOUSTICAL BOARD” on drawings.

B. Use:

1. Refrigeration Machinery Room walls for sound attenuation.

2. Insulation on underside of roof structure of Refrigeration Machinery Room for sound attenuation.

C. Manufacturer: Armstrong

1. Type: Painted Nubby Open Plan Square Lay-In product number 3104

2. Size: 4' x 8' x 1".

3. Material: Fiberglass surface .

4. Finish: Factory-applied latex paint.

5. Fire Performance: a. ASTM E84 and CAN/ULC S102 surface burning characteristics. b. Flame Spread Index 25 or less. c. Smoke Developed Index 50 or less. (UL labeled) ASTM E1264 Classification

Type XII, Form 2, Pattern E, Fire Class A.

6. Sag Resistance HumiGuard®Plus – superior resistance to sagging in high humidity conditions

7. Low Formaldehyde Low formaldehyde – contributing less than 13.5 ppb in typical conditions per ASHRAE Standard 62, “Ventilationfor Acceptable Indoor Air Quality,” California Code Title24, and other building types in CHPS Section 01350.

8. Anti Mold/Mildew & Bacteria Fiberglass substrate is inherently resistant to the growth of mold, mildew and bacteria.

9. Insulation Value 3104 – R Factor - 4.0 (BTU units) R Factor - 0.70 (Watts units)

10. 30-Year Performance Guarantee & Warranty

D. Item 435 Stabilizer Clip

1. Two clips installed at one-third points of each long edge of panel.

2.3 RADIANT BARRIERS

A. Sheet Radiant Barriers: ASTM C 1313 and as follows:


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Fi-Foil Company; Radiant Shield. b. Innovative Energy, Inc.; R+Heatshield Commercial Solid. c. Innovative Insulation, Inc.; Super R Premium Plus. d. TVM Building Products; Reflective.

2. Sheet Construction: Foil on both sides of substrate.

3. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed in-dexes of 5 and 10, respectively.

4. Emissivity: 0.03 (reflects 97% of infrared energy).

5. Sheet Width: Per manufacturer’s recommendation for intended use.

6. Use: Roof/ ceiling assemblies, exterior wall assemblies.

2.4 ADHESIVELY ATTACHED, SPINDLE-TYPE INSULATION FASTENERS

A. Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of holding insulation of specified thickness securely in position indicated with self-locking washer in place.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. AGM Industries, Inc.; Series T TACTOO Insul-Hangers. b. Gemco; Spindle Type.

2. Use: mount acoustical panels on underside of roof structure and to gypsum board walls.

3. Plate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square.

4. Spindle: Copper-coated, low-carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch in diameter; length to suit depth of insulation indicated.

5. Anchor Dome Cap, 7/8" diameter designed to conceal exposed points of anchor spin-dles.

B. Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors se-curely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, fasteners, and substrates.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. AGM Industries, Inc.; TACTOO Adhesive. b. Gemco; Tuff Bond Hanger Adhesive.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and for other conditions af-fecting performance.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and appli-


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


cation indicated.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice, rain, and snow.

C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION

A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, use mechanical anchorage to pro-vide permanent placement and support of units.

B. Stuff glass-fiber loose-fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where shown. Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a den-sity of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF ACOUSTICAL INSULATION PANELS (ACOUSTICAL BOARD)

A. All insulation joints must be firmly butted. Secure with adhesively attached spindle-type in-sulation fasteners. Minimum compression is to be used to assure firm fit and still maintain thermal performance.

B. Fasteners shall be located a maximum of 3" from each edge and spaced no greater than 18” on center.

C. Install anchor dome caps immediately so that no spindle points are exposed.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION

A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.

B. Glass-Fiber or Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing mem-bers according to the following requirements:

1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends.

2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit be-tween edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.

3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation.

4. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs.

C. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation for sound deadening, sound absorption, thermal pro-tection, or air-infiltration reduction in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials:

1. Loose-Fill Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum vol-


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


ume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF RADIANT BARRIERS

A. Install sheet radiant barriers according to ASTM C 1158.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland




CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 07 24 19 - WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)

PART 1 -GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes commercial exterior insulation and finish system (EIFS) incorporating an air and water-resistive barrier coating with a means of positive moisture drainage over a wa-ter-resistive coating on sheathing.

B. The system provides three lines of defense against water intrusion:

1. Combination of reinforced base coat and finish.

2. Specially-designed, grooved EPS with drainage track and vent assembly.

3. An air and water-resistive barrier including a waterproof flashing material used to pro-tect sills of wall openings (such as windows) and a compatible sealant must be utilized at all system terminations.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM B 117 (Federal Test Standard 141A Method 6061) Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus

B. ASTM C 150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement

C. ASTM C 273 - Shear Test in Flatwise Plane of Flat Sandwich Constructions or Sandwich Cores

D. ASTM C 297 Standard Test Method for Flatwise Tensile Strength of Sandwich Construc-tions

E. ASTM D 968 (Federal Test Standard 141A Method 6191) Standard Test Methods for Abra-sion Resistance of Organic Coatings by Falling Abrasive

F. ASTM D 1623 - Tensile and Tensile Adhesion Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics

G. ASTM D 2247 (Federal Test Standard 141A Method 6201) Standard Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings in 100% Relative Humidity

H. ASTM D 2863 - Test Method for Measuring the Minimum Oxygen Concentration to Support Candle-Like Combustion of Plastics (Oxygen Index)

I. ASTM D 3273 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of In-terior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber

J. ASTM D 4060 Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by the Taber Abraser

K. ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

L. ASTM E 96 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials

M. ASTM E 119 Standard Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


N. ASTM E 283 Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen

O. ASTM E 330 Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors and Cur-tain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference

P. ASTM E 331 Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference

Q. ASTM E 2098 Test Method for Determining the Tensile Breaking Strength of Glass Fiber Reinforcing Mesh for use in Class PB Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS), after Exposure to Sodium Hydroxide Solution

R. ASTM E 2134 Test Method for Evaluating the Tensile-Adhesion Performance of Exterior In-sulation and Finish Systems (EIFS)

S. ASTM E 2273 Test Method for Determining the Drainage Efficiency of Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS) Clad Wall Assemblies

T. ASTM E 2430 Standard Specification for Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Thermal Insulation Boards for use in Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS)

U. ASTM E 2485 Standard Test Method for Freeze-Thaw Resistance of Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS) and Water-Resistive Barrier Coatings

V. ASTM E 2486 Standard Test Method for Impact Resistance of Class PB and PI Exterior In-sulation and Finish Systems (EIFS)

W. ASTM G 155 (Federal Test Standard 141A Method 6151) Standard Practice for Operating-Xenon Arc Light Apparatus for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials

X. Mil Std E5272 Environmental Testing

Y. Mil Std 810B Environmental Test Methods

Z. NFPA 268 Standard Test Method for Determining Ignitibility of Exterior Wall Assemblies Us-ing a Radiant Heat Energy Source.

AA. NFPA 285 Standard Method of Test for the Evaluation of Flammability Characteristics of Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Wall Assemblies Containing Combustible Components Using the Intermediate-Scale, Multistory Test Apparatus

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Base Coat: Material used to encapsulate one or more layers of reinforcing mesh fully em-bedded that is applied to the outside surface of the EPS.

B. Building Expansion Joint: A joint through the entire building structure designed to accom-modate structural movement.

C. Contractor: The contractor that installs the water-drainage exterior insulation and finish sys-tem to the substrate.

D. Expansion Joint: A structural discontinuity in the water-drainage exterior insulation and fin-


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


ish system.

E. Exterior Insulation and Finish System (EIFS) - a nonload bearing exterior wall cladding sys-tem consisting of an insulation board, an adhesive and/or mechanical attachment of the in-sulation board to the substrate, an integrally reinforced base coat on the face of the insula-tion board, a protective finish applied to the surface of the base coat and applicable acces-sories that interact to form an energy-efficient exterior wall.

F. PB System - a class of EIFS where the base coat varies in thickness depending on the number of layers or thickness of reinforcing material. The thickness can range from a nominal (1/16 in) to (1/4 in). The reinforcing material is typically glass fiber mesh, which is embedded in the base coat at the time of installation.

G. PM System - A class of EIFS where the reinforcing material is typically glass fiber mesh, which is applied over the insulation board and mechanically fastened to the substrate. The base coat is applied over the reinforcing mesh at a nominal thickness of (3/16 in) to (1/4 in) and contains fiber reinforcement.

H. Finish: An acrylic-based coating, available in a variety of textures and colors that is applied over the base coat.

I. Insulation Board: Expanded polystyrene (EPS) insulation board, which is affixed to the sub-strate.

J. Reinforcing Mesh: Glass fiber mesh(es) used to reinforce the base coat and to provide im-pact resistance.

K. Sheathing: A substrate in sheet form.

L. Substrate: The material to which the water-drainage exterior insulation and finish system is affixed.

M. Substrate System: The total wall assembly including the attached substrate to which the water-drainage exterior insulation and finish system is affixed.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. See the Evaluations in Division 07 Section "Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS)" for further discussion of terminology.

B. Class PB EIFS: A non-load-bearing, exterior wall cladding system that consists of an insu-lation board attached adhesively, mechanically, or both to the substrate; an integrally rein-forced base coat; and a textured protective finish coat.

C. Water-Drainage EIFS: EIFS with a means that allows water entering into an EIFS assem-bly to drain to the exterior.


A. EIFS Performance: Comply with the following:

1. Bond Integrity: Free from bond failure within EIFS components or between system and supporting wall construction, resulting from exposure to fire, wind loads, weather, or other in-service conditions.

2. Weather tightness: Resistant to water penetration from exterior into water-drainage


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


EIFS and assemblies behind it or through them into interior of building that results in deterioration of thermal-insulating effectiveness or other degradation of EIFS and as-semblies behind it, including substrates, supporting wall construction, and interior fin-ish, and including a means that allows water entering into an EIFS assembly to drain to the exterior.

B. Class PB EIFS: Provide EIFS having physical properties and structural performance that comply with the following:

1. Before retaining remaining subparagraphs, verify that EIFS manufacturers selected can comply with requirements. Verify that performance criteria meet owners' require-ments and those of authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Abrasion Resistance: Sample consisting of 1-inch- thick EIFS mounted on 1/2-inch- thick gypsum board; cured for a minimum of 28 days; and showing no cracking, checking, or loss of film integrity after exposure to 528 quarts of sand when tested per ASTM D 968, Method A.

3. Absorption-Freeze Resistance: No visible deleterious effects and negligible weight loss after 60 cycles per ASTM E 2485 (formerly EIMA 101.01).

4. ANSI/EIMA 99-A references either ASTM G 153 or ASTM G 154; ICC-ES AC219 and ICC-ES AC235 reference either ASTM G 153 or ASTM G 155.

5. Accelerated Weathering: Five samples per ICC-ES AC235 showing no cracking, checking, crazing, erosion, rusting, blistering, peeling, delamination, or other charac-teristics that might affect performance as a wall cladding after testing for 2000 hours when viewed under 5 times magnification per ASTM G 153 or ASTM G 154.

6. Freeze-Thaw: No surface changes, cracking, checking, crazing, erosion, rusting, blis-tering, peeling, or delamination, or indications of delamination between components when viewed under 5 times magnification after 60 cycles per EIMA 101.01.

7. Mildew Resistance of Finish Coat: Sample applied to 2-by-2-inch clean glass sub-strate, cured for 28 days, and showing no growth when tested per ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274.

8. Salt-Spray Resistance: No deleterious affects when tested according to ICC-ES AC235.

9. Tensile Adhesion: No failure in the EIFS, adhesive, base coat, or finish coat when tested per ASTM C 297/E 2134

10. Water Penetration: Sample consisting of 1-inch- thick EIFS mounted on 1/2-inch- thick gypsum board, cured for 28 days, and showing no water penetration into the plane of the base coat to expanded polystyrene board interface of the test specimen after 15 minutes at 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. of air pressure difference or 20 percent of positive design wind pressure, whichever is greater, across the specimen during a test period when tested per EIMA 101.02.

11. Water Resistance: Three samples, each consisting of 1-inch- thick EIFS mounted on 1/2-inch- thick gypsum board; cured for 28 days; and showing no cracking, checking, crazing, erosion, rusting, blistering, peeling, or delamination after testing for 14 days per ASTM D 2247.

12. Impact Resistance: Sample consisting of 1-inch- thick EIFS when constructed, condi-tioned, and tested per EIMA 101.86; and meeting or exceeding the following: a. High Impact Resistance: 90 to 150 inch-lb. b. Ultra-High Impact Resistance: More than 150 inch-lb.

13. Drainage: According to ICC-ES AC24.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


14. Structural Performance Testing: EIFS assembly and components shall comply with ICC-ES AC235 when tested per ASTM E 330.

15. Adhesion to Concrete: When tested in accordance with ASTM D 4541: 50 psi mini-mum.

16. Salt Spray Resistance ASTM B 117 :300 hours: No deleterious effects.

17. Mildew Resistance ASTM D 3273:28 days: No growth.

18. Chalk Rating: ASTM D 4214 after ASTM G 154 Cycle 1: 7 after 5000 hours QUV.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type and component of EIFS indicated.

B. Using design documents and manufacturer’s recommendations provide a Water Vapor Transmission (WVT) analysis at no cost to AC Transit to determine the potential for con-densation in each specific wall type to receive EIFS. The WVT analysis shall be returned to the AC Transit Representative with a recommendation for the best location of the vapor re-tarder within the design wall assembly to insure safe outward diffusion of vapor.

C. Shop Drawings: For EIFS. Include plans, elevations, sections, details of components in-corporating recommendations from the WVT analysis, details of penetration and termina-tion, flashing details, joint locations and configurations, fastening and anchorage details in-cluding mechanical fasteners, and connections and attachments to other work.

D. Samples

1. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of finish-coat color and texture indicated. Provide manufacturer’s standard color brochures and sample chips. a. Size: 2 inches square finish system. b. The AC Transit Representative will provide comments on samples and make

four selections of textures and four color selections per texture.

2. Second round samples: Based upon the AC Transit Representative’s comments, pro-vide samples. a. Size: 6-inch- square panels for each type of finish-coat color and texture indi-

cated, prepared using same tools and techniques intended for actual work and resubmit for final approval.

b. The AC Transit Representative will provide comments on samples and make 2 selections of textures and 4 color selections per texture.

3. Third round samples: Based upon the AC Transit Representative’s comments, provide samples. a. Size: 12-inch- square panels for each type of finish-coat color and texture indi-

cated, prepared using same tools and techniques intended for actual work. b. The AC Transit Representative will provide comments on samples and selections

of 2 colors per previous texture selections.

4. Final Samples for Field Verification: Based upon the AC Transit Representative’s comments, provide samples. a. Size: 24-inch- square panels for each type of finish-coat color and texture indi-

cated, prepared using same tools and techniques intended for actual work includ-ing custom trim, each profile, an aesthetic reveal, a typical control joint filled with sealant of color selected.

5. Include sealants and exposed accessory Samples to verify color selected.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


E. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color and finish required.

F. Include similar Samples of joint sealants and exposed accessories involving color selection.

G. Qualification Data: For Installer and testing agency.

H. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that EIFS and joint sealants comply with requirements.

I. Material or Product Certificates: For cementitious materials and aggregates and for each insulation and joint sealant, from manufacturer.

J. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a quali-fied testing agency, for each water-/weather-resistive barrier, insulation, reinforcing mesh, joint sealant, and coating.

K. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: For joint sealants from sealant manufacturer in-dicating the following:

1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.

L. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate prepa-ration needed for adhesion.

M. Field quality-control reports and special inspection reports.

N. Evaluation Reports: For fasteners, water-resistive coating, adhesive membrane flashing, and EIFS (including insulation).

O. Maintenance Data: For EIFS to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications: An installer who is certified in writing by EIFS manufacturer as qualified to install manufacturer's system using trained workers.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain EIFS from single source from single EIFS manufacturer and from sources approved by EIFS manufacturer as compatible with system components.

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide EIFS and system components with the follow-ing fire-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical EIFS and system components per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Provide materials and construction tested for fire re-sistance per ASTM E 119.

2. Multistory test in subparagraph above is more rigorous and meaningful than ASTM E 108 modified test in first subparagraph below. Both above and below can be retained.

3. Radiant Heat Exposure: No ignition of EIFS when tested according to NFPA 268.

4. Potential Heat: Acceptable level when tested according to NFPA 259.

5. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide insulation board, adhesives, base coats,


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


and finish coats with flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 450 or less, per ASTM E 84.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at location designated by AC Transit Rep-resentative.

E. Full Size Field Installed Mock Up Panel:

1. Size per manufacturer’s recommendation to use as AC Transit’s reference standard for subsequent installation. The mock-up shall be prepared with the same products, tools, equipment and techniques required for the actual applications. The finish used shall be from the same batch that is being used on the project.

2. Minimum size: 4’ x 2’.


A. Deliver materials in original, unopened packages with manufacturers' labels intact and clearly identifying products.

B. Store materials inside and under cover; keep them dry and protected from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, aging, corrosion, damaging temperatures, construction traf-fic, and other causes.

1. Stack insulation board flat and off the ground.

2. Protect plastic insulation against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project site before installation time.

3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.


A. Weather Limitations: Maintain ambient temperatures above 40 deg F for a minimum of 24 hours before, during, and after adhesives or coatings are applied. Do not apply EIFS adhe-sives or coatings during rainfall. Proceed with installation only when existing and fore-casted weather conditions and ambient outdoor air, humidity, and substrate temperatures permit EIFS to be applied, dried, and cured according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of EIFS with related Work specified in other Sections to ensure that wall assemblies, including sheathing, weather-resistant sheathing paper, flashing, trim, joint sealants, windows, and doors, are protected against damage from the effects of weather, age, corrosion, moisture, and other causes. Do not allow water to penetrate behind flashing and drainage plane that is behind water-drainage EIFS.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of design: Dryvit Systems, Inc., the manufacturer of the water-drainage exterior insu-lation and finish system specific brand named “Outsulation MD System”. The Dryvit Outsu-lation MD System is an Exterior Insulation and Finish System (EIFS), Class PB, utilizing a cavity wall concept with capability for moisture drainage. The system consists of a water-


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


resistive barrier coating (air/water-resistive barrier), an adhesive, grooved expanded poly-styrene insulation board, internal vinyl tracks (Dryvit Track™ and Vent Track™), Dryvit Vent Assembly™, Dryvit Starter Strip™, base coat, reinforcing mesh(es) and finish.

B. Components -

1. Backstop® NT Air/Water-Resistive Barrier Coating (available in Texture or Smooth)

2. Dryvit Grid Tape™

3. Dryvit AquaFlash™ System or Flashing Tape™ and Surface Conditioner™

4. Dryvit Vent Assembly™

5. Dryvit Track and Vent Track™

6. Dryvit AP Adhesive™ to Adhere Dryvit Track and Vent Track

7. Dryvit Adhesive in Vertical Notched Trowel Configuration (not Insulation Board with Channels

8. Insulation board with integral vertical drainage grooves.

9. Dryvit Mesh a. Dryvit corner mesh b. Dryvit detail mesh c. Dryvit Standard Plus Reinforcing mesh d. Panzer Reinforcing Mesh 20

10. Dryvit Finish a. Reflectit™ b. Ameristone™ c. Medallion® Series of Dirt Pickup Resistance (DPR) and Mildew Resistant (PMR)

finishes d. Textures:

1) Quarzputz® , Sandblast® , Freestyle® , Sandpebble® , Sandpebble Fine™ and two smooth specialty coatings; Demandit® and Weathercoat® .

D. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Dryvit Systems, Inc.

2. Parex, Inc.; a brand of ParexLahabra, Inc.

3. Sto Corp.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Compatibility: Provide water-resistive coating, adhesive, fasteners, board insulation, rein-forcing meshes, base- and finish-coat systems, sealants, and accessories that are compati-ble with one another and with substrates and approved for use by EIFS manufacturer for Project.

B. Size, length, and spacing of fasteners below depend on wind load and fire resistance re-quired. Example engineering calculations can be found in evaluation reports. Verify with Project's structural engineer.

C. Water-Resistive Coatings: EIFS manufacturer's standard formulation and accessories for


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


use as water/weather-resistive barriers, compatible with substrate, and complying with physical and performance criteria of ICC-ES AC209.

1. Sheathing Joint Compound and Tape: Type recommended by EIFS manufacturer for sealing joints between and penetrations through sheathing.

2. VOC Content of Coatings Used as Insulation Adhesive: 50 g/L or less when calcu-lated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

D. Primer/Sealer: EIFS manufacturer's standard substrate conditioner with VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), de-signed to seal substrates from moisture penetration and to improve the bond between sub-strate of type indicated and adhesive used for application of insulation.

E. Flexible-Membrane Flashing: Cold-applied, fully self-adhering, self-healing, rubberized-asphalt and polyethylene-film composite sheet or tape and primer; EIFS manufacturer's standard or product recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturer.

F. Spacers: Woven or fused, self-furring, PVC mesh lath furring strips; EIFS manufacturer's standard or product recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturer with manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant mechanical fasteners suitable for intended substrate.

G. Insulation Adhesive: EIFS manufacturer's standard formulation designed for indicated use; compatible with substrate; with VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24); and complying with the following:

1. Factory-mixed noncementitious formulation designed for adhesive attachment of insu-lation to substrates of type indicated, as recommended by EIFS manufacturer.

H. Type I Expanded Polystyrene Insulation Board (as defined by ASTM C 578) intended for use in Dryvit Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS).

1. Aging: Before cutting and shipping, age insulation in block form by air drying for not less than six weeks or by another method approved by EIMA that produces equivalent results.

2. Flame-Spread and Smoke-Developed Indexes: 25 and 450 or less, respectively, per ASTM E 84.

3. Dimensions: Provide insulation boards not more than 24 by 48 inches and in thick-ness indicated but not more than 4 inches thick or less than thickness allowed by ASTM C 1397.

4. Channeled Board Insulation: EIFS manufacturer's standard factory-fabricated profile with linear, vertical drainage channels, slots, or waves on the back side of board.

5. Board Insulation Closure Blocks: EIFS manufacturer's standard density, size, and configuration.

6. Foam Shapes: Provide with profiles and dimensions indicated on Drawings.

7. Dimensions and permissible variations a. Dimensional Tolerances:

1) Length: (+/-1/16 in)

2) Width: (+/-1/16 in)

3) Thickness: (3/4 in) to (1 in) + (+1/16 in); greater than (1 in) +/- (+/-1/16 in)


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


4) Edge Trueness - Unless otherwise specified and approved by Dryvit Sys-tems, Inc., insulation board shall be furnished with true edges. Edges shall not deviate more than (1/32 in) in (12 in).

5) Face Flatness - Insulation board shall be furnished flat and shall not exhibit any bowing of more than (1/32 in) in the length.

6) Squareness - Insulation board shall not deviate from squareness by more than (1/32 in) in (12 in) of total length or width.

8. Workmanship, finish and appearance at time of delivery a. Defects - Insulation board shall have no defects that will adversely affect its ser-

vice qualities. It shall be of uniform texture and free from foreign inclusions, bro-ken edges or corners, slits or objectionable odors.

b. Crushing and Depressions - Insulation board shall have no crushed or depressed areas on any surface exceeding (1/16 in) in depth on more than 5% of the total surface area.

c. Voids - Insulation board shall have no more than 8 voids having dimensions lar-ger than (1/8 in) x (1/8 in) x (1/8 in) per (8 ft2) of surface area.

d. Projections - Insulation board shall be free of surface projects or wire marks in excess of (1/16 in).

9. Properties and Requirements of EPS for Use in Dryvit EIFS a. Classification (ASTM C 578)Type 1 b. Density, lb. /ft3 0.95 min.1.25 max. c. Thermal Resistance of (1.00 in) thickness, min. F·ft2·h/Btu (40 °F) (0.70) (75 °F)(0.63) d. Compressive strength, min., psi 10.0 e. Tensile strength, min., psi 15.0 f. Flexural strength, min., psi25.0 g. Shear modulus, max., psi 400 h. Water vapor permeance of (1.00 in) thickness, max., perm 5.0 i. Water absorption by total immersion, max., volume %2.5 j. Dimensional stability (change in dimensions), max. %2.0 k. Oxygen index, min., volume %24.0 l. Flame spread, max. 25.0 m. Smoke development, max.450

I. Reinforcing Mesh: Balanced, alkali-resistant, open-weave, glass-fiber mesh treated for compatibility with other EIFS materials, made from continuous multiend strands with re-tained mesh tensile strength of not less than 120 lbf/in. per ASTM E 2098 EIMA 105.01; complying with ASTM D 578 and the following:

1. Heavy-Duty Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 20 oz. /sq. yd. a. Panzer 20

2. Strip Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 3.75 oz. /sq. yd.

3. Detail Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 4.0 oz. /sq. yd.

4. Corner Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 7.2 oz. /sq. yd.

J. Base-Coat Materials: EIFS manufacturer's standard mixture.

K. Waterproof Adhesive/Base-Coat Materials: EIFS manufacturer's standard waterproof for-mulation with VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Sub-


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


part D (EPA Method 24)

L. Primer: EIFS manufacturer's standard factory-mixed, elastomeric-polymer primer for pre-paring base-coat surface for application of finish coat.

M. Finish-Coat Materials: EIFS manufacturer's standard acrylic-based coating with enhanced mildew resistance.

1. Sealer: Manufacturer's waterproof, clear acrylic-based sealer for protecting finish coat.

2. Colors: As selected by AC Transit Representative from manufacturer's full range.

N. Water: Potable.

O. Mechanical Fasteners: EIFS manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant fasteners consist-ing of thermal cap, standard washer and shaft attachments, and fastener indicated below; selected for properties of pullout, tensile, and shear strength required to resist design loads of application indicated; capable of pulling fastener head below surface of insulation board; and of the following description:

1. For attachment to steel studs from 0.033 to 0.112 inch in thickness, provide steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 954.

2. For attachment to light-gage steel framing members not less than 0.0179 inch in thickness, provide steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 1002.

3. For attachment to masonry and concrete substrates, provide sheathing dowel in form of a plastic wing-tipped fastener with thermal cap, sized to fit insulation thickness indi-cated and to penetrate substrate to depth required to secure anchorage.

4. For attachment, provide manufacturer's standard fasteners suitable for substrate.

P. Trim Accessories: Type as designated or required to suit conditions indicated and to com-ply with EIFS manufacturer's written instructions; manufactured from UV-stabilized PVC; and complying with ASTM D 1784, manufacturer's standard Cell Class for use intended, and ASTM C 1063.

1. Casing Bead: Prefabricated, one-piece type for attachment behind insulation, of depth required to suit thickness of coating and insulation, with face leg perforated for bonding to coating and back leg.

2. Drip Screed/Track: Prefabricated, one-piece type for attachment behind insulation with face leg extended to form a drip, of depth required to suit thickness of coating and insulation, with face leg perforated for bonding to coating and back leg.

3. Weep Screed/Track: Prefabricated, one-piece type for attachment behind insulation with perforated face leg extended to form a drip and weep holes in track bottom, of depth required to suit thickness of coating and insulation, with face leg perforated for bonding to coating and back leg; designed to drain incidental moisture that gets into wall construction to the exterior at terminations of EIFS with drainage.

4. Expansion Joint: Prefabricated, one-piece V profile; designed to relieve stress of movement.

5. Louver Sill Flashing: Prefabricated type for both flashing and sloping sill over framing beneath windows; with end and back dams; designed to direct water to exterior.

6. Parapet Cap Flashing: Type for both flashing and covering parapet top with design complying with ASTM C 1397 and as indicated.

7. Flashing: Shall be provided at all roof-wall intersections, louvers, doors, penetrations,


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


and other areas as necessary to prevent water from entering behind the water-drainage exterior insulation and finish system.

2.3 EXPANSION JOINTS:

A. Design and location of expansion joints in the water-drainage exterior insulation and finish system: As a minimum, expansion joints shall be placed at the following locations:

1. Where expansion joints occur in the substrate system.

2. Where building expansion joints occur.

3. At floor lines in wood frame construction.

4. At floor lines of non-wood framed buildings where significant movement is expected.

5. Where the water-drainage exterior insulation and finish system abuts dissimilar mate-rials.

6. Where the substrate type changes.

7. Where prefabricated panels abut one another.

8. In continuous elevations at intervals not exceeding 75 ft.

9. Where significant structural movement occurs, such as changes in roof line, building shape or structural system.

2.4 TERMINATIONS

A. Prior to applying the water-drainage exterior insulation and finish system, wall openings shall be treated with Dryvit AquaFlash System or Flashing Tape. Refer to Dryvit Outsula-tion MD Installation Details (DS167).

B. The water-drainage exterior insulation and finish system shall be held back from adjoining materials around openings and penetrations such as windows, doors, and mechanical equipment a minimum of 3/4 in for sealant application. See Dryvit’s Outsulation MD System Installation Details, DS167.

2.5 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS

A. Sealant Color: As selected by the AC Transit Representative from manufacturer's full range.

B. Sealants shall be compatible with the water-drainage exterior insulation and finish system materials. Refer to current Dryvit Publication DS153 for listing of sealants tested by sealant manufacturer for compatibility.

C. The sealant backer rod shall be closed cell.

D. A number of sealants have been tested by sealant manufacturers and have been found to be compatible with Dryvit products. These sealants are:

1. Tremco, Inc. Sealant: Spectrem 1, Spectrem 3 and Spectrem 4

2. Primer: TREMprime Silicone Porous Primer*

3. Pecora Corporation Sealant: Dynatrol II Primer: Type 75 or 150*

4. Pecora Corporation Sealant: 890 Silicone Primer: P75*

5. Sika Corporation Sealant: Sikaflex 2C Primer: Sikaflex 429*


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


6. Dow Corning Sealant: Dow Corning 790, 791**, 795** Primer: Dow Corning1200* prime Coat

2.6 MANUFACTURER’S REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

A. DS131, Dryvit Expanded Polystyrene Insulation Board Specification

B. DS152, Dryvit Cleaning and Recoating

C. DS153, Dryvit Expansion Joints and Sealants

D. DS159, Dryvit Water Vapor Transmission

E. DS456, Rapidry DM™ 35-50 or DS457, Rapidry DM™ 50-75 Data Sheets

F. DS494, Dryvit AquaFlash™ System

G. Dryvit Systems, Inc. Requirements for Insulation Board Suppliers.

H. Quality Control Manual and Inspection Procedures for Molders Supplying Dryvit Systems, Inc.

2.7 MIXING

A. General: Comply with EIFS manufacturer's requirements for combining and mixing materi-als. Do not introduce admixtures, water, or other materials except as recommended by EIFS manufacturer. Mix materials in clean containers. Use materials within time period specified by EIFS manufacturer or discard.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with re-quirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of EIFS.

B. Examine roof edges, wall framing, flashings, openings, substrates, and junctures at other construction for suitable conditions where EIFS will be installed.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Begin coating application only after surfaces are dry.

2. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect contiguous work from moisture deterioration and soiling caused by application of EIFS. Provide temporary covering and other protection needed to prevent spattering of ex-terior finish coats on other work.

B. Protect EIFS, substrates, and wall construction behind them from inclement weather during installation. Prevent penetration of moisture behind drainage plane of EIFS and deteriora-tion of substrates.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


C. Prepare and clean substrates to comply with EIFS manufacturer's written instructions to ob-tain optimum bond between substrate and adhesive for insulation.

3.3 EIFS INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Comply with EIFS manufacturer's written instructions for installation of EIFS as applicable to each type of substrate indicated.

3.4 SUBSTRATE PROTECTION APPLICATION

A. Primer/Sealer: Apply over sheathing substrates to protect substrates from degradation and where required by EIFS manufacturer for improving adhesion of insulation to substrate.

B. Water-Resistive Coatings: Apply over substrates to protect substrates from degradation and to provide water-/weather-resistive barrier.

1. Tape and seal joints, exposed edges, terminations, and inside and outside corners of sheathing unless otherwise indicated by EIFS manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Waterproof Adhesive/Base Coat: Apply over sloped surfaces, door openings, parapets, where indicated on Drawings, all penetrations, louvers and change of materials to protect substrates from degradation.

D. Flexible-Membrane Flashing: Install over weather-resistive barrier, applied and lapped to shed water; seal at openings, penetrations, terminations, and where indicated by EIFS manufacturer's written instructions to protect wall assembly from degradation. Prime sub-strates, if required, and install flashing to comply with EIFS manufacturer's written instruc-tions and details.

3.5 TRIM INSTALLATION

A. Trim: Apply trim accessories at perimeter of EIFS, at expansion joints, at openings, pene-trations, terminations, and elsewhere as indicated, according to EIFS manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate with installation of insulation.

1. Weep Screed/Track: Use at bottom termination edges, at window and door heads, and at floor line expansion joints of water-drainage EIFS unless otherwise in-dicated.

2. Expansion Joint: Use where indicated on Drawings.

3. Casing Bead: Use at other locations.

4. Parapet Cap Flashing: Use where indicated on Drawings.

5. At gutters.

3.6 INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Board Insulation: Adhesively and mechanically attach insulation to substrate in compliance with ASTM C 1397, EIFS manufacturer's written instructions, and the following:

1. Apply adhesive to ridges on back of insulation by notched-trowel method in a manner that results in full adhesive contact over the entire surface of ridges, leaving channels free of adhesive once insulation is adhered to substrate.

2. Press and slide insulation into place. Apply pressure over the entire surface of insula-tion to accomplish uniform contact, high initial grab, and overall level surface.

3. Allow adhered insulation to remain undisturbed for period recommended by EIFS


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


manufacturer, but not less than 24 hours, before installing mechanical fasteners, be-ginning rasping and sanding insulation, or applying base coat and reinforcing mesh.

4. Mechanically attach insulation to substrate by method complying with EIFS manufac-turer's written instructions. Install top surface of fastener heads flush with plane of in-sulation. Install fasteners into or through substrates with the following minimum pene-tration: a. Steel Framing: 5/16 inch. b. Concrete and Masonry: 1 inch.

5. Begin first course of insulation from screed/track and work upward. Work from pe-rimeter casing beads toward interior of panels if possible.

6. Stagger vertical joints of insulation boards in successive courses to produce running bond pattern. Locate joints so no piece of insulation is less than 12 inches wide or 6 inches high. Offset joints not less than 6 inches from corners of window and door openings and not less than 4 inches from aesthetic reveals. a. Adhesive Attachment: Offset joints of insulation not less than 6 inches from hori-

zontal and 4 inches from vertical joints in sheathing. b. Mechanical Attachment: Offset joints of insulation from horizontal joints in

sheathing.

7. Place insulation with adhesive strips and channels, slots, or waves aligned in the ver-tical position for drainage. Align drainage channels, slots, or waves with channels, slots, or waves in insulation boards above and below.

8. Interlock ends at internal and external corners.

9. Abut insulation tightly at joints within and between each course to produce flush, con-tinuously even surfaces without gaps or raised edges between boards. If gaps greater than 1/16 inch occur, fill with insulation cut to fit gaps exactly; insert insulation without using adhesive or other material.

10. Cut insulation to fit openings, corners, and projections precisely and to produce edges and shapes complying with details indicated.

11. Rasp or sand flush entire surface of insulation to remove irregularities projecting more than 1/32 inch from surface of insulation and to remove yellowed areas due to sun exposure; do not create depressions deeper than 1/16 inch.

12. Interrupt insulation for expansion joints where indicated.

13. Install insulation closure blocks using ribbon-and-dab method to create air zones where indicated.

14. Form joints for sealant application by leaving gaps between adjoining insulation edges and between insulation edges and dissimilar adjoining surfaces. Make gaps wide enough to produce joint widths indicated after encapsulating joint substrates with base coat and reinforcing mesh.

15. Form joints for sealant application with back-to-back casing beads for joints within EIFS and with perimeter casing beads at dissimilar adjoining surfaces. Make gaps between casing beads and between perimeter casing beads and adjoining surfaces of width indicated.

16. After installing insulation and before applying field-applied reinforcing mesh, fully wrap board edges. Cover edges of board and extend encapsulating mesh not less than 2-1/2 inches over front and back face unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

17. Treat exposed edges of insulation as follows: a. Except for edges forming substrates of sealant joints, encapsulate with base


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


coat, reinforcing mesh, and finish coat. b. Encapsulate edges forming substrates of sealant joints within EIFS or between

EIFS and other work with base coat and reinforcing mesh. c. Retain first subparagraph below if trim is used. d. At edges trimmed by accessories, extend base coat, reinforcing mesh, and finish

coat over face leg of accessories.

18. Coordinate installation of flashing and insulation to produce wall assembly that does not allow water to penetrate behind flashing and water-/weather-resistive barrier.

B. Expansion Joints: Install at locations indicated, where required by EIFS manufacturer, and as follows:

1. At expansion joints in substrates behind EIFS.

2. Where EIFS adjoin dissimilar substrates, materials, and construction, including other EIFS.

3. At floor lines in multilevel wood-framed construction.

4. Where wall height or building shape changes.

5. Where EIFS manufacturer requires joints in long continuous elevations.

3.7 BASE-COAT INSTALLATION

A. Base Coat: Apply to exposed surfaces of insulation and foam shapes in minimum thickness recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturer, but not less than 1/16-inch dry-coat thick-ness.

B. Reinforcing Mesh: Embed type indicated below in wet base coat to produce wrinkle-free in-stallation with mesh continuous at corners and overlapped not less than 2-1/2 inches or otherwise treated at joints to comply with ASTM C 1397 and EIFS manufacturer's written in-structions. Do not lap reinforcing mesh within 8 inches of corners. Completely embed mesh, applying additional base-coat material if necessary, so reinforcing-mesh color and pattern are not visible.

1. Heavy-duty reinforcing mesh.

2. Double-Layer Reinforcing Mesh Application: apply second base coat and second layer of intermediate-impact reinforcing mesh, overlapped not less than 2-1/2 inches or otherwise treated at joints to comply with ASTM C 1397 and EIFS manufacturer's written instructions in same manner as first application. Do not apply until first base coat has cured.

3. Additional Reinforcing Mesh: Apply strip reinforcing mesh around openings extending 4 inches beyond perimeter. Apply additional 9-by-12-inch strip reinforcing mesh di-agonally at corners of openings (re-entrant corners). Apply 8-inch- wide strip reinforc-ing mesh at both inside and outside corners unless base layer of mesh is lapped not less than 4 inches on each side of corners.

4. At aesthetic reveals, apply strip reinforcing mesh not less than 8 inches wide.

5. Embed strip reinforcing mesh in base coat before applying first layer of reinforcing mesh.

C. Double Base-Coat Application: Apply second base coat in same manner and thickness as first application except without reinforcing mesh. Do not apply until first base coat has cured.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


3.8 FINISH-COAT INSTALLATION

A. Primer: Apply over dry base coat according to EIFS manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Finish Coat: Apply over dry primed base coat, maintaining a wet edge at all times for uni-form appearance, in thickness required by EIFS manufacturer to produce a uniform finish of color and texture matching approved sample and free of cold joints, shadow lines, and tex-ture variations.

1. Texture: As selected by AC Transit Representative from manufacturer's full range.

2. Embed aggregate in finish coat according to EIFS manufacturer's written instructions to produce a uniform applied-aggregate finish of color and texture matching approved sample.

C. Sealer Coat: Apply over dry finish coat, in number of coats and thickness required by EIFS manufacturer.

3.9 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. Prepare joints and apply sealants, of type and at locations indicated, to comply with appli-cable requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" and in ASTM C 1481.

1. Apply joint sealants after base coat has cured but before applying finish coat.

2. Clean surfaces to receive sealants to comply with indicated requirements and EIFS manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Apply primer recommended in writing by sealant manufacturer for surfaces to be sealed.

4. Install sealant backing to control depth and configuration of sealant joint and to pre-vent sealant from adhering to back of joint.

5. Apply masking tape to protect areas adjacent to sealant joints. Remove tape immedi-ately after tooling joints, without disturbing joint seal.

6. Recess sealant sufficiently from surface of EIFS so an additional sealant application, including cylindrical sealant backing, can be installed without protruding beyond EIFS surface.

7. Use skilled mechanics for installation of sealant system.

8. Follow sealant manufacturer’s installation instructions. Use fresh sealant materials that have arrived at the job site in their original unopened containers. Inspect joint for proper design in accordance with contract documents, Dryvit Systems, Inc. published details, and sealant manufacturer’s recommendations, regarding width, depth, loca-tion, substrate, primer, etc. Report discrepancies to AC Transit Representative and correct deficiencies prior to installation of sealant system.

9. Make sure all joints are clean and free of all foreign matter such as moisture, frost, dust, sealers, release agents, paints, etc. before installation of sealant system.

10. Install sealant system only when climate conditions (temperature, humidity, etc.) meet sealant manufacturer’s recommendations.

11. Protect adjacent materials, including Dryvit system, from damage during installation of sealant system. Mask adjacent areas as required.

12. Allow Dryvit system materials to cure prior to sealant application.

13. Apply a coat of color coordinated Dryvit Demandit or Color Prime™ into the joint. Al-low at least 24 hours to dry before application of the sealant primer. Do not return


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


Dryvit finish into the sealant joint.

14. Install primer, bond breaker and backer rod as specified. Allow primer to cure. Re-move primer overspill.

15. Mix sealant per manufacturer’s instructions. Apply sealant with gun or knife as appro-priate, using proper nozzle and technique. Sealant should completely fill joint cavity to backer material and be in intimate contact with substrate. Tool surface of bead after sealant application, as to leave a neat-appearing, smooth, wrinkle-and-sag-free sur-face without pockets or imbedded impurities, smears or width variations and in total contact with joint sides. Remove sealant from all soiled surfaces. Protect sealant from damage during curing.

16. Use closed cell material for back-up rods.

17. Primer is for sealing Dryvit to Dryvit. For sealing Dryvit to other materials, consult with sealant manufacturer.

18. Dow Corning 791 and 795 are intended to be used as perimeter seals around pene-trations. They are not intended to be used when sealing Dryvit to Dryvit.


A. Special Inspections: AC Transit will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the fol-lowing special inspections:

1. According to ICC-ES AC24.

B. Testing Agency: AC Transit will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and in-spections.

C. EIFS Tests and Inspections: For the following:

1. According to ICC-ES AC24.

2. Remove and replace EIFS where test results indicate that EIFS do not comply with specified requirements.

3. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.11 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Remove temporary covering and protection of other work. Promptly remove coating mate-rials from window and door frames and other surfaces outside areas indicated to receive EIFS coatings.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 07 41 13 - METAL ROOF PANELS

PART 1 -GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Standing-seam metal roof panel systems above Refrigeration Machinery Room.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Metal Roof Panel Assembly: Metal roof panels, attachment system components, miscella-neous metal framing, thermal insulation, and accessories necessary for a complete weathertight roofing system.


A. General Performance: Metal roof panels shall comply with performance requirements with-out failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in con-struction.

B. Delegated Design: Design metal roof panel assembly, including comprehensive engineer-ing analysis by the contractor’s qualified professional engineer licensed in the State of Cali-fornia, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

C. Air Infiltration: Air leakage through assembly of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of roof area when tested according to ASTM E 1680 at the following test-pressure difference:

1. Test-Pressure Difference: Negative 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.

2. Positive Preload Test-Pressure Difference: Greater than or equal to 15.0 lbf/sq. ft. and the greater of 75 percent of building live load or 50 percent of building design positive wind-pressure difference.

3. Negative Preload Test-Pressure Difference: 50 percent of design wind-uplift-pressure difference.

D. Water Penetration: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 1646 at the fol-lowing test-pressure difference:

1. Test-Pressure Difference: 2.86 lbf/sq. ft.

2. Positive Preload Test-Pressure Difference: Greater than or equal to 15.0 lbf/sq. ft. and the greater of 75 percent of building live load or 50 percent of building design positive wind-pressure difference.

3. Negative Preload Test-Pressure Difference: 50 percent of design wind-uplift-pressure difference.

E. Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL 580 for wind-uplift-resistance class indicated.

1. Uplift Rating: UL 90.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


F. FMG Listing: Provide metal roof panels and component materials that comply with re-quirements in FMG 4471 as part of a panel roofing system and that are listed in FMG's "Ap-proval Guide" for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FMG markings.

1. Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A-90 complying with ASTM E 108, Class A fire performance for FMG-approved, Class 1 panel roofs.

G. Structural Performance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under condi-tions indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 1592:

1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on the following minimum design wind pres-sures:

2. Uniform pressure of 30 lbf/sq. ft., acting inward or outward or as indicated on draw-ings.

3. Deflection Limits: Metal roof panel assemblies shall withstand wind loads with vertical deflections no greater than 1/240 of the span.

H. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface temperature changes. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

I. Energy Performance:

1. Provide roof panels with solar reflectance index not less than 78 when calculated ac-cording to ASTM E 1980 based on testing identical products by a qualified testing agency.

2. Provide roof panels that are listed on the U.S. Department of Energy's ENERGY STAR Roof Products Qualified Product List for low-slope roof products.

3. Comply with CEC-Title 24. A list of products tested according to CRRC-1 with their test values is available in PDF at www.coolroofs.org.

4. Provide roof panels with initial solar reflectance not less than 0.70 and emissivity not less than 0.75 when tested according to CRRC-1.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of roof panel and accessory.

B. Product Test Reports: For roof panels, indicating that panels comply with solar reflectance index requirement.

C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of metal roof panels; details of edge conditions, side-seam and endlap joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details. Distinguish between factory- and field-assembled work.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


1. Revise subparagraph below to suit Project. Delete requirement for large-scale details if manufacturer's product data are adequate. Metal roof panel manufacturers may not manufacture all types of accessories.

2. Accessories: Include details of the following items, at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches:

a. Flashing and trim.

b. Gutters.

c. Downspouts.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of metal roof panel indicated with factory-applied color finishes.

1. Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection.

E. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below:

1. Metal Roof panels: 12 inches long by actual panel width. Include fasteners, clips, battens, closures, and other metal roof panel accessories.

2. Trim and Closures: 12 inches long. Include fasteners and other exposed accesso-ries.

3. Accessories: 12-inch- long Samples for each type of accessory.

F. Delegated-Design Submittal: For metal roof panel assembly indicated to comply with per-formance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the contractor’s qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

G. Coordination Drawings: Roof plans, drawn to scale, on which the following are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:

1. Roof panels and attachments.

2. Purlins and rafters.

3. Roof-mounted items including roof hatches, equipment supports, pipe supports and penetrations, lighting fixtures and items mounted on roof curbs.

H. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that roof panels comply with energy performance requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.

1. Submit evidence of meeting performance requirements.

I. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and professional engineer.

J. Material Certificates: For thermal insulation and vapor retarders, from manufacturer.

K. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a quali-fied testing agency, for each product.

L. Field quality-control reports.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


M. Maintenance Data: For metal roof panels to include in maintenance manuals.

N. Warranties: Samples of special warranties.


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of metal roof panels from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide metal roof panels identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency.

2. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at as determined by the AC Transit Rep-resentative.

1. Meet with AC Transit Representative, Architect, AC Transit's insurer if applicable, test-ing and inspecting agency representative, metal roof panel Installer, metal roof panel manufacturer's representative, deck Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects metal roof panels including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.

2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, In-staller's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid de-lays.

3. Review methods and procedures related to metal roof panel installation, including manufacturer's written instructions.

4. Examine deck substrate conditions for compliance with requirements, including flat-ness and attachment to structural members.

5. Review structural loading limitations of deck during and after roofing.

6. Review flashings, special roof details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect metal roof panels.

7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates, and testing and inspecting if applicable.

8. Review temporary protection requirements for metal roof panel assembly during and after installation.

9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after metal roof panel installation.

10. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and fur-nish copy of record to each participant.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland



A. Deliver components, sheets, metal roof panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal roof panels for protection during transportation and handling.

B. Unload, store, and erect metal roof panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twist-ing, and surface damage.

C. Stack metal roof panels on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ven-tilated covering. Store metal roof panels to ensure dryness. Do not store metal roof panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.

D. Protect strippable protective covering on metal roof panels from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of metal roof panel installation.

1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment.

2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic insulation materials to Project site before installation time.

3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit metal roof panel work to be performed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.

B. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous with metal roof panels by field measurements before fabrication.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with actual equipment provided.

B. Coordinate metal roof panels with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction of decks, parapets, walls, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncor-rosive installation.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace metal roof panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing.

b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


2. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal roof panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.

b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.

c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.

2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Special Weathertightness Warranty for Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace standing-seam metal roof panel assemblies that fail to remain weathertight, including leaks, within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 PANEL MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Sheet: Coil-coated sheet, ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer, with temper as required to suit forming operations and structural performance required.

1. Surface: Smooth, flat finish.

2. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:

3. 4-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat and clear coats. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufac-turers' written instructions.

4. Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.

B. Panel Sealants:

1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene com-pound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.

2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or silicone seal-ant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal roof panels and remain weathertight; and as recommended in writing by metal roof panel manufacturer.

3. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS

A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: 30 to 40 mils thick minimum, consisting of slip-resisting, polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer.

1. Thermal Stability: Stable after testing at 240 deg F; ASTM D 1970.

2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Passes after testing at minus 20 deg F; ASTM D 1970.

3. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc., Div. of Carlisle Companies Inc.; CCW WIP 300HT.

b. Grace Construction Products; a unit of Grace, W. R. & Co.; Ultra.

c. Henry Company; Blueskin PE200 HT.

d. Metal-Fab Manufacturing, LLC; MetShield.

e. Owens Corning; WeatherLock Metal High Temperature Underlayment.

B. Felts: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felts.

C. Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's recommended slip sheet, of type required for application.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FRAMING

A. Miscellaneous Metal Framing, General: ASTM C 645, cold-formed metallic-coated steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 hot-dip galvanized or coating with equivalent corrosion resistance unless otherwise indicated.

B. Fasteners for Miscellaneous Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten miscellaneous metal framing mem-bers to substrates.


A. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of metal roof panels by means of plastic caps or fac-tory-applied coating. Provide EPDM, PVC, or neoprene sealing washers.

B. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fi-bers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.

2.5 STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS

A. General: Provide factory-formed metal roof panels designed to be installed by lapping and interconnecting raised side edges of adjacent panels with joint type indicated and mechani-cally attaching panels to supports using concealed clips in side laps. Include clips, cleats, pressure plates, and accessories required for weathertight installation.

1. Aluminum Panel Systems: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with ASTM E 1637.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


B. Vertical-Rib, Seamed-Joint, Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels for installation above Re-frigeration Machinery Room: Formed with vertical ribs at panel edges and intermediate stiffening ribs symmetrically spaced between ribs; designed for sequential installation by mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips located under one side of panels and engaging opposite edge of adjacent panels, and mechanically seaming panels together.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. AEP-Span.

b. Architectural Building Components.

c. Architectural Metal Systems.

d. Architectural Roofing and Siding, Inc.

e. Berridge Manufacturing Company.

f. Butler Manufacturing; a BlueScope Steel company.

g. Fabral.

h. MBCI; a division of NCI Building Systems, L. P.

i. McElroy Metal, Inc.

j. Merchant & Evans.

k. Petersen Aluminum Corporation.

2. Material: Aluminum sheet, 0.040 inch thick.

a. Exterior Finish: 4-coat fluoropolymer.

b. Color: In compliance with Energy Performance requirements and as selected by AC Transit Representative.

3. Batten: Same material, finish, and color as roof panels.

4. Clips: Floating to accommodate thermal movement.

a. Material: 0.062-inch- thick, stainless-steel sheet.

5. Joint Type: Double folded.

6. Panel Coverage: 16 inches.

7. Panel Height: 1.5 inches.

2.6 ACCESSORIES

A. Roof Panel Accessories: Provide components approved by roof panel manufacturer and as required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, corner units, ridge closures, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal roof panels unless otherwise indicated.

1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same metal as metal roof panels.

2. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal roof panel profile. Provide closure strips where indi-cated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction.

3. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material recommended by manufacturer.

B. Flashing and Trim: Formed from same material as roof panels, prepainted with coil coating, minimum 0.018 inch thick. Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal roof panels.

C. Gutters: Formed from same material roof panels. Match profile of gable trim, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other special pieces as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- long sections, of size and metal thickness according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Furnish gutter supports spaced a maximum of 36 inches o.c., fabri-cated from same metal as gutters. Provide wire ball strainers of compatible metal at out-lets. Finish gutters to match metal roof panels.

D. Downspouts: Formed from same material as roof panels. Fabricate in 10-foot- long sec-tions, complete with formed elbows and offsets, of size and metal thickness according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual". Finish downspouts to match gutters.

E. Roof Curbs: Fabricated from same material as roof panels, minimum 0.048 inch thick; with bottom of skirt profiled to match roof panel profiles, and welded top box and integral full-length cricket. Fabricate curb subframing of minimum 0.0598-inch- thick, angle-, C-, or Z-shaped steel sheet. Fabricate curb and subframing to withstand indicated loads, of size and height indicated. Finish roof curbs to match metal roof panels.

1. Insulate roof curb with 1-inch- thick, rigid insulation.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate and finish metal roof panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent pos-sible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes and as necessary to fulfill indi-cated performance requirements. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.

B. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel.

C. Fabricate metal roof panel side laps with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a tight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, in a manner that will seal weathertight and minimize noise from movements within panel assembly.

D. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.

1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buck-ling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

2. End Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.

3. End Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.

4. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elas-tomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards.

5. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view.

6. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of size and metal thickness recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or by metal roof panel manufacturer for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured.

2.8 FINISHES


B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with re-quirements for installation tolerances, metal roof panel supports, and other conditions af-fecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine primary and secondary roof framing to verify that rafters, purlins, angles, channels, and other structural panel support members and anchorages have been installed within alignment tolerances required by metal roof panel manufacturer.

C. Examine solid roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal roof panel manufacturer.

D. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal roof panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal roof panels before metal roof panel installation.

E. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.

F. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation, including removing projections capa-


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


ble of interfering with insulation attachment.

B. Miscellaneous Framing: Install subpurlins, eave angles, furring, and other miscellaneous roof panel support members and anchorage according to metal roof panel manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION

A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Apply primer if required by manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation. Apply at locations indicated below, wrinkle free, in shingle fashion to shed water, and with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Extend underlayment into gutter trough. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlay-ment within 14 days.

1. Roof perimeter for a distance up from eaves of 24 inches or as indicated beyond inte-rior wall line.

2. Rake edges for a distance of 18 inches.

3. Hips and ridges for a distance on each side of 12 inches.

4. Roof to wall intersections for a distance from wall of 18 inches.

5. Around dormers, chimneys, skylights, and other penetrating elements for a distance from element of 18 inches.

B. Felt Underlayment: Apply at locations indicated below, in shingle fashion to shed water, and with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches.

1. Apply over entire roof surface.

C. Apply slip sheet over underlayment before installing metal roof panels.

D. Install flashings to cover underlayment to comply with requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

3.4 METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Provide metal roof panels of full length from eave to ridge unless otherwise indicated or re-stricted by shipping limitations.

B. Thermal Movement. Rigidly fasten metal roof panels to structure at one and only one loca-tion for each panel. Allow remainder of panel to move freely for thermal expansion and contraction. Predrill panels for fasteners.

1. Avoid attaching accessories through roof panels in a manner that will inhibit thermal movement.

C. Install metal roof panels as follows:

1. Commence metal roof panel installation and install minimum of 300 sq. ft. in presence of factory-authorized representative.

2. Field cutting of metal panels by torch is not permitted.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


3. Install panels perpendicular to purlins.

4. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment.

5. Provide metal closures where indicated and at rake edges rake walls and each side of ridge and hip caps.

6. Flash and seal metal roof panels with weather closures at eaves, rakes, and perimeter of all openings.

7. End Splices: Locate panel end splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel end splices to avoid a four-panel splice condition.

8. Install metal flashing to allow moisture to run over and off metal roof panels.

D. Fasteners:

1. Aluminum Roof Panels: Use stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the ex-terior and galvanized-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior.

E. Anchor Clips: Anchor metal roof panels and other components of the Work securely in place, using manufacturer's approved fasteners according to manufacturers' written instruc-tions.

F. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by ap-plying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.

1. Coat back side of roof panels with bituminous coating where roof panels will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

G. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for weatherproof performance of metal roof panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and sealants indicated or, if not indicated, types recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.

1. Seal metal roof panel end laps with double beads of tape or sealant, full width of panel. Seal side joints where recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

3.5 METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION

A. Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with concealed clips at each standing-seam joint at location, spacing, and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer.

1. Install clips to supports with self-tapping fasteners.

2. Install pressure plates at locations indicated in manufacturer's written installation in-structions.

3. Seamed Joint: Crimp standing seams with manufacturer-approved, motorized


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


seamer tool so clip, metal roof panel, and factory-applied sealant are completely en-gaged.

3.6 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other compo-nents.

1. Install components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim, copings, ridge closures, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.

B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installa-tion instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.

1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance.

2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).

C. Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered or lapped and sealed joints. Attach gutters to eave with gutter hangers spaced not more than 36 inches o.c. using manufacturer's standard fasteners. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion.

D. Downspouts: Join sections with telescoping joints. Provide fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely 1 inch away from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at ap-proximately 60 inches o.c. in between.

1. Provide elbows at base of downspouts to direct water away from building.

2. Connect downspouts to underground drainage system indicated.

E. Roof Curbs: Install curbs at locations indicated on Drawings. Install flashing around bases where they meet metal roof panels.

F. Pipe Flashing: Form flashing around pipe penetration and metal roof panels. Fasten and seal to metal roof panels as recommended by manufacturer.

3.7 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Generally retain this article only for sophisticated or highly finished metal roof panel assem-blies.

B. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal roof panel units within installed tolerance of


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of ad-joining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect metal roof panel installation, including accessories. Report results in writing.

B. Remove and replace applications of metal roof panels where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.

C. Additional inspections, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

3.9 CLEANING

A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal roof panels are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal roof panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

B. Replace metal roof panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond success-ful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 07 51 13 ROOFING MODIFICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Modifications to existing traffic coating system roofing.

2. Protection of existing roofing.

3. Temporary opening protection.

4. Roof preparation.


A. Section 07 18 00 TRAFFIC COATINGS

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Roofing Terminology: See ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" for definition of terms related to built-up roofing.

B. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be removed and reinstalled.

C. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not indicated to be removed.


A. Refer to Section 07 18 00 TRAFFIC COATINGS.

B. Contractor shall contact manufacturer’s representative for existing roofing and match mate-rials and install as recommended in writing by existing roofing manufacturer.

C. General Performance: Installed roofing modifications to roofing and base flashings shall withstand specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Roofing and base flashings shall remain watertight.

D. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another un-der conditions of service and application required, as approved in writing by existing roofing manufacturer.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site im-provements, including exterior and interior finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as having been damaged by reroofing operations. Submit before Work begins.

C. Shop Drawings: Refer to Section 07 18 00 TRAFFIC COATINGS.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland



A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and la-beled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, ap-proval or listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other compo-nents.

B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected loca-tion and within the temperature range required by roofing manufacturer. Protect stored liq-uid material from direct sunlight.

1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life.

C. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck.


A. AC Transit will occupy portions of building immediately below reroofing area. Conduct re-roofing so AC Transit's operations will not be disrupted. Provide AC Transit with not less than 7 days’ notice of activities that may affect AC Transit's operations.

1. Coordinate work activities daily with AC Transit so AC Transit can place protective dust or water leakage covers over sensitive equipment or furnishings, shut down HVAC and fire-alarm or -detection equipment if needed, and evacuate occupants from below the work area.

2. Before working over structurally impaired areas of deck, notify AC Transit to evacuate occupants from below the affected area. Verify that occupants below the work area have been evacuated before proceeding with work over the impaired deck area.

B. Protect building to be reroofed, adjacent buildings, walkways, site improvements, exterior plantings, and landscaping from damage or soiling from reroofing operations.

C. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facili-ties.

D. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding will be maintained by AC Transit as far as practical.

E. Limit construction loads on roof per existing and new roofing manufacturers’ recommenda-tions.

F. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials such as asbestos-containing materials will be encountered in the Work.

1. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not dis-turb; immediately notify AC Transit. Hazardous materials will be removed by AC Transit under a separate contract.

2. Coordinate with hazardous material remediation subcontractor to prevent water from entering existing roofing system or building.

G. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


1.8 WARRANTY


B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during reroofing, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing roofing system warranty. Notify warrantor before proceeding.

1. Notify warrantor of existing roofing system on completion of reroofing, and obtain documentation verifying that existing roofing system has been inspected and warranty remains in effect. Submit documentation at Project closeout.

C. Special Warranty: Refer to Section 07 18 00 TRAFFIC COATINGS.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ROOFING MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by Tremco, In-corporated to match existing.

1. Refer to Section 07 18 00 TRAFFIC COATINGS.

B. Metal Flashing Sheet: Metal flashing sheet is specified in Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION


B. Protect existing traffic coating roofing system that is indicated not to be reroofed.

1. Loosely lay 1-inch- minimum thick, molded expanded polystyrene (MEPS) insulation over the existing traffic coating roofing system in areas indicated. Loosely lay 15/32-inch plywood or OSB panels over MEPS. Extend MEPS past edges of plywood or OSB panels a minimum of 1 inch.

2. Limit traffic and material storage to areas of existing traffic coating roofing system that have been protected.

3. Maintain temporary protection and leave in place until replacement roofing has been completed. Remove temporary protection on completion of reroofing.

C. Coordinate with AC Transit to shut down air-intake equipment in the vicinity of the Work. Cover air-intake louvers before proceeding with reroofing work that could affect indoor air quality or activate smoke detectors in the ductwork.

D. During removal operations, have sufficient and suitable materials on-site to facilitate rapid installation of temporary protection in the event of unexpected rain.

E. Maintain roof drains in functioning condition to ensure roof drainage at end of each work-day. Prevent debris from entering or blocking roof drains and conductors. Use roof-drain plugs specifically designed for this purpose. Remove roof-drain plugs at end of each work-day, when no work is taking place, or when rain is forecast.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


1. If roof drains are temporarily blocked or unserviceable due to roofing system removal or partial installation of new membrane roofing system, provide alternative drainage method to remove water and eliminate ponding. Do not permit water to enter into or under existing membrane roofing system components that are to remain.

F. Verify that rooftop utilities and service piping have been shut off before beginning the Work.

3.2 ROOF MODIFICATION

A. General: Notify AC Transit each day of extent of roof modification proposed for that day and obtain authorization to proceed.

B. Remove accessories from roofing membrane. Store and protect accessories for reuse.

3.3 DECK PREPARATION

A. Cut new opening through roof deck where indicated.

3.4 TEMPORARY PROTECTION OF NEW ROOF OPENINGS

A. Install approved temporary protection of new roof openings. Do not leave site before new openings are water tight.

B. Remove temporary protection of new openings before installing new roofing membrane.

3.5 ROOF RE-COVER PREPARATION


B. Remove blisters, ridges, buckles, and other substrate irregularities from existing traffic coat-ing roofing system that inhibit new roofing from conforming to substrate.

1. Scarify the surface as necessary to achieve a sufficiently uniform plane to receive new roofing plys.

2. Broom clean existing substrate.

3. Coordinate with AC Transit's inspector and Special Inspector to schedule times for tests and inspections before proceeding with installation.

C. Remove blisters and areas not fully adhered.

3.6 DISPOSAL

A. Collect demolished materials and place in containers. Promptly dispose of demolished ma-terials. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.

B. Transport and legally dispose of demolished materials off AC Transit's property.

3.7 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with the following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system:

1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and curbs are set and braced and that roof drain bodies are securely clamped in place.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


2. Verify that wood blocking and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at penetra-tions and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

C. Refer to Section 07 18 00 TRAFFIC COATINGS.

3.8 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing in-stallation according to roofing manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projec-tions.

B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast.

C. Refer to Section 07 18 00 TRAFFIC COATINGS.

3.9 ROOFING INSTALLATION

A. Per roofing manufacturer’s written instructions. Refer to Section 07 18 00 TRAFFIC COATINGS.

3.10 FLASHING AND STRIPPING INSTALLATION

A. Install according to roofing manufacturer's written instructions and details. Refer to Section 07 18 00 TRAFFIC COATINGS.

3.11 COATING INSTALLATION




3.13 PROTECTING AND CLEANING


B. Protect roofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When re-maining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to AC Transit.

C. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.

D. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and proce-dures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland




CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 -GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes miscellaneous exterior surfacing and roofing work that may not appear in other specific sections for modification of existing roofing or wall systems:

1. Manufactured Products:

a. Manufactured reglets.

2. Formed Products:

a. Formed roof sheet metal fabrications.

b. Formed equipment support flashing.


A. Refer to Section Section 07 41 13 - Metal Roof Panels

B. Refer to Section 07 24 19 Water-Drainage Exterior Insulation And Finish System (EIFS) for specific requirements for sheet metal flashing and trim that may differ from general re-quirements listed within this section.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of roof panel and accessory.

B. Shop Drawings: For roof accessories. Include plans, elevations, keyed details, and at-tachments to other work. Indicate dimensions, loadings, and special conditions. Distin-guish between plant- and field-assembled work.


A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry.

B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to the extent necessary for the period of sheet metal flashing and trim installation.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEET METALS

A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by ap-plying a strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.

B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet, metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.

1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designa-tion; structural quality.


A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coat-ings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise indicated.

B. Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item.

1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.

a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory-applied coating.

b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened.

2. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Hot-dip galvanized steel accord-ing to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 or Series 300 stainless steel.

C. Solder:

1. For Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead or Grade Sn60, 60 percent tin and 40 percent lead.

D. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.

E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.

F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; poly-


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


isobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited move-ment.

G. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound, rec-ommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints.

H. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

I. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for applica-tion.

J. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with waterborne preservatives for aboveground use, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and complying with AWPA C2; not less than 1-1/2 inches thick.

2.3 MANUFACTURED SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

A. Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile indicated, formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing indicated with factory-mitered and -welded corners and junctions with interlocking counterflashing on exte-rior face, of same metal as reglet.


a. Fry Reglet Corporation.

b. National Sheet Metal Systems, Inc.

c. Sandell Manufacturing Company, Inc.

2. Material: Galvanized steel, 0.022 inch thick.

3. Surface-Mounted Type: Provide with slotted holes for fastening to substrate, with neoprene or other suitable weatherproofing washers, and with channel for sealant at top edge.

4. Accessories:

a. Flexible-Flashing Retainer: Provide resilient plastic or rubber accessory to se-cure flexible flashing in reglet where clearance does not permit use of standard metal counterflashing or where Drawings show reglet without metal counterflash-ing.

b. Counterflashing Wind-Restraint Clips: Provide clips to be installed before coun-terflashing to prevent wind uplift of counterflashing lower edge.

5. Finish: Mill With manufacturer's standard color coating.

2.4 PREFORMED FLASHING SLEEVES

A. Exhaust Vent Flashing: Double-walled metal flashing sleeve or boot, insulation filled, with integral deck flange, 12 inches high, with removable metal hood and slotted metal collar.

1. Metal: Aluminum sheet, 0.063 inch thick.

2. Diameter: As indicated.

3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


B. Vent Stack Flashing: Metal flashing sleeve, uninsulated, with integral deck flange.

1. Metal: Aluminum sheet, 0.063 inch thick.

2. Height: As indicated on drawings or minimum of 7 inches.

3. Diameter: As indicated.

4. Finish: Manufacturer's standard.

2.5 PIPE SUPPORTS

A. Pipe Supports: Pressure treated wood sleepers nominal 4” x 4” x length of pipe rack + 4” on each side.

B. Pipe Support Height: As indicated on Drawings.

C. Roller Assembly: With stainless-steel roller, sized for supported pipes.

D. Pipe Support Flashing: ½ inch thick bituminous material board cut 2” larger on all sides than footprint of wood sleeper.


A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, geome-try, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item indicated. Fabricate items at the shop to greatest extent possible.

1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal.

2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.

3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces exposed to view.

B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installa-tion to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installa-tion to tolerances specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing."

D. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elas-tomeric sealant.

E. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expan-sion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with butyl seal-ant concealed within joints.

F. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


G. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by SMACNA's "Archi-tectural Sheet Metal Manual" for application, but not less than thickness of metal being se-cured.

H. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.

I. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with elas-tomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use. Rivet joints where necessary for strength.

J. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Equipment Support Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:

1. Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch thick.

B. Base Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:


C. Counterflashing: Fabricate from the following materials:


D. Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following materials:


E. Drip Edges: Fabricate from the following materials:


F. Counterflashing: Fabricate from the following materials:


G. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:


PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates.

2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored.

B. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland



A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, weld-ing rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as re-quired to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.

1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.

2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight per-formance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.

3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.

4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks.

5. Install sealant tape where indicated.

6. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.

7. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA.

1. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood sub-strates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or install a course of polyethylene sheet.

C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be suffi-ciently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints.

D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate metal decking not less than rec-ommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.

E. Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction.

1. Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for in-stallation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at tem-peratures below 40 deg F.

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

F. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches, except reduce pre-tinning where pre-tinned surface would show in completed Work.

1. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed sur-


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


faces.

3.3 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance require-ments, sheet metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Archi-tectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be perma-nently watertight and weather resistant.

B. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending a minimum of 4 inches over base flash-ing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten.

C. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counter-flashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches and bed with sealant. Secure in a waterproof manner by means of snap-in installation and sealant or lead wedges and sealant.

D. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installa-tion of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate roof.

3.4 MISCELLANEOUS FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate installation of equipment support flashing with in-stallation of roofing and equipment. Weld or seal flashing with elastomeric sealant to equipment support member.

3.5 PIPE SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Carefully remove gravel ballast from area to receive sleeper.

B. Set bituminous material onto roof surface with a full coating of Asphalt Roofing Cement.

C. Set wood sleeper onto bituminous material with a full coating of Asphalt Roofing Cement.

D. Install pipe support, careful not to penetrate roofing membrane.

3.6 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed toler-ance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

B. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed toler-ances specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing."


A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.

B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


C. Clean off excess sealants.

D. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instruc-tions. On completion of installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

E. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 07 81 10 APPLIED FIREPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Exposed SFRM

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. SFRM: Sprayed fire-resistive material.

1. Exposed: Fire-resistive materials applied to surfaces that are exposed to view when the Work is completed, that are accessible through suspended ceilings, that are in elevator shafts and machine rooms, that are in mechanical rooms, and that are identi-fied as exposed on Drawings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Test reports containing the following information:

1. Test results from an independent testing laboratory indicating compliance of sprayed-on fireproofing products with performance requirements indicated, including asbestos content and mineral wool content. Include copy of each design selected.

C. Shop Drawings: Structural framing plans indicating the following:

1. Locations and types of surface preparations required before applying SFRM.

2. Extent of SFRM for each construction and fire-resistance rating, including the follow-ing:

a. Applicable fire-resistance design designations of a qualified testing and inspect-ing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1) For steel joist assemblies, include applicable fire-resistance design designa-

tions, with each steel joist tested with the same maximum tensile stress as each steel joist indicated on Drawings. Design designations with steel joists tested at lower maximum tensile stress than those indicated are not permit-ted.

b. Minimum thicknesses needed to achieve required fire-resistance ratings of struc-tural components and assemblies.

3. Treatment of SFRM after application.

D. Product Certificates: For each type of SFRM, signed by product manufacturer.

E. Qualification Data: For Installer, manufacturer and testing agency.

F. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From SFRM manufacturer indicating the follow-ing:


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


1. Materials have been tested for bond with substrates.

2. Materials have been verified by SFRM manufacturer to be compatible with substrate primers and coatings.

3. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a quali-fied testing agency, for proposed SFRM.

H. Research/Evaluation Reports: For SFRM.

I. Field quality-control test and special inspection reports.


A. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by SFRM manufacturer as experienced and with sufficient trained staff to install manufacturer's products according to specified requirements. A manufacturer's willingness to sell its SFRM to Contractor or to an installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on the buyer.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain SFRM through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. SFRM Testing: By a qualified testing and inspecting agency engaged by manufacturer to test for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods.

1. SFRMs are randomly selected for testing from bags bearing the applicable classifica-tion marking of UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Testing is performed on specimens of SFRMs that comply with laboratory testing re-quirements specified in Part 2 and are otherwise identical to installed fire-resistive ma-terials, including application of accelerant, sealers, topcoats, tamping, troweling, roll-ing, and water overspray, if any of these are used in final application.

3. Testing is performed on specimens whose application the independent testing and in-specting agency witnessed during preparation and conditioning. Include in test re-ports a full description of preparation and conditioning of laboratory test specimens.

D. Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to test for compliance with requirements for specified performance and test methods.

1. Test for bond per ASTM E 736 and requirements in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" for coating materials. Provide bond strength indicated in referenced fire-resistance design, but not less than minimum specified in Part 2.

2. Verify that manufacturer, through its own laboratory testing or field experience, has not found primers or coatings to be incompatible with SFRM.

E. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide SFRM with the fire-test-response characteris-tics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify bags containing SFRM with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspect-


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


ing agency.

1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for SFRM serving as direct-applied protection tested per ASTM E 119.

2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84.

F. Provide products containing no asbestos as determined according to the method specified in 40 CFR 763, Subpart E, Appendix E, Section 1, "Polarized Light Microscopy."


A. Deliver products to Project site in original, unopened packages with intact and legible manu-facturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture, shelf life if ap-plicable, and fire-resistance ratings applicable to Project.

B. Use materials with limited shelf life within period indicated. Remove from Project site and discard materials whose shelf life has expired.

C. Store materials inside, under cover, and aboveground; keep dry until ready for use. Re-move from Project site and discard wet or deteriorated materials.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply SFRM when ambient or substrate temperature is 40 deg F or lower unless temporary protection and heat are provided to maintain tempera-ture at or above this level for 24 hours before, during, and for 24 hours after product appli-cation.

B. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces during and after application of SFRM. Use natural means or, if they are inadequate, forced-air circulation until fire-resistive material dries thor-oughly.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Sequence and coordinate application of SFRM with other related work specified in other Sections to comply with the following requirements:

1. Provide temporary enclosure as required to confine spraying operations and protect the environment.

2. Provide temporary enclosures for applications to prevent deterioration of fire-resistive material due to exposure to weather and to unfavorable ambient conditions for humid-ity, temperature, and ventilation.

3. Avoid unnecessary exposure of fire-resistive material to abrasion and other damage likely to occur during construction operations subsequent to its application.

4. Do not begin applying fire-resistive material until clips, hangers, supports, sleeves, and other items penetrating fire protection are in place.

5. Defer installing ducts, piping, and other items that would interfere with applying fire-resistive material until application of fire protection is completed.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


6. Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after fire-resistive material has been applied, inspected, and tested and corrections have been made to defective ap-plications.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Contractor and by Installer, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace SFRMs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Cracking, flaking, spalling, or eroding in excess of specified requirements; peel-ing; or delaminating of SFRM from substrates.

2. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EXPOSED SFRM

A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incor-porated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Exposed Cementitious SFRM:

a. Grace, W.R. & Co. - Conn., Construction Products Div.; Monokote Type Z106G.

b. Isolatek International Corp.; Cafco 400.

c. Pyrok, Inc.; Pyrok-HD

d. Southwest Vermiculite Co., Inc.; 5MD

B. Material Composition: Manufacturer's standard product, as follows:

1. Exposed Cementitious SFRM: Factory-mixed, dry, cement aggregate formulation; or chloride-free formulation of gypsum or Portland cement binders, additives, and inor-ganic aggregates mixed with water at Project site to form a slurry or mortar for con-veyance and application.

C. Physical Properties: Minimum values, unless otherwise indicated, or higher values required to attain designated fire-resistance ratings, measured per standard test methods referenced with each property as follows:

1. Dry Density: Values for average and individual densities as required for fire-resistance ratings indicated, per ASTM E 605 or AWCI Technical Manual 12-A, Sec-tion 5.4.5, "Displacement Method," but with an average density of not less than 22 lb/cu. ft.

2. Bond Strength: 434 lbf/sq. ft. minimum per ASTM E 736.

3. Compressive Strength: 51 lbf/sq. in. minimum per ASTM E 761.

4. Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion per ASTM E 937.

5. Deflection: No cracking, spalling, or delamination per ASTM E 759.

6. Effect of Impact on Bonding: No cracking, spalling, or delamination per ASTM E 760.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


7. Air Erosion: Maximum weight loss of 0.025 g/sq. ft. per ASTM E 859.

8. Combustion Characteristics: Passes ASTM E 136.

9. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide SFRM with the following surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdic-tion:

a. Flame-Spread Index: 10 or less.

b. Smoke-Developed Index: 0.

10. Fungal Resistance: No observed growth on specimens per ASTM G 21.

2.2 AUXILIARY FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary fire-resistive materials that are compatible with SFRM and sub-strates and are approved by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to au-thorities having jurisdiction for use in fire-resistance designs indicated.

B. Substrate Primers: For use on each substrate and with each sprayed fire-resistive product, provide primer that complies with one or more of the following requirements:

1. Primer's bond strength complies with requirements specified in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" for coating materials based on a series of bond tests per ASTM E 736.

2. Primer is identical to those used in assemblies tested for fire-test-response character-istics of SFRM per ASTM E 119 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency ac-ceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Adhesive for Bonding Fire-Resistive Material: Product approved by manufacturer of SFRM.

D. Reinforcing Fabric: Glass- or carbon-fiber fabric of type, weight, and form required to com-ply with fire-resistance designs indicated; approved and provided by manufacturer of SFRM.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with re-quirements for substrates and other conditions affecting performance of work. A substrate is in satisfactory condition if it complies with the following:

1. Substrates comply with requirements in the Section where the substrate and related materials and construction are specified.

2. Substrates are free of dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill scale, loose scale, incompatible primers, incompatible paints, incompatible encapsulants, or other foreign substances capable of impairing bond of fire-resistive materials with substrates under conditions of normal use or fire exposure.

3. Objects penetrating fire-resistive material, including clips, hangers, support sleeves, and similar items, are securely attached to substrates.

4. Substrates are not obstructed by ducts, piping, equipment, and other suspended con-struction that will interfere with applying fire-resistive material.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


B. Verify that concrete work on steel deck has been completed.

C. Verify that roof construction and other related work are completed.

D. Conduct tests according to fire-resistive material manufacturer's written recommendations to verify that substrates are free of substances capable of interfering with bond.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fire-resistive materials dur-ing application.

B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of fire-resistive material, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill scale, loose scale, and incompati-ble primers, paints, and encapsulants.

C. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer unless compatible shop primer has been applied and is in satisfactory condition to receive SFRM.

3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL

A. Comply with fire-resistive material manufacturer's written instructions for mixing materials, application procedures, and types of equipment used to mix, convey, and spray on fire-resistive material, as applicable to particular conditions of installation and as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

B. Apply SFRM that is identical to products tested as specified in Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article and substantiated by test reports, with respect to rate of application, accelerator use, sealers, topcoats, tamping, troweling, water overspray, or other materials and procedures affecting test results.

C. Coat substrates with bonding adhesive before applying fire-resistive material where re-quired to achieve fire-resistance rating or as recommended in writing by SFRM manufac-turer for material and application indicated.

D. Extend fire-resistive material in full thickness over entire area of each substrate to be pro-tected. Unless otherwise recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer, install body of fire-resistive covering in a single course.

E. Spray apply fire-resistive materials to maximum extent possible. Following the spraying operation in each area, complete the coverage by trowel application or other placement method recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer.

3.4 APPLICATION, EXPOSED SFRM

A. Apply exposed SFRM in thicknesses and densities not less than those required to achieve fire-resistance ratings designated for each condition, but apply in greater thicknesses and densities if indicated.

1. For steel beams and bracing, provide a thickness of not less than 1 inch.

2. For metal floor or roof decks, provide a thickness of not less than 1/2 inch.

B. Apply exposed cementitious SFRM to produce the following finishes:


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


1. Spray-textured finish in a uniformly consolidated finish to meet the requirement fire ratting.

2. Even, spray-textured finish, produced by rolling flat surfaces of fire-protected mem-bers with a damp paint roller to remove drippings and excessive roughness.

C. Cure exposed SFRM according to product manufacturer's written recommendations.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1. Testing and inspecting agency will interpret tests and state in each report whether tested work complies with or deviates from requirements.

B. Tests and Inspections: Testing and inspecting of completed applications of SFRM shall take place in successive stages, in areas of extent and using methods as follows. Tested values must equal or exceed values indicated and required for approved fire-resistance de-sign.

1. Thickness for Floor, Roof, and Wall Assemblies: For each 1000-sq. ft. area, or partial area, on each floor, from the average of 4 measurements from a 144-sq. in. sample area, with sample width of not less than 6 inches per ASTM E 605.

2. Thickness for Structural Frame Members: From a sample of 25 percent of structural members per floor, taking 9 measurements at a single cross section for structural frame beams or girders, 7 measurements of a single cross section for joists and trusses, and 12 measurements of a single cross section for columns per ASTM E 605.

3. Density for Floors, Roofs, Walls, and Structural Frame Members: At frequency and from sample size indicated for determining thickness of each type of construction and structural framing member, per ASTM E 605 or AWCI Technical Manual 12-A, Sec-tion 5.4.5, "Displacement Method."

4. Bond Strength for Floors, Roofs, Walls, and Structural Framing Members: For each 10,000-sq. ft. area, or partial area, on each floor, cohesion and adhesion from one sample of size indicated for determining thickness of each type of construction and structural framing member, per ASTM E 736.

a. Field test SFRM that is applied to flanges of wide-flange, structural-steel mem-bers on surfaces matching those that will exist for remainder of steel receiving fire-resistive material.

b. If surfaces of structural steel receiving SFRM are primed or otherwise painted for coating materials, perform series of bond tests specified in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory." Provide bond strength indicated in referenced UL fire-resistance crite-ria, but not less than 150 lbf/sq. ft. minimum per ASTM E 736.

5. If testing finds applications of SFRM are not in compliance with requirements, testing and inspecting agency will perform additional random testing to determine extent of noncompliance.

C. Remove and replace applications of SFRM that do not pass tests and inspections for cohe-sion and adhesion, for density, or for both and retest as specified above.

D. Apply additional SFRM, per manufacturer's written instructions, where test results indicate that thickness does not comply with specified requirements, and retest as specified above.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


3.6 CLEANING, PROTECTING, AND REPAIR

A. Cleaning: Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of Project, remove material overspray and fallout from surfaces of other construction and clean exposed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling.

B. Protect SFRM, according to advice of product manufacturer and Installer, from damage re-sulting from construction operations or other causes so fire protection will be without dam-age or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

C. Coordinate application of SFRM with other construction to minimize need to cut or remove fire protection. As installation of other construction proceeds, inspect SFRM and patch any damaged or removed areas.

D. Repair or replace work that has not successfully protected steel.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 07 84 13 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes through-penetration firestop systems for penetrations through fire-resistance-rated constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items.


A. General: For penetrations through the following fire-resistance-rated constructions, includ-ing both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items, provide through-penetration firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire accord-ing to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain origi-nal fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated.

1. Fire-resistance-rated walls, including fire walls, fire partitions, fire barriers, and smoke barriers.

2. Walls and floor slab at Refrigeration Machinery Room P6-4.

B. Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that comply with the latest edition of the UL Fire Resistive Manual.

C. If installed conditions deviate from the UL assemblies listed in the UL Fire Resistive Manual, the contractor shall be responsible for providing a UL approved assembly without any addi-tional cost to AC Transit.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For each through-penetration firestop system, show each type of construc-tion condition penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction, and type of penetrating item. Include firestop design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency that evidences compliance with requirements for each condition indicated.

1. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency that is applicable to each through-penetration firestop system configuration for construction and penetrating items.

2. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular through-penetration firestop condition, submit illus-tration, with modifications marked, approved by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly.

C. Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule: Indicate locations of each through-penetration firestop system, along with the following information:

1. Types of penetrating items.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


2. Types of constructions penetrated, including fire-resistance ratings and, where appli-cable, thicknesses of construction penetrated.

3. Through-penetration firestop systems for each location identified by firestop design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.

D. Qualification Data: For Installer.

E. Product Certificates: For through-penetration firestop system products, signed by product manufacturer.

F. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating through-penetration firestop system complies with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products.


A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FMG according to FMG 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors."

B. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing through-penetration firestop sys-tems similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful performance. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its through-penetration firestop system products to Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer.

C. Installation Responsibility: Assign installation of through-penetration firestop systems and fire-resistive joint systems in Project to a single qualified installer.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain through-penetration firestop systems, for each kind of penetra-tion and construction condition indicated, through one source from a single manufacturer.

E. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that comply with the following requirements and those specified in Part 1 "Performance Re-quirements" Article:

1. Fire stopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL, or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for firestop systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Through-penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per testing stan-dard referenced in "Part 1 Performance Requirements" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:

a. Through-penetration firestop system products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency. Classification markings on penetration firestopping correspond to designations listed by the following:

1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."

2) Intertek ETL SEMKO in its "Directory of Listed Building Products."

3) FM Global in its "Building Materials Approval Guide."


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland



A. Deliver through-penetration firestop system products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture, lot number, shelf life if applicable, qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project, curing time, and mixing in-structions for multicomponent materials.

B. Store and handle materials for through-penetration firestop systems to prevent their deterio-ration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install through-penetration firestop systems when ambi-ent or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by through-penetration firestop system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Ventilate through-penetration firestop systems per manufacturer's written instructions by natural means or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that through-penetration firestop systems are installed according to specified requirements.

B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate through-penetration firestop systems.

C. Notify AC Transit’s inspecting agency at least three days in advance of through-penetration firestop system installations; confirm dates and times on days preceding each series of in-stallations.

D. Do not cover up through-penetration firestop system installations that will become con-cealed behind other construction until each installation has been examined by AC Transit's inspecting agency and building inspector, if required by authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, through-penetration firestop systems that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, those sys-tems indicated in the Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule at the end of Part 3 that are produced by one of the following manufacturers:

1. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc.

2. Grace, W. R. & Co. - Conn.

3. Hilti, Inc.

4. Johns Manville.

5. RectorSeal Corporation (The).


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


6. Specified Technologies Inc.

7. 3M; Fire Protection Products Division.

8. Tremco; Sealant/Weatherproofing Division.

9. USG Corporation.

2.2 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that are compatible with one another; with the substrates forming openings; and with the items, if any, penetrating through-penetration firestop systems, under conditions of service and application, as dem-onstrated by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Accessories: Provide components for each through-penetration firestop system that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Arti-cle. Use only components specified by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestop systems indicated.

2.3 FILL MATERIALS

A. Provide UL Assemblies using the following materials.

1. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete floors and consisting of an outer metallic sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a radial extended flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to con-crete formwork, and a neoprene gasket.

2. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that after cure do not re-emulsify during exposure to moisture.

3. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.

4. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced elas-tomeric sheet bonded to galvanized steel sheet.

5. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no solvents, inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds.

6. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil on one side.

7. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar.

8. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and fire-retardant additives. Fully restrained at cable trays.

9. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


10. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below:

11. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces, and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces requiring a nonslumping, gunnable sealant, unless indicated firestop system limits use to non-sag grade for both opening conditions.

a. Grade for Horizontal Surfaces: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces.

b. Grade for Vertical Surfaces: Nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces.

2.4 MIXING

A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting per-formance of work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing through-penetration firestop systems to comply with firestop system manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements:

1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign ma-terials that could interfere with adhesion of through-penetration firestop systems.

2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces ca-pable of developing optimum bond with through-penetration firestop systems. Re-move loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Con-fine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent through-penetration firestop systems from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning meth-ods used to remove smears from firestop system materials. Remove tape as soon as pos-


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


sible without disturbing firestop system's seal with substrates.

3.3 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. General: Install through-penetration firestop systems to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article and with firestop system manufacturer's written installation instruc-tions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.

B. Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of types required to sup-port fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.

1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible form-ing materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop systems.

C. Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following re-sults:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and pene-trating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items.

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify through-penetration firestop systems with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of edge of the firestop sys-tems so that labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestop systems. Use mechanical fasteners for metal labels. For plastic labels, use self-adhering type with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed and, in combination with label material, will result in partial destruction of label if re-moval is attempted. Include the following information on labels:

1. The words "Warning - Through-Penetration Firestop System - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage."

2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number.

3. Through-penetration firestop system designation of applicable UL numbers

4. Date of installation.

5. Through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's name.

6. Installer's name.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by through-penetration firestop system


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that through-penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Sub-stantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated through-penetration firestop systems immediately and in-stall new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements.

1. PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SCHEDULE

a. Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to system numbers in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under product Category XHEZ.

b. Where Intertek ETL SEMKO-listed systems are indicated, they refer to design numbers in Intertek ETL SEMKO's "Directory of Listed Building Products" under "Firestop Systems."

c. Where FM Global-approved systems are indicated, they refer to design numbers listed in FM Global's "Building Materials Approval Guide" under "Wall and Floor Penetration Fire Stops."

d. Firestopping with No Penetrating Items.

e. Firestopping for Metallic Pipes, Conduit, or Tubing.

f. Firestopping for Nonmetallic Pipe, Conduit, or Tubing.

g. Firestopping for Electrical Cables.

h. Firestopping for Cable Trays with Electric Cables.

i. Firestopping for Insulated Pipes.

j. Firestopping for Miscellaneous Electrical Penetrants.

k. Firestopping for Miscellaneous Mechanical Penetrants.

l. Firestopping for Groupings of Penetrants.

m. Systems requirements:

1) UL-Classified Systems.

2) Intertek ETL SEMKO-Listed System.

3) FM Global-Approved Systems.

4) W-Rating: No leakage of water at completion of water leakage testing.

5) Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland




CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC TRANSIT 07 91 00 - 1/4 OAKLAND

SECTION 07 91 00 PREFORMED JOINT SEALS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Expansion joint systems including the following:

1. Exterior vertical seals.

2. Roof seals.


A. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers : Sealants.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM B 209 - Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.

B. ASTM C 864 - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks, and Spacers - Santoprene Extrusions.

C. ASTM D 2000 - Standard Classification System for Rubber Products- Silicone Extrusions.

D. ASTM E 119 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.

E. UL 2079 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.

B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.

2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.

3. Installation methods.

C. Shop Drawings: Detailed drawings showing layout of assemblies and all special conditions, jointing, and accessories which are not completely shown in the manufacturer's data.

D. Verification Samples: For each finish exposed to view, one representative sample.


A. Protect finished metal surfaces with temporary protective covering.

B. Deliver assemblies to project site in manufacturer's clean, unopened cartons or crates.

C. Store components in original containers in a clean, dry location.

1.6 WARRANTY


CONTRACT# 2010-1090


A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace roof expansion joints and components that leak, deteriorate beyond normal weathering, or otherwise fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

B. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.


A. Installer: Firm with not less than five years experience in installation of expansion joints and acceptable to the manufacturer of the expansion joints.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EXTERIOR ROOF AND WALL EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Michael Rizza Co. Inc., P. O. Box 545 ; Boring, OR 97009; Tel: 503-663-2418; Email: request info ([email protected]); Web: www.michaelrizzacollc.com or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Balco, Inc.

2. C/S Group.

3. MM Systems Corporation.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 209, Alloy 6063-T5, mill finish.

B. Elastomeric seals:

1. Silicone extrusions: ASTM D 2000, 4GE, 709, M, UV stabilized, does not propagate flame. a. Color: As selected by AC Transit Representative from manufacturer’s standard

color selection.

2. Santoprene Extrusions for Gutters: ASTM C 864 modified Grade 221-73, UV stabilized only; will propagate flame, black color.

C. Fasteners:

1. Metal to stone: Stainless steel expansion bolts and expansion shield, self-drilling tubular expansion shield bolt anchor.

2. Metal to Metal: Machine bolts and nuts and self tapping screws.

2.3 ASSEMBLIES

A. Exterior Types:

1. Wall and Soffits: Aluminum retainers. a. Michael Rizza Co. Inc. EV Series (Silicone).

1) Type EV-4, joint dimension 4 inches (102 mm), 1 rib, 8 inches (203 mm) tension back seal and 2-7/8 inches (122 mm) total compression.

2. Roof: Aluminum retainers. a. Michael Rizza Co. Inc. RW Series (Roof to Wall - Silicone).


CONTRACT# 2010-1090


1) Type RW-4, joint dimension 4 inches (102 mm), height dimension 4-5/8 inches (116 mm).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Field measurements: Verify dimensions and conditions in field for work fabricated to fit project conditions.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling and installing roof expansion joints.

1. Anchor roof expansion joints securely in place, with provisions for required movement.

2. Install roof expansion joints true to line and elevation; with limited oil-canning and without warping, jogs in alignment, buckling, or tool marks.

3. Provide for linear thermal expansion of roof expansion joint materials.

4. Provide uniform profile of roof expansion joint throughout its length; do not stretch or squeeze membranes.

5. Provide uniform, neat seams.

6. Install roof expansion joints to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance.

7. Torch cutting of roof expansion joints is not permitted.

B. Directional Changes and Other Expansion-Control Joint Systems: Install factory-fabricated units at directional changes and at transitions between roof expansion joints and exterior expansion-control joint systems to provide continuous, uninterrupted, and watertight joints.

C. Splices: Splice roof expansion joints with materials provided by roof-expansion-joint manufacturer for this purpose.

D. Install waterproof splices and prefabricated end dams to prevent leakage of secondary-seal membrane.

E. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect assemblies from damage until adjacent construction is complete.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Do not remove protective material until finish work in adjacent areas is complete.

B. When protective material is removed, clean exposed metal surfaces to comply with manufacturer's instructions.

END OF SECTION


CONTRACT# 2010-1090




CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 -GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. The work under this section shall include the furnishing of all items shown on the drawings and as specified including, but not limited to, the following.

1. Steel Doors

2. Steel Door Frames

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Steel Doors and Frames in this section must meet all standards as established by the following listing.

1. Door and Hardware Preparation ANSI 115.

2. Life Safety Codes NFPA-101 (Latest edition).

3. Fire Doors and Windows NFPA-80 (Latest edition).

4. Steel Door Institute ANSI/SDI-100 (Latest edition).

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. The steel door and frame supplier will furnish to the AC Transit Representative (4) complete copies of the proposed steel door and frames schedule and/or shop drawings. Using the same reference number for details and openings as those on the contract drawings. After receipt of the approved door schedule the steel door and frame supplier will make any corrections and submit to the architect (6) sets of corrected schedules.

B. Upon request of the AC Transit Representative or for any substitution to this specification, (4) copies of the steel door & frame manufacturers catalog cut sheets are to be submitted to the AC Transit Representative before any material is placed on the job site.


A. Provide Steel Doors and Frames complying with the Steel Door Institute recommended specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames ANSI/SDI 100 (Latest edition).

B. Steel Doors and frames shall be manufactured to high quality standards in manufacturing facilities with annual certified conformance to ISO9001.


A. Doors and frames must be properly marked with door opening mark number to correspond with the schedule.

B. Deliver all steel doors with corrugated edge protection and palletized to provide protection during transit and job storage.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


C. Inspect doors and frames upon delivery for damage. Minor damage is to be repaired, provided the repair is equal to new work and acceptable to the architect.

D. Store doors and frames at the job site under cover. Place units on wood sills on the floor in a manner that will prevent rust and damage. Avoid the use of non-vented plastic or canvas shelters, which could create a humidity chamber. If the wrapper on the door becomes wet, remove the carton immediately. Provide a 1/4 inch space between stacked doors to promote air circulation.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Ceco Door Products – Medallion Series.

B. Other SDI or NAAMM members that conform to the specific requirements of this specification.

2.2 HARDWARE LOCATIONS AND GENERAL REINFORCEMENTS

A. Locate hardware on doors and frames in accordance with the manufacturer’s standard location.

B. When steel frames are used with wood doors, the hardware preparation on the door is governed by the location on the frame. If the doors are factory mortised, the door supplier is responsible for coordinating hardware locations.

C. Hardware reinforcements are to be in accordance with the minimum standard gages as listed in SDI-100.

D. Doors shall be mortised, reinforced and function holes provided at the factory in accordance with the hardware schedule and templates provided by the hardware supplier. Through bolt holes, attachment holes, or drilling and tapping for surface hardware, shall be done by others in the field.

2.3 STEEL DOORS AND TRANSOM INFILL PANEL

A. Material - as indicated on the schedule

1. Sheets are to be made of commercial quality hot dipped zinc coated steel that complies with ASTM A924 A60.

2. Vertical edges will join the face sheets by a continuous weld extending the full height of the door. Welds are to be ground, filled and dress smooth to make them invisible and provide a smooth flush surface.

3. Hinge reinforcement to be not less than 7 gage (3/16") plate 1-1/4" X 9".

4. Reinforce tops and bottoms of all doors with a continuous steel channel not less than 16 gage, extending the full width of the door and welded to both face sheets. Doors with an inverted top channel shall have a steel closure channel screwed or welded in place so the web of the channel is flush with the top of the face sheets of the door.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


Plastic fillers are NOT acceptable.

5. SDI level 3.

6. Door Cores

a. Insulated doors are to be completely filled with fiberglas insulation with an STC rating of 38.

b. Insulated doors to have 20 gage vertical steel stiffeners spanning the full thickness of the interior space between door faces. Stiffeners are to be spaced not more than 6” apart and attached to the face sheets by spot welds spaced not more than 5” on center. Spaces between stiffeners are to be filled with fiberglass insulation (Min. density 0.8#/cubic ft.)

2.4 STEEL FRAMES

A. Materials - as indicated on the schedule.

1. To be hot dipped zinc coated steel that complies with ASTM designations A924 A60.

2. All frames, except slip on drywall, are to be assembled so that the face miter seam is "closed and tight". Weld the face seam and the full web of the frame corner or intersection. Grind and dress the weld area smooth. Apply a zinc rich primer over the grinding area, and finish with 2 coats matching prime paint.

3. SDI level 3.

B. Acceptable Manufactures:

1. Ceco Door Products - SQ, SU, or DQ

2. Curries Company - M or C

3. Security Metal Products, Inc.

4. Steelcraft; a division of Ingersoll-Rand.

5. Any current member of Steel Door Institute will be acceptable. Members of Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association, division of the National Association of Architectural Metal manufacturers, will be acceptable if doors and frames are manufacturer-certified to meet or exceed SDI requirements.

C. Materials for other frames as indicated on the schedule.

1. Cold rolled steel that complies to ASTM A366 or A620.

2. All Frames, except slip on drywall, are to be assembled so that the face miter seam is "closed and tight". Weld the face miter seam. Grind and dress the weld smooth finish with a matching prime paint.

D. Fabrication

1. Provide steel frames for doors, transoms, sidelight, borrowed lite, and other openings to the size and design as shown on the architectural drawings.

2. All finished work shall be strong and rigid, neat in appearance, square, true and free of defects.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


3. Jamb depths, trim, profile and backbends to be as scheduled and shown on approved shop drawings.

4. When shipping limitations so dictate, frames for large openings are to be fabricated in sections for splicing or splining in the field by others.

5. Hardware reinforcements are to be in accordance with the minimum standard gages as listed in SDI-100.

6. Frames shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped at the factory for template mortised hardware only, in accordance with approved hardware schedule and template provided by the hardware contractor. Where surface mounted hardware is to be applied, frames shall have reinforcing plates only; all drilling and tapping shall be done by others.

7. Hinge reinforcements to be 7 gage steel.

E. Anchors

1. Floor anchors to be provided at each jamb.

2. Anchors for stud partitions to be steel of a suitable design, not less than 18 gage thickness,

3. Dust boxes/mortar guards to be no less than 26 gage.

4. All frames that are to be welded are to have a steel spreader temporarily attached to the bottom of both jambs to serve as a brace during shipping and handling. Spreader bars are for bracing only and are not be used to size the frame opening.

2.5 FACTORY FINISH FOR EXTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES:

A. Duplex System For Painting Over Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel Per Specification Section 09 96 00.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. It is the responsibility of the General Contractor to make sure that all dimensions for existing opening or existing frames (strike height, hinge spacing, hinge back set, etc.) given to the steel door and frame manufacturer are accurate.

B. It is the responsibility of the General Contractor to assure that scratches or disfigurements caused in shipping or handling are properly cleaned and touched up with a rust inhibitive primer.

3.2 INSTALLATION:

A. Frames

1. Prior to installation, all frames must be checked for rack, twist and out of square conditions.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


2. Place frames prior to enclosing walls and ceilings. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. Remove shipping bar spreader and insert a wood spreader cut to the opening width, notched to clear the stops.

3. When temperature conditions necessitate an additive to be used in the plaster or mortar to prevent freezing, the contractor installing the frames shall coat the inside of the frames, in the field, with a corrosion inhibiting bituminous material.

4. SDI-105, "Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames" and SDI-110 "Standard Steel Doors and Frames for Modular Masonry Construction" shall indicate the proper installation procedures.

B. Doors

1. Install doors plumb and in true alignment in a prepared opening and fasten them to achieve the maximum operational effectiveness and appearance.

2. Proper door clearance must be maintained in accordance with SDI - 110.

3. Where necessary, only metal hinge shims are acceptable to maintain clearances.

4. "Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware" published by DHI is recommended for further details.

C. Hardware must be applied in accordance with hardware manufacturer's templates and instructions.

3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN

A. Check and re-adjust operating finish hardware items in hollow metal work just prior to final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper condition.

B. Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply to touch-up or compatible air-drying primer.

3.4 SCHEDULES:

A. After installation, copies of the door schedules are to be given to the AC Transit Representative when the building is accepted.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland




CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 -GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Commercial door hardware, except as otherwise noted, for the following: a. Sliding Gate b. Exterior Doors

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

1. ANSI A117.1 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities Standards

2. ANSI A 177.1 Safety Requirements for Three-Roller Printing Ink Mills

3. ANSI A 156.2 Standard for Bored and Preassembled Locks and Latches

4. ANSI A 250.6 Hardware on Standard Steel Doors

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

1. ASTM D 2000 Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications

2. ASTM E 283 Standard Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Cuprous Oxide and Copper Pigments

C. Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association

1. BHMA A 156.1 Butts and Hinges

2. BHMA A 156.2 Bored and Preassembled Locks and Latches

3. BHMA A 156.4 Door Controls-Closers

4. BHMA A 156.5 Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products

5. BHMA A 156.6 Architectural Door Trim

6. BHMA A 156.7 Template Hinge Dimensions

7. BHMA A 156.8 Door Controls-Overhead Stops and Holders

8. BHMA A 156.12 Interconnected Locks and Latches

9. BHMA A 156.13 Mortise Locks and Latches

10. BHMA A 156.16 Auxiliary Hardware

11. BHMA A156.18 Materials and Finishes

12. BHMA A 156.25 Electrified Locking Devices

13. BHMA A 156.26 Continuous Hinges

14. BHMA A 156.28 Master Keying Systems

15. BHMA A 156.30 High Security Cylinders


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


D. Underwriters Laboratory Test Standard (UL)

1. UL 437 Key Locks

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include door hardware schedule. Include cut sheets related to each item on schedule. Include construction and installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Product Certificates:

C. Qualification Data: For Installer.

D. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals. Include final hardware and keying schedule.

E. Other Action Submittals:

1. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing AC Transit Representative's final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique door designations.


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by lock manufac-turer.

1. Installer's responsibilities include supplying and installing door hardware and providing a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant available during the course of the Work to consult with AC Transit Representative about door hardware and keying.

2. Installer shall have warehousing facilities in Project's vicinity.

3. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware from a single manufac-turer, unless otherwise indicated.


A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project site.

B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final door hardware sets, and include basic installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or package.

C. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to AC Transit Representative.

D. Deliver keys and permanent cores to AC Transit Representative by registered mail or over-night package service.

1.6 COORDINATION


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


A. Coordinate layout and installation of recessed pivots and closers with floor construction.

B. Templates: Distribute door hardware templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.

1.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and main-tenance instructions as needed for AC Transit Representative's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.

B. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide six months' full main-tenance by skilled employees of door hardware Installer. Include quarterly preventive main-tenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper door hardware operation. Provide parts and supplies same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original products.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 PROPRIETARY PRODUCTS

A. Use of manufacturer’s proprietary product names to designate materials and finishes is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equiva-lent products of other manufacturers, except where otherwise noted. For substitutions, comply with General Conditions

2.2 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE

A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section and as indicated in the Door Hardware Group Schedule in Part 3 of this specification.

B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:

1. References to BHMA Standards: Provide products complying with these standards and requirements for description, quality, and function.

2.3 HINGES, GENERAL

A. Quantity: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Four Hinges fully mortised:

B. Template Requirements: provide only template-produced units.

C. Finish: Clear coat over 304L stainless steel

D. Hinge Weight: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:

1. Heavy weight Anti-Friction Nylon bearings (AB) –made of resilient engineering plastics that provide a self-lubricant and very strong bearing surface.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


E. Hinge Base Metal: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:

1. Exterior Hinges: Stainless steel, with stainless-steel pin.

F. Fasteners: Comply with the following:

1. Machine Screws: For metal doors and frames. Install into drilled and tapped holes.

2.4 LOCKS AND LATCHES, GENERAL

A. Accessibility Requirements: Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Ameri-cans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." ANSI A117.1. FED-STD-795, "Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards,” and all local Code requirements.

1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf.

B. Latches and Locks: Comply with NFPA 101. Latches shall not require more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks shall not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for opera-tion.

C. Lock Trim:

1. Levers: Stainless Steel.

2. Escutcheons (Roses): Stainless steel

3. Dummy Trim: Match lever lock trim and escutcheons.

D. Lock Throw:

1. Mortise Locks: Minimum ¾” latchbolt throw.

E. Backset: 2 ¾” unless otherwise indicated.

F. Strikes: Manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latchbolt or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, and as follows:

1. Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13.

2.5 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES

A. Lock Functions: Function numbers and descriptions indicated in door hardware sets com-ply with the following:

1. Mortise Locks: BHMA A156.13.

2.6 LOCK CYLINDERS

A. High-Security Lock Cylinders: BHMA A156.30, Grade1.

1. Key Control Level: Category A.

2. Destructive Test Level: Category A.

3. Surreptitious Entry Resistance Level: Category A.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


B. Cylinders: Manufacturer's standard tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver, and complying with the following:

1. Number of Pins: Seven.

2. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and straight- or clover-type cam.

C. Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard; finish face to match lockset; complying with the following:

1. Interchangeable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key; usable with other manufacturers' cylinders.

2. Removable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key; for use only with core manufacturer's cylinder and door hardware.

D. Construction Keying: Comply with the following:

1. Construction Master Keys: Provide cylinders with feature that permits voiding of con-struction keys without cylinder removal. Provide 10 construction master keys.

E. Manufacturer: Same manufacturer as for locks and latches.

2.7 KEYING

A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28, Appen-dix A. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference, and as follows:

1. Great-Grand Master Key System: Cylinders are operated by a change key, a master key, a grand master key, and a great-grand master key.

2. Keyed Alike: Key all cylinders to same change key.

B. Keys: Nickel silver.

1. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and in-clude the following notation: a. Notation: Information to be furnished by AC Transit Representative.

2. Quantity: In addition to one extra key blank for each lock, provide the following per site: a. Cylinder Change Keys: Three. b. Master Keys: Five. c. Grand Master Keys: Five. d. Great-Grand Master Keys: Five.

2.8 OPERATING TRIM

A. Standard: BHMA A156.6.

B. Materials: Fabricate from stainless, unless otherwise indicated.

2.9 CLOSERS

A. Accessibility Requirements: Where handles, pulls, latches, locks, and other operating de-vices are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. Architec-tural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA),


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG),"ANSI A117.1.,FED-STD-795, "Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards," and all local Code Requirements. Closers shall be added to operate with the minimum amount of opening force and still close and latch the door.

B. Door Closers: Comply with NFPA 101. Door closers shall not require more than 8.5 lbf to open door to minimum required width.

C. Size of Units: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's written recommenda-tions for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and antici-pated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force.

D. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1. Listed under Category C in BHMA's "Certified Product Directory." Provide type of arm required for closer to be located on non-public side of door, unless otherwise indicated. Where both sides of door are public, provide type of arm required for closer to be located on the interior side of the door.

1. Closer arms shall be heavy duty, similar to LCN x EDA arm.

2.10 FABRICATION

A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide products that have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location and as otherwise approved by AC Transit Repre-sentative.

1. Manufacturer's identification is permitted on rim of lock cylinders only.

B. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal, fabricated by forming method in-dicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard materials or forming methods if different from specified standard.

C. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates gen-erally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fas-teners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt.

2. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow-metal doors.

2.11 FINISHES

A. For harsh environment.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable varia-tions in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or in-stalled to minimize contrast.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for in-stallation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connec-tions before electrified door hardware installation.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with DHI A115 Series.

1. Surface-Applied Door Hardware: Drill and tap doors and frames according to ANSI A250.6.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated as follows, unless oth-erwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.

1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."

2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames."

B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of sur-face protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 09 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.

1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.

2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.

C. Key Control System: Tag keys as determined by final keying schedule.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.

1. Electric Strikes: Adjust horizontal and vertical alignment of keeper to properly engage lock bolt.

2. Door Closers: Unless otherwise required by authorities having jurisdiction, adjust sweep period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door.


A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.

B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.

C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train AC TRANSIT Representative's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware and door hardware finishes.

3.7 MANUACTURERS

A. Products listed in the Door Hardware Group Schedule are listed to establish function and quality. Equal products of other manufacturer’s will be accepted in accordance with Con-tract requirements for substitutions. The exception of “or equal” provisions is the locks, latches and cylinders which are required to match other locks maintained by AC TRANSIT.

` Manufacturer Acceptable Substitutes Hinges Hager (HAG), Ives,

McKinney (MCK), or equal

Locks, Latches, Cyl-inders

Schlage(SCH) No Equal- to match AC Transit stan-dards.

Thresholds, Seals Pemko or equal Closers LCN or equal Stops, Silencers Glynn Johnson (GJ) or equal Sliding Gate Penkko/ Henderson

(Pem/H) or equal

Gate Hasp Stainless Hinges (S-H) or equal

3.8 DOOR HARDWARE GROUP SCHEDULE Hardware Group No. 01 Quantity

Description Model Number Finish Mfr

3 EA HINGE AB850 4.5 X 4.5 X NRP 32D HAG 1 EA LOCKSET L 9080 X 06 RHODES 630 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 – 3077SCNS w/ 4110-30 Cush Shoe Support 699 LCN


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


1 EA RAIN DRIP 346 C PEM 1 EA DOOR BOTTOM 420_PKL ALUM PEM 1 SET SEALS 290_PK (Jamb), 2891_PK (Head) PEM 1 EA THRESHOLD 172 ALUM PEM 1 EA KICK PLATE K0050 130" X 2" LDW 630 TRI Hardware Group No. 02 Quantity


6 EA HINGE AB850 4.5 X 4.5 X NRP 32D HAG 1 EA LOCKSET L 9080 X 06 RHODES 630 SCH 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4116 – 3077SCNS w/ 4110-30 Cush Shoe Support 689 LCN 1 EA RAIN DRIP 346 C PEM 1 EA DOOR BOTTOM 420_PKL ALUM PEM 1 SET SEALS 290_PK (Jamb), 2891_PK (Head) PEM 1 EA THRESHOLD 172 ALUM PEM 1 EA KICK PLATE K0050 30" X 2" LDW 630 TRI Hardware Group No. 03 Quantity


1 EA TRACK 301 Galv PEM/H4 EA BRACKETS 4A/301 w/ End Clips Galv PEM/H2 EA HANGERS 57A/S Galv PEM/H2 EA GUIDES 126HD/A Galv PEM/H1 EA GROUND STOP 109 Galv PEM/H2 EA PULL 1191G-1, 8” CTC 630 TRI 1 EA HASP AND STAPLE 10940 SS-Mill S-H



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland




CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 08 90 00 - FENCE PANEL & SCREENING SYSTEM AND LOUVERS

PART 1 -GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Fence panel & screening system

2. Horizontal, Drainable-Blade Stationary Louvers.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Louver Terminology: Definitions of terms for metal louvers contained in AMCA 501 apply to this Section unless otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

B. Horizontal Louver: Louver with horizontal blades; i.e., the axes of the blades are horizon-tal.

C. Drainable-Blade Louver: Louver with blades having gutters that collect water and drain it to channels in jambs and mullions, which carry it to bottom of unit and away from opening.


A. Delegated Design: Design Fence Panel & Screening System, including comprehensive engineering analysis by the manufacterer’s qualified professional engineer, using struc-tural and seismic performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Structural Performance: Fence Panel & Screening System to withstand the effects of grav-ity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without permanent deformation of components, or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. Wind pressures shall be considered to act normal to the face of the building.

1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on a uniform pressure of 30 lbf/sq. ft. (1436 Pa), acting inward or outward.

C. Seismic Performance: Fence Panel & Screening System including attachments to other construction, shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7.

1. Component Importance Factor is 1.

D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes, without buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of con-nections, or other detrimental effects.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.

1.4 SUBMITTALS



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


1. For louvers specified to bear AMCA seal, include printed catalog pages showing specified models with appropriate AMCA Certified Ratings Seals.

B. Color samples.

C. Shop Drawings: For Fence Panel & Screening System and accessories. Include plans at ½” = 1’-0” scale, elevations at ½” = 1’-0” scale, sections at 1½” = 1’-0” scale, details at 3”= 1’-0” scale, and attachments to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles, an-gles, and spacing.

1. Show conditions at corners, base, change of direction, top and connection to grating system.

2. Show mullion profiles and locations.

3. Show anchorage at various conditions listed above.

D. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles, angles, and spac-ing.

1. Show weep paths, gaskets, flashing, sealant, and other means of preventing water intrusion.

2. Show mullion profiles and locations.

E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For Fence panel & screening system comply with struc-tural and seismic performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the Contractor’s selected manufacturer’s qualified professional engi-neer responsible for their preparation.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain louvers from single source from a single manufacturer where indicated to be of same type, design, or factory-applied color finish.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain For Fence panel & screening system from single source from a single manufacturer where indicated to be of same type, design, or factory-applied color finish.

C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."

D. SMACNA Standard: Comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) zinc coating, mill phos-phatized.

B. Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions.

1. Use hex-head or Phillips pan-head screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated painted to match finish colors.

2. For fastening galvanized steel, use hot-dip-galvanized steel or 300 series stainless-steel fasteners. Paint to match finish color of louvers.

3. For color-finished louvers, use fasteners with heads that match color of louvers.

C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.


A. Assemble Fence Panel & Screening System and louvers in factory to minimize field splic-ing and assembly. Disassemble units as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Vertical Assemblies: Where height of Fence panel & screening system or louver units ex-ceeds fabrication and handling limitations, fabricate units to permit field-bolted assembly with close-fitting joints in jambs and mullions, reinforced with splice plates.

1. Continuous Vertical Assemblies: Fabricate units without interrupting blade-spacing pattern unless horizontal mullions are indicated.

2. Horizontal Mullions: Provide horizontal mullions at joints where indicated.

C. Maintain equal louver blade spacing, including separation between blades and frames at head and sill, to produce uniform appearance.

D. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allow-ances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints.

1. Frame Type: Channel unless otherwise indicated.

E. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly.

F. Provide vertical mullions of type and at spacings indicated, but not more than recom-mended by manufacturer, or 72 inches (1830 mm) o.c., whichever is less.

1. Fully Recessed Mullions: Where indicated, provide mullions fully recessed behind louver blades. Where length of louver exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, fabricate with close-fitting blade splices designed to permit expansion and contrac-tion.

G. Provide subsills made of same material as louvers or extended sills for recessed louvers.

H. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds, threaded fasteners, or both, as standard with louver manufacturer unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members necessary.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


2.3 FENCE PANEL & SCREENING SYSTEM

A. Fence Panel & Screening System Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements:

1. Manufacturer: Grating Pacific Orsogril®

2. Style: Talia 80

a. Providing a concealment level of 80%, with 45% free air flow.

b. Rigid louvered panels Install horizontal.

c. Weight: 3.0 pounds sq. ft.

3. Cap Rail: manufacturer’s standard plate band.

a. Oversized flat bar welded to end of panel ¼” thick x 2’ Wide.

4. Louver thickness 1/16"

B. Finish:

1. "Powder-Powder" finish: Powder coat primer and powder coat finish.

2. Treat fabricated panels by abrasive blasting to remove mill scale and provide a clean, uniform surface.

3. A Primer: corrosion resistant epoxy prime powder coat is then applied and cured by oven-baking.

4. The finish coating: 10 mils overall thickness TGIC polyester powder finish coat.

a. Ultraviolet protection.

b. Smooth surface appearance.

2.4 HORIZONTAL, DRAINABLE-BLADE STATIONARY LOUVERS.


1. Airolite Company, LLC (The). Model K6774

2. Greenheck Fan Corporation. Model ESD-403

3. Ruskin Company; Tomkins PLC. Model ELF445DX

B. Louver Depth: 4 inches.

C. Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.080 inch.

D. Mullion Type: Hidden

E. Louver Performance Ratings:

F. Free Area: Not less than 8.0 sq. ft. (0.74 sq. m) for 48-inch wide by 48-inch- high louver.

G. AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


H. Louver finish:

1. High-Performance Organic Finish: 4-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

2. Color and Gloss: As selected by the AC Transit Representative from manufacturer's full range.

I. Blank-Off Panels

1. Uninsulated, Blank-Off Panels: Metal sheet attached to back of louver.

a. Aluminum sheet for aluminum louvers, not less than 0.050-inch nominal thick-ness.

b. Panel Finish: Same type of finish applied to louvers, but black color.

c. Attach blank-off panels with sheet metal screws.

J. Provide screen at each exterior louver.

1. Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face.

2. Screening Type: Insect screening. Aluminum, 18-by-16 mesh, 0.012-inch wire.

3. Secure screen frames to louver frames with machine screws with heads finished to match louver, spaced a maximum of 6 inches from each corner and at 12 inches o.c.

4. Louver Screen Frames: Fabricate with mitered corners to louver sizes indicated.

5. Metal: Same kind and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens are at-tached.

6. Finish: Same finish as louver frames to which louver screens are attached.

7. Type: Rewirable frames with a driven spline or insert.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installa-tion of anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordi-nate delivery of such items to Project site.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Locate and place louvers level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.

C. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured.

D. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated.

E. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding. Restore finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the factory, make required alterations, and refinish entire unit or provide new units.

F. Protect unpainted galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals from corrosion and galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint or by separating surfaces with waterproof gaskets or nonmetallic flashing.

G. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as louver installation pro-gresses, where weathertight louver joints are required.


A. Clean exposed surfaces of louvers and vents that are not protected by temporary cover-ing, to remove fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil accumulate during construction period.

B. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not harmful to finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry.

C. Restore louvers and vents damaged during installation and construction so no evidence remains of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by AC Transit Representative, remove damaged units and replace with new units.

1. Touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that matches color and gloss of, and is compatible with, factory-applied finish coating.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 09 24 00 - PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.1 SUMMARY


1. Exterior portland cement plasterwork (stucco) on metal lath.

1.1 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and installation of control and expansion joints including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other work.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of factory-prepared finish coat indicated.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of factory-prepared colored textured finish coat in-dicated; 12 by 12 inches (305 by 305 mm), and prepared on rigid backing.


A. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide portland cement plaster assemblies identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency.

B. Sound-Transmission Characteristics: Where indicated, provide portland cement plaster as-semblies identical to those of assemblies tested for STC ratings per ASTM E 90 and classi-fied according to ASTM E 413 by a qualified testing agency.


A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes.


A. Comply with ASTM C 926 requirements.

B. Exterior Plasterwork:

1. Apply and cure plaster to prevent plaster drying out during curing period. Use proce-dures required by climatic conditions, including moist curing, providing coverings, and


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


providing barriers to deflect sunlight and wind.

2. Apply plaster when ambient temperature is greater than 40 deg F (4.4 deg C).

3. Protect plaster coats from freezing for not less than 48 hours after set of plaster coat has occurred.

C. Factory-Prepared Finishes: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for envi-ronmental conditions for applying finishes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL LATH

A. Expanded-Metal Lath: ASTM C 847 with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galva-nized zinc coating.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers of-fering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. CEMCO.

b. Clark Western Building Systems.

c. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries company.

2. Diamond-Mesh Lath: Self-furring, 3.4 lb/sq. yd. (1.8 kg/sq. m).

B. Paper Backing: FS UU-B-790, Type I, Grade B, Style 1a vapor-retardant paper.

1. Provide paper-backed lath unless otherwise indicated in locations indicated on Draw-ings.

2.1 ACCESSORIES

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1063 and coordinate depth of trim and accessories with thicknesses and number of plaster coats required.

B. Metal Accessories:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:

a. Alabama Metal Industries Corporation; a Gibraltar Industries company.

b. CEMCO.

c. Clark Western Building Systems.

2. Foundation Weep Screed: Fabricated from hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) zinc coating.

3. Cornerite: Fabricated from metal lath with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating.

4. External-Corner Reinforcement: Fabricated from metal lath with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating.

5. Cornerbeads: Fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel.

a. Small nose cornerbead with expanded flanges; use unless otherwise indicated.

b. Small nose cornerbead with perforated flanges; use on curved corners.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


c. Small nose cornerbead with expanded flanges reinforced by perforated stiffening rib; use on columns and.

6. Casing Beads: Fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; square-edged style; with expanded flanges.

7. Control Joints: Fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; one-piece-type, folded pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with perforated flanges and removable protective tape on plaster face of control joint.

8. Expansion Joints: Fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; folded pair of un-perforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with expanded flanges.

9. Two-Piece Expansion Joints: Fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; formed to produce slip-joint and square-edged reveal that is adjustable from 1/4 to 5/8 inch (6.34 to 16 mm) wide; with perforated flanges.


A. Water for Mixing: Potable and free of substances capable of affecting plaster set or of damaging plaster, lath, or accessories.

B. Fiber for Base Coat: Alkaline-resistant glass or polypropylene fibers, 1/2 inch (13 mm) long, free of contaminants, manufactured for use in portland cement plaster.

C. Bonding Compound: ASTM C 932.

D. Steel Drill Screws: For metal-to-metal fastening, ASTM C 1002 or ASTM C 954, as re-quired by thickness of metal being fastened; with pan head that is suitable for application; in lengths required to achieve penetration through joined materials of no fewer than three ex-posed threads.

E. Fasteners for Attaching Metal Lath to Substrates: Complying with ASTM C 1063.

F. Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, not less than 0.0475-inch (1.21-mm) diameter, unless otherwise indicated.

2.1 PLASTER MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II.

1. Color for Finish Coats: Gray.

B. Colorants for Job-Mixed Finish Coats: Colorfast mineral pigments that produce finish plas-ter color.

C. Lime: ASTM C 206, Type S; or ASTM C 207, Type S.

D. Sand Aggregate: ASTM C 897.

1. Color for Job-Mixed Finish Coats: White.

E. Ready-Mixed Finish-Coat Plaster: Mill-mixed portland cement, aggregates, coloring agents, and proprietary ingredients.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Bonsal American, an Oldcastle Company; Marblesil Stucco Mix.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


b. California Stucco Products Corp.; Conventional Portland Cement Stucco.

c. El Rey Stucco Company, Inc., a brand of ParexLaHabra, Inc.; Premium Stucco Finish.

d. LaHabra, a brand of ParexLaHabra, Inc.; Exterior Stucco Color Coat.

e. QUIKCRETE; QUIKCRETE Finish Coat Stucco, No. 1201.

f. SonoWall, BASF Wall Systems, Inc.; Thoro Stucco.

g. USG Corporation; Oriental Exterior Finish Stucco.

2. Color: Match existing cement plaster.

2.1 PLASTER MIXES

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926 for applications indicated.

1. Fiber Content: Add fiber to base-coat mixes after ingredients have mixed at least two minutes. Comply with fiber manufacturer's written instructions for fiber quantities in mixes, but do not exceed 1 lb of fiber/cu. yd. (0.6 kg of fiber/cu. m) of cementitious materials.

B. Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for three-coat plaster-work as follows:

1. Portland Cement Mixes:

a. Scratch Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious mate-rial.

b. Brown Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime. Use 3 to 5 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material, but not less than volume of aggregate used in scratch coat.

C. Base-Coat Mixes: Single base coats for two-coat plasterwork as follows:

1. Portland Cement Mix: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material.

D. Job-Mixed Finish-Coat Mixes:

1. Portland Cement Mix: For cementitious materials, mix 1 part portland cement and 1-1/2 to 2 parts lime. Use 1-1/2 to 3 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect adjacent work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration, and other harmful ef-fects caused by plastering.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


B. Prepare solid substrates for plaster that are smooth or that do not have the suction capabil-ity required to bond with plaster according to ASTM C 926.


A. Acoustical Sealant: Where required, seal joints between edges of plasterwork and abutting construction with acoustical sealant.

3.1 INSTALLING METAL LATH

A. Expanded-Metal Lath: Install according to ASTM C 1063.

1. Partition Framing and Vertical Furring: Install flat diamond-mesh lath.

2. On Solid Surfaces, Not Otherwise Furred: Install self-furring, diamond-mesh lath.

3.1 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES

A. Install according to ASTM C 1063 and at locations indicated on Drawings.

B. Reinforcement for External Corners:

1. Install cornerbead at interior and exterior locations.

C. Control Joints: Install control joints [at locations indicated on Drawings.] [in specific loca-tions approved by Architect for visual effect as follows:]

1. As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) of the following maximum sizes:

a. Vertical Surfaces: 144 sq. ft. (13.4 sq. m).

b. Horizontal and other Nonvertical Surfaces: 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m).

2. At distances between control joints of not greater than 18 feet (5.5 m) o.c.

3. As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) with length-to-width ratios of not greater than 2-1/2:1.

4. Where control joints occur in surface of construction directly behind plaster.

5. Where plasterwork areas change dimensions, to delineate rectangular-shaped areas (panels) and to relieve the stress that occurs at the corner formed by the dimension change.

3.1 PLASTER APPLICATION

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926.

1. Do not deviate more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6.4 mm in 3 m) from a true plane in finished plaster surfaces, as measured by a 10-foot (3-m) straightedge placed on surface.

2. Finish plaster flush with metal frames and other built-in metal items or accessories that act as a plaster ground unless otherwise indicated. Where casing bead does not terminate plaster at metal frame, cut base coat free from metal frame before plaster sets and groove finish coat at junctures with metal.

3. Retain subparagraph below if plaster surfaces will receive field-applied finishes.

4. Provide plaster surfaces that are ready to receive field-applied finishes indicated.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


B. Walls; Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for three-coat plasterwork; 3/4-inch (19-mm) thickness.

1. Portland cement mixes.

C. Plaster Finish Coats: Apply to provide finish to match existing.

3.1 PLASTER REPAIRS

A. Repair or replace work to eliminate cracks, dents, blisters, buckles, crazing and check cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to sub-strate has failed.

3.1 PROTECTION

A. Remove temporary protection and enclosure of other work. Promptly remove plaster from door frames, windows, and other surfaces not indicated to be plastered. Repair floors, walls, and other surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during plastering.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 -GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Interior Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Wallboard.

2. Sound Isolation Clips.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Gypsum Board Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 for definitions of terms for gypsum board assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards.

1.3 SUBMITTALS



A. Sound Isolation Clips

1. Sound Transmission Loss Test Report per ASTM E90-99 documenting a minimum STC 57 wall assembly for a 2 in. x 4 in. wood stud wall with one layer of 5/8 in. gyp-sum board on each side. Also submit same report for a 2 in. x 4 in. wall assembly with two layers of 5/8 in. gypsum board on each side achieving a minimum STC 64.

2. Sound test reports must be from an independent laboratory accredited by the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP).

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with fire-resistance rat-ings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated ac-cording to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to au-thorities having jurisdiction.

1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory."

C. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with STC ratings, pro-vide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing agency.

1. STC-Rated Assemblies: Indicated by design designations from GA- 600, "Fire Resis-tance Design Manual."


A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and iden-tification of manufacturer or supplier.

B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


causes. Stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manu-facturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 INTERIOR ABUSE-RESISTANT GYPSUM WALLBOARD

A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and correspond with support system indicated.

B. Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1629/C 1629M, Level 3.

1. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X.

2. Long Edges: Tapered.

3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10.

2.2 SOUND ISOLATION CLIPS

A. Sound isolation clips specified shall be designed and manufactured by Kinetics Noise Con-trol, Dublin, Ohio. Product shall be Model Iso-Max Sound Isolation Clips.

1. Use: Interior wall support for acoustical panels.

2. Vertical Load capacity. Clips shall have sufficient capacity to support wall or ceiling weights as constructed. In a vertical load test comparible to a ceiling installation, the clip shall have a minimum design load capacity of 36 lbs. using 25 gauge furring channel. The minimum design load capacity when using 22 gauge furring channel shall be 48 lbs. Design Load capacity shall be based on a safety factor where the load to failure, defined as pullout of the channel from the clip, is a minimum 2.5 times the allowable maximum Design Load. Anchors for attachment of the clips to the sub-structure shall be selected to support wall and/or ceiling weights at each clip.

3. The isolation clips shall consist of a rubber element into which a standard galvanized steel furring channel, 7/8 in. x minimum 25 gauge, is captured. The channel legs snap fit into the rubber element without any metal-to-metal or other rigid contact with building elements.

4. The isolation clip is attached to the wall/ceiling framing or other structural substrate through galvanized steel brackets on each side of the rubber isolation element. The brackets shall be of sufficient strength to carry the wall or ceiling weight without bend-ing or failure.

2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc.

2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated.

b. Bullnose Bead: Use where indicated


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


c. LC-Bead (J-Bead): Use at exposed panel edges.

d. L-Bead: Use where indicated.

e. U-Bead: Use where indicated.

f. Expansion (Control) Joint: Use where indicated.

2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: 10-by-10 glass mesh.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is com-patible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface ar-eas, use setting-type taping compound.

2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

2.5 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT

A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorpo-rated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints or equal:

a. Ohio Sealants, Inc.; Pro-Series SC-170 Rubber Base Sound Sealant.

b. Pecora Corp.; BA-98.

c. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Acoustical Sealant.

B. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstain-ing, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce airborne sound transmission.

2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.

PART 3 -EXECUTION


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.


3.2 PREPARATION

3.3 INSTALLATION OF SOUND ISOLATION CLIPS

A. Spacing and location of sound isolation clips shall be determined by the manufacturer based on wall or ceiling type. Installation drawing details shall be provided by the manufac-turer to assure optimum sound control and structural integrity of the system.

1. Gypsum board shall be attached to resiliently supported furring channel to sound iso-late the material from the wall or ceiling structure.

3.4 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: ASTM C 840 and GA-216.

B. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.

C. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place ta-pered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of parti-tions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

E. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

F. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts.

G. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.

H. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.

1. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.

2. Where partitions intersect open concrete coffers, concrete joists, and other structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by coffers, joists, and other structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8- inch- wide joints to install sealant.

I. Isolate perimeter of non-load-bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments, ex-cept floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with U-bead edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


J. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control and expansion joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. In-stall acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through gypsum board assemblies, in-cluding sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.

K. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's written recommendations. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches o.c. for vertical applications.

L. Space fasteners in panels that are tile substrates a maximum of 8 inches o.c.

3.5 PANEL APPLICATION METHODS

A. Single-Layer Application:

1. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless other-wise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.

a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of board.

b. At high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance rated assembly.

B. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.

3.6 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fas-teners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instruc-tions.

B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations ap-proved by Owner for visual effect.

3.7 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board sur-faces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not in-tended for tape.

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to ASTM C 840, for locations indicated:

1. Level 1: Embed tape at joints in ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where in-dicated, unless a higher level of finish is required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies and sound-rated assemblies.

2. Level 2: Embed tape and apply separate first coat of joint compound to tape, fasten-ers, and trim flanges where panels are substrate for acoustical insulation.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


END OF SECTION


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 09 65 19 RESILIENT BASE

PART 1 -GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Resilient base.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Maintenance data.


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 RESILIENT BASE

A. Resilient Base:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. b. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc. c. Endura Rubber Flooring; Division of Burke Industries, Inc. d. Flexco, Inc. e. Johnsonite. f. Mondo Rubber International, Inc. g. Nora Rubber Flooring; Freudenberg Building Systems, Inc. h. Roppe Corporation, USA.

B. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861.

1. Material Requirement: Type TV (vinyl, thermoplastic).

2. Style: Cove (base with toe).

C. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch.

D. Height: 6 inches.

E. Lengths: Cut lengths, 48 inches long.

F. Outside Corners: Preformed.

G. Inside Corners: Preformed.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


H. Finish: As selected by AC Transit from manufacturer's full range.

I. Colors and Patterns: As selected by AC Transit from full range of industry colors.

2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated.

1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): a. Cove Base Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.

2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhe-sives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recom-mended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Pro-ceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching com-pound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

D. Do not install base strips until they are same temperature as space where they are to be in-stalled.

1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be in-stalled at least 48 hours in advance of installation.

3.2 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.

B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.

D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in con-tinuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.

F. On irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's rec-ommended adhesive filler material.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland




CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 09 91 23 PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed interior and exterior items and surfaces.

B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where these Specifications indicate that the surface or ma-terial is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If an item or a surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If a color of finish is not indicated, AC Transit Project Manager will select from standard colors and finishes available.

1. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (includ-ing color coding), and surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment that do not have a factory-applied final finish. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Elec-trical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work:

a. Paint the following work where exposed to view:

1) Equipment, including panelboards and switch gear.

2) Uninsulated metal piping.

3) Uninsulated plastic piping.

4) Pipe hangers and supports.

5) Metal conduit.

6) Plastic conduit.

7) Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.

8) Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material.

9) Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces.

10) Miscellaneous steel plate.

C. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels.

1. Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components:

a. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment.

b. Light fixtures.

2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces:


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


a. Furred areas.

b. Ceiling plenums.

3. Finished metal surfaces include the following:

a. Anodized aluminum.

b. Stainless steel.

c. Chromium plate.

d. Bronze and brass.

4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following:

a. Valve and damper operators.

b. Linkages.

c. Sensing devices.

d. Motor and fan shafts.

5. Labels: Do not paint over UL, FMG, or other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each paint system indicated. Include block fillers and primers.

1. Interior Paints: Manufacturers’ product data and material safety data sheets (MSDS) for paints and coatings used on the interior of the building including printed statement of VOC content in g/L.

B. Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings Provide products that comply with the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24) and the following chemical restrictions; these requirements do not apply to primers or finishes that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop:

1. Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC not more than 50 g/L.

2. Non-Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC not more than 150 g/L.

3. Anti-Corrosive Coatings: VOC not more than 250 g/L.

4. Varnishes and Sanding Sealers: VOC not more than 350 g/L.

5. Stains: VOC not more than 250 g/L.

6. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by weight total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings).

7. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following:

a. Acrolein.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


b. Acrylonitrile.

c. Antimony.

d. Benzene.

e. Butyl benzyl phthalate.

f. Cadmium.

g. Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate.

h. Di-n-butyl phthalate.

i. Di-n-octyl phthalate.

j. 1,2-dichlorobenzene.

k. Diethyl phthalate.

l. Dimethyl phthalate.

m. Ethylbenzene.

n. Formaldehyde.

o. Hexavalent chromium.

p. Isophorone.

q. Lead.

r. Mercury.

s. Methyl ethyl ketone.

t. Methyl isobutyl ketone.

u. Methylene chloride.

v. Naphthalene.

w. Toluene (methylbenzene).

x. 1,1,1-trichloroethane.

y. Vinyl chloride.

C. Samples for Verification: For each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative Samples of the actual substrate.

1. Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit un-til required sheen, color, and texture are achieved.

2. Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each Sample. Label each Sample for location and application.


A. Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers and primers for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


C. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" ap-plicable to substrates indicated.


A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and con-tainers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information:

1. Product name or title of material.

2. Product description (generic classification or binder type).

3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.

4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.

5. Thinning instructions.

6. Application instructions.

7. Color name and number.

8. VOC content.

B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a mini-mum ambient temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily.


A. Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 50 and 90 deg F.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incor-porated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2 articles.

B. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manu-facturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:

1. Dunn Edwards

2. Sherwin-Williams Co. (Sherwin-Williams).

3. Or approved substitute

2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish-coat materials that are compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating types specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for applica-tion indicated. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable.

1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manu-facturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions.

C. Colors: Refer to Contract Drawings.

D. Interior paint products.

1. PRIMERS/SEALERS

a. Primer Sealer, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC: MPI #149.

b. Primer, Bonding, Water Based: MPI #17.

2. METAL PRIMERS

a. Primer, Rust-Inhibitive, Water Based: MPI #107.

b. Primer, Galvanized, Water Based: MPI #134.

c. Primer, Vinyl Wash: MPI #80.

d. Primer, Quick Dry, for Aluminum: MPI #95.

3. WATER-BASED PAINTS

a. Latex, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC, Flat (Gloss Level 1): MPI #143.

b. Latex, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC, (Gloss Level 3): MPI #145.

c. Latex, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #147.

4. ALUMINUM PAINT

a. Aluminum Paint: MPI #1.

5. FLOOR COATINGS

a. Sealer, Water Based, for Concrete Floors: MPI #99.

6. BLOCK FILLERS

a. Block Filler, Latex, Interior/Exterior: MPI #4.

E. Exterior paint products.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


1. PRIMERS/SEALERS

a. Primer, Bonding, Water Based: MPI #17.

2. METAL PRIMERS

a. Primer, Galvanized, Water Based: MPI #134.

b. Primer, Galvanized: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer.

c. Primer, Quick Dry, for Aluminum: MPI #95.

3. WATER-BASED PAINTS

a. Light Industrial Coating, Exterior, Water Based (Gloss Level 3): MPI #161.

b. Light Industrial Coating, Exterior, Water Based, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #163.

c. Light Industrial Coating, Exterior, Water Based, Gloss (Gloss Level 6): MPI #164.

4. ALUMINUM PAINT

a. Aluminum Paint: MPI #1.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with re-quirements for paint application. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P4.

1. Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been cor-rected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry.

2. Start of painting will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and condi-tions within a particular area.

B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.

1. Notify AC Transit Project Manager about anticipated problems when using the materi-als specified over substrates primed by others.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is imprac-tical or impossible because of size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean substrates of sub-stances that could impair bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning.

1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.

a. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, ef-florescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instruc-tions.

b. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer but not less than the following:

1) SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning."

2) SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

3) SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning."

4) SSPC-SP 11, "Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal."

c. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.

d. Galvanized-metal substrates should not be chromate passivated if primers are field applied. If galvanized metal is chromate passivated, consult manufacturers for appropriate surface preparation and primers.

e. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.

f. Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation.

g. Plastic Trim Fabrication Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign mate-rial that might impair bond of paints to substrates.

2. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime.

3. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete unit masonry, cement plaster, and mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflores-cence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to re-move glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechani-cal methods of surface preparation.

a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer.

b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


4. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with SSPC's recommendations.

a. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system manufacturer and according to SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3.

b. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming.

c. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with same primer as the shop coat.

C. Material Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of for-eign materials and residue.

2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as re-quired during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using.

3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended lim-its.

D. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats of same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.

1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the paint schedules.

2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.

3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.

4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fix-tures, grilles, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, and similar compo-nents are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain system in-tegrity and provide desired protection.

5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers or grilles.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


7. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.

B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subse-quent surface deterioration.

1. The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of applica-tion method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recom-mended by manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications.

2. Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted.

3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply addi-tional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special at-tention to ensure that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.

4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and until application of another coat of paint does not cause undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.

C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applica-tors according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brush of appro-priate size for surface or item being painted.

2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet-back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required.

3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required.

D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recom-mended spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness indicated. Provide total dry film thick-ness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer.

E. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled.

F. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by manu-facturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.

G. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable.

H. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imper-


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


fections.

I. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, re-finish, or repaint work not complying with requirements.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other dis-carded paint materials from Project site.

1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spat-tered paint by washing and scraping without scratching or damaging adjacent finished surfaces.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by AC Transit Project Manager.

B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting op-erations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work.

1. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1.

3.6 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE

A. Provide the following finish systems over interior surfaces:

1. Two finish coats over a primer.

3.7 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces:

1. Latex System:

a. Prime Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat.

b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior flat (Gloss Level 1), MPI #10.

B. Concrete Substrates, Traffic Surfaces:

1. Water-Based Clear Sealer System:

a. Prime Coat: Sealer, water based, for concrete floors, MPI #99.

b. Intermediate Coat: Sealer, water based, for concrete floors, MPI #99.

c. Topcoat: Sealer, water based, for concrete floors, MPI #99.

2. Latex System:

a. Prime Coat: Block filler, latex, interior/exterior, MPI #4.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland




C. Steel Substrates if not specified elsewhere:

1. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System:

a. Prime Coat: Shop primer specified in Division 05 Section where substrate is specified.

b. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, matching top-coat.

c. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based (Gloss Level 3), MPI #161.

D. Aluminum Substrates:

1. Latex System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, quick dry, for aluminum, MPI #95.



E. Plastic Trim Fabrication Substrates:

1. Latex System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, bonding, water based, MPI #17.



F. Portland Cement Plaster Substrates:

1. Latex System:

a. Prime Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat.





CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland




CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 09 96 00 DUPLEX SYSTEM FOR PAINTING OVER HOT-DIP GALVANIZED STEEL

PART 1 -GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and application of Duplex System For Painting Over Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. Paint products. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

2. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated.

3. Samples for Verification: For each type of coating system and in each color and gloss of topcoat indicated.

4. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square.

5. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.

6. Label each coat of each Sample.

7. Label each Sample for location and application area.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Comply with the requirements of the reference standards and publications noted herein, except where more stringent requirements are listed herein or otherwise required by the Contract Documents. The reference standards listed below form part of this Specification to the extent referenced. Where standards and publications are identified, they shall be the most current version, unless otherwise noted.

1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

a. A123 - Zinc (Hot Dipped Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products

b. A153 - Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware

2. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC)

a. Steel Structures Painting Manual, Volumes 1 and 2

1.4 QUALITY CONTROL AND ASSURANCE

A. Paint testing: Provide certification that factory applied paint complies with specified requirements. Submit copy to AC Transit Representative prior to steel erection.


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg f.

B. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


C. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.

1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

B. Coatings: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 DUPLEX SYSTEM FOR PAINTING OVER HOT-DIP GALVANIZED STEEL



2. As accepted by AC Transit Representative.








1. Site repair of galvanized components shall be done only with permission and inspection from AC Transit Representative.


F. Duplex system for painting over hot-dip galvanized steel:

1. Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-Paint 29 and compatible with topcoat. (USE AT ALL FERROUS METALS )

a. Use primer with a VOC content of 420 g/L (3.5 lb/gal.) or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

1) Benjamin Moore & Co.; Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer CM18/19.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


2) International Coatings Limited; Interzinc 315 Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer.

3) PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.; Aquapon Zinc-Rich Primer 97-670.

4) Tnemec Company, Inc.; Tneme-Zinc 90-97.

5) Carboline Company; Carbozinc 621.

6) ICI Devoe Coatings; Catha-Coat 313.

7) Sherwin-Williams Company (The); Corothane I GalvaPac Zinc Primer.

2. Top coat: apply two coats over primer.

a. Aliphatic Acrylic Polyurethane meeting the accelerated weathering requirements of SSPC Paint Standard 36.

b. Tnemec Company, Inc ENDURA-SHIELD ® SERIES 73 or accepted equal. Verify compatibility of primer with topcoat per manufacturer’s recommendations.



5. Finish color: As indicated on finish schedule or where color not indicated as selected by AC Transit Representative.

G. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications for items to be embedded in concrete or masonry and items to receive sprayed-on fireproofing, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79.

1. Use primer with a VOC content of 420 g/L (3.5 lb/gal.) or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

C. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "mpi architectural painting specification manual" applicable to substrates indicated.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

C. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection.

D. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

E. Coordination of shop-applied prime coats with high-performance coatings is critical.

F. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce coating systems indicated.

G. Steel substrates: remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer but not less than the following:

H. Sspc-sp 11, "power tool cleaning to bare metal."

I. Galvanized-metal substrates: remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied coatings.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply high-performance coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "mpi architectural painting specification manual."

B. If project requires restricted application method (e.g., using only spray or rollers), revise first subparagraph below accordingly.

C. Use applicators and techniques suited for coating and substrate indicated.

D. Coat surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, coat surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

E. Coat back sides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.

F. Do not apply coatings over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

G. If undercoats or other conditions show through final coat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform coating finish, color, and appearance.

H. Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Produce sharp glass lines and color breaks.


A. Dry film thickness testing: owner will engage the services of a qualified testing and


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


inspecting agency to inspect and test coatings for dry film thickness.

B. Contractor shall touch up and restore coated surfaces damaged by testing.

C. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied coating does not comply with coating manufacturer's written recommendations, contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with coating manufacturer's written recommendations.


A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

C. After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

D. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating operation. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

E. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced coated surfaces.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland




CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 10 44 16 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

PART 1 -GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire ex-tinguishers.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rating and classification, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire extin-guisher and mounting brackets.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manu-als.

C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Port-able Fire Extinguishers."

B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FMG.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire protection cabinets to ensure fit and function.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire extinguisher as required by the building code for the location and purpose


a. Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International Ltd.

b. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group.

c. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.

2. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard.

3. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appen-


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


dix B and bar coding for documenting fire extinguisher location, inspections, mainte-nance, and recharging.

B. Regular Dry-Chemical Type: UL-rated (ABC- 20 lb nominal capacity, with sodium bicar-bonate-based dry chemical in manufacturer's standard enameled container.

2.2 MOUNTING BRACKETS

A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or black baked-enamel finish.


a. Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International Ltd.

b. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group.

c. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.

d. Potter Roemer LLC.

B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.

1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to mounting surface.

a. Orientation: Vertical.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.

1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in com-pliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Mounting Brackets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher.

B. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland

21 13 13- 1/8

SECTION 21 13 13 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Modification and augmentation of existing wet-pipe sprinkler system piping for General Of-fice Building Penthouse and Parking level P-6.

B. Section Includes:

1. Pipes, fittings, and specialties.

2. Sprinklers.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Some fire-protection products for high-pressure sprinkler piping are only rated for 250 psig (1725 kPa). If 300-psig (2070-kPa) piping is required, verify product pressure ratings.

B. Standard-Pressure Sprinkler Piping: Wet-pipe sprinkler system piping designed to operate at working pressure of 175 psig (1200 kPa) maximum.

1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS

A. Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing water and that is connected to water supply through alarm valve. Water discharges immediately from sprinklers when they are opened. Sprinklers open when heat melts fusible link or de-stroys frangible device.


A. Standard-Pressure Piping System Component: Listed for 175-psig (1200-kPa) minimum working pressure.

B. Delegated Design: Design sprinkler system(s), including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria per NFPA 13, 2007 California Building Code, 2007 California Fire Code with all current amenments.

C. Sprinkler system design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Margin of Safety for Available Water Flow and Pressure: 10 percent, including losses through water-service piping, valves, and backflow preventers.

2. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications per NFPA 13.

D. Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design per NFPA 13.

E. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler per NFPA 13.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland

21 13 13- 2/8

F. Seismic Performance: Sprinkler piping shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to NFPA 13 and ASCE/SEI 7. See structural drawing sheets for addi-tional parameters.

1.06 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating char-acteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For wet-pipe sprinkler systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, de-tails, and attachments to other work.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For sprinkler systems indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

D. Coordination Drawings: Sprinkler systems, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Domestic water piping.

2. Compressed air piping.

3. HVAC hydronic piping.

4. Items penetrating finished ceiling include the following: a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets.

E. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic calculations if ap-plicable.

F. Welding certificates.

G. Fire-hydrant flow test report.

H. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13. Include "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping."

I. Field quality-control reports.

J. Operation and Maintenance Data: For sprinkler specialties to include in emergency, opera-tion, and maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications:

1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing sprinkler systems and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test.

a. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and field test reports by a qualified professional engineer.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland

21 13 13- 3/8

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

D. NFPA Standards: Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing shall comply with the following:

1. NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems."


A. Interruption of Existing Sprinkler Service: Do not interrupt sprinkler service to facilities oc-cupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only af-ter arranging to provide temporary sprinkler service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify in writing the Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interrup-tion of sprinkler service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of sprinkler service without Owner's written permis-sion.

1.09 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that penetrates ceil-ings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies.

1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall-mounted, steel cabinet with hinged cover, and with space for minimum of six spare sprinklers plus sprinkler wrench. Include number of sprinklers required by NFPA 13 and sprinkler wrench. Include separate cabinet with sprinklers and wrench for each type of sprinkler used on Project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Standard Weight, Schedule 40 Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B with threaded fittings, or welded fittings, or groove fittings per NFPA 13.

B. Black-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard-weight, seamless steel pipe with threaded ends.

C. Steel Couplings: ASTM A 865, threaded.

D. Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern.

E. Malleable- or Ductile-Iron Unions: UL 860.

F. Cast-Iron Flanges: ASME 16.1, Class 125.

G. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, Class 150.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland

21 13 13- 4/8

H. Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M and ASME B16.9.

I. Grooved-Joint, Steel-Pipe Appurtenances:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Anvil International, Inc. b. Corcoran Piping System Co. c. National Fittings, Inc. d. Shurjoint Piping Products. e. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. f. Victaulic Company. g. Or approved equal.

2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum.

3.

4. Grooved-End Fittings for Steel Piping: ASTM A 47/A 47M, malleable-iron casting or ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting; with dimensions matching steel pipe.

J. AWWA C606 and UL 213 cover couplings in subparagraph below in NPS 3/4 to at least NPS 12 (DN 20 to at least DN 300).

1. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping: AWWA C606 and UL 213, rigid pat-tern, unless otherwise indicated, for steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, EPDM-rubber gasket, and bolts and nuts.

2.02 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS

A. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indi-cated.

B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding materials appropri-ate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

C. Grooved Joints.

D. Threaded Joints.

2.03 SPRINKLER SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS

A. Branch Outlet Fittings:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Anvil International, Inc. b. National Fittings, Inc. c. Shurjoint Piping Products. d. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. e. Victaulic Company. f. Or approved equal.

2. Standard: UL 213.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland

21 13 13- 5/8


4. Body Material: Ductile-iron housing with EPDM seals and bolts and nuts.

5. Type: Mechanical-T and -cross fittings.

6. Configurations: Snap-on and strapless, ductile-iron housing with branch outlets.

7. Size: Of dimension to fit onto sprinkler main and with outlet connections as required to match connected branch piping.

8. Branch Outlets: Grooved, plain-end pipe, or threaded.

B. Branch Line Testers:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Company, Inc. b. Fire-End & Croker Corporation. c. Potter Roemer. d. Or approved equal.


3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa).

4. Body Material: Brass.

5. Size: Same as connected piping.

6. Inlet: Threaded.

7. Drain Outlet: Threaded and capped.

8. Branch Outlet: Threaded, for sprinkler.

C. Adjustable Drop Nipples:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. CECA, LLC. b. Corcoran Piping System Co. c. Merit Manufacturing; a division of Anvil International, Inc. d. Or approved equal.



4. Body Material: Steel pipe with EPDM-rubber O-ring seals.

5. Size: Same as connected piping.

6. Length: Adjustable.

7. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded.

2.04 SPRINKLERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products that match ex-isting or current standard for the building.

B. General Requirements:


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland

21 13 13- 6/8

1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval Guide," pub-lished by FM Global, listing.

2. Pressure Rating for Residential Sprinklers: 175 psig (1200 kPa) maximum.

3. Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum.

4. Pressure Rating for High-Pressure Automatic Sprinklers: 250 psig (1725 kPa) mini-mum.

C. Automatic Sprinklers with Heat-Responsive Element:

1. Early-Suppression, Fast-Response Applications: UL 1767.

2. Nonresidential Applications: UL 199.

3. Characteristics: Nominal 1/2-inch (12.7-mm) orifice with Discharge Coefficient K of 5.6, and for "Ordinary" temperature classification rating unless otherwise indicated or required by application.

D. Sprinkler Finishes:

1. Chrome plated.

2. Bronze.

E. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler mounting applications. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed-type sprinklers are specified with sprinklers.

1. Ceiling Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one piece, flat.

2. Sidewall Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one piece, flat.

F. Sprinkler Guards:

1. Provide in all machine and mechanical rooms.

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. b. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. c. Victaulic Company. d. Viking Corporation. e. Or approved equal.


4. Type: Wire cage with fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Piping Standard: Comply with requirements for installation of sprinkler piping in NFPA 13.

B. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint device materials and installation in NFPA 13.

C. Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in pipe sizes.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland

21 13 13- 7/8

D. Install hangers and supports for sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13. Comply with requirements for hanger materials in NFPA 13.

E. Fill sprinkler system piping with water.

3.02 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings that have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating for aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings be-fore assembly.

C. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.

D. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and re-store full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged.

E. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualified proc-esses and welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article.

1. Shop weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated. Do not use welded joints for galvanized-steel pipe.

F. Steel-Piping, Cut-Grooved Joints: Cut square-edge groove in end of pipe according to AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe joints.

G. Steel-Piping, Roll-Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of pipe according to AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe grooved joints.

H. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems.

3.03 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate this article with Drawings.

B. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of narrow dimension of acoustical ceiling panels.

3.04 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labeling and pipe markers on piping within project work areas (new and existing) ac-cording to requirements in NFPA 13.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland

21 13 13- 8/8

A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair leaks and re-test until no leaks exist.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

3. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems Accep-tance" Chapter.

4. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.

5. Coordinate with fire-alarm tests. Operate as required.

B. Sprinkler piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspec-tions.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.06 CLEANING

A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.

B. Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish.

3.07 PIPING SCHEDULE

B. Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, shall be the following:

1. Standard-weight black-steel pipe with threaded ends; uncoated, gray-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.

C. Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100), shall be one of the following:

1. Standard-weight black-steel pipe with threaded ends; uncoated, gray-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.

2. Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with cut or roll-grooved ends; uncoated, grooved-end

fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.

3. Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with plain ends; steel welding fittings; and welded joints.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 22 05 00 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

PART 1 -GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.

2. Transition fittings.

3. Dielectric fittings.

4. Mechanical sleeve seals.

5. Escutcheons.

6. Grout.

7. Plumbing demolition.

8. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.

9. Painting and finishing.

10. Supports and anchorages.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, un-excavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occu-pied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases.

E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather condi-tions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient tempera-tures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.

F. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:

1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland





3. Mechanical sleeve seals.

4. Escutcheons.

B. Welding certificates.


A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Struc-tural Welding Code--Steel."

B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pres-sure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."

2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes in-volved and that certification is current.

C. Electrical Characteristics for Plumbing Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical charac-teristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modi-fied. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.


A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for plumbing installations.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for plumbing items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Di-vision 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following re-quirements apply for product selection:


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified.

2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS

A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and join-ing methods.

B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.

2.3 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.

B. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

C. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

2.4 TRANSITION FITTINGS

A. AWWA Transition Couplings: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with ends compatible with, piping to be joined.

1. Manufacturers: a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. b. Dresser Industries, Inc.; DMD Div. c. Ford Meter Box Company, Incorporated (The); Pipe Products Div. d. JCM Industries. e. Smith-Blair, Inc. f. Viking Johnson.

2. Underground Piping NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Manufactured fitting or coupling.

3. Underground Piping NPS 2 and Larger: AWWA C219, metal sleeve-type coupling.

4. Aboveground Pressure Piping: Pipe fitting.

B. Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Nonpressure Drainage Piping: ASTM C 1173 with elastomeric sleeve, ends same size as piping to be joined, and corro-sion-resistant metal band on each end.

1. Manufacturers: a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. b. Fernco, Inc. c. Mission Rubber Company. d. Plastic Oddities, Inc.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.

B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pres-sure at 180 deg F.

1. Manufacturers: a. Capitol Manufacturing Co. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Eclipse, Inc. d. Epco Sales, Inc. e. Hart Industries, International, Inc. f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. g. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div. h. Dielectric

D. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.

1. Manufacturers: a. Calpico, Inc. b. Lochinvar Corp.

E. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lin-ing; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.

1. Manufacturers: a. Perfection Corp. b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. Victaulic Co. of America.

2.6 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve.

1. Manufacturers: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Metraflex Co. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM or NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. In-clude type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element.

4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


element.

2.7 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass.

C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.

D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.

E. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With set screw.

F. One-Piece, Floor-Plate Type: Cast-iron floor plate.

G. Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw.

2.8 GROUT

A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.

1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, non-gaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 PLUMBING DEMOLITION

A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching" and Division 02 Section "Selective Structure Demolition" for general demolition requirements and procedures.

B. Disconnect, demolish, and remove plumbing systems, equipment, and components indi-cated to be removed.

1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.

2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material.

3. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.

C. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable, remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capac-ity and quality.

3.2 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


piping systems.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of pip-ing systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as in-dicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically in-dicated otherwise.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

G. Install piping at indicated slopes.

H. Install piping free of sags and bends.

I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connection.

J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

K. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:

1. New Piping: a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type. b. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-

brass type. c. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type with

concealed hinge and set screw. d. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type with set

screw. e. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-plate

L. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

M. Delete first paragraph below if permanent sleeves are required for holes formed by remov-able PE sleeves.

N. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Divi-sion 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for materials.

O. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

P. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


3.3 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before as-sembly.

D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.

F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and re-store full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

3.4 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final con-nection to each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.

4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.

3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated.

B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install plumbing equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.

3.6 PAINTING


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


A. Painting of plumbing systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09 Sec-tions "Painting."

B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish.

3.7 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and ele-vation to support and anchor plumbing materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.

3.8 GROUTING

A. Mix and install grout for plumbing equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors.

B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.

C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.

D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.

E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.

F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.

G. Place grout around anchors.

H. Cure placed grout.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 22 05 23 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 -GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Bronze angle valves.

2. Brass ball valves.

3. Iron, single-flange butterfly valves.

4. Bronze lift check valves.

5. Bronze swing check valves.

6. Bronze gate valves.


1. Division 22 plumbing piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CWP: Cold working pressure.

B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber.

C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.

D. NRS: Nonrising stem.

E. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.

F. RS: Rising stem.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated.


A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer.

B. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria.

2. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


3. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.

C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service.


A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.

2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.

3. Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling.

4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.

5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open.

6. Block check valves in either closed or open position.

B. Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Maintain valve end protection.

2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES

A. Refer to valve schedule articles for applications of valves.

B. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for sys-tem pressures and temperatures.

C. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

D. Valve Actuator Types:

E. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types.

F. Valve-End Connections:

1. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18.

2. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.

G. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

2.2 BRONZE ANGLE VALVES

A. Class 150, Bronze Angle Valves with Bronze Disc:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. b. Kitz Corporation. c. NIBCO INC.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1. b. CWP Rating: 300 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and union-ring bonnet. d. Ends: Threaded. e. Stem and Disc: Bronze. f. Packing: Asbestos free. g. Handwheel: Malleable iron.

2.3 BRASS BALL VALVES

A. One-Piece, Reduced-Port, Brass Ball Valves with Brass Trim:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Kitz Corporation. b. Description: Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. c. NIBCO INC.

2. a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. CWP Rating: 400 psig. c. Body Design: One piece. d. Body Material: Forged brass. e. Ends: Threaded. f. Seats: PTFE or TFE. g. Stem: Brass. h. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. i. Port: Reduced.

2.4 BRONZE BALL VALVES

A. One-Piece, Reduced-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Valve, Inc. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves. c. NIBCO INC.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. CWP Rating: 400 psig. c. Body Design: One piece. d. Body Material: Bronze. e. Ends: Threaded. f. Seats: PTFE or TFE. g. Stem: Bronze. h. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


i. Port: Reduced.

2.5 IRON, SINGLE-FLANGE BUTTERFLY VALVES

A. 200 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with EPDM Seat and Aluminum-Bronze Disc:


j. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves. k. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. l. Milwaukee Valve Company. m. NIBCO INC. n. Red-White Valve Corporation. o. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:

p. Standard: MSS SP-67, Type I. q. CWP Rating: 200 psig. r. Body Design: Lug type; suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at rated

pressure without use of downstream flange. s. Body Material: ASTM A 126, cast iron or ASTM A 536, ductile iron. t. Seat: EPDM. u. Stem: One- or two-piece stainless steel. v. Disc: Aluminum bronze.

2.6 BRONZE LIFT CHECK VALVES

A. Class 125, Lift Check Valves with Bronze Disc:


w. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. x. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. y. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.

2. Description:

z. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1. aa. CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). bb. Body Design: Vertical flow. cc. Body Material: ASTM B 61 or ASTM B 62, bronze. dd. Ends: Threaded. ee. Disc: Bronze.

2.7 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Class 150, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Valve, Inc. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. d. Milwaukee Valve Company. e. NIBCO INC. f. Red-White Valve Corporation.

2. Description:

ff. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 3. gg. CWP Rating: 300 psig. hh. Body Design: Horizontal flow. ii. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze. jj. Ends: Threaded. kk. Disc: Bronze.

2.8 BRONZE GATE VALVES

A. Class 150, NRS Bronze Gate Valves:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Hammond Valve. b. Milwaukee Valve Company. c. NIBCO INC. d. Powell Valves. e. Red-White Valve Corporation. f. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1. b. CWP Rating: 300 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and union-ring bonnet. d. Ends: Threaded. e. Stem: Bronze. f. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze. g. Packing: Asbestos free. h. Handwheel: Malleable iron.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.

B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations.

C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

D. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

E. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:

1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.

2. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.

3.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:

1. Shutoff Service: Ball, butterfly valves.

2. Throttling Service: ball, or butterfly valves.

3. Pump-Discharge: Check Valves

4. Cooling Tower to maintain prime in piping: Check Valves

3.5 DOMESTIC, HOT- AND COLD-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller:

1. Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends.

2. Bronze Angle Valves: Class 150

3. Ball Valves: One piece, full port.

4. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 150.

5. Bronze Gate Valves: Class 150.

3.6 CONDENSER-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger:

1. Bronze Valves: Flanged or threaded ends.





3.7 CONDENSER-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller:

1. Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends.







CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland




CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 22 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 -GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following hangers and supports for plumbing system piping and equipment:

1. Steel pipe hangers and supports.

2. Trapeze pipe hangers.

3. Metal framing systems.

4. Pipe stands.

5. Pipe positioning systems.


B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for tra-peze hangers for pipe and equipment supports.

2. Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equip-ment" for vibration isolation devices.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.

B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports."


A. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

C. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment per the SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems Edition. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment per the 2007 California Building Code..

1.5 1.5 SUBMITTALS


1. Steel pipe hangers and support.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


2. Powder-actuated fastener systems.

3. Pipe positioning systems.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the fol-lowing:

1. Trapeze pipe hangers. Include Product Data for components.

2. Metal framing systems. Include Product Data for components.

3. Pipe stands. Include Product Data for components.


C. Welding certificates.


A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.

B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

2. AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum."

3. AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code--Reinforcing Steel."

4. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.

2.2 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to Part 3 "Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and sup-port types.

B. Manufacturers:

1. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.

2. Grinnell Corp.

3. GS Metals Corp.

4. National Pipe Hanger Corporation.

5. Tolco Inc.

C. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.

E. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for support of bearing surface of piping.

2.3 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.

2.4 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Description: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel chan-nels and other components.

B. Manufacturers:

1. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.

2. Tolco Inc.

3. Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International, Ltd.

C. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.

D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.

2.5 PIPE POSITIONING SYSTEMS

A. Description: IAPMO PS 42, system of metal brackets, clips, and straps for positioning pip-ing in pipe spaces for plumbing fixtures for commercial applications.

B. Manufacturers:

1. C & S Mfg. Corp.

2. HOLDRITE Corp.; Hubbard Enterprises.

3. Samco Stamping, Inc.

2.6 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural- hot dipped galvanized steel shapes.


A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, hot dipped galvanized steel plates, shapes, and bars.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 -EXECUTION


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping sys-tems and equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

F. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as speci-fied in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

2. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 24, if little or no insulation is required.

3. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.

4. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 8.

5. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated sta-tionary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

6. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

7. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsu-lated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 2.

8. Extension Hinged or 2-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of non-insulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 3.

9. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

10. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or con-traction.

G. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping sys-tem Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20.

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

H. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


2. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of building attachments.

I. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles.

2. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.

3. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.

4. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.

5. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel

I-beams for heavy loads.

6. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel

I-beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.

7. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to structural steel.

8. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads: a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb (340 kg). b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb (680 kg). c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb (1360 kg).

9. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.

10. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is re-quired.

11. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear horizontal movement where headroom is limited.

J. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with in-sulation that matches adjoining insulation.

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufac-turer to prevent crushing insulation.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

K. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping move-ment.

2. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These supports include the following types:


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally. b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically. c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member.

L. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

M. Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

N. Use pipe positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply and waste piping for plumbing fixtures.

3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure.

B. Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated tra-peze pipe hangers.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individ-ual pipe hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being sup-ported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1.

C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and sup-port together on field-assembled metal framing systems.

D. Pipe Positioning System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply and waste piping connections to each plumbing fixture.

E. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.

F. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

G. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

H. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

I. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

J. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maxi-mum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 (for building services piping) are not ex-ceeded.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland



A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to sup-port equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.4 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appear-ance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the fol-lowing:




4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and con-tours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches (40 mm).



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland




CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 22 05 48 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 -GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Isolation pads.

2. Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts.

3. Elastomeric hangers.

4. Pipe riser resilient supports.

5. Resilient pipe guides.

6. Restraining braces and cables.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. IBC: International Building Code.

B. ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service.

C. OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development for the State of California.


D. Seismic-Restraint Loading:

1. Site Class as Defined in the 2007 California Building Code.

2. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment per the SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems 1991 Edition.

3. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods (0.2 Second): 100%.

4. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1-Second Period: 100%.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation device.

2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of seismic-restraint component used.

a. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with requirements.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For vibration isolation and seismic-restraint details indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment weight and operation, seismic forces required to select vibration isolators, seismic restraints, and for designing vibration isolation bases.

2. Riser Supports: Include riser diagrams and calculations showing anticipated expan-sion and contraction at each support point, initial and final loads on building structure, spring deflection changes, and seismic loads. Include certification that riser system has been examined for excessive stress and that none will exist.

3. Seismic-Restraint Details:

b. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic restraints. Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads.

c. Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and spacings. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events. Indicate association with vibration isolation devices.

C. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for plumbing piping and equipment with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and seismic restraints.

D. Welding certificates.

E. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are more stringent.

C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

D. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall bear anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD, preapproved by ICC-ES, or preapproved by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified pro-fessional engineer.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


2.1 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES


1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.

2. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.

3. Hilti, Inc.

4. Kinetics Noise Control.

5. Mason Industries.

6. TOLCO Incorporated; a brand of NIBCO INC.

7. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.

B. Channel Support System: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of slotted steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosion-resistant coating; and rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.

C. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 492 stainless-steel cables with end connections made of steel assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; and with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement.

D. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted connections or Reinforcing steel angle clamped to hanger rod.

E. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor Bolts: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and studs.

F. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of attachment devices used.

G. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant neoprene, with a flat washer face.

H. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. Minimum length of eight times diameter.

I. Adhesive Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing polyvinyl or ure-thane methacrylate-based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid mortar adhe-sive. Provide anchor bolts and hardware with zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for an-chor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.

2.2 FACTORY FINISHES

A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.

B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested equipment before shipping.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


1. Powder coating on springs and housings.

2. All hardware shall be galvanized. Hot-dip galvanize metal components for exterior use.

3. Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for interior use.

4. Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and seismic-control devices to indi-cate capacity range.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting per-formance.

B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before installation.


3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces.

B. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within specified loading limits.

3.3 VIBRATION-CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Restraints:

1. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance be-tween anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inches.

B. Piping Restraints:

1. Comply with requirements in MSS SP-127.

2. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet o.c., and longitudinal supports a maxi-mum of 80 feet o.c.

3. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet.

C. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.

D. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to pro-vide resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base.

E. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to pro-vide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.

F. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


G. Drilled-in Anchors:

1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.

2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength.

3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural ele-ment to which anchor is to be fastened.

4. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to in-stallation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air pockets in the adhesive.

5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench.

6. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless steel anchors for exterior applications.

3.4 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION

A. Install flexible connections in piping where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sec-tions or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where the connections terminate with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one supporting the connections as they approach equipment.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Perform tests and inspections.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency accept-able to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage device to restrained component (unless postconnection testing has been approved), and with at least seven days' advance notice.

3. Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide tempo-rary load-spreading members.

4. Test at least 25% of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by Architect.

5. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device.

6. Measure isolator restraint clearance.

7. Measure isolator deflection.

8. If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until satisfactory results are achieved.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090


SECTION 22 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Pipe labels.

2. Stencils.

3. Valve tags.



B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification material and device.

C. Valve numbering scheme.

D. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE LABELS

A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction.

B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to partially cover circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.

D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090


1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high.

2.2 STENCILS

A. Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; and minimum letter height of 3/4 inch for access panel and door labels, equipment labels, and similar operational instructions.

1. Stencil Material: Aluminum

2. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, acrylic enamel black unless otherwise indicated. Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form.

3. Identification Paint: Exterior, acrylic enamel in colors according to ASME A13.1 unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 VALVE TAGS

A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch numbers.

1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.

2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link chain and S-hook

B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open or closed,), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.

1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.

3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Piping Color-Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Division 09 Section "Interior Painting."

B. Stenciled Pipe Label Option: Stenciled labels may be provided instead of manufactured pipe labels, at Installer's option. Install stenciled pipe labels complying with ASME A13.1, on each piping system.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090


1. Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background.

2. Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking.

C. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device.

2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.

3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.

4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping.

5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.

6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in areas of congested piping and equipment.

7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.

D. Pipe Label Color Schedule:

1. Domestic Water Piping: a. Background Color: White. b. Letter Color: Blue.

2. Sanitary Waste and Storm Drainage Piping: a. Background Color: White. b. Letter Color: Black.

3.4 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within factory-fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering hose connections; and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.

B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:

1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape: a. Cold Water: 1-1/2 inches round

2. Valve-Tag Color: a. Cold Water: Natural.

3. Letter Color: a. Cold Water: Black.

3.5 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where required.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090


THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland

Section 22 11 16 - page 1 of 8

SECTION 22 11 16 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 -GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Under-building slab and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, fittings, and spe-cialties inside the building.

2. Specialty valves.

3. Flexible connectors.

4. Escutcheons.

5. Sleeves and sleeve seals.

6. Wall penetration systems.


A. Seismic Performance: Domestic water piping and support and installation shall withstand effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Site Class as Defined in the 2007 California Building Code.

2. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment per the SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems 1991 Edition.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following products:

1. Specialty valves.




5. Escutcheons.

6. Sleeves and sleeve seals.

7. Water penetration systems.

B. Water Samples: Specified in "Cleaning" Article.

C. Coordination Drawings: For piping in equipment rooms and other congested areas, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using in-put from Installers of the items involved:

1. Domestic water piping.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


2. HVAC hydronic piping.

D. Field quality-control reports.


A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF 14 for plastic, potable domestic water piping and components. Include marking "NSF-pw" on piping.

C. Piping materials for non-potable recycled water shall bear label, stamp, or other markings denoting non-potable water do not drink.

D. Comply with NSF 61 for potable domestic water piping and components.


1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K (ASTM B 88M, Type A) and ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B), water tube, annealed temper.

1. Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-copper, solder-joint pressure type. Furnish only wrought-copper fittings if in-dicated.

2. Copper, Pressure-Seal Fittings: a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufactur-

ers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Viega; Plumbing & Heating Systems.

b. NPS 2 and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM O-ring seal in each end.

B. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K (ASTM B 88M, Type A) and ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B), water tube, drawn temper.

1. Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-copper, solder-joint pressure type. Furnish only wrought-copper fittings if in-dicated.

2. Copper, Pressure-Seal Fittings: a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufactur-

ers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


limited to, the following: 1) Viega; Plumbing & Heating Systems.

b. NPS 2 and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM O-ring seal in each end.

C. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body with ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded end.

2.3 SPECIALTY VALVES

A. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for general-duty metal valves.

2.4 TRANSITION FITTINGS

A. General Requirements:

1. Same size as pipes to be joined.

2. Pressure rating at least equal to pipes to be joined.

3. End connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting.

C. Sleeve-Type Transition Coupling: AWWA C219.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Cascade Waterworks Manufacturing. b. Dresser, Inc.; Dresser Piping Specialties. c. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The). d. JCM Industries. e. Romac Industries, Inc. f. Smith-Blair, Inc; a Sensus company. g. Viking Johnson; c/o Mueller Co.

2.5 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS


1. Flex-Hose Co., Inc.

2. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.

3. Mercer Rubber Co.

4. Metraflex, Inc.

5. Universal Metal Hose; a Hyspan company

B. Bronze-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-bronze tubing with bronze wire-braid cover-ing and ends brazed to inner tubing.

1. Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 200 psig.

2. End Connections NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded copper pipe or plain-end copper


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


tube.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Comply with requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.


A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indi-cated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

B. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

C. Install ductile-iron piping under building slab with restrained joints according to AWWA C600 and AWWA M41.

D. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve, inside the building at each domestic water service entrance. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for pressure gages and Divi-sion 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for drain valves and strainers.

E. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.

F. Install water-pressure-reducing valves downstream from shutoff valves. Comply with re-quirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for pressure-reducing valves.

G. Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's requirements.

H. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Vibra-tion and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for seismic-restraint devices.

I. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occu-pants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

J. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically in-dicated otherwise.

K. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space.

L. Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance.

M. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

N. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


higher than system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

O. Install piping free of sags and bends.

P. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

Q. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and specialty.


A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings be-fore assembly.

C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and re-store full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged.

D. Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed Joints" Chapter.

E. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

F. Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join copper tube and pressure-seal fittings with tools recom-mended by fitting manufacturer.

G. Extruded-Tee Connections: Form tee in copper tube according to ASTM F 2014. Use tool designed for copper tube; drill pilot hole, form collar for outlet, dimple tube to form seating stop, and braze branch tube into collar.

H. Copper-Tubing Grooved Joints: Roll groove end of tube. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join copper tube and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for roll-grooved joints.

1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. Apply primer.

I. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


dissimilar piping materials.

D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and con-nect to the following:

1. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection.

3.5 ESCUTCHEON INSTALLATION

A. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

B. Escutcheons for New Piping:

1. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One piece, deep pattern.

2. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One piece, stamped steel with set screw.

3. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One piece, stamped steel with set screw.

4. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece floor plate.

3.6 SLEEVE INSTALLATION

A. General Requirements: Install sleeves for pipes and tubes passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.

B. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

C. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

D. Install sleeves in new partitions, slabs, and walls as they are built.

E. For interior wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insula-tion using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with re-quirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants.

F. For exterior wall penetrations above grade, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with require-ments in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants.

G. Seal space outside of sleeves in concrete slabs and walls with grout.

3.7 SLEEVE SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve seals in sleeves in exterior concrete walls at water-service piping entries into building.

B. Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble sleeve seal components and install in annular space be-tween pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.8 WALL PENETRATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install wall penetration systems in new, exterior concrete walls.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


B. Assemble wall penetration system components with sleeve pipe. Install so that end of sleeve pipe and face of housing are flush with wall. Adjust locking devices to secure sleeve pipe in housing.


A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Piping Inspections:

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and ap-proved by authorities having jurisdiction.

2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before inspec-tion must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction: a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or

closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures. b. Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to ob-

serve tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or in-spections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having ju-risdiction.

C. Piping Tests:

1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water.

2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been al-tered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and un-concealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.

D. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.10 ADJUSTING

A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:

1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position.

3. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during installation.

4. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.

5. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.

3.11 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect potable and non-potable domestic water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or re-paired before using.

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below: a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at

outlets. b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:

1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.

c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time.

d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.

B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.

C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work pro-gresses.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 22 11 19 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 -GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following domestic water piping specialties:

1. Hose bibbs.

2. Trap-seal primer valves.


A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 130 psig, unless other-wise indicated.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Field quality-control test reports.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water piping specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. NSF Compliance:

1. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plas-tic domestic water piping components.

2. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sec-tions 1 through 9."

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 VACUUM BREAKERS

A. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers :

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


b. MIFAB, Inc. c. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. d. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation. e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.

2. Standard: ASSE 1011.

3. Body: Bronze, nonremovable, with manual drain.

4. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose threaded complying with ASME B1.20.7.

5. Finish: Rough bronze.

2.2 STRAINERS FOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

A. Y-Pattern Strainers:

1. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying with AWWA C550.

3. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller.

4. Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations, unless otherwise indicated.

5. Perforation Size: a. Strainers NPS 2 and Smaller: 0.020 inch.

6. Drain: Pipe plug installed, hose-end drain valve.

2.3 HOSE BIBBS

A. Hose Bibbs :

1. Standard: ASME A112.18.1 for sediment faucets.

2. Body Material: Bronze.

3. Seat: Bronze, replaceable.

4. Supply Connections: NPS 3/4 threaded or solder-joint inlet.

5. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7.

6. Pressure Rating: 125 psig.

7. Vacuum Breaker: Integral or field-installation, nonremovable, drainable, hose-connection vacuum breaker complying with ASSE 1011.

8. Finish for Equipment Rooms: Rough bronze.

9. Finish for Service Areas: Rough bronze.

10. Finish for Finished Rooms: Chrome or nickel plated.

11. Operation for Equipment Rooms: Wheel handle.

12. Operation for Service Areas: Wheel handle.

13. Operation for Finished Rooms: Wheel handle.

14. Include wall flange with each hose bibb at wall penetration.

2.4 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


A. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Ames Fire & Waterworks; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. c. FEBCO; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. d. Flomatic Corporation. e. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company. f. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Prod-

ucts.


3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications.

4. Pressure Loss: 12 psig maximum, through middle third of flow range.

5. Size: 1-1/2 NPS.

6. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller.


8. Configuration: Designed for vertical-inlet, horizontal-center-section, and vertical-outlet flow.

9. Accessories: a. Valves NPS 2 and Smaller: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet. b. Air-Gap Fitting: ASME A112.1.2, matching backflow-preventer connection.

2.5 WALL HYDRANTS

A. Nonfreeze Wall Hydrants:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Josam Company. b. MIFAB, Inc. c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. d. Watts Drainage Products. e. Woodford Manufacturing Company; a division of WCM Industries, Inc. f. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Products.

2. Standard: ASME A112.21.3M for concealed-outlet, self-draining wall hydrants.

3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig.

4. Operation: Loose key.

5. Casing and Operating Rod: Of length required to match wall thickness. Include wall clamp.

6. Inlet: NPS 3/4.

7. Outlet: Concealed, with integral vacuum breaker and garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


8. Box: Deep, flush mounted with cover.

9. Box and Cover Finish: Polished nickel bronze.

10. Operating Keys(s): Two with each wall hydrant.

2.6 TRAP-SEAL PRIMER VALVES

A. Supply-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Valves:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. MIFAB, Inc. b. PPP Inc. c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.


3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum.

4. Body: Bronze.

5. Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 threaded, union, or solder joint.

6. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 threaded or solder joint. Finish: Rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not chrome finished.

2.7 STRAINERS FOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING


1. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated.

2. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron[ with interior lining that complies with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved, epoxy coated and] for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.


4. Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations unless otherwise indicated.

5. Perforation Size: a. Strainers NPS 2 and Smaller: 0.020 inch.

6. Drain: Factory-installed, hose-end drain valve.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining materi-als, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.

B. Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system.

2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with air-


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


gap fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe diameters in drain piping and pipe to floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached to or under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are not acceptable for this appli-cation.

3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.

C. Install Y-pattern strainers for water on supply side of each control valve or water pressure-reducing valve.

D. Install air vents at high points of water piping.

E. Install supply-type, trap-seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indi-cate general arrangement of piping and specialties.


A. Perform the following tests and prepare test reports:

1. Test each pressure vacuum breaker, reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventer, double-check backflow-prevention assembly, water pressure regulator according to authorities having jurisdiction and the device's reference standard.

B. Remove and replace malfunctioning domestic water piping specialties and retest as speci-fied above.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable pressure set points of water pressure-reducing valves.

B. Set field-adjustable flow set points of balancing valves.


\


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland




CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 22 13 16 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PART 1 -GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following for soil, waste, and vent piping inside the building:

1. Pipe, tube, and fittings.

2. Special pipe fittings.

3. Encasement for underground metal piping.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.

B. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

C. LLDPE: Linear, low-density polyethylene plastic.

D. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

E. PE: Polyethylene plastic.

F. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

G. TPE: Thermoplastic elastomer.


A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum work-ing pressure, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water. Seismic Performance: Soil, waste, and vent piping and support and installation shall be capable of with-standing the effects of seismic events determined according to the SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems 1991 Edition. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for pip-ing and equipment per the 2007 California Building Code.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.

B. Field quality-control inspection and test reports.




CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.


A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials.

2.3 HUBLESS CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.

B. Shielded Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal shield or housing, corrosion-resistant fasteners, and rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.

1. Heavy-Duty, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: With stainless-steel shield, stainless-steel bands and tightening devices, and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve. a. Manufacturers:

1) ANACO. 2) Clamp-All Corp. 3) Ideal Div.; Stant Corp. 4) Mission Rubber Co. 5) Tyler Pipe; Soil Pipe Div.


A. Copper DWV Tube: ASTM B 306, drainage tube, drawn temper.

1. Copper Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast copper or ASME B16.29, wrought copper, solder-joint fittings.

2.5 SPECIAL PIPE FITTINGS

A. Flexible, Nonpressure Pipe Couplings: Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition pattern. Include shear ring, ends of same sizes as piping to be joined, and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

1. Manufacturers: a. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. b. Fernco, Inc. c. Logan Clay Products Company (The). d. Mission Rubber Co. e. NDS, Inc. f. Plastic Oddities, Inc.

2. Sleeve Materials: a. For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber. b. For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC. c. For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


materials being joined.

B. Shielded Nonpressure Pipe Couplings: ASTM C 1460, elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion-resistant outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

1. Manufacturers: a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. b. Mission Rubber Co.

C. Wall-Penetration Fittings: Compound, ductile-iron coupling fitting with sleeve and flexing sections for up to 20-degree deflection, gaskets, and restrained-joint ends complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include AWWA C111, ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.

1. Manufacturers: a. SIGMA Corp.

2.6 ENCASEMENT FOR UNDERGROUND METAL PIPING

A. Description: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105, high-density, crosslaminated PE film of 0.004-inch (0.10-mm) minimum thickness.

B. Form: Sheet or tube.

C. Color: Black or natural.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 EXCAVATION

A. Refer to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following:

1. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; heavy-duty shielded, couplings; and hubless-coupling joints.

2. Copper DWV tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered joints.

3. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure pipe couplings for joining dissimilar pipe materials with small difference in OD.

B. Aboveground, vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following:


2. Copper DWV tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered joints.

3. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded nonpressure pipe couplings for joining dissimilar pipe materials with small difference in OD.

C. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping 6-inch and smaller shall be any of the following:

1. Retain one or more of first six subparagraphs below. If more than one type of material


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


and joining method is used, identify various materials on Drawings and show points of transition from one material to another.


3. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure pipe couplings for joining dissimilar pipe materials with small difference in OD.


A. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

B. Install seismic restraints on piping. Seismic-restraint devices are specified in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

C. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building sanitary sewers.

D. Make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Divi-sion 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

E. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."

1. Install encasement on underground piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.

F. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drain-age piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

G. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of pip-ing upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.

H. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless oth-erwise indicated:

1. Building Sanitary Drain: 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger.

2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.

3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.

I. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-on-grade if slab is without membrane waterproofing.

J. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by au-thorities having jurisdiction.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland



A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

B. Join hubless cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless-coupling joints.

C. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.


A. Seismic-restraint devices are specified in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Con-trols for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." Install the following:

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.

2. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs according to the following: a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer Than 100 Feet, if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

C. Install supports according to Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Pip-ing and Equipment."

D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

E. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods.

A. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

2. NPS 3: 60 inches with 1/2-inch rod.

3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 60 inches with 5/8-inch rod.

F. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet .

G. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and mini-mum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod.


H. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.

I. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


written instructions.

3.6 CONNECTIONS


B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:

1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code.

2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indi-cated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code.

4. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve, if indicated, and union for each connection.


A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to ob-serve tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspec-tion, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdic-tion.

D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having juris-diction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been al-tered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate re-port for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except outside leaders, on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. In-spect joints for leaks.

4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg. Use U-tube or manometer in-serted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

3.8 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland





CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 22 13 19 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 -GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following sanitary drainage piping specialties:

1. Cleanouts.

2. Floor drains.

3. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating char-acteristics, and accessories for grease interceptors.


A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 CLEANOUTS

A. Exposed Cast-Iron Cleanouts:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. MIFAB, Inc. c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. e. Watts Drainage Products Inc. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for cast iron for cleanout test tee.

3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping

4. Body Material: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected piping.

5. Closure: [Countersunk] [Countersunk or raised-head] [Raised-head], [brass] [cast-iron] [plastic] plug.

6. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.

B. Cast-Iron Floor Cleanouts:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. Oatey.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. e. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. f. Watts Drainage Products Inc. g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation. h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for [adjustable housing] [cast-iron soil pipe with cast-iron ferrule] [heavy-duty, adjustable housing] [threaded, adjustable housing] cleanout.

3. Size: Same as connected branch.

4. Type: Heavy-duty, adjustable housing.

5. Body or Ferrule: Cast iron.

6. Clamping Device: Not required.

7. Outlet Connection: Threaded.

8. Closure: Cast-iron plug.

9. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with threads.

10. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: [Nickel-bronze, copper alloy] [Painted cast iron] [Polished bronze] [Rough bronze] <Insert material and finish>.

11. Frame and Cover Shape: Round.

12. Top Loading Classification: Heavy Duty.

13. Riser: ASTM A 74, [Extra-Heavy] [Service] class, cast-iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to cleanout.

2.2 FLOOR DRAINS

A. Cast-Iron Floor Drains:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Commercial Enameling Co. b. Josam Company; Josam Div. c. MIFAB, Inc. d. Prier Products, Inc. e. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. f. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. g. Watts Drainage Products Inc. h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation. i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Standard: ASME A112.6.3.

3. Pattern: Floor drain.

4. Body Material: Cast Iron.

5. Seepage Flange: Required.

6. Anchor Flange: Required.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


8. Outlet: Bottom.

9. Coating on Interior and Exposed Exterior Surfaces: Not required.

10. Sediment Bucket: Suspended.

11. Top or Strainer Material: Cast iron.

12. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Dura-coated cast iron body and top.

13. Top Shape: Round.

14. Dimensions of Top or Strainer: 12 in. diameter.

15. Top Loading Classification: Heavy-Duty.

16. Funnel: Not required.

17. Inlet Fitting: Not required.

18. Trap Material: Cast iron.

19. Trap Pattern: Standard P-trap.

20. Trap Features: Not required.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Deep-Seal Traps:

1. Description: Cast-iron or bronze casting, with inlet and outlet matching connected pip-ing and cleanout trap-seal primer valve connection.

2. Size: Same as connected waste piping. a. NPS 2: 4-inch-minimum water seal. b. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 5-inch-minimum water seal.

B. Floor-Drain, Trap-Seal Primer Fittings:

1. Description: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap-seal primer valve connection.

2. Size: Same as floor drain outlet with NPS 1/2 side inlet.

C. Air-Gap Fittings:

1. Standard: ASME A112.1.2, for fitting designed to ensure fixed, positive air gap be-tween installed inlet and outlet piping.

2. Body: Bronze or cast iron.

3. Inlet: Opening in top of body.

4. Outlet: Larger than inlet.

5. Size: Same as connected waste piping and with inlet large enough for associated in-direct waste piping.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated.

2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.

3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for larger piping.

4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.

B. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with fin-ished floor.

C. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indi-cated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.

D. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.

2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage. Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii: a. Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 1/4-

inch total depression. b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches: Equivalent to 1 percent slope. c. Radius, 60 Inches or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater than

1-inch total depression.

3. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and ad-joining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.

4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless oth-erwise indicated.

E. Install floor-drain, trap-seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap-seal primer connection.

1. Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap-seal primer connection.

2. Size: Same as floor drain inlet.

F. Install air-gap fittings on draining-type backflow preventers and on indirect-waste piping dis-charge into sanitary drainage system.

G. Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors with water-proof membrane.

H. Install vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof.

I. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is indicated.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indi-cate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


3.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland




CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 22 14 13 - FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING

PART 1 -GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Pipe, tube, and fittings.

2. Specialty pipe fittings.


A. Seismic Performance: Storm drainage piping and support and installation shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.





B. Comply with NSF/ANSI 14, "Plastics Piping System Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS


A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

2.2 HUBLESS, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.

B. CISPI, Hubless-Piping Couplings:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, a. ANACO-Husky. b. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. c. Fernco Inc. d. Matco-Norca, Inc. e. MIFAB, Inc. f. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. g. Stant. h. Tyler Pipe.

1. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and CISPI 310.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


2. Description: Stainless-steel corrugated shield with stainless-steel bands and tighten-ing devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.

C. Heavy-Duty, Hubless-Piping Couplings:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, a. ANACO-Husky. b. Clamp-All Corp. c. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. d. MIFAB, Inc. e. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. f. Stant. g. Tyler Pipe.

2. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and ASTM C 1540.

3. Description: Stainless-steel shield with stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.

2.3 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS

A. Transition Couplings:

1. General Requirements: Fitting or device for joining piping with small differences in OD's or of different materials. Include end connections same size as and compatible with pipes to be joined.

2. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified-piping-system fitting.

3. Unshielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,

1) Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. 2) Fernco Inc. 3) Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. 4) Plastic Oddities; a division of Diverse Corporate Technologies, Inc.

b. Standard: ASTM C 1173. c. Description: Elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition pattern. Include

shear ring and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

d. Sleeve Materials: 1) For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber. 2) For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC. 3) For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with

pipe materials being joined.

4. Shielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,

1) Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. 2) Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc.

b. Standard: ASTM C 1460. c. Description: Elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion-resistant

outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mecha-nism on each end.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


PART 3 -EXECUTION


A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of pip-ing systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as in-dicated unless deviations from layout are approved on coordination drawings.

B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically in-dicated otherwise.

D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

E. Install piping at indicated slopes.

F. Install piping free of sags and bends.

G. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

H. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

I. Make changes in direction for storm drainage piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reduc-ing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

J. Lay buried building storm drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.

K. Install storm drainage piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwise indicated:

1. Horizontal Storm-Drainage Piping: 1 percent downward in direction of flow.

L. Plumbing Specialties:

1. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building storm drains connect to build-ing storm sewers in storm drainage gravity-flow piping. Install cleanout fitting with clo-sure plug inside the building in storm drainage force-main piping. Comply with re-quirements for cleanouts specified in Division 22 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties."

2. Install drains in storm drainage gravity-flow piping. Comply with requirements for drains specified in Division 22 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties."

M. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by au-thorities having jurisdiction.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


N. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with require-ments for sleeves specified in Division 22 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

O. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with re-quirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 22 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

P. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with re-quirements for escutcheons specified in Division 22 Section "Escutcheons for Plumbing Pip-ing."


A. Join hubless, cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless-piping coupling joints.

3.3 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Transition Couplings:

1. Install transition couplings at joints of piping with small differences in OD's.

2. In Drainage Piping: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings.


A. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Division 22 Section "Vi-bration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

1. Install carbon-steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in noncorrosive environments.

2. Install carbon-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in noncorrosive environ-ments.

3. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.

4. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

5. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

6. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

C. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches of each fitting and coupling.

D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

E. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods.

F. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


minimum rod diameters:


2. NPS 3: 60 inches with 1/2-inch rod.

3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 60 inches with 5/8-inch rod.

G. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet.

3.5 CONNECTIONS


B. Connect interior storm drainage piping to exterior storm drainage piping. Use transition fit-ting to join dissimilar piping materials.

C. Connect storm drainage piping to roof drains and storm drainage specialties.

1. Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor, and floor cleanouts with cover flush with floor.

2. Comply with requirements for cleanouts and drains specified in Division 22 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties."

D. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of equipment.


A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in.

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to ob-serve tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspec-tion, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdic-tion.

D. Test storm drainage piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been al-tered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate re-port for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced storm drain-age piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

3. Test Procedure: Test storm drainage piping on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts until completion of in-spection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained.

5. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

3.8 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Aboveground storm drainage piping NPS 6 and smaller shall be the following:

1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints.

2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI, hubless-piping couplings; and coupled joints.

3. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 22 14 23 - STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 -GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Miscellaneous storm drainage piping specialties.

2. Cleanouts.




A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

A. Metal, Medium-Sump, Deck Roof Drains:

1. Standard: ASME A112.6.4, for deck roof drains; ASME A112.6.3, for floor drains.

2. Body Material: Metal.

3. Flange: Anchor with weep holes.


5. Outlet: Bottom.

6. Grate Material: Cast iron.

7. Grate Finish: [Painted] [Not required] <Insert finish>.

8. Overall Dimension of Frame and Grate: Nominal 12 inches round.

9. Top-Loading Classification: Extra-Heavy Duty.

10. Vandal-Proof Frame and Grate: Required.

2.2 CLEANOUTS

A. Test Tees:

1. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M and ASTM A 74, ASTM A 888, or CISPI 301, for cleanout test tees.

2. Size: Same as connected drainage piping.

3. Body Material: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil-pipe T-branch or hubless, cast-iron soil-pipe test tee as required to match connected piping.

4. Closure Plug: Countersunk


B. Wall Cleanouts:


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


1. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M, for cleanouts. Include wall access.

2. Size: Same as connected drainage piping.

3. Body Material: Hubless, cast-iron soil-pipe test tee as required to match connected piping.

4. Closure: drilled-and-threaded plug.


PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install roof drains at low points of roof areas according to roof membrane manufacturer's written installation instructions. Roofing materials are specified in Division 07 Sections.

1. Install flashing collar or flange of roof drain to prevent leakage between drain and ad-joining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.

2. Install expansion joints, if indicated, in roof drain outlets.

3. Position roof drains for easy access and maintenance.

B. Install downspout adapters on outlet of back-outlet parapet roof drains and connect to sheet metal downspouts.

C. Install downspout boots at grade with top 12 inches above grade. Secure to building wall.

D. Install conductor nozzles at exposed bottom of conductors where they spill onto grade.

E. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following instructions unless otherwise indicated:

1. Use cleanouts the same size as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated.

2. Locate cleanouts at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.

3. Locate cleanouts at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for larger piping.

4. Locate cleanouts at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.

F. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with fin-ished floor.

G. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indi-cated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.

H. Install test tees in vertical conductors and near floor.

I. Install sleeve flashing device with each conductor passing through floors with waterproof membrane.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Fabricate flashing from single piece of metal unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are required. Join flashing according to the following if required:

1. Lead Sheets: Burn joints of 6.0-lb/sq. ft. (30-kg/sq. m) lead sheets, 0.0938-inch (2.4-mm) thickness or thicker. Solder joints of 4.0-lb/sq. ft. (20-kg/sq. m) lead sheets, 0.0625-inch (1.6-mm) thickness or thinner.

2. Copper Sheets: Solder joints of copper sheets.

B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors and roofs with waterproof membrane.

1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching the pipe size, with a minimum length of 10 inches (250 mm) and with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches (200 mm) around pipe.

2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches (200 mm) around sleeve.

3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches (200 mm) around specialty.

C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.

D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.

E. Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland




CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 23 00 00 EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER CONTACT LIST Chillers Trane Steve Toney 310 Soquel Way Sunnyvale, CA 94086 408/481-3657 [email protected] Carrier Corporation 99 South Hill Dr Suite B Brisbane, CA Matthew Russell 415/330-6600 [email protected] York International Johnson Controls Taylor Stumpp 3526 Breakwater Court Hayward, CA 94545 925/989-7225 [email protected] Cooling Tower Evapco Conservation Mechanical Systems, Inc. Michelle Whitsitt 2440 Stanwell Dr. Suite M Concord, CA 94520 925/969-9100 [email protected] Baltimore Air Coil (BAC) Schauf Company 225 West Hamilton Ave. Campbell, CA 95008 408/866-0723 Brian Maher [email protected] Marley (SPX Cooling Technologies) Dynamic Engineered Systems, Inc. Joe Sanders 1831 Commerce Street, C107 Corona, CA 92880 951/278-0282 [email protected]


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


Air Handling Units Haakon Industries Trane Steve Toney 310 Soquel Way Sunnyvale, CA 94086 408/481-3657 [email protected] York International Johnson Controls Taylor Stumpp 3526 Breakwater Court Hayward, CA 94545 925/989-7225 [email protected] Energy Labs Inc. DMG-Sacramento 8231 Alpine Ave, Suite 7 Sacramento, CA 95826 916/451-3730 [email protected]



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 23 05 00 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC

PART 1 -GENERAL



B. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.

C. Dielectric fittings.

D. Mechanical sleeve seals.

E. Sleeves.

F. Escutcheons.

G. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.

H. Supports and anchorages.

1.2 PRODUCTS SUPPLIED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION

A. Access doors.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM D 698 - Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/cu. ft. (600kN-m/cu. m.)).

B. ASTM E 814 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops.

C. IEEE C2 - National Electrical Safety Code.

D. UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Provide: Where the word "provide" is used, the word shall be understood to mean "the Contractor shall furnish and install" the equipment, tests, inspections, etc. referenced.

B. Related Work: The sections referenced under RELATED SECTIONS shall be understood to include provisions which directly affect the work being specified in the section where RELATED SECTIONS occurs.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


C. Concealed: Where the word "concealed" is used in conjunction with piping, equipment, and the like, the word shall be understood to mean hidden from sight as in chases, furred spaces, or suspended ceilings.

D. Exposed: Where the word "exposed" is used, the word shall be understood to mean open to view.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop drawings submitted to the engineer for approval before ductwork fabrication. Shop

drawings of ductwork will include duct size, insulation type, dampers, louvers, support points and sheet metal gauge.

B. Shop drawings submitted to the engineer for approval before piping fabrication. Shop

drawings of piping will include size, insulation type, valves, support points and schedule. C. Contractor to provide structural calculations for ductwork hangers and supports stamped by

a professional structural engineer.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Qualifications of Subcontractor for Heating and Ventilating. Submit documentation detailing previous experience of the subcontractor in installing, starting-up, balancing, and commissioning of large heating and ventilating systems.

1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Perform work in accordance with the editions, revisions, amendments, or supplements of applicable statutes, ordinances, codes, or regulations of Federal, State, and Local Authorities having jurisdiction in effect on the date bids are received.

B. Where approval standards have been established by OSHA, UL, ASME, AGA, AMCA, ANSI, ASHRAE, ARI, NFPA, State Fire Insurance Regulatory Body, follow these standards whether or not indicated on the Drawings and Specifications. Include cost of work required to comply with requirements of these authorities in the original proposal.

C. Requirements in reference specifications and standards are minimum for equipment, material, and work. In instances where capacities, size, or other features of equipment, devices, or materials exceed these minimums, meet listed or shown capacities.

D. Resolve code violations discovered in Contract Documents with A/E prior to Contract award. After Contract award, make corrections or additions necessary for compliance with applicable codes.

E. Arrange with local and state authorities and utility companies for permits, fees, and service connections for temporary and permanent water, sanitary sewer, storm and natural gas, verifying locations and arrangement, and pay charges including inspections.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


1.8 CONTRACT DRAWINGS

A. Drawings are generally diagrammatic and are intended to encompass a system that will not interfere with the structural and architectural design of the building. Coordinate work to avoid interferences between piping, equipment, architectural, and structural work.

B. Coordinate with architectural features, siding and screening details, and install equipment not to interfere with those items.

C. Horsepower ratings on motors are based on scheduled equipment and design conditions. No substitutions will be allowed.

D. Provide valves, stopcocks, waste cocks, strainers, and connections where shown on Drawings and where required for controlling the various pieces of equipment. Install valves where branches take off from mains for domestic water, hot water, chilled water, and natural gas.

E. Drawings are based on equipment specified. Make adjustments, modifications, or changes required, due to use of other equipment.

1.9 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Site Visitation: Visit the site of the proposed construction to become thoroughly familiar with details of work and working conditions, verify dimensions in the field, and advise A/E of discrepancies before performing Work.

B. Space Requirements: Consider space limitations imposed by contiguous work in location of equipment and material. Do not provide equipment or material which is not suitable in this respect.

C. Conceal piping and ductwork in finished areas, except in mechanical rooms, and where noted otherwise on the drawings. Route pipes and ducts through the building without interfering with other contractors’ equipment or construction.

D. Provide maximum possible clear height underneath piping and ductwork.

E. Install equipment requiring service so that it is easily accessible.

F. Compare the equipment sizes with the space allotted for installation before installation and make written notice of possible conflict. Disassemble large equipment to permit installation through normal room openings when required. Should written notice not be made in a timely manner, make adjustments and modifications necessary without additional compensation. Timely place equipment too large to fit through finished openings and stairways.

G. Site Obstructions: Drawings indicate certain information pertaining to surface and subsurface obstructions which has been taken from available drawings. Such information is not guaranteed as to accuracy of location or completeness of information.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


H. Verify with A/E, utility companies, municipalities, and other interested parties that available information has been provided before cutting or trenching operations are begun. Verify locations given.

I. Alter routing of new work should obstruction be encountered, whether or not shown on Drawings. Reroute existing lines, remove obstruction where permitted, or otherwise perform whatever work is necessary to satisfy the purpose of the new work and leave existing services and structures in a satisfactory and serviceable condition.

J. Assume total responsibility for and repair damage to existing utilities caused by construction, whether or not such existing facilities are shown. Repair the lines, if damaged.

K. Cutting and Patching: Submit written request to A/E in advance of cutting or alterations.

L. Execute cutting and demolition by methods which will prevent damages to other work and will provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repairs.

M. Restore work which has been cut or removed; install new products complying with specified products, functions, tolerances, and finishes specified.

N. Escutcheon Plates: Heavy chrome-plated or nickel-plated escutcheon plates for penetrations of finished surface. Product: B&C No. 10 with concealed hinges.

O. Fit work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, and other penetrations through surfaces. For fire-rated penetrations, provide assemblies in accordance with UL 1479 and ASTM E 814 utilizing products and materials equal to rating of surfaces penetrated.

1.10 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

A. Provide new materials and equipment by those regularly engaged in the production and manufacture of specified materials and equipment. Where UL or other agency has established standards for materials, provide materials which are listed and labeled accordingly. The commercially standard items of equipment and the specific names mentioned herein are intended to identify standards of quality and performance necessary for the proper functioning of the work.

B. Work shall be performed by workmen skilled in the trade required for the work. Install materials and equipment to present a neat appearance when completed in accordance with the approved recommendations of the manufacturer and in accordance with Contract Documents.

C. Provide labor, materials, apparatus, and appliances essential to the complete functioning of the systems described or indicated herein, or which may be reasonably implied as essential whether mentioned in the Contract Documents or not.

D. Make written request for supplementary instructions to A/E in cases of doubt as to Work intended or in the event of need for explanation thereof.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


E. Performance and material requirements scheduled or specified are minimum standards acceptable. The right to judge the quality of equipment that deviates from the Contract Documents remains solely with A/E.

F. Prior to the purchase of materials manufactured outside the United States, submit complete certifications and typical mill reports for review. Provide mill heat markings on foreign pipe delivered to job site; make available corresponding mill test reports.


A. Follow the manufacturer's directions completely in the delivery, storage, and handling of equipment and materials.

B. Store equipment in a clean, dry place protected from other construction. While stored maintain factory wrapping or tightly cover and protect equipment against dirt, water, construction debris, chemical, physical or weather damage, traffic and theft.

C. Adequately brace and package equipment to prevent breakage and distortion while in transit.

1.12 WARRANTY

A. If the Contract requires that specific listed products must perform as a system in accordance with this warranty, then extend that warranty to those listed products as a system.

B. If the Contract requires verification through testing that Products provided are Year 2010 compliant, provide, upon request, a copy of testing results which verify that Products are Year 2010 compliant.

C. Do not construe anything in this warranty to limit any rights or remedies the Owner may otherwise have under this Contract with respect to defects other than Year 2010 performance.

D. The warranty period for Contractor workmanship and operation shall be for 360 days after final completion of project and acceptance by Owner.

E. Extended Manufacturer’s Warranties shall be provided in addition to Contractor’s Warranty for a minimum period of five years.

1.13 EXCAVATION

A. Trenching and backfilling shall comply with Section 315000 – Trenching as well as provisions specified herein.

B. Trenching: Provide minimum 12 inches between outer surfaces and embankment or shoring which may be used, when excavating for manholes and similar structures. Remove unstable soil that is incapable of supporting the structure in the bottom of the excavation to the depth necessary to obtain design bearing.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


C. Protect existing utility lines that are indicated or the locations of which are made known prior to excavating and trenching and that are to be retained. Protect utility lines constructed during excavating and trenching operations, from damage during excavating, trenching, and backfilling; if damaged, repair lines as directed by utilities, Owner, and A/E. Issue notices when utility lines that are to be removed are encountered within the area of operations in ample time for the necessary measures to be taken to prevent interruption of the service.

D. Provide trenches for utilities of a depth that will provide the following minimum depths of cover from existing grade or from indicated finish grades, whichever is lower: 1-Foot Minimum Cover: Sanitary sewer, storm drainage, industrial waste, acid waste.

E. 2-Foot Minimum Cover: Domestic water, fire line.

F. Backfilling: Backfill trenches after piping, fittings, and joints have been tested and approved.

G. Backfill remainder of trenches with satisfactory materials. Backfill shall be material specified as Section 315000- Trenching. Place and compact fill as specified in Section 315000 – Trenching. Take care not to damage utility lines.

H. Backfill trench utility line in accordance with Section 330500, where trenches cross streets, driveways, building slabs, or other pavements. Compact to 95 percent of the maximum soil density as determined by ASTM D 698. Accomplish backfilling in such a manner as to permit the rolling and compaction of the filled trench with the adjoining material to provide the required bearing value so that paving of the area can proceed immediately after backfilling is complete.

1.14 WELDING

A. Weld piping and above grade steel tanks in accordance with qualified procedures using performance qualified welders and welding operators. Qualified procedures and welders in accordance with ASME Section IX. Welding procedures qualified by others and welders and welding operators qualified by another employer may be accepted as permitted by ANSI B31.1. Notify the A/E 24 hours in advance of tests, and perform the tests at the work site if practicable. Furnish A/E with a copy of qualified procedures, welder’s certificates and a list of names and identification symbols of qualified welders and welding operators. Apply welders or welding operators assigned symbols near each weld they make as permanent record.

1.15 PAINTING

A. Properly prepare surfaces to receive paint. Prime prepared surfaces and finish with two coats of exterior oil base paint. Verify primer and paint are rated for application.

B. Repair damage to factory painted finishes.

C. Remove splattered and incidental paint from mechanical equipment.

1.16 PILOT INSTALLATION


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


A. Provide a pilot installation of items of equipment which are concealed and require service, such as variable air volume boxes, fan coil units, and hot water coils. Have pilot installation approved before further installation work is performed for the particular items of equipment.

1.17 ACCESS DOORS

A. Provide access doors in walls, floors, and ceilings to permit access to equipment and piping requiring service or adjustment.

B. Valves.

C. Manual balance dampers and automatic control dampers.

D. Fire dampers, smoke dampers and smoke/fire dampers.

E. Air terminal units.

F. Duct mounted filters and coils.

G. Plumbing drainage cleanouts.

H. Other mechanical equipment indicated in mechanical equipment schedules requiring maintenance, adjustment, or operation.

I. Provide hinged access doors and frames as follows for Drywall Construction.

J. Provide with concealed spring hinges and flush screwdriver operated cam locks in sufficient number of the size of the panel. Factory prime paint surfaces not galvanized. Product: Milcor, Style DW.

K. Visible Masonry and Ceramic Tile: Milcor, Style M.

L. Gypsum and Cement Plaster: Milcor, Style K.

M. Acoustic Plaster: Reinforce panel as required to prevent sagging. Provide continuous steel piano type hinge for the length of the panel, and sleeved and grommeted screwdriver operated cam locks in sufficient number for the size of the panel. Factory prime paint surfaces not galvanized. Product: Milcor, Style AP.

N. Acoustic Tile: Milcor, Style AT.

O. Provide continuous concealed hinges and cam locks.

P. Provide UL listed 1-1/2 hour Label "B" access doors with automatic self-closing latching mechanism where required.

Q. Provide removable ceiling access tile section immediately adjacent to each mechanical or electrical device located in the ceiling plenum above removable tile ceiling.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


R. Coordinate approval and location of access doors with A/E.

1.18 NOISE AND VIBRATION

A. Provide the entire operating system and its component items of equipment free of objectionable vibration or noises. Refer to ASHRAE handbook for recommended noise criteria (NC) unless otherwise noted. Statically and dynamically balance rotating equipment, and mount or fasten so that no equipment vibration will be transmitted to the building. If objectionable noise or vibration is produced or transmitted to or through the building structure by equipment, piping, ducts, or other parts of work, rectify such conditions at no additional compensation.

1.19 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

A. Provide services of authorized representatives of manufacturer to ensure that the equipment is installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations, is operating properly, and to instruct Owner's operating personnel during start-up and operating tests of complete mechanical systems. Prove operation of equipment to A/E. Notify A/E seven days prior to beginning equipment start-up.

B. Certify in writing that these services have been performed.

C. Perform tests as specified in Section 230593

1.20 SERVICE

A. Inspect, clean, and service air filters and strainers immediately prior to final acceptance of project. Replace disposable type air filters.

B. Provide lubrication for operation of equipment until final acceptance of the equipment by A/E. Protect bearings during installation and thoroughly grease steel shafts to prevent corrosion. Provide extended lubrication lines for parts requiring lubrication which are concealed or inaccessible.

C. Provide complete and working charge of proper refrigerant, free of contaminants, into each refrigerant system. After each system has been in operation long enough to ensure completely balanced conditions, check the charge and modify it for proper operation as required.

D. Provide protective guard for belts, pulleys, gears, couplings, projecting set screws, keys, and other rotating parts which are located so a person might come in close proximity with. Construct protective guard around angle iron frame, securely bolted to apparatus; comply with safety requirements. Install guard to completely enclose drives and pulleys, and not interfere with lubrication of equipment. Provide 2-inch minimum diameter opening in fan belt guards housing for tachometer.

E. Place mechanical systems in complete working order, and clean and polish fixtures, equipment, and materials thoroughly returning to "as new" condition prior to request for final review.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


F. Remove excess material and debris. Clean out lines and fittings and adjust valves. Broom clean areas. Thoroughly clean ductwork inside and out before grilles are installed.

1.21 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Maintain a set of Contract Documents at the job site for the purpose of recording final size, location, and interrelation of work under this Division. Mark this set of drawings as the job progresses to indicate "as-built" location of equipment, including concealed piping, valves, and ductwork.

B. Obtain Drawings from A/E, at Contractor's expense, and record as-built conditions.

C. Clearly and accurately delineate the work by dimensions on the record drawings as installed, with equipment locations identified by at least two dimensions to permanent structures.

D. Final record drawings shall be marked "AS-BUILT," and signed and dated by Contractor.

E. Provide certified "AS-BUILT" drawings at the conclusion of project.

1.22 FINAL REVIEW

A. Obtain necessary Certificates of Occupancy from local authorities.

B. Submit final commissioning reports for each system and equipment.

C. Submit final approved operation and maintenance manuals including approved submittals, test reports, and "AS-BUILT" drawings prior to requesting final payment. Delivery of operation and maintenance manuals is a condition of final acceptance.

1.23 GUARANTEE

A. Guarantee materials, parts, and labor for Work for one year from the date of issuance of occupancy permit. During that period, make good faults or imperfections that may arise due to defects or omissions in materials or workmanship with no additional compensation and as directed by A/E.

B. Certain items of equipment, such as small sealed refrigeration units, are covered by the manufacturer's warranty of longer durations.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified.

2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods.

B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.


A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.

B. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.


A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.

B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

C. Revise pressure ratings and temperatures in five paragraphs and associated subparagraphs below to suit Project or add other options for specific applications.

D. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F. Manufacturers: Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.

E. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F . Manufacturers: Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.

2.5 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS

A. Units in this Article are usually furnished with EPDM sealing elements, plastic pressure plates, and carbon-steel bolts. NBR and silicone sealing elements, carbon- and stainless-steel pressure plates, and stainless-steel bolts are available for special applications.

B. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve.

C. Coordinate first subparagraph and associated subparagraphs below with Part 2 "Manufacturers" Article. Retain "Available" for nonproprietary and delete for semiproprietary specifications.

D. Manufacturers: Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

E. Sealing Elements: EPDM or NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


F. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element.

G. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

2.6 SLEEVES

A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.

C. Sleeve in paragraph below is available with many end variations.

D. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

E. PVC sleeves in first two paragraphs below may be prohibited by fire authorities having jurisdiction.

F. Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

G. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

2.7 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening.

B. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw. Finish: Polished chrome-plated and rough brass.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

G. Install piping at indicated slopes.

H. Install piping free of sags and bends.

I. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

K. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following: Delete or revise application subparagraphs and associated subparagraphs below as required for escutcheons specified in Part 2.

L. New Piping: Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.

M. Delete paragraph below if sleeves are required for core-drilled holes.

N. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

O. Retain paragraph above or below.

P. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.

Q. Edit first subparagraph and associated subparagraph below as required for 2-inch (50-mm) extension above floor.

R. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

S. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.

T. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed. Edit subparagraph below as required for seismic design conditions. Coordinate sleeve requirements with Division 23 Section "HVAC Insulation."

U. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


V. Edit pipe size range in first two subparagraphs below to suit Project. Confirm that PVC materials are allowed for sleeves by fire authorities having jurisdiction.

W. PVC Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6.

X. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum-board partitions.

Y. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.

Z. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

AA. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.

BB. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter.

CC. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

DD. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

EE. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

FF. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

GG. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.

3.2 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION


B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

C. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


D. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID.

E. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.

F. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

B. Edit dielectric connection types in two subparagraphs below for each fluid.

C. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.

D. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.

3.4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated.

B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install HVAC equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.

3.5 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Refer to Division 5 Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor HVAC materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland




CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


This page intentionally left blank,


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 23 05 13 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

PART 1 -GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following:

1. Motor controllers.

2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.

3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.

4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in HVAC equipment schedules or other Sections.

B. Comply with NEMA MG 1-2007 unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS

A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet above sea level.

B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.

2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS

A. Description: NEMA MG 1-2007, Design B, medium induction motor.

B. Efficiency: Premium-Efficiency or Energy-Efficient, per the Drawings and as defined in NEMA MG 1-2007.

C. Service Factor: 1.15.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


D. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.

E. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

F. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.

G. Insulation: Class F.

H. Code Letter Designation:

1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G.

2. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.

I. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor frame sizes smaller than 324T.

2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box, suited to control method.

B. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.

1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses pro-duced by pulse-width modulated inverters.

2. Energy-Efficient and Premium-Efficiency Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation.

3. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation.

4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1-2007 requirements for thermally pro-tected motors.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


5. Motor Efficiencies

6. Minimum nominal enclosed motor efficiencies shall be as follows as defined by Nema MG 1-2007:

7. Minimum nominal open motor efficiencies shall be as follows as defined by Nema MG 1-2007:

2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS

A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and require-ments of specific motor application:

1. Permanent-split capacitor.

2. Split phase.

Motor Horsepower TEFC Premium

Efficiency 4-pole, 1800 rpm

TEFC Energy Effi-cient 4-pole, 1800

rpm

TEFC Premium


TEFC Energy Effi-cient 6-pole, 1200

rpm

1 85.5 82.5 82.5 80.0 1.5 86.5 84.0 87.5 85.5 2 86.5 84.0 88.5 86.5 3 89.5 87.5 89.5 87.5 5 89.5 87.5 89.5 87.5

7.5 91.7 89.5 91.0 89.5 10 91.7 89.5 91.0 89.5 15 92.4 91.0 91.7 90.2 20 93.0 91.0 91.7 90.2 25 93.6 92.4 93.0 91.7 30 93.6 92.4 93.0 91.7

Motor Horsepower ODP Premium


ODP Energy Effi-cient 4-pole, 1800

rpm

ODP Premium


ODP Energy Effi-cient 6-pole, 1200

rpm

1 85.5 82.5 82.5 80.0 1.5 86.5 84.0 86.5 84.0 2 86.5 84.0 87.5 85.5 3 89.5 86.5 88.5 86.5 5 89.5 87.5 89.5 87.5

7.5 91.0 88.5 90.2 88.5 10 91.7 89.5 91.7 90.2 15 93.0 91.0 91.7 90.2 20 93.0 91.0 92.4 91.0 25 93.6 91.7 93.0 91.7 30 94.1 92.4 93.6 92.4


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


3. Capacitor start, inductor run.

4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.

B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.

C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.

E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature re-turns to normal range.

PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Applicable)



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 23 05 19 - METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 -GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Light-activated thermometers.

2. Thermowells.

3. Dial-type pressure gages.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 LIGHT-ACTIVATED THERMOMETERS

A. Direct-Mounted, Light-Activated Thermometers:


a. Flo Fab Inc.

b. REOTEMP Instrument Corporation.

c. Trerice, H. O. Co.

d. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

e. WIKA Instrument Corporation - USA.

f. Winters Instruments - U.S.

2. Case: Plastic; 7-inch nominal size unless otherwise indicated.

3. Scale(s): Deg F.

4. Case Form: Adjustable angle.

5. Connector: 1-1/4 inches, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.

6. Stem: Aluminum and of length to suit installation.

a. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem.

7. Display: Digital.

8. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 deg F.

9. Resolution: 0.1 deg F

2.2 THERMOWELLS

A. Thermowells:

1. Standard: ASME B40.200.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


2. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting.

3. Material for Use with Copper Tubing: CNR or CUNI.

4. Material for Use with Steel Piping: CRES or CSA.

5. Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is indicated.

6. External Threads: NPS 1/2, NPS 3/4, or NPS 1, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.

7. Internal Threads: 1/2, 3/4, and 1 inch , with ASME B1.1 screw threads.

8. Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem.

9. Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem.

10. Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing.

11. Bushings: For converting size of thermowell's internal screw thread to size of ther-mometer connection.

B. Heat-Transfer Medium: Mixture of graphite and glycerin.

2.3 PRESSURE GAGES

A. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages:


a. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge.

b. Ashcroft Inc.

c. Ernst Flow Industries.

d. Flo Fab Inc.

e. Marsh Bellofram.

f. Miljoco Corporation.

g. Noshok.

h. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group.

i. REOTEMP Instrument Corporation.

j. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Company.

k. Trerice, H. O. Co.

l. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

m. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

n. WIKA Instrument Corporation - USA.

o. Winters Instruments - U.S.

2. Standard: ASME B40.100.

3. Case: Sealed type(s); cast aluminum or drawn steel; 4-1/2-inch nominal diameter.

4. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated.

5. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


6. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.

7. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in psi.

8. Pointer: Dark-colored metal.

9. Window: plastic.

10. Ring: Metal.

11. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half of scale range.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install thermowells with socket extending one-third of pipe diameter and in vertical position in piping tees.

B. Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors. Include bushings if required to match sizes.

C. Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping.

D. Fill thermowells with heat-transfer medium.

E. Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust vertical and tilted positions.

F. Install remote-mounted thermometer bulbs in thermowells and install cases on panels; con-nect cases with tubing and support tubing to prevent kinks. Use minimum tubing length.

G. Install duct-thermometer mounting brackets in walls of ducts. Attach to duct with screws.

H. Install direct-mounted pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at the most readable position.

I. Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gage for fluids (except steam).

J. Install valve and syphon fitting in piping for each pressure gage for steam.

K. Install permanent indicators on walls or brackets in accessible and readable positions.

L. Install connection fittings in accessible locations for attachment to portable indicators.

M. Install thermometers in the following locations:

1. Inlet and outlet of each chiller chilled-water and condenser-water connection at chill-ers and heat exchangers.

N. Install pressure gages in the following locations:

1. Discharge of each pressure-reducing valve.

2. Inlet and outlet of each chiller chilled-water and condenser-water connection at chill-ers and heat exchangers.

3. Suction and discharge of each pump.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and mainte-nance of meters, gages, machines, and equipment.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.

3.4 PRESSURE-GAGE SCHEDULE

A. Pressure gages at discharge of each pressure-reducing valve shall be the following:

1. Sealed, direct -mounted, metal case.

B. Pressure gages at inlet and outlet of each chiller chilled-water and condenser-water con-nection shall be the following:


C. Pressure gages at suction and discharge of each pump shall be the following:


3.5 PRESSURE-GAGE SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Chilled-Water Piping: 0 to 100 psi.

B. Scale Range for Condenser-Water Piping: 0 to 100 psi.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 23 05 23 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 -GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Bronze angle valves.

2. Brass ball valves.

3. Bronze ball valves.

4. Iron ball valves.

5. Iron, single-flange butterfly valves.

6. Iron, grooved-end butterfly valves.

7. High-performance butterfly valves.

8. Bronze lift check valves.

9. Bronze swing check valves.

10. Iron swing check valves.

11. Iron swing check valves with closure control.

12. Iron, grooved-end swing-check valves.

13. Iron, center-guided check valves.

14. Iron, plate-type check valves.

15. Bronze gate valves.

16. Iron gate valves.

17. Bronze globe valves.

18. Iron globe valves.

19. Lubricated plug valves.

20. Eccentric plug valves.

21. Chainwheels.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland



1. Division 23 HVAC piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only.

2. Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and schedules.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CWP: Cold working pressure.

B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber.

C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.

D. NRS: Nonrising stem.

E. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.

F. RS: Rising stem.

G. SWP: Steam working pressure.


A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated.


A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer.

B. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria.

2. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves.

3. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.


A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.

2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.

3. Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling.

4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.

5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


6. Block check valves in either closed or open position.

B. Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Maintain valve end protection.

2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES

A. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for sys-tem pressures and temperatures.

B. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

C. Valve Actuator Types:

1. Gear Actuator: For quarter-turn valves NPS 8 and larger.

2. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types.

3. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and smaller except plug valves.

4. Wrench: For plug valves with square heads. Furnish Owner with 1 wrench for every 5 plug valves, for each size square plug-valve head.

5. Chainwheel: Device for attachment to valve handwheel, stem, or other actuator; of size and with chain for mounting height, as indicated in the "Valve Installation" Article.

D. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extensions and the following features:

1. Gate Valves: With rising stem.

2. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or dis-turbing insulation.

3. Butterfly Valves: With extended neck.

E. Valve-End Connections:

1. Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves.

2. Grooved: With grooves according to AWWA C606.

3. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18.

4. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


F. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

2.2 BRONZE ANGLE VALVES

A. Class 125, Bronze Angle Valves with Bronze Disc:


a. Hammond Valve.

b. Milwaukee Valve Company.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1.

b. CWP Rating: 200 psig.

c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet.

d. Ends: Threaded.

e. Stem and Disc: Bronze.

f. Packing: Asbestos free.

g. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum.

B. Class 125, Bronze Angle Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:


a. American Valve, Inc.

b. NIBCO INC.

2. Description:




d. Ends: Threaded.

e. Stem: Bronze.

f. Disc: PTFE or TFE.

g. Packing: Asbestos free.

h. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum.

C. Class 150, Bronze Angle Valves with Bronze Disc:


a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


b. Kitz Corporation.

2. Description:



c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and union-ring bonnet.

d. Ends: Threaded.




D. Class 150, Bronze Angle Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:


a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.

b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.

c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.

d. Hammond Valve.

e. Milwaukee Valve Company.

f. NIBCO INC.

g. Powell Valves.

2. Description:




d. Ends: Threaded.

e. Stem: Bronze.




2.3 BRONZE LIFT CHECK VALVES

A. Class 125, Lift Check Valves with Bronze Disc:





CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division..

2. Description:



c. Body Design: Vertical flow.

d. Body Material: ASTM B 61 or ASTM B 62, bronze.

e. Ends: Threaded.

f. Disc: Bronze.

B. Class 125, Lift Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:


a. Flo Fab Inc.

b. Hammond Valve.

c. Kitz Corporation.

d. Milwaukee Valve Company.

e. Mueller Steam Specialty; a division of SPX Corporation.

f. NIBCO INC.

g. Red-White Valve Corporation.

h. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:



c. Body Design: Vertical flow.

d. Body Material: ASTM B 61 or ASTM B 62, bronze.

e. Ends: Threaded.

f. Disc: NBR, PTFE, or TFE.

2.4 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc:



b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.

c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.

d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


e. Hammond Valve.

f. Kitz Corporation.

g. Milwaukee Valve Company.

h. NIBCO INC.

i. Powell Valves.

j. Red-White Valve Corporation.

k. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

l. Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc.

2. Description:



c. Body Design: Horizontal flow.

d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze.

e. Ends: Threaded.

f. Disc: Bronze.

B. Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:





d. Hammond Valve.

e. Kitz Corporation.

f. Milwaukee Valve Company.

g. NIBCO INC.

h. Red-White Valve Corporation.

i. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc..

2. Description:





e. Ends: Threaded.


C. Class 150, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc:


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland









g. NIBCO INC.


i. Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc.

2. Description:





e. Ends: Threaded.

f. Disc: Bronze.

D. Class 150, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:




c. Hammond Valve.


e. NIBCO INC.

f. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:





e. Ends: Threaded.


2.5 IRON SWING CHECK VALVES


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


A. Class 125, Iron Swing Check Valves with Metal Seats:





d. Hammond Valve.


f. Legend Valve.


h. NIBCO INC.

i. Powell Valves.


k. Sure Flow Equipment Inc.

l. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

m. Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-71, Type I.

b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12, CWP Rating: 200 psig.

c. NPS 14 to NPS 24, CWP Rating: 150 psig.

d. Body Design: Clear or full waterway.

e. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet.

f. Ends: Flanged.

g. Trim: Bronze.

h. Gasket: Asbestos free.

B. Class 125, Iron Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic-to-Metal Seats:



b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.

2. Description:






CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland



f. Ends: Flanged.

g. Trim: Composition.

h. Seat Ring: Bronze.

i. Disc Holder: Bronze.

j. Disc: PTFE or TFE.

k. Gasket: Asbestos free.

C. Class 250, Iron Swing Check Valves with Metal Seats:





d. Hammond Valve.


f. NIBCO INC.

g. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:






f. Ends: Flanged.

g. Trim: Bronze.

h. Gasket: Asbestos free.

2.6 IRON, CENTER-GUIDED CHECK VALVES

A. Class 125, Iron, Compact-Wafer, Center-Guided Check Valves with Metal Seat:


a. Anvil International, Inc.

b. APCO Willamette Valve and Primer Corporation.

c. Crispin Valve.

d. DFT Inc.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


e. Flo Fab Inc.

f. GA Industries, Inc.

g. Hammond Valve.

h. Metraflex, Inc.

i. Milwaukee Valve Company.

j. Mueller Steam Specialty; a division of SPX Corporation.

k. NIBCO INC.

l. Spence Strainers International; a division of CIRCOR International.

m. Sure Flow Equipment Inc.

n. Val-Matic Valve & Manufacturing Corp.

o. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-125.



d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron.

e. Style: Compact wafer.

f. Seat: Bronze.

B. Class 125, Iron, Globe, Center-Guided Check Valves with Metal Seat:


a. APCO Willamette Valve and Primer Corporation.

b. Crispin Valve.

c. DFT Inc.

d. Flomatic Corporation.

e. Hammond Valve.

f. Metraflex, Inc.


h. Mueller Steam Specialty; a division of SPX Corporation.

i. NIBCO INC.

j. Spence Strainers International; a division of CIRCOR International.

k. Sure Flow Equipment Inc.

l. Val-Matic Valve & Manufacturing Corp.

m. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland






e. Style: Globe, spring loaded.

f. Ends: Flanged.

g. Seat: Bronze.

C. Class 150, Iron, Compact-Wafer, Center-Guided Check Valves with Metal Seat:



b. Crispin Valve.

c. Val-Matic Valve & Manufacturing Corp.

2. Description:




d. Body Material: ASTM A 395/A 395M or ASTM A 536, ductile iron.


f. Seat: Bronze.

D. Class 150, Iron, Globe, Center-Guided Check Valves with Metal Seat:



b. Crispin Valve.


2. Description:






f. Ends: Flanged.

g. Seat: Bronze.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


E. Class 250, Iron, Compact-Wafer, Center-Guided Check Valves with Metal Seat:



b. Crispin Valve.

c. DFT Inc.

d. Flo Fab Inc.

e. Hammond Valve.

f. Metraflex, Inc.


h. NIBCO INC.

i. Sure Flow Equipment Inc.

j. Val-Matic Valve & Manufacturing Corp.

2. Description:





e. Style: Compact wafer, spring loaded.

f. Seat: Bronze.

F. Class 250, Iron, Globe, Center-Guided Check Valves with Metal Seat:



b. Crispin Valve.

c. DFT Inc.

d. Flomatic Corporation.

e. Hammond Valve.

f. Metraflex, Inc.


h. Mueller Steam Specialty; a division of SPX Corporation.

i. NIBCO INC.


2. Description:



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland






f. Ends: Flanged.

g. Seat: Bronze.

G. Class 300, Iron, Compact-Wafer, Center-Guided Check Valves with Metal Seat:



b. Crispin Valve.


2. Description:






f. Seat: Bronze.

H. Class 300, Iron, Globe, Center-Guided Check Valves with Metal Seat:



b. Crispin Valve.


2. Description:






f. Ends: Flanged.

g. Seat: Bronze.

I. Class 125, Iron, Compact-Wafer, Center-Guided Check Valves with Resilient Seat:


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland




b. Crispin Valve.

c. DFT Inc.

d. Flo Fab Inc.

e. Hammond Valve.


g. NIBCO INC.

h. Spence Strainers International; a division of CIRCOR International.



2. Description:






f. Seat: EPDM or NBR.

J. Class 125, Iron, Globe, Center-Guided Check Valves with Resilient Seat:


a. Anvil International, Inc.

b. APCO Willamette Valve and Primer Corporation.

c. Crispin Valve.

d. DFT Inc.

e. GA Industries, Inc.

f. Hammond Valve.


h. NIBCO INC.



2. Description:




CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland





f. Ends: Flanged.

g. Seat: EPDM or NBR.

K. Class 150, Iron, Compact-Wafer, Center-Guided Check Valves with Resilient Seat:



b. Crispin Valve.


2. Description:







L. Class 150, Iron, Globe, Center-Guided Check Valves with Resilient Seat:



b. Crispin Valve.

c. DFT Inc.

d. Val-Matic Valve & Manufacturing Corp.

2. Description:






f. Ends: Flanged.


M. Class 250, Iron, Compact-Wafer, Center-Guided Check Valves with Resilient Seat:


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland




b. Crispin Valve.

c. DFT Inc.

d. Flo Fab Inc.

e. Hammond Valve.


g. NIBCO INC.

h. Sure Flow Equipment Inc.

i. Val-Matic Valve & Manufacturing Corp..

2. Description:







N. Class 250, Iron, Globe, Center-Guided Check Valves with Resilient Seat:



b. Crispin Valve.

c. DFT Inc.

d. Hammond Valve.


f. NIBCO INC.

g. Val-Matic Valve & Manufacturing Corp.

2. Description:






f. Ends: Flanged.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland



O. Class 300, Iron, Compact-Wafer, Center-Guided Check Valves with Resilient Seat:



b. Crispin Valve.


2. Description:







P. Class 300, Iron, Globe, Center-Guided Check Valves with Resilient Seat:



b. Crispin Valve.

c. Val-Matic Valve & Manufacturing Corp..

2. Description:






f. Ends: Flanged.


2.7 IRON, PLATE-TYPE CHECK VALVES

A. Class 125, Iron, Dual-Plate Check Valves with Metal Seat:




CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland



c. Flomatic Corporation.

d. Mueller Steam Specialty; a division of SPX Corporation.

2. Description:

a. Standard: API 594.



d. Body Design: Wafer, spring-loaded plates.

e. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron.

f. Seat: Bronze.

B. Class 150, Iron, Dual-Plate Check Valves with Metal Seat:




c. Mueller Steam Specialty; a division of SPX Corporation.


2. Description:





e. Body Material: ASTM A 395/A 395M or ASTM A 536, ductile iron.

f. Seat: Bronze.

C. Class 250, Iron, Dual-Plate Check Valves with Metal Seat:




2. Description:






CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland



f. Seat: Bronze.

D. Class 300, Iron, Dual-Plate Check Valves with Metal Seat:




c. Mueller Steam Specialty; a division of SPX Corporation.


2. Description:






f. Seat: Bronze.

E. Class 125, Iron, Single-Plate Check Valves with Resilient Seat:


a. Flo Fab Inc.

b. Sure Flow Equipment Inc.

2. Description:




d. Body Design: Wafer, spring-loaded plate.



F. Class 125, Iron, Dual-Plate Check Valves with Resilient Seat:



b. Cooper Cameron Valves TVB Techno.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.


e. NIBCO INC.

f. Spence Strainers International; a division of CIRCOR International.

g. Sure Flow Equipment Inc.


2. Description:







G. Class 150, Iron, Dual-Plate Check Valves with Resilient Seat:






2. Description:







H. Class 250, Iron, Wafer, Single-Plate Check Valves with Resilient Seat:


a. Sure Flow Equipment Inc.

2. Description:




CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland



d. Body Design: Wafer, spring-loaded plate.



I. Class 250, Iron, Dual-Plate Check Valves with Resilient Seat:




c. Sure Flow Equipment Inc.

2. Description:







J. Class 300, Iron, Dual-Plate Check Valves with Resilient Seat:



b. Val-Matic Valve & Manufacturing Corp.

2. Description:







2.8 BRONZE GATE VALVES

A. Class 125, NRS Bronze Gate Valves:



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland






e. Hammond Valve.



h. NIBCO INC.

i. Powell Valves.


k. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

l. Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc.

2. Description:




d. Ends: Threaded or solder joint.

e. Stem: Bronze.

f. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze.



B. Class 125, RS Bronze Gate Valves:






e. Hammond Valve.



h. NIBCO INC.

i. Powell Valves.

j. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

k. Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


2. Description:





e. Stem: Bronze.




C. Class 150, NRS Bronze Gate Valves:


a. Hammond Valve.

b. Kitz Corporation.

c. Milwaukee Valve Company.

d. NIBCO INC.

e. Powell Valves.

f. Red-White Valve Corporation.


2. Description:




d. Ends: Threaded.

e. Stem: Bronze.




D. Class 150, RS Bronze Gate Valves:




c. Hammond Valve.

d. Kitz Corporation.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland



f. NIBCO INC.

g. Powell Valves.



2. Description:




d. Ends: Threaded.

e. Stem: Bronze.




2.9 IRON GATE VALVES

A. Class 125, NRS, Iron Gate Valves:





d. Flo Fab Inc.

e. Hammond Valve.


g. Legend Valve.

h. Milwaukee Valve Company.

i. NIBCO INC.

j. Powell Valves.

k. Red-White Valve Corporation.



2. Description:





CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet.

e. Ends: Flanged.

f. Trim: Bronze.

g. Disc: Solid wedge.

h. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free.

B. Class 125, OS&Y, Iron Gate Valves:





d. Flo Fab Inc.

e. Hammond Valve.


g. Legend Valve.

h. Milwaukee Valve Company.

i. NIBCO INC.

j. Powell Valves.

k. Red-White Valve Corporation.



2. Description:





e. Ends: Flanged.

f. Trim: Bronze.



C. Class 250, NRS, Iron Gate Valves:





CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


c. NIBCO INC.

2. Description:





e. Ends: Flanged.

f. Trim: Bronze.



D. Class 250, OS&Y, Iron Gate Valves:




c. Hammond Valve.


e. NIBCO INC.

f. Powell Valves.


2. Description:





e. Ends: Flanged.

f. Trim: Bronze.



3. BRONZE GLOBE VALVES

E. Class 125, Bronze Globe Valves with Bronze Disc:




CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland



c. Hammond Valve.

d. Kitz Corporation.


f. NIBCO INC.

g. Powell Valves.


i. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

j. Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc.

2. Description:








F. Class 125, Bronze Globe Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:




c. NIBCO INC.

d. Red-White Valve Corporation.

2. Description:





e. Stem: Bronze.




G. Class 150, Bronze Globe Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland




b. Hammond Valve.

c. Kitz Corporation.


e. NIBCO INC.

f. Powell Valves.

g. Red-White Valve Corporation.



2. Description:




d. Ends: Threaded.

e. Stem: Bronze.




2.10 LUBRICATED PLUG VALVES

A. Class 125, Regular-Gland, Lubricated Plug Valves with Threaded Ends:


a. Nordstrom Valves, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-78, Type II.



d. Body Material: ASTM A 48/A 48M or ASTM A 126, cast iron with lubrication-sealing system.

e. Pattern: Regular or short.

f. Plug: Cast iron or bronze with sealant groove.

B. Class 125, Regular-Gland, Lubricated Plug Valves with Flanged Ends:


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland




2. Description:







C. Class 125, Cylindrical, Lubricated Plug Valves with Threaded Ends:


a. Homestead Valve; a division of Olson Technologies, Inc.

b. Milliken Valve Company.

c. R & M Energy Systems; a unit of Robbins & Myers, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-78, Type IV.






D. Class 125, Cylindrical, Lubricated Plug Valves with Flanged Ends:





2. Description:




CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland






E. Class 250, Regular-Gland, Lubricated Plug Valves with Threaded Ends:



2. Description:







F. Class 250, Regular-Gland, Lubricated Plug Valves with Flanged Ends:



2. Description:







G. Class 250, Cylindrical, Lubricated Plug Valves with Threaded Ends:





CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland



2. Description:







H. Class 250, Cylindrical, Lubricated Plug Valves with Flanged Ends:




c. R & M Energy Systems, a unit of Robbins & Myers, Inc.

2. Description:




d. Body Material: ASTM A 48/A 48M or ASTM A 126, Grade 40 cast iron with lubri-cation-sealing system.



2.11 CHAINWHEELS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the follow-ing:

1. Babbitt Steam Specialty Co.

2. Roto Hammer Industries.

3. Trumbull Industries.

B. Description: Valve actuation assembly with sprocket rim, brackets, and chain.

1. Brackets: Type, number, size, and fasteners required to mount actuator on valve.

2. Attachment: For connection to butterfly valve stems.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


3. Sprocket Rim with Chain Guides: Bronze, of type and size required for valve.

4. Chain: Brass, of size required to fit sprocket rim.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.

B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations.

C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material com-position is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.

E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

E. Install chainwheels on operators for butterfly valves NPS 4 and larger and more than 96 inches above floor. Extend chains to 72 inches above finished floor.

F. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:

1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.

2. Center-Guided and Plate-Type Check Valves: In horizontal or vertical position, be-tween flanges.

3. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.

3.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. If valve applications are not indicated on the Drawings or other Sections, use the following:


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


1. Shutoff Service: Ball, butterfly, gate, or plug valves.

2. Butterfly Valve Dead-End Service: Single-flange (lug) type.

3. Throttling Service except Steam: Ball, or butterfly valves.

4. Pump-Discharge Check Valves:

a. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves with bronze or nonmetallic disc.

b. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Iron swing check valves with lever and weight or with spring or iron, center-guided, metal or resilient-seat check valves.

B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.

C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.

2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end option is indicated elsewhere.

3. For Copper Tubing, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends.

4. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends.

5. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end option is indicated elsewhere.

6. For Steel Piping, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends.

7. For Grooved-End Steel Piping except Steam and Steam Condensate Piping: Valve ends may be grooved.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 23 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 -GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal pipe hangers and supports.



4. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.

5. Fastener systems.

6. Pipe stands.




2. Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for vibration isolation devices.

3. Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct hangers and supports.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.


A. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for HVAC piping and equipment shall with-stand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7 and California Building Code 2007 requirements.

1. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting com-bined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of sup-ported equipment and connected systems and components.

3. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and obtain approval from authorities having jurisdiction.




CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the fol-lowing; include Product Data for components:



3. Pipe stands.



A. Welding certificates.


A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.

2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.

3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.

4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to support bearing surface of piping.

5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.

B. Copper Pipe Hangers:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-fabricated components.

2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper-coated steel.

2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, sad-dles, and U-bolts.

2.3 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems:


a. Allied Tube & Conduit.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.

c. Flex-Strut Inc.

d. GS Metals Corp.

e. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

f. Unistrut Corporation; Tyco International, Ltd.

g. Wesanco, Inc.

2. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly for supporting multiple parallel pipes.

3. Standard: MFMA-4.

4. Channels: Continuous slotted steel channel with inturned lips.

5. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped steel nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel.


7. Metallic Coating: Mill galvanized.

B. Non-MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems:


a. Anvil International; a subsidiary of Mueller Water Products Inc.

b. Empire Industries, Inc.

c. ERICO International Corporation.

d. Haydon Corporation; H-Strut Division.

e. NIBCO INC.

f. PHD Manufacturing, Inc.

g. PHS Industries, Inc.

2. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel channels, accessories, fittings, and other components for supporting multiple parallel pipes.

3. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4.

4. Channels: Continuous slotted steel channel with inturned lips.

5. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped steel nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel.


7. Coating: Mill galvanized.

2.4 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS


1. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.

2. Clement Support Services.

3. ERICO International Corporation.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


4. National Pipe Hanger Corporation.

5. PHS Industries, Inc.

6. Pipe Shields, Inc.; a subsidiary of Piping Technology & Products, Inc.

7. Piping Technology & Products, Inc.

8. Rilco Manufacturing Co., Inc.

9. Value Engineered Products, Inc.

B. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig or ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier.

C. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.

D. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

E. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambi-ent air temperature.

2.5 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel anchors, for use in hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

2.6 PIPE STANDS

A. General Requirements for Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated assemblies made of manufactured corrosion-resistant components to support roof-mounted piping.

B. Compact Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic unit with integral-rod roller, pipe clamps, or V-shaped cradle to support pipe, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

C. Low-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic base unit with plastic roller, for roof instal-lation without membrane penetration.

D. High-Type, Single-Pipe Stand:

1. Description: Assembly of base, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe support, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

2. Base: Plastic.

3. Vertical Members: Two or more cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel, continuous-thread rods.

4. Horizontal Member: Cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel rod with plastic or stainless-steel, roller-type pipe support.

E. High-Type, Multiple-Pipe Stand:


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


1. Description: Assembly of bases, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe supports, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

2. Bases: One or more; plastic.

3. Vertical Members: Two or more protective-coated-steel channels.

4. Horizontal Member: Protective-coated-steel channel.

5. Pipe Supports: Galvanized-steel, clevis-type pipe hangers.

F. Curb-Mounted-Type Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe supports made from struc-tural-steel shapes, continuous-thread rods, and rollers, for mounting on permanent station-ary roof curb.


A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural car-bon-steel shapes.


A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and gal-vanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi , 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 -EXECUTION


A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure.

B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Ar-range for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping, and sup-port together on field-assembled metal framing systems.

D. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

E. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasten-ers according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.

2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and com-pletely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Pipe Stand Installation:

1. Pipe Stand Types except Curb-Mounted Type: Assemble components and mount on smooth roof surface. Do not penetrate roof membrane.

2. Curb-Mounted-Type Pipe Stands: Assemble components or fabricate pipe stand and mount on permanent, stationary roof curb. See Division 07 Section "Roof Accesso-ries" for curbs.

G. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.

H. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

I. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

J. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

K. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install addi-tional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 4 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of in-serts.

L. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

M. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not ex-ceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

N. Insulated Piping:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation.

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield in-sert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2 : 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.

b. NPS 4 : 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.

c. NPS 5 and NPS 6 : 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.

d. NPS 8 to NPS 14 : 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick.

5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicate-insulation in-serts of length at least as long as protective shield.

6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.


A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to sup-port equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.3 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the following:




4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.

3.5 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas imme-diately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Touchup: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 09 painting Sections.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply gal-vanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports metal trapeze pipe hangers and metal framing systems and attachments for general service applications.

F. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper attachments for copper piping and tubing.

G. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

H. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.

I. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as speci-fied in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of up to 1050 deg F ,pipes NPS 4 to NPS 24 , requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.

3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 36 , requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.

4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 24 if little or no insulation is required.

5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.

6. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 8.

7. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated, sta-tionary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

8. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

9. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsu-lated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


10. Split Pipe Ring with or without Turnbuckle Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 8.

11. Extension Hinged or Two-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 3.

12. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

13. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or con-traction.

14. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate.

15. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate, and with U-bolt to retain pipe.

16. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 if vertical adjustment is required, with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.

17. Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30, from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

18. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 24, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

19. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42 if longi-tudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical ad-justment is not necessary.

20. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 24 if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and ver-tical adjustment is not necessary.

21. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 30 if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addi-tion to expansion and contraction.

J. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping sys-tem Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24.

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

K. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.

2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.

4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of building attachments.

5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


L. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to sus-pend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.

3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles.

4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.

5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.

6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.

7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tan-gent to flange edge.

8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.

9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-beams for heavy loads.

10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I-beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.

11. Malleable-Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to structural steel.

12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.

b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.

c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.

13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.

14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is re-quired.

15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear horizontal movement where headroom is limited.

M. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with in-sulation that matches adjoining insulation.

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufac-turer to prevent crushing insulation.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

N. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping move-ment.

2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not ex-ceed 1-1/4 inches.

3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41, roll hanger with springs.

4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal ex-pansion in piping systems.

5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger.

6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from base support.

7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from trapeze support.

8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These supports include the following types:

a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.

b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.

c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member.

O. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

P. Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

Q. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building at-tachments where required in concrete construction.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland




CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 23 05 48 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 -GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Isolation pads.

2. Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts.

3. Restrained spring isolators.

4. Spring hangers with vertical-limit stops.

5. Seismic snubbers.

6. Restraining braces and cables.

7. Inertia vibration isolation equipment bases.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. IBC: International Building Code.






a. Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an agency acceptable to au-thorities having jurisdiction.

b. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with requirements.

3. Interlocking Snubbers: Include ratings for horizontal, vertical, and combined loads.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


1. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment weight and operation, seismic forces required to select vibration isolators, seismic restraints, and for designing vibration isolation bases.

a. Coordinate design calculations with wind load calculations required for equip-ment mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other Division 23 Sections for equipment mounted outdoors.

2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail overall dimensions, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails, base weights, equipment static loads, power transmission, component mis-alignment, and cantilever loads.


a. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic restraints. Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads.

b. Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and spacings. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events. Indicate association with vibration isolation devices.

c. Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By an agency acceptable to au-thorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum ratings of restraint items and the basis for approval (tests or calculations).


A. Welding certificates.


A. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are more stringent.

B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

C. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall bear anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD, preapproval by ICC-ES, or preapproval by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maxi-mum seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to rat-ings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified pro-fessional engineer.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. Vibrex, M.W. Sausse.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland





5. California Dynamics Corporation.

6. Isolation Technology, Inc.

7. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.

8. Vibration Isolation.

9. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.

B. Pads: Arranged in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area.

1. Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant hermetically sealed compressed fiberglass or natural rubber.

a. Provide neoprene isolation grommets where applicable.

C. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic or limit-stop restraint.

1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to weight being removed; factory-drilled baseplate bonded to 1-inch thick fiberglass, or 3/4-inch thick natural rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjust-able equipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.

2. Restraint: Seismic or limit stop as required for equipment and authorities having juris-diction.

3. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load.

4. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.

5. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.

6. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without de-formation or failure.

D. Spring Hangers with Vertical-Limit Stop: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and insert in compression and with a vertical-limit stop.

1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reduc-ing isolation efficiency.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland





6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.

7. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower threaded rod.

8. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and sup-port spring coil.

2.2 VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT BASES

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product in-dicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:










B. Inertia Base: Factory-fabricated, welded, structural-steel bases and rails ready for place-ment of cast-in-place concrete.

1. Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1-inch clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide bases or rails.

2. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. Bases shall have shape to accommodate supported equipment.

3. Support Brackets: Factory-welded steel brackets on frame for outrigger isolation mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support.

4. Fabrication: Fabricate steel templates to hold equipment anchor-bolt sleeves and an-chors in place during placement of concrete. Obtain anchor-bolt templates from sup-ported equipment manufacturer.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland



A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product in-dicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:







7. Hilti, Inc.

8. Loos & Co.; Cableware Division.



B. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and applica-tions shall be as defined in reports by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdic-tion.

1. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected.

C. Snubbers: Factory fabricated using welded structural-steel shapes and plates, anchor bolts, and replaceable resilient isolation washers and bushings.

1. Anchor bolts for attaching to concrete shall be seismic-rated, drill-in, and stud-wedge or female-wedge type.

2. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene.

3. Maximum 1/4-inch air gap, and minimum 1/4-inch- thick resilient cushion.

D. Channel Support System: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of slotted steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosion-resistant coating; and rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.

E. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603 galvanized-steel cables with end connections made of steel assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; and with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement.

F. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Steel channel sleeve with internally bolted connections to hanger rod.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


G. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor Bolts: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and studs.

H. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant neoprene, with a flat washer face.

I. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. Minimum length of eight times diameter.

J. Adhesive Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing polyvinyl or ure-thane methacrylate-based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid mortar adhe-sive. Provide anchor bolts and hardware with zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for an-chor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.


A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested equipment before shipping.


2. All hardware shall be galvanized. Hot-dip galvanize metal components for exterior use or if noted per the Drawings.



PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION




3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Multiple Pipe Supports: Secure pipes to trapeze member with clamps approved for applica-tion by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Draw-ings to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


C. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within specified loading limits.

3.3 VIBRATION-CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Restraints:

1. Install seismic snubbers on HVAC equipment mounted on vibration isolators. Locate snubbers as close as possible to vibration isolators and bolt to equipment base and supporting structure.

2. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance be-tween anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch .

3. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals for component.

B. Piping Restraints:

1. Comply with requirements in MSS SP-127.

2. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet o.c., and longitudinal supports a maxi-mum of 80 feet o.c.

3. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet.


D. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to au-thorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals for component.

E. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to pro-vide resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base.

F. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.

G. Drilled-in Anchors:




4. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to in-stallation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air pockets in the adhesive.


6. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior applications.


A. Install flexible connections in piping where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sec-tions or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where the connections terminate with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one supporting the connections as they approach equipment. Comply with re-quirements in Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping" for piping flexible connections.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight.

B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation.

C. Adjust active height of spring isolators.

D. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 23 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 -GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Equipment labels.

2. Warning signs and labels.

3. Pipe labels.

4. Valve tags.



B. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the pro-posed content for each label.

C. Valve numbering scheme.

D. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of sur-faces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Plastic Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engrav-ing, 1/16 inch thick.

2. Letter Color: White.

3. Background Color: Black.

4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.

5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger let-tering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

7. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with sub-strate.

B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.2 PIPE LABELS

A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with letter-ing indicating service, and showing flow direction.

B. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.

C. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches.

2.3 VALVE TAGS

A. Valve Tags: Engraved with 3/8-inch letters and numbers for piping system abbreviations.

1. Tag Material: 2-ply Rowmark ABS plastic or equivalent, 2” diameter, 1/16” minimum thickness, with matte finish, beveled edges, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.

2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link chain with S-hooks.

B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.

1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.

3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Piping Color-Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Division 09 Section Section "High-Performance Coatings."

B. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device.

2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.

3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.

4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping.

5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.

6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 25 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 10 feet areas of congested piping and equipment.

7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.

C. Pipe Label Color Schedule:

1. Chilled-Water Supply Piping:

a. Background Color: Blue.

b. Letter Color: Black or White as required to be legible.

2. Chilled-Water Return Piping:

a. Background Color: Red.


3. Condenser-Water Supply Piping:

a. Background Color: Green.


4. Condenser-Water Supply Piping:

a. Background Color: Yellow.


3.4 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within factory-fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering hose connections; and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.

B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to color scheme:


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


1. Valve-Tag Color:

a. Chilled Water: White.

b. Condenser Water: Black.

2. Letter Color:

a. Chilled Water: Black.

b. Condenser Water: White.

3.5 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where required.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland

Section 23 05 93A - page 1 of 10

SECTION 23 05 93 A - HYDRONIC TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

PART 1 -GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Balancing Hydronic Piping Systems:

a. Constant-flow hydronic systems.

b. Variable-flow hydronic systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.

B. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.

C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

D. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.

E. TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work.


A. Qualification Data: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit documentation that the TAB contractor and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications speci-fied in "Quality Assurance" Article.

B. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article.

C. Certified TAB reports.

D. Sample report forms.

E. Instrument calibration reports, to include the following:

1. Instrument type and make.

2. Serial number.

3. Application.

4. Dates of use.

5. Dates of calibration.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


A. TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by AABC or NEBB.

1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB contractor and certified by AABC or NEBB.

2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB contractor and who is certified by AABC or NEBB as a TAB technician.

B. TAB Conference: Meet with Architect/Engineer on approval of the TAB strategies and pro-cedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Require the participation of the TAB field supervisor and technicians. Provide seven days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location.

1. Agenda Items:

a. The Contract Documents examination report.

b. The TAB plan.

c. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.

d. Coordination of documentation and communication flow.

C. Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following:

1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB re-ports.

2. Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification.

D. TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor's forms approved by Architect/Engineer.

E. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE 111, Section 5, "Instrumentation."


A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times. The Mechanical Engineer of Record may elect to witness TAB at their discre-tion.

B. Perform TAB after pressure tests on water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to dis-cover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equip-ment.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


B. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, ther-mometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are accessible.

C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.

D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assump-tions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.

E. Examine equipment performance data including pump curves.

1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system ef-fects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capaci-ties in all or part of a system.

F. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing, cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.

G. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.

H. Examine HVAC equipment and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.

I. Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens are replaced by permanent screens with in-dicated perforations.

J. Examine three-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or mixing fluid flows.

K. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.

L. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.

M. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.

N. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Ob-serve and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if dif-ferent from indicated values.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.

B. Complete system-readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following:

1. Permanent electrical-power wiring is complete.

2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air.

3. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.

4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.

5. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.

3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in AABC's "National Standards for Total System Balance" or NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems" and in this Sec-tion.

B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.

1. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation, coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Division 23 Section "HVAC Piping In-sulation."

C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.

D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.

3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data, and number in sequence starting at pump to end of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against the approved pump flow rate. Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts.

C. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the general preparation procedures specified above:

1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow.

2. Check liquid level in expansion tank.

3. Check makeup water-station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent.

4. Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation, and set at indicated flow.

5. Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not set at fully closed position when pump is positive-displacement type unless several terminal valves are kept open.

6. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers.

7. Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing device so motor nameplate rating is not exceeded.

8. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated.

3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Measure water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures except for positive-displacement pumps:

1. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Read pressure differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for dif-ferences in gage heights. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


a. If impeller sizes must be adjusted to achieve pump performance, obtain approval from Architect/Engineer and comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Hydronic Pumps."

2. Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the pump and mark pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge valve until indicated water flow is achieved.

a. Monitor motor performance during procedures and do not operate motors in overload conditions.

3. Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for the system based on pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated brake horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where actual amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage.

4. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 10 percent of design.

B. Measure flow at all automatic flow control valves to verify that valves are functioning as de-signed.

C. Measure flow at all pressure-independent characterized control valves, with valves in fully open position, to verify that valves are functioning as designed.

D. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings.

E. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance.

1. System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow-pressure-drop relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device.

F. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow that is 5 percent greater than indicated flow.

G. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of indicated flow rate as follows:

1. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over indicated flow.

2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage over indicated flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over indicated flow.

3. Record settings and mark balancing devices.

H. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm, pump heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures including outdoor-air temperature.

I. Measure the differential-pressure-control-valve settings existing at the conclusion of balanc-ing.

J. Check settings and operation of each safety valve. Record settings.

3.6 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Balance systems with automatic two- and three-way control valves by setting systems at maximum flow through heat-exchange terminals and proceed as specified above for con-stant-flow hydronic systems.

3.7 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT EXCHANGERS


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


A. Measure water flow through all circuits.

B. Adjust water flow to within specified tolerances.

C. Measure inlet and outlet water temperatures.

3.8 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS

A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:

1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number.

2. Motor horsepower rating.

3. Motor rpm.

4. Efficiency rating.

5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.

6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.

7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.

B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds vary-ing from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass of the controller to prove proper operation. Record observations including name of controller manufacturer, model number, serial number, and nameplate data.

3.9 PROCEDURES FOR CHILLERS

A. Balance water flow through each evaporator and condenser to within specified tolerances of indicated flow with all pumps operating. With only one chiller operating in a multiple chiller installation, do not exceed the flow for the maximum tube velocity recommended by the chiller manufacturer. Measure and record the following data with each chiller operating at design conditions:

1. Evaporator-water entering and leaving temperatures, pressure drop, and water flow.

2. For water-cooled chillers, condenser-water entering and leaving temperatures, pres-sure drop, and water flow.

3. Evaporator and condenser refrigerant temperatures and pressures, using instruments furnished by chiller manufacturer.

4. Power factor if factory-installed instrumentation is furnished for measuring kilowatts.

5. Kilowatt input if factory-installed instrumentation is furnished for measuring kilowatts.

6. Capacity: Calculate in tons of cooling.

3.10 PROCEDURES FOR COOLING TOWERS

A. Shut off makeup water for the duration of the test, and verify that makeup and blowdown systems are fully operational after tests and before leaving the equipment. Perform the fol-lowing tests and record the results:

1. Measure condenser-water flow to each cell of the cooling tower.

2. Measure entering- and leaving-water temperatures.

3. Measure wet- and dry-bulb temperatures of entering air.

4. Measure wet- and dry-bulb temperatures of leaving air.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


5. Measure condenser-water flow rate recirculating through the cooling tower.

6. Measure cooling-tower spray pump discharge pressure.

7. Adjust water level and feed rate of makeup water system.

8. Measure flow through particle separator.

3.11 TOLERANCES

A. Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances:

1. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 5 percent.

3.12 FINAL REPORT

A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sec-tions for tested systems and balanced systems.

1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer.

2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.

B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following:

1. Pump curves.

2. Manufacturers' test data.

3. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.

4. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and product data.

C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:

1. Title page.

2. Name and address of the TAB contractor.

3. Project name.

4. Project location.

5. Architect/Engineer’s name and address.

6. Contractor's name and address.

7. Report date.

8. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report.

9. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the re-port. Number each page in the report.

10. Summary of contents including the following:

a. Indicated versus final performance.

b. Notable characteristics of systems.

c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Docu-ments.

11. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.

12. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


13. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated val-ues.

14. Test conditions for pump performance forms including the following:

a. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.

b. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.

D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of hydronic distribution systems. Present each system with single-line diagram and include the following:

1. Water flow rates.

2. Pipe and valve sizes and locations.

3. Cooling coils.

4. Balancing stations.

5. Position of balancing devices.

E. Cooling-Coil Test Reports:

1. Coil Data:

a. System identification.

b. Location.

c. Coil type.

d. Number of rows.

e. Fin spacing in fins per inch o.c.

f. Make and model number.

g. Face area in sq. ft..

h. Tube size in NPS.

i. Tube and fin materials.

j. Circuiting arrangement.

2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):

a. Air flow rate in cfm.

b. Outdoor-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.

c. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.

d. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.

e. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.

f. Water flow rate in gpm.

g. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig.

h. Entering-water temperature in deg F.

i. Leaving-water temperature in deg F.

F. System-Coil Reports: For all cooling coils include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. System and air-handling-unit identification.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


b. Location and zone.

c. Coil make and size.

d. Type of balancing valve.


a. Air flow rate in cfm.

b. Entering-water temperature in deg F.

c. Leaving-water temperature in deg F.

d. Water pressure drop in feet of head or psig.

e. Entering-air temperature in deg F.

f. Leaving-air temperature in deg F.

G. Pump Test Reports: Calculate impeller size by plotting the shutoff head on pump curves and include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. Unit identification.

b. Location.

c. Service.

d. Make and size.

e. Model number and serial number.

f. Water flow rate in gpm.

g. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig.

h. Required net positive suction head in feet of head or psig.

i. Pump rpm.

j. Impeller diameter in inches.

k. Motor make and frame size.

l. Motor horsepower and rpm.

m. Voltage at each connection.

n. Amperage for each phase.

o. Full-load amperage and service factor.

p. Seal type.


a. Static head in feet of head or psig.

b. Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or psig.

c. Actual impeller size in inches.

d. Full-open flow rate in gpm.

e. Full-open pressure in feet of head or psig.

f. Final discharge pressure in feet of head or psig.

g. Final suction pressure in feet of head or psig.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


h. Final total pressure in feet of head or psig.

i. Final water flow rate in gpm.

j. Voltage at each connection.

k. Amperage for each phase.

H. Instrument Calibration Reports:

1. Report Data:

a. Instrument type and make.

b. Serial number.

c. Application.

d. Dates of use.

e. Dates of calibration.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland

Section 23 05 93 B- page 1 of 18

SECTION 23 05 93 B – AIRSIDE TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.

B. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.

C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

D. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.

E. TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit documentation that the TAB contractor and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.

B. Certified TAB reports.

C. Instrument calibration reports, to include the following:


2. Serial number.

3. Application.

4. Dates of use.


D. Qualification Data: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit documentation that the TAB contractor and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.

E. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit the Contract Documents review report.

F. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 60 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures.

G. Certified TAB reports.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


H. Sample report forms.

I. Instrument calibration reports, to include the following:


2. Serial number.

3. Application.

4. Dates of use.



A. TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by AABC or NEBB.

1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB contractor and certified by AABC or NEBB

2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB contractor and who is certified by AABC or NEBB as a TAB technician.

B. TAB Conference: Meet with AC Transit Representative on approval of the TAB strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Require the participation of the TAB field supervisor and technicians. Provide seven days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location.

1. Agenda Items: a. The Contract Documents examination report. b. The TAB plan. c. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors. d. Coordination of documentation and communication flow.

C. Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following:

1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports.

2. Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification.

D. TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor's forms approved by AC Transit Representative .

E. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE 111, Section 5, "Instrumentation."


A. Partial User Occupancy: User may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial Completion. Cooperate with AC Transit Representative during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with User operations.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


B. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.

B. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are accessible.

C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.

D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.

E. Examine ceiling plenums used for supply, return, or relief air to verify that they meet the leakage class of connected ducts as specified. Verify that penetrations in plenum walls are sealed and fire-stopped if required.

F. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves.

1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.

G. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing, cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.

H. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.

I. Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.

J. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, and verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning.

K. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.

L. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.

M. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


B. Complete system-readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following:

1. Permanent electrical-power wiring is complete.

2. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.

3. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.

4. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.

5. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and access to balancing devices is provided.

6. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be met.

3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in AABC's "National Standards for Total System Balance" or NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems and in this Section.

1. Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 7.2.2, and “Air Balancing."

B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.

1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness as used to construct ducts.

2. After testing and balancing, install test ports and duct access doors that comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."

3. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation, coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Division 23 Section "HVAC Insulation."

C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.

D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) English units.

3.4 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS

A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:

1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number.

2. Motor horsepower rating.

3. Motor rpm.

4. Efficiency rating.

5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.

6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.

7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.

B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass of the controller to prove


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


proper operation. Record observations including name of controller manufacturer, model number, serial number, and nameplate data.

3.5 PROCEDURES FOR REFRIGERANT HEAT-TRANSFER COILS

A. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each refrigerant coil:

1. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.

2. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.

3. Airflow.

4. Air pressure drop.

5. Refrigerant suction pressure and temperature.

3.6 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data, and number in sequence starting at pump to end of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against the approved pump flow rate. Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts.

C. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the general preparation procedures specified above:

1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow.

2. Check liquid level in expansion tank.

3. Check makeup water-station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent.

4. Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation, and set at indicated flow.

5. Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not set at fully closed position when pump is positive-displacement type unless several terminal valves are kept open.

6. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers.

7. Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing device so motor nameplate rating is not exceeded.

8. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated.

3.7 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Measure water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures except for positive-displacement pumps:

1. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Read pressure differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage heights. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size.

2. Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the pump and mark pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge valve until indicated water flow is achieved. a. Monitor motor performance during procedures and do not operate motors in


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


overload conditions.

3. Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for the system based on pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated brake horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where actual amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage.

4. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 10 percent of design.

B. Measure flow at all automatic flow control valves to verify that valves are functioning as designed.

C. Measure flow at all pressure-independent characterized control valves, with valves in fully open position, to verify that valves are functioning as designed.

D. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings.

E. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance.

1. System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow-pressure-drop relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device.

F. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow that is 5 percent greater than indicated flow.

G. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of indicated flow rate as follows:

1. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over indicated flow.

2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage over indicated flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over indicated flow.

3. Record settings and mark balancing devices.

H. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm, pump heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures including outdoor-air temperature.

I. Measure the differential-pressure-control-valve settings existing at the conclusion of balancing.

J. Check settings and operation of each safety valve. Record settings.

3.8 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT EXCHANGERS

A. Measure water flow through all circuits.

B. Adjust water flow to within specified tolerances.

C. Measure inlet and outlet water temperatures.

D. Measure inlet steam pressure.

E. Check settings and operation of safety and relief valves. Record settings.

3.9 PROCEDURES FOR AIR SYSTEMS

A. Procedures For Constant-Volume Air Systems


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


1. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer.

2. Measure total airflow.

3. Where sufficient space in ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow.

4. Measure fan static pressures as follows to determine actual static pressure:

5. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practical and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.

6. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.

7. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as possible, upstream from the flexible connection, and downstream from duct restrictions.

8. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that houses the fan.

9. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit, rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment.

10. Report the cleanliness status of filters and the time static pressures are measured.

11. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices, such as sound traps, heat-recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions.

12. Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Calculate actual system-effect factors. Recommend adjustments to accommodate actual conditions.

13. Obtain approval from AC Transit Representative for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated speed. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Sections for air-handling units for adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air-handling-unit performance.

14. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full-cooling, full-heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required brake horsepower.

15. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.

16. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts.

17. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone.

18. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper, and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.

19. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.

20. Measure air outlets and inlets without making adjustments.

21. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written instructions and calculating factors.

22. Adjust air outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using branch volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers at air terminals.

23. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents.

24. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.

B. PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS

1. Compensating for Diversity: When the total airflow of all terminal units is more than the indicated airflow of the fan, place a selected number of terminal units at a minimum set-point airflow with the remainder at maximum-airflow condition until the total airflow of the terminal units equals the indicated airflow of the fan. Select the reduced-airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly among the branch ducts.

2. Pressure-Independent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems: After the fan systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:

3. Set outdoor-air dampers at minimum, and set return- and exhaust-air dampers at a position that simulates full-cooling load.

4. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow and static pressure. Measure static pressure. Adjust system static pressure so the entering static pressure for the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of the terminal-unit manufacturer's recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome terminal-unit discharge system losses.

5. Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within indicated airflow.

6. Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed maximum airflow. Use terminal-unit manufacturer's written instructions to make this adjustment. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units the same as described for constant-volume air systems.

7. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow the same as described for constant-volume air systems.

8. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leave outlets balanced for maximum airflow.

9. Remeasure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outdoor airflow.

10. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as described for constant-volume air systems.

11. Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the static-pressure controller at the main supply-air sensing station to ensure that adequate static pressure is maintained at the most critical unit.

12. Record final fan-performance data.

13. Pressure-Dependent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems without Diversity: After the fan systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:

14. Balance variable-air-volume systems the same as described for constant-volume air systems.

15. Set terminal units and supply fan at full-airflow condition.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


16. Adjust inlet dampers of each terminal unit to indicated airflow and verify operation of the static-pressure controller. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units the same as described for constant-volume air systems.

17. Readjust fan airflow for final maximum readings.

18. Measure operating static pressure at the sensor that controls the supply fan if one is installed, and verify operation of the static-pressure controller.

19. Set supply fan at minimum airflow if minimum airflow is indicated. Measure static pressure to verify that it is being maintained by the controller.

20. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow the same as described for constant-volume air systems.

21. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leave the outlets balanced for maximum airflow.

22. Measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outdoor airflow.

23. Retain subparagraph below for units with return-air ducts connected to units.

24. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as described for constant-volume air systems.

25. Pressure-Dependent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems with Diversity: After the fan systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:

26. Set system at maximum indicated airflow by setting the required number of terminal units at minimum airflow. Select the reduced-airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly among the branch ducts.

27. Adjust supply fan to maximum indicated airflow with the variable-airflow controller set at maximum airflow.

28. Set terminal units at full-airflow condition.

29. Adjust terminal units starting at the supply-fan end of the system and continuing progressively to the end of the system. Adjust inlet dampers of each terminal unit to indicated airflow. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units the same as described for constant-volume air systems.

30. Adjust terminal units for minimum airflow.

31. Measure static pressure at the sensor.

32. Measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outdoor airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as described for constant-volume air systems.

3.10 PROCEDURES FOR COOLING TOWERS

A. Shut off makeup water for the duration of the test, and verify that makeup and blowdown systems are fully operational after tests and before leaving the equipment. Perform the following tests and record the results:

1. Measure condenser-water flow to each cell of the cooling tower.

2. Measure entering- and leaving-water temperatures.

3. Measure wet- and dry-bulb temperatures of entering air.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


4. Measure wet- and dry-bulb temperatures of leaving air.

5. Measure condenser-water flow rate recirculating through the cooling tower.

6. Measure cooling-tower spray pump discharge pressure.

7. Adjust water level and feed rate of makeup water system.

8. Measure flow through bypass.

3.11 PROCEDURES FOR CHILLERS

A. Balance water flow through each evaporator and condenser to within specified tolerances of indicated flow with all pumps operating. With only one chiller operating in a multiple chiller installation, do not exceed the flow for the maximum tube velocity recommended by the chiller manufacturer. Measure and record the following data with each chiller operating at design conditions:

B. Evaporator-water entering and leaving temperatures, pressure drop, and water flow.

C. For water-cooled chillers, condenser-water entering and leaving temperatures, pressure drop, and water flow.

D. Evaporator and condenser refrigerant temperatures and pressures, using instruments furnished by chiller manufacturer.

E. Power factor if factory-installed instrumentation is furnished for measuring kilowatts.

F. Kilowatt input if factory-installed instrumentation is furnished for measuring kilowatts.

G. Capacity: Calculate in tons of cooling.

H. For air-cooled chillers, verify condenser-fan rotation and record fan and motor data including number of fans and entering- and leaving-air temperatures.

3.12 PROCEDURES FOR CONDENSING UNITS

A. Verify proper rotation of fans.

B. Measure entering- and leaving-air temperatures.

C. Record compressor data.

3.13 PROCEDURES FOR BOILERS

A. Hydronic Boilers: Measure and record entering- and leaving-water temperatures and water flow.

B. Steam Boilers: Measure and record entering-water temperature and flow and leaving-steam pressure, temperature, and flow.

3.14 PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC HEAT-TRANSFER COILS

A. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each water coil:

1. Entering- and leaving-water temperature.

2. Water flow rate.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


3. Water pressure drop.


5. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air for cooling coils.

6. Airflow.


B. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each electric heating coil:

1. Nameplate data.

2. Airflow.

3. Entering- and leaving-air temperature at full load.

4. Voltage and amperage input of each phase at full load and at each incremental stage.

5. Calculated kilowatt at full load.

6. Fuse or circuit-breaker rating for overload protection.

C. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each steam coil:


2. Airflow.


4. Inlet steam pressure.

D. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each refrigerant coil:


2. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.

3. Airflow.


5. Refrigerant suction pressure and temperature.

3.15 TOLERANCES

A. Set HVAC system's air flow rates within the following tolerances:

1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent.

2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent.

B. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices.

C. Status Reports: Prepare weekly progress reports to describe completed procedures, procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each building floor for systems serving multiple floors.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


3.16 FINAL REPORT

A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections for tested systems and balanced systems.

1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer.

2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.

B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following:

1. Fan curves.

2. Manufacturers' test data.

3. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.

4. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and product data.

C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:

1. Title page.

2. Name and address of the TAB contractor.

3. Project name.

4. Project location.

5. Architect's name and address.

6. Engineer's name and address.

7. Contractor's name and address.

8. Report date.

9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report.

10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report. Number each page in the report.

11. Summary of contents including the following: a. Indicated versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract

Documents.

12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.

13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings.

14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values.

15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following: a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers. b. Conditions of filters. c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions. d. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. e. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems. f. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


g. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.

D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air distribution systems. Present each system with single-line diagram and include the following:

1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.

2. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.

3. Location of balancing devices.

E. Air-Handling-Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:

1. Unit Data: a. Unit identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and unit size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Unit arrangement and class. g. Discharge arrangement. h. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. i. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches. j. Number, make, and size of belts. k. Number, type, and size of filters.

2. Motor Data: a. Motor make, and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. c. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full-load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches.

3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Total air flow rate in cfm. b. Total system static pressure in inches wg. c. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg. e. Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg. f. Preheat-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. g. Cooling-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. h. Heating-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. i. Outdoor airflow in cfm. j. Return airflow in cfm. k. Outdoor-air damper position. l. Return-air damper position. m. Vortex damper position.

F. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports:

1. Coil Data:


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


a. System identification. b. Location. c. Coil type. d. Number of rows. e. Fin spacing in fins per inch o.c. f. Make and model number. g. Face area in sq. ft. h. Tube size in NPS. i. Tube and fin materials. j. Circuiting arrangement.

2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Air flow rate in cfm. b. Average face velocity in fpm. c. Air pressure drop in inches wg. d. Outdoor-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. f. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. g. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. h. Water flow rate in gpm. i. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig. j. Entering-water temperature in deg F. k. Leaving-water temperature in deg F. l. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types. m. Refrigerant suction pressure in psig. n. Refrigerant suction temperature in deg F. o. Inlet steam pressure in psig.

G. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:

1. Fan Data: a. System identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Arrangement and class. g. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. h. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches.

2. Motor Data: a. Motor make, and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. c. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full-load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches. g. Number, make, and size of belts.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Total airflow rate in cfm. b. Total system static pressure in inches wg. c. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg. e. Suction static pressure in inches wg.

H. Air-Terminal-Device Reports:

1. Unit Data: a. System and air-handling unit identification. b. Location and zone. c. Apparatus used for test. d. Area served. e. Make. f. Number from system diagram. g. Type and model number. h. Size. i. Effective area in sq. ft. (sq. m).

2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Air flow rate in cfm (L/s). b. Air velocity in fpm (m/s). c. Preliminary air flow rate as needed in cfm (L/s). d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm (m/s). e. Final air flow rate in cfm (L/s). f. Final velocity in fpm (m/s). g. Space temperature in deg F (deg C).

I. Pump Test Reports: Calculate impeller size by plotting the shutoff head on pump curves and include the following:

1. Unit Data: a. Unit identification. b. Location. c. Service. d. Make and size. e. Model number and serial number. f. Water flow rate in gpm (L/s). g. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig (kPa). h. Required net positive suction head in feet of head or psig (kPa). i. Pump rpm. j. Impeller diameter in inches (mm). k. Motor make and frame size. l. Motor horsepower and rpm. m. Voltage at each connection. n. Amperage for each phase. o. Full-load amperage and service factor. p. Seal type.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Static head in feet of head or psig (kPa). b. Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). c. Actual impeller size in inches (mm). d. Full-open flow rate in gpm (L/s). e. Full-open pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). f. Final discharge pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). g. Final suction pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). h. Final total pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). i. Final water flow rate in gpm (L/s). j. Voltage at each connection. k. Amperage for each phase.

J. Round, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid representing the duct cross-section and record the following:

1. Report Data: a. System and air-handling-unit number. b. Location and zone. c. Traverse air temperature in deg F. d. Duct static pressure in inches wg. e. Duct size in inches. f. Duct area in sq. ft. g. Indicated air flow rate in cfm. h. Indicated velocity in fpm. i. Actual air flow rate in cfm. j. Actual average velocity in fpm. k. Barometric pressure in psig.

K. Instrument Calibration Reports:

1. Report Data: a. Instrument type and make. b. Serial number. c. Application. d. Dates of use. e. Dates of calibration.

3.17 INSPECTIONS

A. Initial Inspection:

1. After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and balance readings documented in the final report.

2. Check the following for each system: a. Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets. b. Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor. Compare

the reading to the set point. c. Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


d. Note deviations from the Contract Documents in the final report.

B. Final Inspection:

1. After initial inspection is complete and documentation by random checks verifies that testing and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report, request that a final inspection be made by Architect and Engineer of Record.

2. The TAB contractor's test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the presence of Architect and Engineer of Record

3. Architect and Engineer of Record shall randomly select measurements, documented in the final report, to be rechecked. Rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements recorded or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8-hour business day.

4. If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as "FAILED."

5. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be considered incomplete and shall be rejected.

C. See Division 01 Section for retesting and reinspecting requirements and Division 01 Section for requirements for correcting the Work.

D. TAB Work will be considered defective if it does not pass final inspections. If TAB Work fails, proceed as follows:

1. Recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report and balancing device settings to include all changes; resubmit the final report and request a second final inspection.

2. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner may contract the services of another TAB contractor to complete TAB Work according to the Contract Documents and deduct the cost of the services from the original TAB contractor's final payment.


3.18 ADDITIONAL TESTS

A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.

B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and winter conditions.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


This page intentionally left blank,


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 23 07 13 - DUCT INSULATION

PART 1 -GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Insulation Materials: a. Calcium silicate. b. Cellular glass. c. Mineral fiber.

2. Adhesives.

3. Mastics.

4. Lagging adhesives.

5. Sealants.

6. Factory-applied jackets.

7. Field-applied jackets.

8. Tapes.

9. Securements.


1. Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct liners.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).

B. Field quality-control reports.


A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprentice-ship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement ma-terial containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less.


A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Divi-sion 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application, duct Installer for duct insulation application, and equipment Installer for equipment insula-tion application. Before preparing piping and ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and main-tain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and fin-ishes and for space required for maintenance.

C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.

1.7 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after in-stalling and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.

B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS DUCTWORK

A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type with factory-applied vinyl jacket.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. CertainTeed Corp.; Duct Wrap. b. Johns Manville; Microlite. c. Knauf Insulation; Duct Wrap. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap. e. Owens Corning; All-Service Duct Wrap.

2.2 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.

1. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2.3 MASTICS

A. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient services.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-35. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-90. c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-50. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 590. e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-40. f. Vimasco Corporation; 749.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film thickness.

3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F .

4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight.

5. Color: White.

2.4 LAGGING ADHESIVES

A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible with insu-lation materials, jackets, and substrates.

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-52. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81-42. c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 130. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 11-30. e. Vimasco Corporation; 136.

2. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire-resistant lagging cloths over duct, equipment, and pipe insulation.

3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 180 deg F .

4. Color: White.

2.5 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0835. b. Compac Corp.; 104 and 105. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 428 AWF ASJ. d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ.

2. Width: 3 inches .


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


3. Thickness: 11.5 mils .

4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.

5. Elongation: 2 percent.

6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.

7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhe-sive; complying with ASTM C 1136.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0827. b. Compac Corp.; 110 and 111. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 491 AWF FSK. d. Venture Tape; 1525 CW, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ.






7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.

C. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0800. b. Compac Corp.; 120. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 488 AWF. d. Venture Tape; 3520 CW.






2.6 SECUREMENTS

A. Insulation Pins and Hangers:

1. Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insu-lation indicated. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP-1. 2) GEMCO; CD. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; CD. 4) Nelson Stud Welding; TPA, TPC, and TPS.

2. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.135-inch- ] diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-steel washer. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP-1. 2) GEMCO; Cupped Head Weld Pin. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Cupped Head. 4) Nelson Stud Welding; CHP.

3. Nonmetal Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch thick nylon sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1) GEMCO. 2) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.

B. Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, galvanized steel.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers of-fering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Childers Products. b. PABCO Metals Corporation. c. RPR Products, Inc.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.

2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.

B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows:

C. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with re-quirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.

D. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.

3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even sur-faces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping includ-


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


ing fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses re-quired for each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hang-ers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.

2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on an-chor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to struc-ture. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation ma-terial manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

1. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufac-turer to maintain vapor seal.

2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings.

L. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

M. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and crack-ing due to thermal movement.

N. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


similar to butt joints.

O. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Vibration-control devices.

2. Testing agency labels and stamps.

3. Nameplates and data plates.

4. Manholes.

5. Handholes.

6. Cleanouts.

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.

2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof sur-face and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insula-tion, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing.

4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continu-ously through wall penetrations.


2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall sur-face and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insula-tion, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches .

4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.

C. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.

2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and tran-sitions.

3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, ca-pacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of ver-tical ducts as follows: a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudi-

nal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches , place pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.

c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and ple-nums.

d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers. f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with

insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insula-tion facing.

4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-

barrier seal. b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot

intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the in-sulation thickness but not less than 3 inches .

5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.

6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation sec-tion for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with indi-vidually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.

3.5 FINISHES

A. Duct, Equipment, with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material:



B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Inspect ductwork, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to one location for each duct system.

C. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements.

3.7 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air.

2. Indoor, concealed return located in nonconditioned space.

3. Indoor, exposed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exte-rior.

4. Outdoor, concealed supply and return.

5. Outdoor, exposed supply and return.

B. Items Not Insulated:

1. Fibrous-glass ducts.

2. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.

3. Factory-insulated flexible ducts.

4. Factory-insulated plenums and casings.


6. Vibration-control devices.

7. Factory-insulated access panels and doors.

3.8 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Concealed, round and flat-oval, supply-air duct insulation shall be one of the following:

1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 1-1/2 inches thick with an R-value of 8 per California T-24 en-ergy compliance.

B. Concealed, round and flat-oval, return-air duct insulation shall be one of the following:


C. Concealed, rectangular, supply-air duct insulation shall be one of the following:


D. Concealed, rectangular, return-air duct insulation shall be one of the following:


E. Concealed, supply-air plenum insulation shall be one of the following: 1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 1-1/2 inches thick with an R-value of 8 per California T-24 en-

ergy compliance.

F. Concealed, return-air plenum insulation shall be one of the following:




CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland




CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 23 07 19 - HVAC PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 -GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following HVAC piping systems:

1. Condensate drain piping, indoors.

2. Chilled-water, indoors and outdoors.


1. Division 23 Section "Duct Insulation."

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied if any).

B. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

C. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having ju-risdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation ma-terials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests and test methods employed.


A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprentice-ship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency ac-ceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of ap-plicable testing agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less.

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropri-ate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Di-vision 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application. Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.

1.7 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.

B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Piping Insula-tion Schedule," "Outdoor, Aboveground Piping Insulation Schedule," articles for where insu-lating materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable ac-cording to ASTM C 795.

E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.

F. Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid, hermetically sealed cells. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following :

2. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Foamglas.

3. Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I.

4. Special-Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III.

5. Board Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type IV.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


6. Preformed Pipe Insulation with Factory-Applied ASJ-SSL: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 2.

7. Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585.

G. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:


2. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200.

3. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok.

4. Knauf Insulation; 1000-Degree Pipe Insulation.

5. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K.

6. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.

2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS

A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195.


2. Ramco Insulation, Inc.; Super-Stik.

B. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 196.


2. Ramco Insulation, Inc.; Thermokote V.

C. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449.


2. Ramco Insulation, Inc.; Ramcote 1200 and Quik-Cote.

2.3 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.

B. Cellular-Glass Adhesive: Two-component, thermosetting urethane adhesive containing no flammable solvents, with a service temperature range of minus 100 to plus 200 deg F.


2. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Com-pany; 81-84.

C. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland



2. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Com-pany; CP-127.

3. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 225.

4. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Com-pany; 85-60/85-70.

5. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.

D. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.






E. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.


2. Dow Corning Corporation; 739, Dow Silicone.

3. Johns Manville; Zeston Perma-Weld, CEEL-TITE Solvent Welding Adhesive.

4. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; Welding Adhesive.

5. Speedline Corporation; Polyco VP Adhesive.

2.4 MASTICS

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.

1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services.



3. Vimasco Corporation; 749.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


4. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film thickness.

5. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.


7. Color: White.

C. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for outdoor use on below-ambient services.


2. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Com-pany; Encacel.



5. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 30-mil dry film thickness.



8. Color: White.

2.5 LAGGING ADHESIVES

A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible with in-sulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

1. For indoor applications, use lagging adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).


3. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Com-pany; CP-50 AHV2.


5. Vimasco Corporation; 713 and 714.

6. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire-resistant lagging cloths over pipe insulation.

7. Service Temperature Range: 0 to plus 180 deg F.

8. Color: White.

2.6 SEALANTS


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


A. Joint Sealants:

1. Joint Sealants for Cellular-Glass, Phenolic, and Polyisocyanurate Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following :





6. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Pittseal 444.

7. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

8. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.


10. Color: White or gray.

B. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:







7. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.


9. Color: Aluminum.

C. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:





CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


4. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.


6. Color: White.

2.7 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:

1. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

2.8 FIELD-APPLIED FABRIC-REINFORCING MESH

A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Approximately 2 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 10 strands by 10 strands/sq. in. for covering pipe and pipe fittings.


2. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Com-pany; Chil-Glas Number 10.

B. Woven Polyester Fabric: Approximately 1 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 10 strands by 10 strands/sq. in. , in a Leno weave, for pipe.


2. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Com-pany; Mast-A-Fab.

3. Vimasco Corporation; Elastafab 894.

2.9 FIELD-APPLIED CLOTHS

A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I, plain weave, and presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd..


2. Alpha Associates, Inc.; Alpha-Maritex 84215 and 84217/9485RW, Luben 59.

2.10 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.

B. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil-face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing.

C. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and form-ing. Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


2. Johns Manville; Zeston.

3. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series.

4. Proto Corporation; LoSmoke.

5. Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe.

6. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer.

7. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate.

8. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, un-ions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply covers for lavatories.

9. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005, Tem-per H-14.

10. Factory cut and rolled to size.

11. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.

12. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 1-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper.

13. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper.

14. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers: (1) Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket. (2) Preformed 2-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-

radius elbows. (3) Tee covers. (4) Flange and union covers. (5) End caps. (6) Beveled collars. (7) Valve covers. (8) Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers

are not available.

D. Self-Adhesive Outdoor Jacket: 60-mil- thick, laminated vapor barrier and waterproofing membrane for installation over insulation located aboveground outdoors; consisting of a rubberized bituminous resin on a crosslaminated polyethylene film covered with white alu-minum-foil facing.


2. Polyguard Products, Inc.; Alumaguard 60.

E. PVDC Jacket for Indoor Applications: 4-mil- thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.02 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96/E 96M and with a flame-spread index of 5 and a smoke-developed index of 20 when tested according to ASTM E 84.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland



2. Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film.

F. PVDC Jacket for Outdoor Applications: 6-mil- thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.01 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96/E 96M and with a flame-spread index of 5 and a smoke-developed index of 25 when tested according to ASTM E 84.


2. Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Film.

G. PVDC-SSL Jacket: PVDC jacket with a self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based ad-hesive covered by a removable protective strip.


2. Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film and Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Film.

2.11 TAPES

A. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhe-sive; suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.


2. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 370 White PVC tape.

3. Compac Corporation; 130.

4. Venture Tape; 1506 CW NS.

5. Width: 2 inches.

6. Thickness: 6 mils.




B. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.


2. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 488 AWF.

3. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0800.

4. Compac Corporation; 120.

5. Venture Tape; 3520 CW.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


6. Width: 2 inches.

7. Thickness: 3.7 mils.




2.12 SECUREMENTS

A. Bands:


2. ITW Insulation Systems; Gerrard Strapping and Seals.

3. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate Strapping, Seals, and Springs.

4. Aluminum: ASTM B 209 , Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation toler-ances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.

2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.

B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows:

1. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature between 32 and 300 deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coat-ing materials and application methods for operating temperature range.

C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.

3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even sur-faces; free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses re-quired for each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hang-ers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.

2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on an-chor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to struc-ture. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation ma-terial manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.

2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitu-dinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Sta-ple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.

4. For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


5. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's writ-ten instructions, to maintain vapor seal.

6. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.

M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and crack-ing due to thermal movement.

O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations.


2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof sur-face and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insula-tion, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing.

4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continu-ously through wall penetrations.


2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall sur-face and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insula-tion, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches.

4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

D. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation con-tinuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


1. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.

E. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.

2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Divi-sion 07 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."

3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated.

2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe in-sulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diame-ter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insu-lating cement.

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulat-ing cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reus-able insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.

6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insu-lation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.

7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elas-tomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to ad-joining insulation facing using PVC tape.

9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union." Match size and color of pipe labels.

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insu-lating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.

D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following:

1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation.

2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insula-tion from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adja-cent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.

3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.

4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mi-tered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.

5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed sur-faces with a metal jacket.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.

2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protru-sions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient services, secure laps with outward-clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient services, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing seal-ant.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.

2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation.

3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of cellular-glass block insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.

4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch , and seal joints with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. When preformed sections of insulation are not available, install mitered sections of cellular-glass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1. Install preformed sections of cellular-glass insulation to valve body.

2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.

3.7 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.

2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protru-sions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward-clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing seal-ant.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation.

3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.

4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch , and seal joints with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sec-tions of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insu-lation materials with wire or bands.

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body.

3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.

3.8 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION

A. Where glass-cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation with factory-applied jackets.

1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints.

2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch- thick coats of lagging adhesive.

3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation.

B. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:

1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight.

2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket.

3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- wide joint strips at end joints.

5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insula-tion with vapor-barrier mastic.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


C. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints; for horizontal applications. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge.

D. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weather-proof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints.

E. Where PVDC jackets are indicated, install as follows:

1. Apply three separate wraps of filament tape per insulation section to secure pipe insu-lation to pipe prior to installation of PVDC jacket.

2. Wrap factory-presized jackets around individual pipe insulation sections with one end overlapping the previously installed sheet. Install presized jacket with an approximate overlap at butt joint of 2 inches over the previous section. Adhere lap seal using ad-hesive or SSL, and then apply 1-1/4 circumferences of appropriate PVDC tape around overlapped butt joint.

3. Continuous jacket can be spiral-wrapped around a length of pipe insulation. Apply adhesive or PVDC tape at overlapped spiral edge. When electing to use adhesives, refer to manufacturer's written instructions for application of adhesives along this spi-ral edge to maintain a permanent bond.

4. Jacket can be wrapped in cigarette fashion along length of roll for insulation systems with an outer circumference of 33-1/2 inches or less. The 33-1/2-inch- circumference limit allows for 2-inch- overlap seal. Using the length of roll allows for longer sections of jacket to be installed at one time. Use adhesive on the lap seal. Visually inspect lap seal for "fishmouthing," and use PVDC tape along lap seal to secure joint.

5. Repair holes or tears in PVDC jacket by placing PVDC tape over the hole or tear and wrapping a minimum of 1-1/4 circumferences to avoid damage to tape edges.

3.9 FINISHES

A. Pipe Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 09 painting Sections.

1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket mate-rial and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.

2. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.

B. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual in-spection of the completed Work.

3.10 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:

1. Condenser water piping.

2. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces.

3. Underground piping.

4. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.

3.11 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Chilled Water:

1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following:

2. Cellular Glass: 1 inch thick.

3. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I : 1 inch thick.

B. Condensate Drain:


2. Cellular Glass: 1/2 inch thick.

3. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I : 1/2 inch thick.

3.12 OUTDOOR, ABOVEGROUND PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Chilled Water:


2. Cellular Glass: 1-1/2 inches thick.

3. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1-1/2 inches thick.

3.13 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE

A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.

B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

C. Piping, Exposed:

1. PVC: 20 mils thick.

2. Painted Aluminum, with Z-Shaped Locking Seam: 0.024 inch thick.

END OF SECTION 230719


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 23 09 00 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC- BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including General, Supplementary, and Special Conditions, and Division 1 - General Requirements, apply to work specified in this section. Subcontractor must familiarize himself with the terms of the above documents.

1.2 QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDER

A. All bidders must be building automation contractors in the business of installing direct digital control building automation systems for a minimum of 5 years.

B. All bidders must have an office within 45 miles of the project.

C. All bidders must be an authorized distributor of the specified manufacturer.

D. All bidders must have a trained staff of application engineers, who have been certified by the manufacturer in the configuration, programming and service of the automation system.

E. The following bidders have been pre-qualified:

1. EMCOR services integrated solutions.

F. Building Automation contractor will be a first-tier and a direct sub-contractor of the prime-contractor.

1.3 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Except as otherwise noted, the control system shall consist of all Ethernet Network Controllers, Standalone Digital Control Units, workstations, software, sensors, transducers, relays, valves, dampers, damper operators, control panels, and other accessory equipment, along with a complete system of electrical interlocking wiring to fill the intent of the specification and provide for a complete and operable system. Except as otherwise specified, provide operators for equipment such as dampers if the equipment manufacturer does not provide these. Coordinate requirements with the various Contractors.

B. The BAS contractor shall review and study all HVAC drawings and the entire specification to familiarize himself with the equipment and system operation and to verify the quantities and types of dampers, operators, alarms, etc. to be provided.

C. All interlocking, wiring and installation of control devices associated with the equipment listed below shall be provided under this Contract. When the BAS system is fully installed and operational, the BAS Contractor and representatives of the Owner will review and check out the system. At that time, the BAS contractor shall demonstrate the operation of the system and prove that it complies with the intent of the drawings and specifications.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


D. The Contractor shall furnish and install a complete building automation system including all necessary hardware and all operating and applications software necessary to perform the control sequences of operation as called for in this specification. At a minimum, provide controls for the following:

1. Air handling units

2. Return air fans

3. Exhaust and supply fans

4. Chilled water system including chillers, pumps and cooling towers

5. Heating water system including boilers and pumps

6. Refrigerant leak detection system

7. Variable volume and constant volume box control including interlocks with finned tube radiation.

8. Fan coils, split systems, cabinet unit heaters

9. Monitoring points for packaged equipment such as emergency generators, air compressors, electric meter, water meters, chiller (s)

10. Compressed air, if required, to all pneumatic actuators and operators

E. Power wiring (120VAC, dedicated circuits) to all BAS control panels and BAS devices to be furnished and installed by Division 16 – Electrical.

F. Smoke detectors, fire smoke damper controls and life safety system to be furnished and installed by Division 16 - Electrical

G. Provide services and manpower necessary for commissioning of system in coordination with the HVAC Contractor, Balancing Contractor and Owner’s representative.

H. All work performed under this section of the specifications will comply with all codes, laws and governing bodies. If the drawings and/or specifications are in conflict with governing codes, the Contractor shall submit a proposal with appropriate modifications to the project to meet code restrictions. If this specification and associated drawings exceed governing code requirements, the specification will govern. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all necessary construction permits and licenses.

I. Provide a minimum of (24) hours of on-site training for (3) system operators. The training will be hands-on type at the owner’s office. The training class will use the actual Operator’s Manual that will be submitted for this project.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. The Building Automation System (BAS) shall be an extension to the existing facilities TAC Andover Continuum control system. The system will consist of (upgraded/new) PC-based workstations and microcomputer controllers of modular design providing distributed processing capability, and allowing future expansion of both input/output points and processing/control functions.

B. For this project the system shall consist of the following components:

1. Operator Workstation(s).


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


a. The BAS Contractor shall furnish (qty) Operator Workstation Computers and (qty) printer(s) as described in Part 2 of the specification. These workstations must be running the standard workstation software developed and tested by the manufacturer of the network controllers and the standalone controllers. No third party front-end workstation software will be acceptable.

2. Ethernet-based Network Controller(s). a. The BAS Contractor shall furnish (qty) Ethernet-based network

controllers as described in Part 2 of the specification. These controllers will connect directly to the Operator Workstation over Ethernet, provide communication to the Standalone Digital Control Units and/or other Input/Output Modules and serve as a gateway to equipment furnished by others (if applicable).

3. Standalone Digital Control Units (SDCUs). a. Provide the necessary quantity and types of SDCUs to meet the

requirements of the project for mechanical equipment control including air handlers, central plant control, and terminal unit control. Each SDCU will operate completely standalone, containing all of the I/O and programs to control its associated equipment.

4. Service Tool. a. Provide a portable service tool for monitoring and commissioning of the

network and Standalone Digital Control Units.

5. Modem. a. A modem shall be furnished for remote interrogation of the system. The

modem shall operate at a minimum of 28.8 KBaud and allow for access to the entire network of controllers.

1.5 WORK BY OTHERS

A. The Electrical Contractor shall provide:

1. All motor starters with control circuits for automatic control.

2. Fire alarm / life safety system including smoke detectors, alarm devices and all associated wiring related to the building fire alarm system. BAS Contractor to hardwire to fan shut down.

3. Auxiliary contacts, BACnet or Modbus interface or other monitoring interface, as required, for all monitored electrical equipment.

4. Power wiring (120VAC, dedicated circuits) to all BAS control panels and BAS devices.

B. The Mechanical Contractor shall provide:

1. Installation of all control valves, water flow transmitters, temperature sensing wells, pressure taps and any other in-line control devices.

2. All control and fire/smoke dampers.

1.6 CODE COMPLIANCE

A. Provide BAS components and ancillary equipment, which are UL-916 listed and labeled.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


B. All equipment or piping used in conditioned air streams, spaces or return air plenums shall comply with NFPA 90A Flame/Smoke/Fuel contribution rating of 25/50/0 and all applicable building codes or requirements.

C. All wiring shall conform to the National Electrical Code. Open plenum rated cabling may be utilized in areas not subject to physical damage (e.g. – in walls, ceiling spaces, cable risers, etc.)

D. Comply with FCC rules, Part 15 regarding Class A radiation for computing devices and low power communication equipment operating in commercial environments.

E. Comply with FCC, Part 68 rules for telephone modems and data sets.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. All shop drawings shall be prepared in AutoCAD software. In addition to the drawings, the Contractor shall furnish a CD containing the identical information. Drawings shall be 11”x17”size.

B. Shop drawings shall include a riser diagram depicting locations of all controllers and workstations, with associated network wiring. Also included shall be individual schematics of each mechanical system showing all connected points with reference to their associated controller. Typicals will be allowed where appropriate.

C. Submittal data shall contain manufacturer's data on all hardware and software products required by the specification. Valve, damper and air flow station schedules shall indicate size, configuration, capacity and location of all equipment.

D. Submittals shall contain narrative descriptions of sequences of operation and graphic flowchart.

E. Submit (qty)( copies of submittal data and shop drawings to the Engineer for review prior to ordering or fabrication of the equipment. The Contractor prior to submitting shall check all documents for accuracy.

F. The Engineer will make corrections, if required, and return to the Contractor. The Contractor will then resubmit with the corrected or additional data. This procedure shall be repeated until all corrections are made to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the submittals are fully approved.

1.8 SYSTEM STARTUP & COMMISSIONING

A. Each point in the system shall be tested for both hardware and software functionality. In addition, each mechanical and electrical system under control of the BAS will be tested against the appropriate sequence of operation specified herein. Successful completion of the system test shall constitute the beginning of the warranty period. A written report will be submitted to the owner indicating that the installed system functions in accordance with the plans and specifications.

B. The BAS contractor shall commission and set in operating condition all major equipment and systems, such as the chilled water, hot water and all air handling systems, in the presence of the equipment manufacturer’s representatives, as applicable, and the Owner and Architect’s representatives.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


C. The BAS Contractor shall provide necessary system training, if required, to the balancing contractor to enable necessary adjustments for the balancing process.

1.9 TRAINING

A. The BAS Contractor shall provide both on-site training to the Owner’s representative and maintenance personnel per the following description:

B. On-site training shall consist of a minimum of (24) hours of hands-on instruction geared at the operation and maintenance of the systems. The curriculum shall include:

1. System Overview

2. System Software and Operation a. System access b. Software features overview c. Changing setpoints and other attributes d. Scheduling e. Editing programmed variables f. Displaying color graphics g. Running reports h. Workstation maintenance i. Application programming

3. Operational sequences including start-up, shutdown, adjusting and balancing.

4. Equipment maintenance.

1.10 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. The operation and maintenance manuals shall contain all information necessary for the operation, maintenance, replacement, installation, and parts procurement for the entire BAS. This documentation shall include specific part numbers and software versions and dates. A complete list of recommended spare parts shall be included with the leadtime and expected frequency of use of each part clearly identified.

B. Following project completion and testing, the BAS contractor will submit as-built drawings reflecting the exact installation of the system. The as-built documentation shall also include a copy of all application software both in written form and on CD.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. The BAS contractor shall warrant the system for 12 months after system acceptance and beneficial use by the owner. During the warranty period, the BAS contractor shall be responsible for all necessary revisions to the software as required to provide a complete and workable system consistent with the letter and intent of the Sequence of Operation section of the specification.

B. Updates to the manufacturer’s software shall be provided at no charge during the warranty period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


2.1 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE

A. General

1. The Building Automation System (BAS) shall consist of Network Control Units (NCUs), a family of Standalone Digital Control Units (SDCUs), Input/Output Unit Modules (IOU Modules), Operator Workstations (OWs), and one File Server to support system configurations where more than one operator workstation is required. The BAS shall provide control, alarm detection, scheduling, reporting and information management for the entire facility, and Wide Area Network (WAN) if applicable, from a single ODBC-compliant database.

B. Level 1 Network Description

1. Level 1, the main backbone of the system, shall be an Ethernet LAN/WAN. Network Control Units, Operator Workstations, and the Central File Server shall connect directly to this network without the need for Gateway devices.

C. Level 2 Network Description

1. Level 2 of the system shall consist of one or more field buses managed by the Network Control Units. The Level 2 field buses may consist of one or both of the following types: a. An RS485, token passing bus that supports up to 127 Standalone Digital

Control Units (SDCUs) for operation of HVAC equipment and lighting, or b. An RS485 field bus that supports up to 32 devices from a family of plug-

in, IOU modules.

2. These IOU modules may be mounted within the NCU enclosure or remotely mounted via a single, twisted, shielded pair of wires.

D. BAS

1. The BAS shall be capable of being segmented, through software, into multiple local area networks (LANs) distributed over a wide area network (WAN), sharing a single file server. This enables workstations to manage a single LAN (or building), and/or the entire system with all devices being assured of being updated by and sharing the most current database. In the case of a single workstation system, the workstation shall contain the entire database – with no need for a separate file server.

E. Standard Network Support

1. All NCUs, Workstation(s) and File Server shall be capable of residing directly on the owner’s Ethernet TCP/IP LAN/WAN with no required gateways. Furthermore, the NCU’s, Workstation(s) and File Server shall be capable of using standard, commercially available, off-the-shelf Ethernet infrastructure components such as routers, switches and hubs. With this design the owner may utilize the investment of an existing or new enterprise network or structured cabling system. This also allows the option of the maintenance of the LAN/WAN to be performed by the owner’s Information Systems Department as all devices utilize standard TCP/IP components.

F. Remote Communications

1. In addition to the above LAN/WAN architecture support, the same workstation software (front end) must be capable of managing remote systems via


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


standard dial-up phone lines as a standard component of the software. Front-end “add-on” software modules to perform remote site communication shall not be acceptable.

2. The remote system architecture shall consist of two levels providing control, alarm detection, reporting and information management for the remote facility. Level 1 shall contain the Remote Site Control Unit, communicating to the remotely located, Operator Workstation(s) through the use of a modem and a standard dial-up phone line. Level 2 shall consist of one or more field buses controlled by the RSCU. The field buses may consist of one or both of two types: a. An RS485, token passing bus that supports up to 127 Standalone Digital

Control Units (SDCUs) for operation of HVAC equipment and lighting, or b. An RS485 field bus that supports up to 32 devices from a family of plug-

in, IOU modules that may be mounted within the RSCU enclosure or remotely mounted on a single, twisted, shielded pair of wires.

G. System Expansion

1. The BAS system shall be scalable and expandable at all levels of the system using the same software interface, and the same Level 1 and Level 2 controllers. Systems that require replacement of either the workstation software or field controllers in order to expand the system shall not be acceptable.

2. The BAS shall be expandable to include Security and Access Control functions at any time in the future with no additional workstations, front-end software or Level 1 controllers required. Standalone Digital Control Units or IOU modules shall be able to be added to the existing Level 1 controller’s field bus(es), to perform security and card access applications. In this way, an owner’s existing investment in wiring infrastructure may be leveraged and the cost and inconvenience of adding new field bus wiring will be minimized.

3. Additionally, an integrated video badging option must be able to be included with no additional workstations required. This photo ID option must share the same database as the BAS in order to eliminate the need for updating multiple databases.

4. The system shall use the same application programming language for all levels: Operator Workstation, Network Control Unit, Remote Site Control Unit and Standalone Digital Control Unit. Furthermore, this single programming language shall be used for all applications: environmental control, card access control, intrusion detection and security, lighting control, leak detection/underground storage tank monitoring, and digital data communication interfaces to third party microprocessor-based devices.

H. Support For Open Systems Protocols

1. The BAS design must include solutions for the integration of the following “open systems” protocols: BACnet, LonTalk™, and digital data communication to third party microprocessors such as chiller controllers, fire panels and variable frequency drives (VFDs).

2. The system shall also provide the ability to program custom ASCII communication drivers, that will reside in the NCU, for communication to third party systems and devices. These drivers will provide real time monitoring and control of the third party systems.

2.2 NETWORK CONTROL UNITS (NCUS)


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


A. General

1. Network Control Units shall be microprocessor based, multi-tasking, multi-user, and employ a real time operating system. Each NCU control panel shall consist of modular hardware including power supply, CPU board, and input/output modules. A sufficient number of NCUs shall be supplied to fully meet the requirements of this specification and the attached point list.

2. NCUs for telephone dialup sites shall be of the same design as the Ethernet control units but without the plug-in Ethernet network interface card (NIC), i.e., NCUs, which include a NIC, shall be interchangeable whether used on a LAN/WAN or a dialup site.

B. Webserver Functionality

1. All NCUs on the Ethernet TCP/IP LAN/WAN shall be capable, out-of-the box, to be set up as a Web Server. The NCU shall have the ability to store HTML code and “serve” pages to a web browser. This provides the ability for any computing device utilizing a TCP/IP Ethernet connection and capable of running a standard Internet browser (Microsoft Internet Explorer™, Netscape Navigator™, etc.) to access real-time data from the entire BAS via any NCUs.

2. Graphics and text-based web pages shall be constructed using standard HTML code. The interface shall allow the user to choose any of the standard text or graphics-based HTML editors for page creation. It shall also allow the operator to generate custom graphical pages and forms.

3. The WEB server interface shall be capable of password security, including validation of the requesting PC’s IP address. The WEB server interface shall allow the sharing of data or information between any controller, or process or network interface (BACnet, LonTalk and TCP/IP) that the BMS has knowledge of, regardless of where the point is connected on the BAS network or where it is acquired from.

4. The BAS network controller must act directly as the WEB server. It must directly generate the HTML code to the requesting user (i.e. WEB browser), eliminating the need for and reliance on any PC-based WEB server hardware or software. To simplify graphic image space allocation, HTML graphic images, if desired, shall be stored on any shared network device. The BAS WEB server shall have the ability to acquire any necessary graphics using standard pathing syntax within the HTML code mounted within the BAS WEB server. External WEB server hardware and software are not acceptable.

C. Hardware Specifications

1. Memory: a. A minimum of 4MB of RAM shall be provided for NCUs with expansion

up to 8MB. The 8MB versions shall include a floating-point math co-processor.

2. Communication Ports: a. Each NCU shall provide communication to both the Workstation(s) and

the field buses. In addition, each NCU must have at least 3 other communications ports that support a telephone modem, portable service tool, serial printer and connection to third party controllers such as a chiller control panel. On a LAN/WAN system the NCU shall be provided with a 10Mbps plug-in Ethernet TCP/IP network interface card (NIC).

3. Input/Output (I/O):


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


a. Each NCU shall support the addition of the following types of inputs and outputs:

1) Digital Inputs for status/alarm contacts

2) Counter Inputs for summing pulses from meters.

3) Thermistor inputs for measuring temperatures in space, ducts and thermowells.

4) Analog inputs for pressure, humidity, flow and position measurements.Digital Outputs for on/off equipment control.

5) Analog Outputs for valve and damper position control, and capacity control of primary equipment.

4. Modular Expandability: a. The system shall employ a modular I/O design to allow easy expansion.

Input and output capacity is to be provided through plug-in modules of various types or DIN-mountable IOU modules. It shall be possible to combine I/O modules as desired to meet the I/O requirements for individual control applications.

5. Hardware Override Switches: a. All digital output units shall include three position manual override

switches to allow selection of the ON, OFF, or AUTO output state. These switches shall be built into the unit and shall provide feedback to the controller so that the position of the override switch can be obtained through software. In addition each analog output shall be equipped with an override potentiometer to allow manual adjustment of the analog output signal over its full range, when the 3 position manual override switch is placed in the ON position.

6. Local Status Indicator Lamps: a. Provide as a minimum LED indication of CPU status, Ethernet LAN

status, and field bus status. For each output, provide LED indication of the value of the output (On/Off). For each output module provide an LED which gives a visual indication of whether any outputs on the module are manually overridden.

7. Real Time Clock (RTC): a. Each NCU shall include a battery-backed, real time clock, accurate to 10

seconds per day. The RTC shall provide the following: time of day, day, month, year, and day of week. In normal operation the system clock will be based on the frequency of the AC power. The system shall automatically correct for daylight savings time and leap years and be Year 2000 compliant.

8. Power Supply: a. The power supply for the NCUs shall be auto sensing, 120-220VAC,

60/50 Hz power, with a tolerance of +/- 20%. Line voltage below the operating range of the system shall be considered outages. The controller shall contain over voltage surge protection, and require no additional AC power signal conditioning. Optionally, if indicated on the drawings, the power supply shall accept an input voltage of (–48 VDC).

9. Automatic Restart After Power Failure: a. Upon restoration of power after an outage, the ECU shall automatically

and without human intervention: update all monitored functions; resume


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


operation based on current, synchronized time and status, and implement special start-up strategies as required.

10. Battery backup: a. Each NCU with the standard 120-220VAC power supply shall include a

programmable DC power backup system rated for a minimum of 72 hours of battery backup to maintain all volatile memory or, a minimum of 2 hours of full UPS including modem power. This power backup system shall be configurable such that at the end of a settable timeframe (such as 1 hour) of running on full UPS, the unit will shut off full UPS and switch to memory retention-only mode for the remainder of the battery power. The system shall allow the simple addition of more batteries to extend the above minimum battery backup times.

D. Software Specifications

1. General. a. The NCU shall contain flash ROM as the resident operating system.

Application software will be RAM resident. Application software will only be limited by the amount of RAM memory. There will be no restrictions placed on the type of application programs in the system. Each NCU shall be capable of parallel processing, executing all control programs simultaneously. Any program may affect the operation of any other program. Each program shall have the full access of all I/O facilities of the processor. This execution of control function shall not be interrupted due to normal user communications including interrogation, program entry, printout of the program for storage, etc.

2. User Programming Language: a. The application software shall be user programmable. This includes all

strategies, sequences of operation, control algorithms, parameters, and setpoints. The source program shall be English language-based and programmable by the user. The language shall be structured to allow for the easy configuration of control programs, schedules, alarms, reports, telecommunications, local displays, mathematical calculations, passwords, and histories. The language shall be self-documenting. Users shall be able to place comments anywhere in the body of a program. Program listings shall be configurable by the user in logical groupings.

E. Control Software:

1. The NCU shall have the ability to perform the following pre-tested control algorithms: a. Proportional, Integral plus Derivative Control (PID) b. Self Tuning PID c. Two Position ControlDigital Filter d. Ratio Calculator e. Equipment Cycling Protection

2. Mathematical Functions: a. Each controller shall be capable of performing basic mathematical

functions (+, -, *, /), squares, square roots, exponential, logarithms, Boolean logic statements, or combinations of both. The controllers shall be capable of performing complex logical statements including operators such as >, <, =, and, or, exclusive or, etc. These must be able to be


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


used in the same equations with the mathematical operators and nested up to five parentheses deep.

3. Energy Management Applications: a. NCUs shall have the ability to perform any or all of the following energy

management routines:

1) Time of Day Scheduling

2) Calendar Based Scheduling

3) Holiday Scheduling

4) Temporary Schedule Overrides

5) Optimal Start

6) Optimal Stop

7) Night Setback Control

8) Enthalpy Switchover (Economizer)

9) Peak Demand Limiting

10) Temperature Compensated Duty Cycling

11) CFM Tracking

12) Heating/Cooling Interlock

13) Hot/Cold Deck Reset

14) Free Cooling

15) Hot Water Reset

16) Chilled Water Reset

17) Condenser Water Reset

18) Chiller Sequencing

4. History Logging: a. Each controller shall be capable of logging any system variable over user

defined time intervals ranging from 1 second to 1440 minutes. Any system variables (inputs, outputs, math calculations, flags, etc.) can be logged in history. A maximum of 32767 values can be stored in each log. Each log can record either the instantaneous, average, minimum or maximum value of the point. Logs can be automatic or manual. Logged data shall be downloadable to the Operator Workstation for long term archiving based upon user-defined time intervals, or manual command.

5. Alarm Management: a. For each system point, alarms can be created based on high/low limits or

conditional expressions. All alarms will be tested each scan of the NCU and can result in the display of one or more alarm messages or reports.

b. Up to 8 alarms can be configured for each point in the controller. c. Messages and reports can be sent to a local terminal, to the front-end

workstation(s), or via modem to a remote-computing device. d. Alarms will be generated based on their priority. A minimum of 255

priority levels shall be provided. e. If communication with the Operator Workstation is temporarily

interrupted, the alarm will be buffered in the NCU. When


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


communications return, the alarm will be transmitted to the Operator Workstation if the point is still in the alarm condition.

6. Reporting. a. The NCU shall be able to generate user-definable reports to a locally

connected printer or terminal. The reports shall contain any combination of text and system variables. Report templates shall be able to be created by users in a word processing environment. Reports can be displayed based on any logical condition or through a user command.

2.3 STANDALONE DIGITAL CONTROL UNITS (SDCUS)

A. General:

1. Standalone Digital Control Units shall provide control of HVAC and lighting. Each controller shall have its own control programs and will continue to operate in the event of a failure or communication loss to its associated NCU.

B. Memory:

1. Control programs shall be stored in battery backed-up RAM and EPROM. Each controller shall have a minimum of 32K bytes of user RAM memory and 128K bytes of EPROM.

C. Communication Ports:

1. SDCUs shall provide a communication port to the field bus. In addition, a port shall be provided for connection of a portable service tool to support local commissioning and parameter changes with or without the NCU online. It shall be possible from a service port on any SDCU to view, enable/disable, and modify values of any point or program on any controller on the local field bus, any NCU or any SDCU on a different field bus.

D. Input/Output:

1. Each SDCU shall support the addition of the following types of inputs and outputs: a. Digital Inputs for status/alarm contacts b. Counter Inputs for summing pulses from meters. c. Thermistor Inputs for measuring temperatures in space, ducts and

thermowells. d. Analog inputs for pressure, humidity, flow and position measurements. e. Digital Outputs for on/off equipment control. f. Analog Outputs for valve and damper position control, and capacity

control of primary equipment.

E. Expandability:

1. Input and output capacity shall be expandable through the use of plug-in modules. A minimum of two modules shall be added to the base SDCU before additional power is required.

F. Networking:

1. Each SDCU will be able to exchange information on a peer to peer basis with other Standalone Digital Control Units during each field bus scan. Each SDCU shall be capable of storing and referencing global variables (on the


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


LAN) with or without any workstations online. Each SDCU shall be able to have its program viewed and/or enabled/disabled either locally through a portable service tool or through a workstation connected to an NCU.

G. Indicator Lamps:

1. SDCUs will have as a minimum, LED indication of CPU status, and field bus status.

H. Real Time Clock (RTC):

1. An SDCU shall have a real time clock in either hardware or software. The accuracy shall be within 10 seconds per day. The RTC shall provide the following information: time of day, day, month, year, and day of week. Each SDCU shall receive a signal, every hour, over the network from the NCU which synchronizes all SDCU real time clocks.

I. Automatic Restart After Power Failure:

1. Upon restoration of power, the SDCU shall automatically and without human intervention, update all monitored functions, resume operation based on current, synchronized time and status, and implement special start-up strategies as required.

J. Battery Back Up:

1. Each SDCU shall have at least 3 years of battery back up to maintain all volatile memory.

K. Alarm Management:

1. For each system point, alarms can be created based on high/low limits or conditional expressions. All alarms will be tested each scan of the SDCU and can result in the display of one or more alarm messages or reports.

2. Up to 8 alarms can be configured for each point in the controller enabling the escalation of the alarm priority (urgency) based upon which alarm(s) is/are triggered.

3. Alarm messages can be sent to a local terminal or modem connected to an NCU or to the Operator’s Workstation(s).

4. Alarms will be generated based on their priority. A minimum of 255 priority levels shall be provided.

5. If communication with the NCU is temporarily interrupted, the alarm will be buffered in the SDCU. When communications return, the alarm will be transmitted to the NCU if the point is still in the alarm condition.

L. Air Handler Controllers (To be used on units with less than 40 points)

1. AHU Controllers shall be capable of meeting the requirements of the sequence of operation found in the Execution portion of this specification and for future expansion.

2. AHU Controllers shall support all the necessary point inputs and outputs as required by the sequence and operate in a standalone fashion.

3. AHU Controllers shall be fully user programmable to allow for modification of the application software.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


4. An LCD display shall be optionally available for readout of point values and to allow operators to change setpoints and system parameters.

5. A manual override switch shall be provided for all digital and analog outputs on the AHU Controller. The position of the switch shall be monitored in software and available for operator displays and alarm notification.

M. VAV Terminal Unit Controllers

1. VAV Terminal Unit Controllers shall support, but not be limited to the control of the following configurations of VAV boxes to address current requirements as described in the Execution portion of this specification, and for future expansion: a. Single Duct Cooling Only b. Single Duct Cooling with Reheat (Electric or Hot Water) c. Fan Powered (Parallel or Series) d. Dual Duct (Constant or Variable Volume) e. Supply/Exhaust

2. VAV Controllers for single duct applications will come equipped with a built-in actuator for modulation of the air damper. The actuator shall have a minimum torque rating of 35 in.-lb., and contain an override mechanism for manual positioning of the damper during startup and service.

3. VAV Controllers shall contain an integral velocity sensor accurate to +/- 5% of the full range of the box’s CFM rating.

4. Each controller shall perform the sequence of operation described in Part 3 of this specification, and have the capability for time of day scheduling, occupancy mode control, after hours operation, lighting control, alarming, and trending.

5. VAV Controllers shall be able to communicate with any other Standalone Digital Control Unit on the same field bus with or without communication to the NCU managing the field bus. Systems that fail to provide this (true peer-to-peer) capability will be limited to a maximum of 32 VAV controllers per field bus.

N. Unitary Controllers

1. Unitary Controllers shall support, but not be limited to, the control of the following systems as described in the Execution portion of this specification, and for future expansion: a. Unit Ventilators b. Heat Pumps (Air to Air, Water to Water) c. Packaged Rooftops d. Fan Coils (2 or 4 Pipe)

2. The I/O of each Unitary Controller shall contain the sufficient quantity and types as required to meet the sequence of operation found in the Execution portion of this specification. In addition, each controller shall have the capability for time of day scheduling, occupancy mode control, after hour operation, lighting control, alarming, and trending.

O. Lighting Controllers

1. Lighting controllers shall provide direct control of 20 Amp, 277 VAC lighting circuits using mechanically held, latching relays. Controllers will contain from


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


8 to 48 circuits per enclosure. Each controller shall also contain inputs for direct connection to light switches and motion detectors.

2. Each controller shall have the capability for time of day scheduling, occupancy mode control, after hour operation, alarming, and trending.

P. Display Controllers

1. Display controllers are standalone, touch screen based operator interfaces. The controller shall be designed for flush mounting in a finished space, with a minimum display size of 9 x 9 inches.

2. Software shall be user programmable allowing for custom graphical images that simulate floor plans, menus, equipment schematics along with associated real time point values coming from any NCU on the network.

3. The touch screen display shall contain a minimum of 64 possible touch cells that permit user interaction for changing screens, modifying setpoints or operating equipment.

4. Systems that do not offer a display controller as specified must provide a panel mounted computer with touch screen capability as an alternative.

2.4 OPERATOR WORKSTATION REQUIREMENTS

A. General.

1. The BAS workstation software shall be configurable as either a single workstation system (with a local database) or multi-workstation system where the database is located on a central file server. The client software on multi-workstation system shall access the file server database program via an Ethernet TCP/IP network running at either 10MBPS or 100MBPS.

2. All Workstations shall be Pentium II based personal computers operating under the Microsoft NT operating system. The application software shall be capable of communication to all Network Control Units and Standalone Digital Control Units, feature high-resolution color graphics, alarming, reporting, and be user configurable for all data collection and data presentation functions.

3. For multi-workstation systems, a minimum of 256 workstations shall be allowed on the Ethernet network along with the central file server. In this client/server configuration, any changes or additions made from one workstation will automatically appear on all other workstations without the requirement for manual copying of files. Multi-workstation systems with no central database will not be acceptable. Multi-workstation systems with distributed/tiered file servers and a central (master) database will be acceptable.

B. Workstation Requirements (Single workstation or multi-workstation configuration).

1. The workstation shall consist of the following:

2. 2 GHz Pentium 4 processor with 512MB of RAM

3. Microsoft Windows XP Professional operating system

4. Serial port, parallel port

5. 10/100MBPS Ethernet NIC

6. 80 GB hard disk

7. CD-ROM drive


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


8. High resolution (minimum 1024 x 768), 17” flat panel display

9. Mouse

10. Full function keyboard

11. Audio sound card and speakers

12. License agreement for all applicable software.

C. File Server Hardware Requirements (if file server is shown on the drawings).

1. The file server computer shall contain of the following:

2. 2 GHz Pentium 4 processor with 1GB of RAM

3. Microsoft Windows 2000 Server™ operating system

4. 10/100MBPS Ethernet NIC

5. 80 GB hard disk

6. CD-ROM drive

7. High resolution (minimum 1024 x 768), 17” flat panel display

8. Mouse

9. Full function keyboard

10. License agreement for all applicable software.

D. Provide one Windows 2000-compatible 56 Kbaud modem.

E. Printer

1. Provide an alarm printer and a separate report/graphics printer. The alarm printer shall be an Epson dot matrix or equivalent and the report printer shall be a HP LaserJet.

F. Workstation Software

1. General Description a. The software architecture must be object-oriented in design, a true 32-bit

application suite utilizing Microsoft’s OLE, COM, DCOM and ODBC technologies. These technologies make it easy to fully utilize the power of the operating system to share, among applications (and therefore to the users of those applications), the wealth of data available from the BAS.

b. The workstation functions shall include monitoring and programming of all DDC controllers. Monitoring consists of alarming, reporting, graphic displays, long term data storage, automatic data collection, and operator-initiated control actions such as schedule and setpoint adjustments.

c. Programming of controllers shall be capable of being done either off-line or on-line from any operator workstation. All information will be available in graphic or text displays. Graphic displays will feature animation effects to enhance the presentation of the data, to alert operators of problems, and to facilitate location of information throughout the DDC system. All operator functions shall be selectable through a mouse.

2. System Database a. The files server database engine must be Microsoft SQL Server, or

another ODBC-compliant, relational database program. This ODBC


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


(Open Database Connectivity)-compliant database engine allows for an owner to utilize “their” choice of database and due to it’s “open” architecture, allows an owner to write custom applications and/or reports which communicate directly with the database avoiding data transfer routines to update other applications. The system database shall contain all point configurations and programs in each of the controllers that have been assigned to the network. In addition, the database will contain all workstation files including color graphic, alarm reports, text reports, historical data logs, schedules, and polling records.

3. User Interface a. The BAS workstation software shall allow the creation of a custom,

browser-style interface linked to the user that has logged into the workstation software. This interface shall support the creation of “hot-spots” that the user may link to view/edit any object in the system or run any object editor or configuration tool contained in the software. Furthermore, this interface must be able to be configured to become a user’s “PC Desktop” – with all the links that a user needs to run other applications. This, along with the Windows 2000 user security capabilities, will enable a system administrator to setup workstation accounts that not only limit the capabilities of the user within the BAS software but may also limit what a user can do on the PC and/or LAN/WAN. This might be used to ensure, for example, that the user of an alarm monitoring workstation is unable to shutdown the active alarm viewer and/or unable to load software onto the PC.

4. User Security a. The software shall be designed so that each user of the software can

have a unique username and password. This username/password combination shall be linked to a set of capabilities within the software, set by and editable only by, a system administrator. The sets of capabilities shall range from View only, Acknowledge alarms, Enable/disable and change values, Program, and Administer. The system shall allow the above capabilities to be applied independently to each and every class of object in the system. The system must allow a minimum of 256 users to be configured per workstation. There shall be an inactivity timer adjustable in software that automatically logs off the current operator after the timer has expired.

5. Configuration Interface a. The workstation software shall use a familiar Windows Explorer™-style

interface for an operator or programmer to view and/or edit any object (controller, point, alarm, report, schedule, etc.) in the entire system. In addition, this interface shall present a “network map” of all controllers and their associated points, programs, graphics, alarms, and reports in an easy to understand structure. All object names shall be alphanumeric and use Windows long filename conventions. Object names shall not be required to be unique throughout the system. This allows consistency in point naming. For example, each VAV controller can have an input called Space Temperature and a setpoint called CFM Setpoint. The VAV controller name shall be unique such as VAV for LAB101. Systems requiring unique object names throughout the system will not be acceptable.

b. The configuration interface shall also include support for template objects. These template objects shall be used as building blocks for the creation of the BAS database. The types of template objects supported


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


shall include all data point types (input, output, string variables, setpoints, etc.), alarm algorithms, alarm notification objects, reports, graphics displays, schedules, and programs. Groups of template object types shall be able to be set up as template subsystems and systems. The template system shall prompt for data entry if necessary. The template system shall maintain a link to all “child” objects created by each template. If a user wishes to make a change to a template object, the software shall ask the user if he/she wants to update all of child objects with the change. This template system shall facilitate configuration and programming consistency and afford the user a fast and simple method to make global changes to the BAS.

6. Color Graphic Displays a. The system shall allow for the creation of user defined, color graphic

displays for the viewing of mechanical and electrical systems, or building schematics. These graphics shall contain point information from the database including any attributes associated with the point (engineering units, etc.). In addition operators shall be able to command equipment or change setpoints from a graphic through the use of the mouse. Requirements of the color graphic subsystem include:

1) SVGA, bit-mapped displays. The user shall have the ability to import AutoCAD generated picture files as background displays.

2) A built-in library of animated objects such as dampers, fans, pumps, buttons, knobs, gauges, ad graphs which can be “dropped” on a graphic through the use of a software configuration “wizard”. These objects shall enable operators to interact with the graphic displays in a manner that mimics their mechanical equivalents found on field installed control panels. Using the mouse, operators shall be able to adjust setpoints, start or stop equipment, modify PID loop parameters, or change schedules.

3) Status changes or alarm conditions must be able to be highlighted by objects changing screen location, size, color, text, blinking or changing from one display to another.

4) Graphic panel objects shall be able to be configured with multiple “tabbed” pages allowing an operator to quickly view individual graphics of equipment, which make up a subsystem or system.

5) Ability to link graphic displays through user defined objects, alarm testing, or the result of a mathematical expression. Operators must be able to change from one graphic to another by selecting an object with a mouse - no menus will be required.

7. Automatic monitoring a. The software shall allow for the automatic collection of data and reports

from any controller through either a hardwire or modem communication link. The frequency of data collection shall be completely user-configurable.

8. Alarm Management a. The software shall be capable of accepting alarms directly from

controllers, or generating alarms based on evaluation of data in controllers and comparing to limits or conditional equations configured through the software. Any alarm (regardless of its origination) will be integrated into the overall alarm management system and will appear in


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


all standard alarm reports, be available for operator acknowledgment, and have the option for displaying graphics, or reports.

b. Alarm management features shall include:

1) A minimum of 255 alarm notification levels. Each notification level will establish a unique set of parameters for controlling alarm display, acknowledgment, keyboard annunciation, alarm printout and record keeping.

2) Automatic logging in the database of the alarm message, point name, point value, connected controller, timestamp, username and time of acknowledgement, username and time of alarm silence (soft acknowledgement)

3) Automatic printing of the alarm information or alarm report to an alarm printer or report printer.

4) Playing an audible beep or audio (wav) file on alarm initiation or return to normal.

5) Sending an email or alphanumeric page to anyone listed in a workstation’s email account address list on either the initial occurrence of an alarm and/or if the alarm is repeated because an operator has not acknowledged the alarm within a user-configurable timeframe. The ability to utilize email and alphanumeric paging of alarms shall be a standard feature of the software integrated with the operating system’s mail application interface (MAPI). No special software interfaces shall be required.

6) Individual alarms shall be able to be re-routed to a workstation or workstations at user-specified times and dates. For example, a critical high temp alarm can be configured to be routed to a Facilities Dept. workstation during normal working hours (7am-6pm, Mon-Fri) and to a Central Alarming workstation at all other times.

7) An active alarm viewer shall be included which can be customized for each user or user type to hide or display any alarm attributes.

8) The font type and color, and background color for each alarm notification level as seen in the active alarm viewer shall be customizable to allow easy identification of certain alarm types or alarm states.

9) The active alarm viewer can be configured such that an operator must type in text in an alarm entry and/or pick from a drop-down list of user actions for certain alarms. This ensures accountability (audit trail) for the response to critical alarms.

9. Custom Report Generation a. The software will contain a built-in custom report generator, featuring

word processing tools for the creation of custom reports. These custom reports shall be able to be set up to automatically run or be generated on demand. Each workstation shall be able to associate reports with any word processing or spreadsheet program loaded on the machine. When the report is displayed, it will automatically spawn the associated report editor such as MS Word™.

1) Reports can be of any length and contain any point attributes from any controller on the network.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


2) The report generator will have access to the user programming language in order to perform mathematical calculations inside the body of the report, control the display output of the report, or prompt the user for additional information needed by the report.

3) It shall be possible to run other executable programs whenever a report is initiated.

4) Report Generator activity can be tied to the alarm management system, so that any of the configured reports can be displayed in response to an alarm condition.

5) Standard reports shall include:

6) Points in each controller.

7) Points in alarm

8) Disabled points

9) Overridden points

10) Operator activity report

11) Alarm history log.

12) Program listing by controller with status.

13) Network status of each controller

10. Spreadsheet-style reports a. The software shall allow the simple configuration of row/column

(spreadsheet-style) reports on any class of object in the system. These reports shall be user-configurable and shall be able to extract live (controller) data and/or data from the database. The user shall be able to set up each report to display in any text font, color and background color. In addition the report shall be able to be configured to filter data, sort data and highlight data which meets user-defined criteria.

11. HTML Reporting a. The above spreadsheet-style reports shall be able to be run to an HTML

template file. This feature will create an HTML “results” file in the directory of the HTML template. This directory can be shared with other computer users, which will allow those users with access to the directory to “point” their web browser at the file and view the report.

12. Scheduling a. It shall be possible to configure and download from the workstation

schedules for any of the controllers on the network. b. Time of day schedules shall be in a calendar style and shall be

programmable for a minimum of one year in advance. Each standard day of the week and user-defined day types shall be able to be associated with a color so that when the schedule is viewed it is very easy, at-a-glance, to determine the schedule for a particular day even from the yearly view. To change the schedule for a particular day, a user shall simply click on the day and then click on the day type.

c. Each schedule will appear on the screen viewable as the entire year, monthly, week and day. A simple mouse click shall allow switching between views. It shall also be possible to scroll from one month to the next and view or alter any of the schedule times.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


d. Schedules will be assigned to specific controllers and stored in their local RAM memory. Any changes made at the workstation will be automatically updated to the corresponding schedule in the controller.

13. Programmer's Environment a. The programmer's environment will include access to a superset of the

same programming language supported in the controllers. Here the programmer will be able to configure application software off-line (if desired) for custom program development, write global control programs, system reports, wide area networking data collection routines, and custom alarm management software. On the same screen as the program editor, the programming environment shall include dockable debug and watch bars for program debugging and viewing updated values and point attributes during programming. In addition a wizard tool shall be available for loading programs from a library file in the program editor.

14. Saving/Reloading a. The workstation software shall have an application to save and restore

field controller memory files. This application shall not be limited to saving and reloading an entire controller – it must also be able to save/reload individual objects in the controller. This allows off-line debugging of control programs, for example, and then reloading of just the modified information.

15. Data Logging a. The workstation software shall have the capability to easily configure

groups of data points with trend logs and display the trend log data. A group of data points shall be created by drag-and-drop method of the points into a folder. The trend log data shall be displayed through a simply menu selection. This data shall be able to be saved to file and/or printed.

16. Audit Trail a. The workstation software shall automatically log and timestamp every

operation that a user performs at a workstation, from logging on and off a workstation to changing a point value, modifying a program, enabling/disabling an object, viewing a graphic display, running a report, modifying a schedule, etc.

17. Fault Tolerant File Server Operation a. The system shall provide the option to provide fault tolerant operation in

the event of the loss of the CPU, disk drives, or other hardware required to maintain the operational integrity of the system. Operational integrity includes all user interfaces, monitoring of alarm points and access points, and executing access control functions.

b. The switchover mechanism provided shall be automatic. Should the failure be caused by hardware, then the system shall immediately switch to the Backup computer. Should the system failure be caused by software (instruction or data), the system shall not pass the faulted code to the Backup computer, otherwise the Backup shall fail in the same manner of the Primary computer.

c. Switchover to the Backup computer shall be initiated and effective (complete) in a manner and time frame that precludes the loss of event data, and shall be transparent to the system users, except for an advisory alarm message indicating that the switchover has occurred.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


d. When the system fails-over from the Primary to the Backup computer, no alarm or other event shall be lost, and the Backup computer shall take control of all system functions.

e. A single component failure in the system shall not cause the entire system to fail. All system users shall be informed of any detectable component failure via an alarm event. System users shall not be logged off as a result of a system failure or switchover.

f. The Primary computer shall provide continual indication that the Backup computer is unavailable until such time that the fault has been purged.

2.5 PORTABLE OPERATOR’S TERMINAL

A. Full screen, laptop service tools shall communicate directly to all controllers. The laptop software shall enable users to monitor both instantaneous and historical point data, modify control parameters, and enable/disable any point or program in any controller on the network.

1. The laptop computer will be a Pentium-based portable computer with a minimum of 128MB of RAM memory, and a 4GB hard disk drive, running Windows 2000 or Windows XP.

2. The laptop service tool will connect to any Ethernet controller or standalone controller via a dedicated service port. From this single connection, the user shall be able to communicate with any other controller on the LAN.

3. The laptop service tool will limit operator access by passwords. The service tool must support, at a minimum, the following password-protected user types: Administrator, Modify Parameters, View Only.

4. The laptop software shall include built-in menus for viewing points by controller, enabling, disabling and viewing programs, configuring controllers, and communicating to other controllers on the network.

2.6 DDC SENSORS AND POINT HARDWARE

A. Temperature Sensors

1. All temperature devices shall use precision thermistors accurate to +/- 1 degree F over a range of –30 to 230 degrees F. Space temperature sensors shall be accurate to +/- .5 degrees F over a range of 40 to 100 degrees F.

2. Standard space sensors shall be available in an off white enclosure for mounting directly on wall or a standard electrical box.

3. Where manual overrides are required, the sensor housing shall feature both an optional sliding mechanism for adjusting the space temperature setpoint, as well as a push button for selecting after hours operation.

4. Where a local display is specified, the sensor shall incorporate either an LED or LCD display for viewing the space temperature, setpoint and other operator selectable parameters. Using built in buttons, operators shall be able to adjust setpoints directly from the sensor.

5. Duct temperature sensors shall incorporate a thermistor bead embedded at the tip of a stainless steel tube. Probe style duct sensors are useable in air handling applications where the coil or duct area is less than 14 square feet.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


6. Averaging sensors shall be employed in ducts which are larger than 14 square feet. The averaging sensor tube must contain at least one thermistor for every 3 feet, with a minimum tube length of 12 feet.

7. Immersion sensors shall be employed for measurement of temperature in all chilled and hot water applications as well as refrigerant applications. Thermal wells shall be brass or stainless steel for non-corrosive fluids below 250 degrees F and 300 series stainless steel for all other applications.

8. A pneumatic signal shall not be allowed for sensing temperature.

B. Humidity Sensors

1. Humidity devices shall be accurate to +/- 5% at full scale for space and +/- 3% for duct and outside air applications. Suppliers shall be able to demonstrate that accuracy is NIST traceable.

2. Provide a hand held field calibration tool that both reads the output of the sensor and contains a reference sensor for ongoing calibration.

C. Pressure Sensors

1. Air pressure measurements in the range of 0 to 10” water column will be accurate to +/- 1% using a solid-state sensing element. Provide Setra, Veris or approved equal.

2. Differential pressure measurements of liquids or gases shall be accurate to =/- 0.5% of range. The housing shall be Nema 4 rated.

D. Current and KW Sensors

1. Current status switches shall be used to monitor fans, pumps, motors and electrical loads. Current switches shall be available in solid and split core models, and offer either a digital or an analog signal to the automation system. Acceptable manufacturer is Veris or approved equal.

2. Measurement of three phase power shall be accomplished with a kW/kWH transducer. This device shall utilize direct current transformer inputs to calculate the instantaneous value (kW) and a pulsed output proportional to the energy usage (kWH). Provide Veris Model 6000 Power Transducer or approved equal.

E. Flow Sensors

1. Provide an insertion flowmeter for measurement of liquid, gas or steam flows in pipe sizes above 3 inches.

2. Install the flow meter on an isolation valve to permit removal without process shutdown.

3. Sensors shall be manufactured by Onicon or approved equal.

F. Electric/Pneumatic Transducers

1. Electric to pneumatic transducers shall operate from either a PWM or analog signal. E/P transducers shall be rated for 0 - 20 psi operation and accurate to 2% of full scale. E/P transducers shall have a maximum air consumption of 100 SCIM.

2. E/P transducers may be installed at the end device (damper or valve), or mounted separately in a field interface panel, or as part of the controller. All


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


transducers will be calibrated. Panel mounted transducers shall be Mamac or approved equal.

G. Electric/Pneumatic Solenoid Valves

1. Electric solenoid operated pneumatic valves (EP's) shall have a three port operation: common, normally open and normally closed. They shall be rated for 50 psig when used for 25 psig or less applications, or rated for 150 psig when used for 100 psig or less applications. The coils shall be equipped with transient suppression devices to limit transients to 150 percent of the rated coil voltage.

2.7 CONTROL VALVES

A. Provide automatic control valves suitable for the specified controlled media (steam, water or glycol). Provide valves which mate and match the material of the connected piping. Equip control valves with the actuators of required input power type and control signal type to accurately position the flow control element and provide sufficient force to achieve required leakage specification.

B. Control valves shall meet the heating and cooling loads specified, and close off against the differential pressure conditions within the application. Valves should be sized to operate accurately and with stability from 10 to 100% of the maximum design flow.

C. Trim material shall be stainless steel for steam and high differential pressure applications.

D. Electric actuation should be provided on all terminal unit reheat applications.

2.8 DAMPER ACTUATORS

A. Electronic Actuators – the actuator shall be direct coupled over the shaft, enabling it to be mounted directly to the damper shaft without the need for connecting linkage. The actuator shall have electronic overload circuitry to prevent damage. For power-failure/safety applications, an internal mechanical, spring return mechanism shall be built into the actuator housing. Non-spring return actuators shall have an external manual gear release to allow positioning of the damper when the actuator is not powered.

B. Pneumatic Actuators - shall be of the synthetic elastomer diaphragm piston type and shall be fully proportioning unless otherwise specified. They shall have full metal bodies and utilize replaceable diaphragms. Damper actuators on large sections of modulating dampers (>25 sq.ft.) or high face velocity applications (such as fan inlet vanes) shall be equipped with pilot positioners to provide repeatability and quick response. Also provide pilot positioners on steam valves requiring 1/3 – 2/3 operation.

2.9 AIRFLOW MEASURING STATIONS

A. Provide a thermal anemometer using instrument grade self heated thermistor sensors with thermistor temperature sensors.

B. The flow station shall operate over a range of 0 to 5,000 feet/min with an accuracy of +/- 2% over 500 feet/min and +/- 10 ft/min for reading less than 500 feet/min.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


C. The output signal shall be linear with field selectable ranges including 0-5 VDC, 0-10VDC and 4-20 mA.

D. Furnish Ebtron Series 3000 airflow stations or approved equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES

A. General

1. Installation of the building automation system shall be performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor. However, all installation shall be under the personal supervision of the Contractor. The Contractor shall certify all work as proper and complete. Under no circumstances shall the design, scheduling, coordination, programming, training, and warranty requirements for the project be delegated to a subcontractor.

B. Demolition

1. Remove controls which do not remain as part of the building automation system, all associated abandoned wiring and conduit, and all associated pneumatic tubing. The Owner will inform the Contractor of any equipment which is to be removed that will remain the property of the Owner. All other equipment which is removed will be disposed of by the Contractor.

C. Access to Site

1. Unless notified otherwise, entrance to building is restricted. No one will be permitted to enter the building unless their names have been cleared with the Owner or the Owner’s Representative.

D. Code Compliance

1. All wiring shall be installed in accordance with all applicable electrical codes and will comply with equipment manufacturer's recommendations. Should any discrepancy be found between wiring specifications in Division 17 and Division 16, wiring requirements of Division 17 will prevail for work specified in Division 17.

E. Cleanup

1. At the completion of the work, all equipment pertinent to this contract shall be checked and thoroughly cleaned, and all other areas shall be cleaned around equipment provided under this contract.

3.2 WIRING, CONDUIT, AND CABLE

A. All wire will be copper and meet the minimum wire size and insulation class listed below:

Wire Class Wire Size Isolation Class Power 12 Gauge 600 Volt Class One 14 Gauge Std. 600 Volt Class Two 18 Gauge Std. 300 Volt Class Three 18 Gauge Std. 300 volt Communications Per Mfr. Per Mfr.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


1. Power and Class One wiring may be run in the same conduit. Class Two and Three wiring and communications wiring may be run in the same conduit.

2. Where different wiring classes terminate within the same enclosure, maintain clearances and install barriers per the National Electric Code.

3. Where wiring is required to be installed in conduit, EMT shall be used. Conduit shall be minimum 1/2 inch galvanized EMT. Set screw fittings are acceptable for dry interior locations. Watertight compression fittings shall be used for exterior locations and interior locations subject to moisture. Provide conduit sealoff fitting where exterior conduits enter the building or between areas of high temperature/moisture differential.

4. Flexible metallic conduit (max. 3 feet) shall be used for connections to motors, actuators, controllers, and sensors mounted on vibration producing equipment. Liquid-tight flexible conduit shall be use in exterior locations and interior locations subject to moisture.

5. Junction boxes shall be provided at all cable splices, equipment termination, and transitions from EMT to flexible conduit. Interior dry location J-boxes shall be galvanized pressed steel, nominal four-inch square with blank cover. Exterior and damp location JH-boxes shall be cast alloy FS boxes with threaded hubs and gasketed covers.

6. Where the space above the ceiling is a supply or return air plenum, the wiring shall be plenum rated. Teflon wiring can be run without conduit above suspended ceilings. EXCEPTION: Any wire run in suspended ceilings that is used to control outside air dampers or to connect the system to the fire management system shall be in conduit.

7. Coaxial cable shall conform to RG62 or RG59 rating. Provide plenum rated coaxial cable when running in return air plenums.

8. Fiber optic cable shall include the following sizes; 50/125, 62.5/125 or 100/140.

9. Only glass fiber is acceptable, no plastic.

10. Fiber optic cable shall only be installed and terminated by an experienced contractor. The BAS contractor shall submit to the Engineer the name of the intended contractor of the fiber optic cable with his submittal documents.

3.3 HARDWARE INSTALLATION

A. Installation Practices for Wiring

1. All controllers are to be mounted vertically and per the manufacturer’s installation documentation .

2. The 120VAC power wiring (By Division 16 - Electrical Contractor) to each Ethernet or Remote Site controller shall be a dedicated run, with a separate breaker. Each run will include a separate hot, neutral and ground wire. The ground wire will terminate at the breaker panel ground. This circuit will not feed any other circuit or device.

3. A true earth ground must be available in the building. Do not use a corroded or galvanized pipe, or structural steel.

4. Wires are to be attached to the building proper at regular intervals such that wiring does not droop. Wires are not to be affixed to or supported by pipes, conduit, etc.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


5. Conduit in finished areas, will be concealed in ceiling cavity spaces, plenums, furred spaces and wall construction. Exception; metallic surface raceway may be used in finished areas on masonry walls. All surface raceway in finished areas must be color matched to the existing finish within the limitations of standard manufactured colors.

6. Conduit, in non-finished areas where possible, will be concealed in ceiling cavity spaces, plenums, furred spaces, and wall construction. Exposed conduit will run parallel to or at right angles to the building structure.

7. Wires are to be kept a minimum of three (3) inches from hot water, steam, or condensate piping.

8. Where sensor wires leave the conduit system, they are to be protected by a plastic insert.

9. Wire will not be allowed to run across telephone equipment areas.

B. Installation Practices for Field Devices

1. Well-mounted sensors will include thermal conducting compound within the well to insure good heat transfer to the sensor.

2. Actuators will be firmly mounted to give positive movement and linkage will be adjusted to give smooth continuous movement throughout 100 percent of the stroke.

3. Relay outputs will include transient suppression across all coils. Suppression devices shall limit transients to 150% of the rated coil voltage.

4. Water line mounted sensors shall be removable without shutting down the system in which they are installed.

5. For duct static pressure sensors, the high pressure port shall be connected to a metal static pressure probe inserted into the duct pointing upstream. The low pressure port shall be left open to the plenum area at the point that the high pressure port is tapped into the ductwork.

6. For building static pressure sensors, the high pressure port shall be inserted into the space via a metal tube. Pipe the low pressure port to the outside of the building.

C. Enclosures

1. For all I/O requiring field interface devices, these devices where practical will be mounted in a field interface panel (FIP). The Contractor shall provide an enclosure which protects the device(s) from dust, moisture, conceals integral wiring and moving parts.

2. FIPs shall contain power supplies for sensors, interface relays and contactors, safety circuits, and I/P transducers.

3. The FIP enclosure shall be of steel construction with baked enamel finish, NEMA 1 rated with a hinged door and keyed lock. The enclosure will be sized for twenty percent spare mounting space. All locks will be keyed identically.

4. All wiring to and from the FIP will be to screw type terminals. Analog or communications wiring may use the FIP as a raceway without terminating. The use of wire nuts within the FIP is prohibited.

5. All outside mounted enclosures shall meet the NEMA-4 rating.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


6. The wiring within all enclosures shall be run in plastic track. Wiring within controllers shall be wrapped and secured.

D. Identification

1. Identify all control wires with labeling tape or sleeves using either words, letters, or numbers that can be exactly cross-referenced with as-built drawings.

2. All field enclosures, other than controllers, shall be identified with a bakelite nameplate. The lettering shall be in white against a black or blue background.

3. Junction box covers will be marked to indicate that they are a part of the BAS system.

4. All I/O field devices (except space sensors) that are not mounted within FIP's shall be identified with name plates.

5. All I/O field devices inside FIP's shall be labeled.

E. Existing Controls.

1. Existing controls which are to be reused must each be tested and calibrated for proper operation. Existing controls which are to be reused and are found to be defective requiring replacement, will be noted to the Owner. The Owner will be responsible for all material and labor costs associated with their repair.

F. Control System Switch-over

1. Demolition of the existing control system will occur after the new temperature control system is in place including new sensors and new field interface devices.

2. Switch-over from the existing control system to the new system will be fully coordinated with the Owner. A representative of the Owner will be on site during switch-over.

3. The Contractor shall minimize control system downtime during switch-over. Sufficient installation mechanics will be on site so that the entire switch-over can be accomplished in a reasonable time frame.

G. Location

1. The location of sensors is per mechanical and architectural drawings.

2. Space humidity or temperature sensors will be mounted away from machinery generating heat, direct light and diffuser air streams.

3. Outdoor air sensors will be mounted on the north building face directly in the outside air. Install these sensors such that the effects of heat radiated from the building or sunlight is minimized.

4. Field enclosures shall be located immediately adjacent to the controller panel(s) to which it is being interfaced.

3.4 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION

A. General.

1. The Contractor shall provide all labor necessary to install, initialize, start-up and debug all system software as described in this section. This includes any


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


operating system software or other third party software necessary for successful operation of the system.

B. Database Configuration.

1. The Contractor will provide all labor to configure those portions of the database that are required by the points list and sequence of operation.

C. Color Graphic Slides.

1. Unless otherwise directed by the owner, the Contractor will provide color graphic displays as depicted in the mechanical drawings for each system and floor plan. For each system or floor plan, the display shall contain the associated points identified in the point list and allow for setpoint changes as required by the owner.

3.5 COMMISSIONING AND SYSTEM STARTUP

A. Point to Point Checkout.

1. Each I/O device (both field mounted as well as those located in FIPs) shall be inspected and verified for proper installation and functionality. A checkout sheet itemizing each device shall be filled out, dated and approved by the Project Manager for submission to the owner or owner’s representative.

B. Controller and Workstation Checkout.

1. A field checkout of all controllers and front end equipment (computers, printers, modems, etc.) shall be conducted to verify proper operation of both hardware and software. A checkout sheet itemizing each device and a description of the associated tests shall be prepared and submitted to the owner or owner’s representative by the completion of the project.

C. System Acceptance Testing

1. All application software will be verified and compared against the sequences of operation. Control loops will be exercised by inducing a setpoint shift of at least 10% and observing whether the system successfully returns the process variable to setpoint. Record all test results and attach to the Test Results Sheet.

2. Test each alarm in the system and validate that the system generates the appropriate alarm message, that the message appears at all prescribed destinations (workstations or printers), and that any other related actions occur as defined (i.e. graphic panels are invoked, reports are generated, etc.). Submit a Test Results Sheet to the owner.

3. Perform an operational test of each unique graphic display and report to verify that the item exists, that the appearance and content are correct, and that any special features work as intended. Submit a Test Results Sheet to the owner.

4. Perform an operational test of each third party interface that has been included as part of the automation system. Verify that all points are properly polled, that alarms have been configured, and that any associated graphics and reports have been completed. If the interface involves a file transfer over Ethernet, test any logic that controls the transmission of the file, and verify the content of the specified information.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


3.6 SEQUENCES OF OPERATION

A. Chilled Water Plant

1. Chilled water schedule a. Chilled water is required for fan coils serving 9th floor Data Center (AC-2

thru AC-4) and basement UPS (AC-7) at all times, 24/7.

1) Process chilled water shall be produced by either:

a) Water economizer utilizing cooling tower (CT-1) and frame/plate heat exchanger with associated chilled water pump (CHWP) and condenser water pump (CWP).

b) Water cooled screw chiller CH-2 and cooling tower (CT-1) with associated CHWP and CWP.

b. Chilled water is required for rooftop air handling unit (AH-1) based on cooling demand during normal building scheduled hours of operation.

1) Combined comfort cooling and process chilled water shall be produced by either:

a) Water cooled screw chiller CH-2 and cooling tower (CT-1) with associated CHWP and CWP.

b) Water cooled centrifugal chiller CH-1 and cooling tower (CT-1) with associated CHWP and CWP.

c) Water cooled centrifugal chiller CH-1 and screw chiller CH-2 combined operation with cooling tower (CT-1) and associated CHWPs and CWPs.

2. Cooling tower CT-1 operation a. Start signal for normal operation shall originate from BAS.

1) Cooling tower shall operate 24/7 unless down for service or repair. b. System shall enter HX-1 control. c. F-1 particle separator shall enter normal operation.

1) Basin sweeper pump shall be programmed to the following schedule:

a) 15 min (adj) on

b) 45 min (adj) off d. Fan (CT-1) shall modulate per the correct logic for the appropriate

Cooling Stage.

1) Fan (CT-1) VFC actual minimum frequency/rpm shall be determined by A/E in field after vibration measurements are taken at representative frequencies. Minimum frequency shall be 130 rpm until that time.

3. Chilled water reset a. BMS shall automatically reset chilled water supply design temperature of

42 deg F (adj) based upon cooling demand.

4. General a. Chilled water pump, condenser water pump and cooling tower fan motor

start command staging.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


1) Sequence every motor start so more than one motor receives more than a single start command in any given 10 sec (adj) window.

b. CHWP-1 & CHWP-2 are sized for 100% capacity and shall be programmed for lead/lag. Pumps shall be programmed to cycle starts automatically based on total pump runtime.

c. CWP-1 & CWP-2 are sized for 100% capacity and shall be programmed for lead/lag. Pumps shall be programmed to cycle starts automatically based on total pump runtime.

B. Stages of Cooling

1. Water economizer (HX-1) (compressor-less cooling) a. Lockout shall occur at ambient air temperatures of 52 deg F (adj) wb and

above. b. CWP-4 VFC shall start pump and ramp up to 30 Hz (adj) for 2 min (adj).

CHWP-4 VFC shall start pump and modulate frequency to maintain a pressure setpoint of 80’ (adj).

c. CWP-4 VFC shall modulate pump between 30 Hz (adj) to 60 Hz as required to maintain condenser water supply (CWS) (adj) setpoint.

d. Cooling tower (CT-1) fan VFC shall start with linear ramp to frequency corresponding to 130 rpm or fan minimum for 2 min (adj) after 2 consecutive min (adj) of CWP-4 operation at 60 Hz. CWP-3 shall modulate down and operate at a fixed 45 Hz (adj) during fan operation.

e. CT-1 VFC fan shall modulate fan between 130-370 rpm as required to maintain condenser water supply (CWS) (adj) setpoint.

f. CT-1 VFC fan shall turn off fan after 5 consecutive min of 130 rpm and ambient air temperatures of 42 deg F wb (adj) and below. System shall cycle back to Stage 1.c.

g. Water economizer (HX-1) stage shall cycle to Stage 2 cooling when:

1) CHWS temp rises above 56 deg F (adj) for longer than 2 min (adj). Stop CWP-4 and CHWP-4.

2. Chiller CH-2 a. CWP-3 VFC shall start pump and ramp up to frequency corresponding to

140 GPM (adj) or minimum flow. b. CHWP-3 VFC shall start pump and modulate frequency to maintain a

pressure setpoint of 45’ (adj). c. CH-2 CHW and CW flow switches must confirm proof of flow before

chiller shall start. d. CH-2 shall start and operate to maintain a 42 deg F (adj) CHWS

setpoint. e. CWP-3 VFC shall ramp up to frequency corresponding to 360 GPM (adj)

or design flow after 65 deg F (adj) CWS temp is achieved. f. CH-2 shall cycle and modulate twin compressors via internal

manufacturer’s control. g. Chiller CH-2 stage shall cycle to Stage 3 cooling when:

1) AH-1 CHWR Valve (CHWR-1) position is full open, from 95% (adj) to 100%, coupled with a call for cooling signal for 5 consecutive min (adj).

2) CHWP-3 operation at frequency corresponding to CH-2 design flow only (+/- 15%, adj) for 5 (adj) consecutive min.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


3) Chiller CH-2 stage shall cycle to Stage 1 cooling when:

a) AH-1 CHWR Valve (CHWR-1) position is 50% (adj) or less coupled with a call for cooling signal for 5 consecutive min (adj).

b) CHWP-3 operation less than 35 Hz (+/- 15%, adj) for 5 (adj) consecutive min.

3. Chiller CH-1 a. CWP-1/2 VFC shall start pump and ramp up to frequency corresponding

to 590 GPM (adj) or minimum flow. b. CHWP-1/2 VFC shall start pump and ramp up to frequency

corresponding to 300 GPM (adj) or minimum flow. c. CH-1 CWP-1/2 & CHWP-1/2 flow switches must confirm proof of flow

before chiller shall start. d. CH-1 shall start and enter normal operation. After 2 min (adj) CH-2 shall

receive stop signal and Stage 2 cooling shall end. e. CWP-1/2 VFC shall ramp up to frequency corresponding to 780 GPM

(adj) or design flow after 65 deg F (adj) CWS temp is achieved. f. CHWP-1/2 VFC shall start pump and modulate frequency to maintain a

pressure setpoint of 60’ (adj). g. CH-1 shall modulate compressor via VFC-1 and internal manufacturer’s

control. h. Chiller CH-2 stage shall cycle to Stage 3 cooling when:

1) AH-1 CHWR Valve (CHWR-1) position is full open 95% (adj) to 100%, coupled with a call for cooling signal for 5 consecutive min (adj).

2) CHWP-1/2 operation at frequency corresponding to CH-1 design flow alone (+/- 15%, adj) for 5 (adj) consecutive min.

4. CH-1 & CH-2 combined a. CH-1 remains in normal operation. b. CWP-3 VFC shall start pump and ramp up to frequency corresponding to

140 GPM (adj) or minimum flow. c. CHWP-3 VFC shall start pump and modulate frequency to maintain a

pressure setpoint of 80’ (adj). d. CH-2 CHW and CW flow switches must confirm proof of flow before

chiller shall start. e. CH-2 shall start and operate to maintain a 42 deg F (adj) CHWS

setpoint. f. CHWP-1/2 VFC shall modulate frequency to maintain a min pressure

setpoint of 80’ (adj). g. CWP-1/2 VFC shall modulate to frequency corresponding to 780 GPM

during combined chiller operation (adj) or design flow. h. CWP-3 VFC shall modulate to frequency corresponding to 360 GPM

during combined chiller operation (adj) or design flow. i. CH-1 & CH-2 combined stage shall cycle to Stage 3 cooling when:

a) AH-1 CHWR Valve (CHWR-1) position is 50% (adj) or less coupled with a call for cooling signal for 5 consecutive min (adj).


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


b) CHWP-1/2 operation less than 35 Hz (+/- 15%, adj) for 5 (adj) consecutive min.

c) CHWP-3 operation less than 35 Hz (+/- 15%, adj) for 5 (adj) consecutive min.

C. Air handler ahu-1 sequence of operation:

1. The air handler is started and stopped as scheduled by the Building Automation System (BAS). When a system start command is issued by the BAS, the minimum outside air damper will be opened. When positive indication is received from the damper that the damper is open, a start signal will be issued to the variable frequency controller(s) associated with the supply fans for the air handler. The variable frequency controller will energize and ramp the supply fans to the rpm required to maintain the supply duct static pressure set point. Once positive indication is received that the supply fans have started, a start signal will be issued to the variable frequency controller(s) associated with the return air fans for the air handler. The variable frequency controller(s) will energize and ramp the return air fans to the rpm required to maintain the return air flow set point. When a stop signal is issued to the system, the supply air and return fans will be de-energize immediately. When positive indication is received that the supply air and return fans have de-energized, the outside air and return air dampers will be closed,

D. Air Handler Safeties:

1. The safeties for the air handler will be hardwired. The duct smoke detectors, and duct static high limit switches will be wired to the variable frequency controller(s) and will de-energize the air handler fan systems upon the activation of any safety switch.

E. Supply Duct Static Pressure Control:

1. A differential pressure transmitter located in the supply air ductwork will transmit a signal proportional to the static pressure in the ductwork to the BAS. A PI control algorithm in the BAS will through the variable frequency controller vary the speed of the supply air fans to maintain the required duct static pressure set point.

2. The position of the dampers in the VAV boxes associated with the system will be monitored. The air handling system will contain a variable MAXDMP. MAXDMP will be the highest percent open value of the VAV box dampers supplied by the air handling system. 0 being fully closed and 100 being fully open. The static pressure set point of the air handling system will be reset from minimum set point (2.0 in. wg.) to maximum set point (4.0 in. wg.), as the value of MAXDMP varies from 80 to 100.

3. The control algorithm will be de-activated when the air handling unit is not operating to avoid integral error buildup (controller windup).

F. Building Static Pressure Control:

1. Building static pressure transmitter (located at the 3rd floor lobby ceiling) will transmit a signal proportional to the building static pressure. A PI control algorithm in the BAS will modulate the return air flow differential set point to maintain the building static pressure set point.

G. Return Air Flow Control:


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


1. Supply air flow transmitters will transmit a signal proportional to the supply air flow. Return air flow transmitters will transmit a signal proportional to the return air flow. The return air flow set point will track the supply air flow, minus the return air flow differential set point. A PI control algorithm in the BAS will through the return fan variable frequency controller(s) vary the speed of the return air fans to maintain the return air flow set point.

H. Supply Air Temperature Control and Economizer:

1. The percent of primary airflow for each VAV box served by the air handling system will be calculated. The percent of airflow (PERAF) will be the result of the calculation: a. ((Current Airflow – Minimum Airflow) / (Maximum Airflow – Minimum

Airflow))* 100

2. The variable for the air handling system AVGPERAF is the average of the PERAF values for the VAV boxes associated with the air handling system. The set point of the control algorithm will be adjusted from 50 degrees Fahrenheit to 65 degrees Fahrenheit as the value of AVGPERAF varies from 70 to 30.

3. When the supply air fans are operating, indicated by the supply fans, the temperature sensor located in the discharge air of the air handling unit will through a proportional only control algorithm first modulate the economizer cycle and open the outside and exhaust air damper and modulate shut the return air damper. If the economizer can not meet the cooling load the economizer will close to minimum position and then the cooling coil valve will modulate as required to maintain the required supply air temperature set point. When the supply air fans are not operating, indicated by the supply fans, the cooling coil valve, outside air damper and exhaust air damper will close and the return air damper will open.

I. Economizer Cycle: When the temperature of the outside air is greater then the temperature of the return air, the economizer cycle will be de-energized. The outside and exhaust air dampers will be closed, and the return air damper will open.

J. Vav box start/stop and fail control: If: life safety alarm (“lifesafety.alarm”) is on, or Supply fan fail (“supplyfan.fail”) is on, Or Occupancy (“occupancy”) is off, and Tenant override (“tenant.override”) is off, and Warm-up (“warmup”) is off, and Precool (“precool”) is off, Then vav system (“vav.system”) is turned off. If life safety alarm (“lifesafety.alarm”) is off, and Occupancy (“occupancy”) is on, or Tenant override (“tenant.override”) is on, or Warm-up (“warmup”) is on, and Precool (“precool”) is on, and Then vav system (“vav.system”) is turned on, and Vav box supply fan (“supply.fan”) is turned on.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


Current transmitter ct-x.xx vav box supply fan current (“sup.fan.current”) to its’ respective controller. If vav box supply fan current is greater than xx amps, then supply fan status (“supplyfan.status”) is turned on. If vav box supply fan (“supply.fan”) is on and (after 15 seconds) supply fan status (“supplyfan.status”) is off, then vav box supply fan fail (“supply.fan.fail”) is turned on. Operator may turn supply fan fail (“supply.fan.fail”) off, or If supply fan status (“supfan.status”) is on, then supply fan fail (“supplyfan.fail”) is turned off.

K. Room temperature setpoint control:

Room temperature sensor rts-x.xx transmits room temperature (“room.temperature”) to its’ respective controller. The room temperature sensor rts-x.xx is supplied with a tenant adjustable setpoint slider (“roomsetpt.slider”), and push button off hours override. As tenant adjustable setpoint slider (“roomsetpt.slider”) is manually positioned from minimum to maximum position, then the value of room temperature setpoint (“room.temp.setpt”) is reset (proportionally) from room setpoint minimum (“room.setpt.min”) (70° f) value to room setpoint maximum (“room.setpt.max”) (74° f) value. If the ‘override’ push button is pushed, then 60 minutes (adjustable) (maximum of 8 hours) is added to the tenant off hours override time (“tenant.ovrd.time”). Load shed setpoint (“loadshed.setpt”) is the site cooling override setpoint. Normally load shed setpoint (“loadshed.setpt”) is set to 0° f. If used, load shed setpoint (“loadshed.setpt”) is modulated from 70° f to 80° f, to raise building vav box room temperature setpoints and reduce building energy usage. Load shed setpoint (“loadshed.setpt”) does not affect the room heating temperature setpoint (room temperature setpoint (“room.temp.setpt”) minus (-) heating deadband (“heating.deadband”) (2° f). If load shed setpoint (“loadshed.setpt”) is: Greater than room temperature setpoint (‘room.temp.setpt”), and Less than 80° f, Then: value of room setpoint (“room.setpt”) is set to load shed setpoint (“loadshed.setpt”). Load shed (“loadshed”) is turned on. If load shed setpoint (“loadshed.setpt”) is: Less than room temperature setpoint (‘room.temp.setpt”), or Greater than 80° f, Then: value of room setpoint (“room.setpt”) is set to room temperature setpoint (“room.temp.setpt”). Load shed (“loadshed”) is turned off.

L. Off hours override and mechanical cooling request control:

If: the room temperature sensor rts-x.xx is supplied with tenant push button override, or The room temperature sensor rts-x.xx is supplied with a lcd and tenant adjustable push button setpoint and override,


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


Then each time the tenant override push button is pushed: 60 minutes of override (adjustable) is added to total tenant override accumulation (‘tenant.ovr.accum”), and Tenant off hours override (“tenant.override”) is turned on, after occupancy (“occupancy”) is off. Off hours room heating setpoint (“offhrs.heatsetpt”) is the off hours room heating temperature low limit setpoint. It is initially set by the start-up technician at 60° f. (adjustable). Off hours room heating setpoint (“offhrs.heatsetpt”) is limited to maximum of 65° f. If room temperature (“room.temperature”) drops below off hours room heating setpoint (“offhrs.heatsetpt”), then off hours heat request (“offhrs.heatreq”) is turned on. If room temperature (“room.temperature”) rises above off hours room heating setpoint (“offhrs.heatsetpt”) plus (+) 5° f, then off hours heat request (“offhrs.heatreq”) is turned off. Off hours room cooling setpoint (“offhrs.coolsetpt”) is the off hours room cooling temperature high limit setpoint. It is initially set by the start-up technician at 90° f. (adjustable). Off hours room cooling setpoint (“offhrs.coolsetpt”) is limited to minimum of 85° f. If room temperature (“room.temperature”) rises above off hours room cooling setpoint (“offhrs.coolsetpt”), off hours cool request (“offhrs.coolreq”) is turned on. If room temperature (“room.temperature”) drops below off hours room cooling setpoint (“offhrs.coolsetpt”) minus (-) 5° f, then off hours cool request (“offhrs.coolreq”) is turned off. If: room temperature (“room.temperature”) is greater than room setpoint (“room.setpt”) plus (+) 2° f, and Cold air flow percent (“cold.airflow.pct”) is at 100% full cooling, For 10 minutes, then mechanical cooling request (“mechcool.request”) is turned on. If: room temperature (“room.temperature”) is less than room setpoint (“room.setpt”), and Cold air flow per cent (“cold.airflow.pct”) is less then 90% full cooling, For 10 minutes, then mechanical cooling request (“mechcool.request”) is turned off.

M. Room temperature control: If vav system (“vav.system”) is on, and Room temperature is less than room temperature setpoint (“room.temp.setpt”) minus (-) room heating deadband (“heating.deadband”), and Room temperature loop (“room.temp.loop”) is less than or equal to 50% full cooling, Then: heating mode (“heating.mode”) is turned on, and Cooling mode (“cooling.mode”) is turned off. If: heating mode (“heating.mode”) is on, and Hot water heating system (“heating.system”) is on, Then as room temperature drops below room temperature setpoint (“room.temp.setpt”) minus (-) room heating deadband (“heating.deadband”) (2° f), room temperature loop (“room.temp.loop”) is modulated from 50 to 0% full cooling


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


to maintain room temperature setpoint (“room.temp.setpt”) minus (-) room heating deadband setpoint (“heating.deadband”). As room temperature loop (“room.temp.loop”) modulates from 50 to 0% full cooling, discharge air temperature loop (“disch.temp.loop”) is modulated from 0 to 100% full heating, to maintain room temperature setpoint (“room.temp.setpt”) minus (-) room heating deadband setpoint (“heating.deadband”). If vav system (“vav.system”) is off, or Room temperature is greater than room temperature setpoint (“room.temp.setpt”) minus (-) room heating deadband (“heating.deadband”), and Room temperature loop (“room.temp.loop”) is greater than or equal to 50% full cooling, and Reheat valve (“reheat.valve”) is 0% open, Then: heating mode (“heating.mode”) is turned off. Room heating loop (“heating.loop”) is set to 0% full heating. Reheat valve actuator (“reheat.pulse”) is pulsed shut for minus two times (-2 *) reheat valve run time (“reheat.runtime”) seconds If vav system (“vav.system”) is on, and Room temperature is greater than room setpoint (“room.setpt”), and Room temperature loop (“room.temp.loop”) is greater than or equal to 50% full cooling, Then: heating mode (“heating.mode”) is turned off, and Cooling mode (“cooling.mode”) is turned on. If cooling mode (“cooling.mode”) is on, then as room temperature rises above room setpoint (“room.setpt”), room temperature loop (“room.temp.loop”) is modulated from 50 to 100% full cooling to maintain room setpoint (“room.setpt”). As room temperature loop (“room.temp.loop”) modulates from 50 to 100% full cooling, cold air flow percent (“cold.airflow.pct”) is modualted from 0 to 100% full cooling, to maintain room temperature setpoint (“room.temp.setpt”). If vav system (“vav.system”) is off, or Room temperature is less than room setpoint (“room.setpt”), and Room temperature loop (“room.temp.loop”) is less than or equal to 50% full cooling, Then: cooling mode (“cooling.mode”) is turned off. Cold air flow percent (“cold.airflow.pct”) is set to 0% full cooling. If: heating mode (“heating.mode”) is off, and Cooling mode (“cooling.mode”) is off, Then: room temperature loop (“room.temp.loop”) is set to 50% full cooling. Room heating loop (“heating.loop”) is set to 0% full heating. Cold air flow percent (“cold.airflow.pct”) is set to 0% full cooling. Room heating (vav box discharge air temperature setpoint) control: Temperature sensor dts-x.xx transmits vav box discharge air temperature (“disch.air.temp”) to its’ respective controller. If: vav system (“vav.system”) is on, and Heating mode (heating.mode”) is on, and Heating system (“heating. System”) is on, and Warm-up (“warmup”) is off,


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


Then as discharge air temperature loop (“disch.temp.loop”) modulates from 0-100% full heating: Vav box discharge air temperature setpoint (“disch.temp.setpt”) is modualted from 55° f to maximum discharge air temperature setpoint (“disch.setpt.max”) (“115° f) (adjustable), and (if vav box hot air flow maximum setpoint (“hot.airflow.max”) is greater than cold air flow minimum sertpoint (“cold.airflow.min”) vav cold box air flow setpoint (“cold.flow.setpt”) is modulated from cold air flow minimum setpoint (“cold.airflow.min”) to hot air flow maximum setpoint (“hot.airflow.max”). If: vav system (“vav.system”) is on, and Heating mode (heating.mode”) is on, and Heating system (“heating. System”) is on, and Warm-up (“warmup”) is on, Then: vav box discharge air temperature setpoint (“disch.temp.setpt”) is set to 130° f. Vav cold box air flow setpoint (“cold.flow.setpt”) is set to cold air flow maximum setpoint (“cold.airflow.max”). As vav box discharge air temperature (“disch.air.temp”) drops below vav box discharge air temperature setpoint (“disch.temp.setpt”), reheat valve (“reheat.valve”) is modulated from 0-100% open, to maintain discharge air temperature setpoint (“disch.temp.setpt”). As reheat valve (“reheat.valve”) modulates from 0-100% open, reheat valve actuator (“reheat.pulse”) is pulsed open or shut to match reheat valve (“reheat.valve”). If warm-up (“warmup”) is off, and: Vav system (“vav.system”) is off, or Heating mode (heating.mode”) is off, or Heating system (“heating. System”) is off, Then: discharge air temperature setpoint (“disch.temp.setpt”) is set to 55° f, and reheat valve (“reheat.valve”) is set to 0% open, and Reheat valve actuator (“reheat.pulse”) is pulsed shut. If override reheat valve (“ovrd.reheatvalve”) is set to –on, then: Reheat valve (“reheat.valve”) is set to 0% open, and Reheat valve actuator (“reheat.pulse”) is pulsed shut. If override reheat valve (“ovrd.reheatvalve”) is set to on, then: Vav box cold air flow setpoint (“cold.flow.sept”) is set to maximum of: Cold air flow minimum setpoint (“cold.airflow.min”), and Hot air flow maximum setpoint (“hot.airflow.max”). Reheat valve (“reheat.valve”) is set to 100% open, and Reheat valve actuator (“reheat.pulse”) is pulsed open.

N. Room cooling (vav box air flow setpoint) control:

Maximum air flow calibration factor (“calibrate.max”) is the correction factor for the supply air flow reading (when the supply air flow is at the cooling supply air flow maximum setpoint) (“cold.airflow.max”). The air balancer manually sets maximum air flow calibration factor (“calibrate.max”) (between .5 and 1.5). Cooling supply air flow maximum setpoint (“cold.airflow.max”) is the engineered maximum cooling supply air flow setpoint (as determined by the engineer). The


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


system start-up technician manually sets supply air flow maximum setpoint (“cold.airflow.max”). Cooling supply air flow minimum setpoint (“cold.airflow.min”) is the engineered minimum cooling supply air flow setpoint (as determined by the engineer). The system start-up technician manually sets supply air flow minimum setpoint (“cold.airflow.min”). Minimum air flow calibration factor (“calibrate.min”) is the correction factor for the supply air flow reading (when the supply air flow is at the cooling supply air flow minimum setpoint) (“cold.airflow.min”). The air balancer manually sets minimum air flow calibration factor (“calibrate.min”) (between .5 and 1.5). Vav box k-factor (“k.factor”) is the supply air flow at 1” w.c. (as determined by the vav box manufacturer). It is used for vav box air flow sizing. The system start-up technician manually sets vav box k-factor (“k.factor”). Vav box controller built-in vav box air velocity transmitter (with high and low velocity tubes located at the supply air velocity sensor) transmits vav box supply air flow pressure drop (“cold.vel.press”) to its’ respective controller. Vav box supply air flow pressure drop (“cold.vel.press”) is averaged and calibrates in: vav box k-factor (“k.factor”), The maximum air flow calibration factor (“calibrate.max”), and The minimum air flow factor (“calibrate.min”), To accurately determine vav box average air flow (“cold.airflow”) As cold air flow per cent (“cold.airflow.pct”) modulates from 0 –100% full cooling, cooling supply air flow setpoint (“cold.flow.setpt”) is modulated from the cooling supply air flow minimum setpoint (“cold.airflow.min”) (xxx cfm), to the cooling supply air flow maximum setpoint (“cold.airflow.max”) (xxx cfm). If vav system (“vav.system”) is off, then cooling supply air flow setpoint (“cold.flow.setpt”) is set to 0. If pre-cool (“precool”) is on, Then: cold air flow percent (“cold.airflow.pct”) is set to 100%, and Cold air flow setpoint (“cold.flow.setpt”) is set to cooling supply air flow maximum setpoint (“cold.airflow.max”). If warm-up (“warmup”) is on, then cold air flow setpoint (“cold.flow.setpt”) is set to cooling supply air flow maximum setpoint (“cold.airflow.max”). If override vav box air flow (“ovrd.cold.airflow”) is set to –on, then: Cold air flow percent (“cold.airflow.pct”) is set to 0%, and Cold air flow setpoint (“cold.flow.setpt”) is set to the cooling supply air flow minimum setpoint (“cold.airflow.min”). If override vav box air flow (“ovrd.cold.airflow”) is set to on, then: Cold air flow percent (“cold.airflow.pct”) is set to 100% full cooling, and Cooling supply air flow setpoint (“cold.flow.setpt”) is set to the cooling supply air flow maximum setpoint (“cold.airflow.max”). Vav box air flow control: If vav system (“vav.system”) is on:


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


Then as vav box supply air flow (“cold.airflow”) drops below vav box supply air flow setpoint (“cold.flow.setpt”), vav box damper (“cold.damper”) is modulated from 0-100% open to maintain vav box air flow setpoint (“cold.flow.setpt”). As vav box damper (“cold.damper”) modulates from 0-100% open, vav box damper actuator (“colddamper.pulse”), is pulsed to match vav box damper (“cold.damper”). If vav system (“vav.system”) is off, then: Vav box damper (“cold.damper”) is set to 0% open, and Vav damper actuator (“colddamper.pulse”) is pulsed shut. If override vav box damper (“ovrd.cold.damper”) is set to –on, then: Vav box damper (“cold.damper”) is set to 0% open, and Vav damper actuator (“colddamper.pulse”) is pulsed shut. If override vav box damper (“ovrd.cold.damper”) is set to on, then: Vav box damper (“cold.damper”) is set to 100% open, and Vav damper actuator (“colddamper.pulse”) is pulsed open.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 23 21 13 - HYDRONIC PIPING

PART 1 -GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes pipe and fitting materials, joining methods, special-duty valves, and specialties for the following:

1. Chilled-water piping.

2. Condenser-water piping.

3. Makeup-water piping.

4. Condensate-drain piping.

5. Blowdown-drain piping.

6. Air-vent piping.


1. Division 23 Section "Hydronic Pumps" for pumps, motors, and accessories for hy-dronic piping.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene.


A. Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure and temperature:

1. Chilled-Water Piping: 150 psig at 150 deg F.

2. Condenser-Water Piping: 150 psig at 150 deg F.

3. Makeup-Water Piping: 150 psig at 150 deg F.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of the following:

1. Valves. Include flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for calibrated-orifice balancing valves and automatic flow-control valves.

2. Air control devices.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


3. Hydronic specialties.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail, at 1/4 scale, the piping layout, fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, supports for multiple pipes, and attachments of the same to the building structure. Detail location of supports and anchors.


D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air control devices, hydronic specialties, and special-duty valves to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.

1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."

2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes in-volved and that certification is current.

C. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 01.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Differential Pressure Meter: For each type of balancing valve and automatic flow control valve, include flowmeter, probes, hoses, flow charts, and carrying case.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS


A. Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L.

B. DWV Copper Tubing: ASTM B 306, Type DWV.

C. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers of-fering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Victaulic Company.

b. Anvil International, Inc.

c. S. P. Fittings; a division of Star Pipe Products.

D. Copper, Mechanically Formed Tee Option: For forming T-branch on copper water tube.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland



a. T-DRILL Industries Inc.

E. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.

2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel with plain ends; type, grade, and wall thickness as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.

B. Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, wall thickness to match adjoining pipe.

C. Wrought Cast- and Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:

1. Material Group: 1.1.

2. End Connections: Butt welding.

3. Facings: Raised face.

D. Grooved Mechanical-Joint Fittings and Couplings:


a. Victaulic Company

b. Anvil International, Inc.

c. National Fittings, Inc.

d. S. P. Fittings; a division of Star Pipe Products.

2. Joint Fittings: ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron; ASTM A 47/A 47M, Grade 32510 malleable iron; ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F, E, or S, Grade B fabricated steel; or ASTM A 106, Grade B steel fittings with grooves or shoulders constructed to accept grooved-end couplings; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings.

3. Couplings: Ductile- or malleable-iron housing and synthetic rubber gasket of central cavity pressure-responsive design; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings.

E. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of same materials and wall thicknesses as pipe in which they are installed.


A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping sys-tem contents.

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for joining cop-per with copper; or BAg-1, silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.

E. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropri-ate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

F. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled and working temperatures and pressures.


A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Dielectric Unions:


a. Capitol Manufacturing Company.

b. Central Plastics Company.

c. Hart Industries International, Inc.

d. Jomar International Ltd.

e. Matco-Norca, Inc.

f. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.


h. Wilkins; a Zurn company.

2. Description:

a. Standard: ASSE 1079.

b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig minimum at 150 deg F.

c. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

C. Dielectric Flanges:


a. Capitol Manufacturing Company.

b. Central Plastics Company.

c. Matco-Norca, Inc.

d. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


e. Wilkins; a Zurn company.

2. Description:

a. Standard: ASSE 1079.

b. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly.

c. Pressure Rating: 150 psig minimum at 150 deg F.

d. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded sol-der-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

D. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:


a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.

b. Calpico, Inc.

c. Central Plastics Company.

d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges.

b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig.

c. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic.

d. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene.

e. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.

E. Dielectric Nipples:


a. Elster Perfection.

b. Grinnell Mechanical Products.

c. Matco-Norca, Inc.

d. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.

e. Victaulic Company.

2. Description:

a. Standard: IAPMO PS 66

b. Electroplated steel nipple. complying with ASTM F 1545.

c. Pressure Rating: 150 psig at 150 deg F.

d. End Connections: Male threaded or grooved.

e. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


2.5 VALVES

A. Gate, Globe, Check, Ball, and Butterfly Valves: Comply with requirements specified in Divi-sion 23 Section "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping."

B. Automatic Temperature-Control Valves, Actuators, and Sensors: Comply with requirements specified in Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC."

C. Bronze, Calibrated-Orifice, Balancing Valves:


a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.

b. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries.

c. Flow Design Inc.

d. Gerand Engineering Co.

e. Griswold Controls.

f. Taco.

2. Body: Bronze, ball or plug type with calibrated orifice or venturi.

3. Ball: Brass or stainless steel.

4. Plug: Resin.

5. Seat: PTFE.

6. End Connections: Threaded or socket.

7. Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter.

8. Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position.

9. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig .

10. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.

D. Cast-Iron or Steel, Calibrated-Orifice, Balancing Valves:


a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.

b. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries.

c. Flow Design Inc.

d. Gerand Engineering Co.

e. Griswold Controls.

f. Taco.

g. Tour & Andersson; available through Victaulic Company.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


2. Body: Cast-iron or steel body, ball, plug, or globe pattern with calibrated orifice or venturi.

3. Ball: Brass or stainless steel.

4. Stem Seals: EPDM O-rings.

5. Disc: Glass and carbon-filled PTFE.

6. Seat: PTFE.

7. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.

8. Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter.

9. Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position.

10. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig.


E. Diaphragm-Operated, Pressure-Reducing Valves:


a. Amtrol, Inc.

b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.

c. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries.

d. Conbraco Industries, Inc.

e. Spence Engineering Company, Inc.

f. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Body: Bronze or brass.

3. Disc: Glass and carbon-filled PTFE.

4. Seat: Brass.

5. Stem Seals: EPDM O-rings.

6. Diaphragm: EPT.

7. Low inlet-pressure check valve.

8. Inlet Strainer: <Insert materials>, removable without system shutdown.

9. Valve Seat and Stem: Noncorrosive.

10. Valve Size, Capacity, and Operating Pressure: Selected to suit system in which in-stalled, with operating pressure and capacity factory set and field adjustable.

F. Automatic Flow-Control Valves:


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland



a. Flow Design Inc.

b. Griswold Controls.

2. Body: Brass or ferrous metal.

3. Piston and Spring Assembly: [Stainless steel] [Corrosion resistant], tamper proof, self cleaning, and removable.

4. Combination Assemblies: Include bonze or brass-alloy ball valve.

5. Identification Tag: Marked with zone identification, valve number, and flow rate.

6. Size: Same as pipe in which installed.

7. Performance: Maintain constant flow, plus or minus 5 percent over system pressure fluctuations.

8. Minimum CWP Rating: 175 psig.


2.6 AIR CONTROL DEVICES


1. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries.

2. Wessels Company

3. Amtrol, Inc.

4. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.

5. Taco.

B. Manual Air Vents:

1. Body: Bronze.

2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous.

3. Operator: Screwdriver or thumbscrew.

4. Inlet Connection: NPS 3/4.

5. Discharge Connection: NPS 3/8.

6. CWP Rating: 150 psig.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


C. Automatic Air Vents:

1. Body: Bronze or cast iron.

2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous.

3. Operator: Noncorrosive metal float.

4. Inlet Connection: NPS 3/4.

5. Discharge Connection: NPS 3/8.



D. Bladder-Type Expansion Tanks:

1. Tank: Welded steel, rated for 125-psig working pressure and 240 deg F maximum operating temperature. Factory test with taps fabricated and supports installed and labeled according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Divi-sion 1.

2. Bladder: Securely sealed into tank to separate air charge from system water to main-tain required expansion capacity.

3. Air-Charge Fittings: Schrader valve, stainless steel with EPDM seats.

E. Tangential-Type Air Separators:

1. Tank: Welded steel; ASME constructed and labeled for 125-psig minimum working pressure and 375 deg F maximum operating temperature.

2. Air Collector Tube: Perforated stainless steel, constructed to direct released air into expansion tank.

3. Tangential Inlet and Outlet Connections: Flanged.

4. Blowdown Connection: Threaded.

5. Size: Per Drawings.

2.7 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES


1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection.

2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3. Strainer Screen: 40-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50 percent free area.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


B. Stainless-Steel Bellow, Flexible Connectors:

1. Body: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing protective jacket.

2. End Connections: Threaded or flanged to match equipment connected.

3. Performance: Capable of 3/4-inch misalignment.



C. Rubber flexible connections and expansion joints:


a. Mason Industries, Inc. Model SFDEJ Safeflex or equiv.

2. Body: Peroxide cured EPDM throughout with Kevlar tire cord reinforcement.

3. End Connections: Threaded or flanged to match equipment connected.

4. Performance: Capable of 1-1/4-inch compression, 3/4-inch elongation, 3/4-inch transverse, and 20 degree minimum angular misalignment.



PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Chilled-water piping, aboveground, NPS 3 and smaller, shall be the following:

1. Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and brazed joints.

B. Chilled-water piping, aboveground, NPS 4 and larger, shall be any of the following:

1. Schedule 40 steel pipe, wrought-steel fittings and wrought-cast or forged-steel flanges and flange fittings, and welded and flanged joints.

2. Schedule 40 steel pipe; grooved, mechanical joint coupling and fittings; and grooved, mechanical joints.

C. Condenser-water piping, aboveground, NPS 3 and smaller, shall be the following:


D. Chilled-water piping, aboveground, NPS 4 and larger, shall be any of the following:

1. Schedule 40 steel pipe, wrought-steel fittings and wrought-cast or forged-steel flanges and flange fittings, and welded and flanged joints.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


2. Schedule 40 steel pipe; grooved, mechanical joint coupling and fittings; and grooved, mechanical joints

E. Makeup-water piping installed aboveground shall be the following:


F. Condensate-Drain Piping: Type DWV, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fit-tings, and soldered joints.

G. Blowdown-Drain Piping: Same materials and joining methods as for piping specified for the service in which blowdown drain is installed.

H. Air-Vent Piping:

1. Inlet: Same as service.

2. Outlet: Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and brazed joints.

3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Install shutoff-duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, and at supply con-nection to each piece of equipment.

B. Install calibrated-orifice, balancing valves in the return pipes of new air handling units and fan coils.

C. Install pressure-reducing valves at makeup-water connection to regulate system fill pres-sure.

3.3 PIPING INSTALLATIONS

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of pip-ing systems. Indicate piping locations and arrangements if such were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install pip-ing as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

B. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically in-dicated otherwise.

C. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

D. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

E. Install piping at indicated slopes.

F. Install piping free of sags and bends.

G. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

H. Install piping to allow application of insulation.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


I. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

J. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and ser-vicing of valves.

K. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage.

L. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.

M. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.

N. Install branch connections to mains using [mechanically formed] tee fittings in main pipe, with the branch connected to the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers, connect the branch to the top of the main pipe.

O. Install valves according to Division 23 Section "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping."

P. Install unions in piping, NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

Q. Install flanges in piping, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, at final connections of equipment and else-where as indicated.

R. Install strainers on inlet side of each control valve, pressure-reducing valve, solenoid valve, in-line pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS 3/4 nipple and ball valve in blow-down connection of strainers NPS 2 and larger. Match size of strainer blowoff connection for strainers smaller than NPS 2 .

S. Identify piping as specified in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

T. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with require-ments for sleeves specified in Division 23 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."

U. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with re-quirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 23 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."

V. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with re-quirements for escutcheons specified in Division 23 Section "Common Work Results for HVAC."

3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Comply with the following requirements for maximum spacing of supports.

B. Seismic restraints are specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


C. Install the following pipe attachments:

1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet long.

2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 20 feet or longer.

3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer, sup-ported on a trapeze.

4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.

5. Provide copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with copper pipe.

6. On plastic pipe, install pads or cushions on bearing surfaces to prevent hanger from scratching pipe.

D. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 4 : Maximum span, 14 feet ; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch .



E. Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 3/4 : Maximum span, 5 feet ; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch .


3. NPS 1-1/2 : Maximum span, 8 feet ; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch .


5. NPS 2-1/2 : Maximum span, 9 feet ; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch .


F. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 12-foot intervals between floors.

3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION


B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before as-sembly.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.

F. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified proc-esses and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

G. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

H. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with coupling and gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Cut or roll grooves in ends of pipe based on pipe and coupling manufacturer's written instructions for pipe wall thickness. Use grooved-end fittings and rigid, grooved-end-pipe couplings.

I. Mechanically Formed, Copper-Tube-Outlet Joints: Use manufacturer-recommended tool and procedure, and brazed joints.

3.6 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION

A. Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as re-quired for system air venting.

B. Install automatic air vents at high points of system piping in mechanical equipment rooms only. Manual vents at heat-transfer coils and elsewhere as required for air venting.

C. Install piping from boiler air outlet, air separator, or air purger to expansion tank with a 2 percent upward slope toward tank.

D. Install tangential air separator in pump suction. Install blowdown piping with gate or full-port ball valve; extend full size to nearest floor drain.

E. Install expansion tanks above the air separator. Install tank fitting in tank bottom and charge tank. Use manual vent for initial fill to establish proper water level in tank.

1. Install tank fittings that are shipped loose.

2. Support tank from floor or structure above with sufficient strength to carry weight of tank, piping connections, fittings, plus tank full of water. Do not overload building components and structural members.

F. Install expansion tanks on the floor. Vent and purge air from hydronic system, and ensure tank is properly charged with air to suit system Project requirements.

3.7 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Sizes for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than equip-ment connections.

B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If parallel control valves are in-stalled, only one bypass is required.

D. Install ports for pressure gages and thermometers at coil inlet and outlet connections ac-cording to Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping."


A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:

1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test.

2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing.

3. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace strainer screens.

4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment.

5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pres-sure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test.

B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping:

1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used.

2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release air. Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid.

3. Isolate expansion tanks and determine that hydronic system is full of water.

4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the system's working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A in ASME B31.9, "Build-ing Services Piping."

5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine pip-ing, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.

6. Prepare written report of testing.

C. Perform the following before operating the system:

1. Open manual valves fully.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


2. Inspect pumps for proper rotation.

3. Set makeup pressure-reducing valves for required system pressure.

4. Inspect air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operat-ing freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type).

5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow.

6. Inspect and set operating temperatures of hydronic equipment, such as boilers, chill-ers, cooling towers, to specified values.

7. Verify lubrication of motors and bearings.




CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 23 21 23 - HYDRONIC PUMPS

PART 1 -GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Separately coupled, base-mounted, end-suction centrifugal pumps.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Buna-N: Nitrile rubber.

B. EPT: Ethylene propylene terpolymer.


A. Product Data: For each type of pump. Include certified performance curves and rated ca-pacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, final impeller dimensions, and ac-cessories for each type of product indicated. Indicate pump's operating point on curves.

B. Shop Drawings: For each pump.

1. Show pump layout and connections.

2. Include setting drawings with templates for installing foundation and anchor bolts and other anchorages.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pumps to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are pack-aged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Mechanical Seals: One mechanical seal for each pump.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 SEPARATELY COUPLED, BASE-MOUNTED, END-SUCTION CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or compa-rable product by one of the following:

1. ITT Corporation; Bell & Gossett.

2. Armstrong Pumps Inc.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


3. PACO Pumps.

4. TACO Incorporated.

B. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, centrifugal, overhung-impeller, separately coupled, end-suction pump designed for base mounting, with pump and motor shafts hori-zontal.

C. Pump Construction:

1. Casing: Radially split, cast iron, with replaceable bronze wear rings, threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet, drain plug at bottom and air vent at top of volute, and flanged connections. Provide integral mount on volute to support the casing, and pro-vide attached piping to allow removal and replacement of impeller without disconnect-ing piping or requiring the realignment of pump and motor shaft.

2. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, keyed to shaft, and secured with a locking cap screw. For pumps not frequency-drive con-trolled, trim impeller to match specified performance.

3. Pump Shaft: Stainless steel.

4. Seal: Mechanical seal consisting of carbon rotating ring against a ceramic seat held by a stainless-steel spring, and Buna-N bellows and gasket.

5. Pump Bearings: Grease-lubricated ball bearings in cast-iron housing with grease fit-tings.

D. Shaft Coupling: Molded-rubber insert and interlocking spider capable of absorbing vibra-tion. Couplings shall be drop-out type to allow disassembly and removal without removing pump shaft or motor. EPDM coupling sleeve for variable-speed applications.

E. Coupling Guard: Dual rated; ANSI B15.1, Section 8; OSHA 1910.219 approved; steel; re-movable; attached to mounting frame.

F. Mounting Frame: Welded-steel frame and cross members, factory fabricated from ASTM A 36/A 36M channels and angles. Fabricate to mount pump casing, coupling guard, and motor.

G. Motor: Single speed, secured to mounting frame, with adjustable alignment.

1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and applica-tion.

2. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency re-quirements for motors specified in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

a. Enclosure: Open, dripproof or totally enclosed, fan cooled per Drawings.

b. Efficiency: Premium efficient per NEMA.

2.2 PUMP SPECIALTY FITTINGS

A. Combination flow straightener and flex connection:

1. With reducer, short radius elbow, long radius elbow or reducing elbow where required.

2. 150-psig flanges, type 304 stainless steel corrugated hose with braided covering.

3. Straightening vanes or pre-rotational vanes as required.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


B. Triple-Duty Valve:

1. Straight pattern.

2. 175-psig pressure rating, cast-iron body, pump-discharge fitting.

3. Drain plug and bronze-fitted shutoff, balancing, and check valve features.

4. Brass gage ports with integral check valve and orifice for flow measurement.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine equipment foundations and anchor-bolt locations for compliance with require-ments for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections be-fore pump installation.

C. Examine foundations and inertia bases for suitable conditions where pumps are to be in-stalled.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PUMP INSTALLATION

A. Install pumps to provide access for periodic maintenance including removing motors, impel-lers, couplings, and accessories.

B. Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps and weight of pumps is not supported by piping.

C. Equipment Mounting: Install base-mounted pumps on concrete filled spring isolation base with seismic snubbers. Comply with requirements for equipment bases specified in Divi-sion 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

1. Minimum Deflection: 2 inch.

2. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.

3. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indi-cated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around full perimeter of concrete base.

4. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through con-crete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.

5. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, in-structions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

6. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equip-ment.

7. Install on 6-inch high concrete pad.

3.3 ALIGNMENT

A. Perform alignment service.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


B. Comply with requirements in Hydronics Institute standards for alignment of pump and motor shaft. Add shims to the motor feet and bolt motor to base frame. Do not use grout between motor feet and base frame.

C. Comply with pump and coupling manufacturers' written instructions.

D. After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly. Completely fill baseplate with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout while metal blocks and shims or wedges are in place. After grout has cured, fully tighten foundation bolts.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Where installing piping adjacent to pump, allow space for service and maintenance.

B. Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are same size as piping connected to pumps.

C. Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles.

D. Install flow straightener, and triple-duty valve on discharge side of pumps.

E. Install Y-type strainer and flow straightener with straightening vanes or pre-rotational vanes where applicable per the Drawings, with shutoff valve on suction side of pumps.

F. Install flexible connectors on suction and discharge sides of base-mounted pumps where applicable per the Drawings

G. Install pressure gages on pump suction and discharge or at integral pressure-gage tapping, or install single gage with multiple-input selector valve.

H. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

3.5 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instruc-tions.

2. Check piping connections for tightness.

3. Clean strainers on suction piping.

4. Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting:

a. Verify bearing lubrication.

b. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquid is free to rotate with pump hot and cold. If pump is bound or drags, do not operate until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.

c. Verify that pump is rotating in the correct direction.

5. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump for op-eration.

6. Start motor.

7. Open discharge valve slowly.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain hydronic pumps.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland




CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 23 25 00 - HVAC WATER TREATMENT

PART 1 -GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following HVAC water-treatment systems:

1. Bypass chemical-feed equipment and controls.

2. Biocide chemical-feed equipment and controls.

3. Chemical treatment test equipment.

4. HVAC water-treatment chemicals.

5. Water filtration units for HVAC makeup water.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control, signaling power-limited circuits.

B. TDS: Total dissolved solids, measured by electrical conductivity.


A. Water quality for HVAC systems shall minimize corrosion, scale buildup, and biological growth for optimum efficiency of HVAC equipment without creating a hazard to operating personnel or the environment.

B. Base HVAC water treatment on quality of water available at Project site, HVAC system equipment material characteristics and functional performance characteristics, operating personnel capabilities, and requirements and guidelines of authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Closed hydronic systems, including chilled water, shall have the following water qualities:

1. pH: Maintain a value within 9.0 to 10.5.

2. "P" Alkalinity: Maintain a value within 100 to 500 ppm.

3. Boron: Maintain a value within 100 to 200 ppm.

4. Chemical Oxygen Demand: Maintain a maximum value of 100 ppm.

5. Soluble Copper: Maintain a maximum value of 0.20 ppm.

6. TDS: Maintain a maximum value of 10 ppm.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


7. Ammonia: Maintain a maximum value of 20 ppm.

8. Free Caustic Alkalinity: Maintain a maximum value of 20 ppm.

9. Microbiological Limits:

a. Total Aerobic Plate Count: Maintain a maximum value of 1000 organisms/ml.

b. Total Anaerobic Plate Count: Maintain a maximum value of 100 organisms/ml.

c. Nitrate Reducers: Maintain a maximum value of 100 organisms/ml.

d. Sulfate Reducers: Maintain a maximum value of 0 organisms/ml.

e. Iron Bacteria: Maintain a maximum value of 0 organisms/ml.

D. Open hydronic systems, including condenser water, shall have the following water qualities monitored and controlled to levels recommended by water treatment service provider after initial project site water analysis:

a. Conductivity (μS/cm)

b. pH

c. Total Hardness (mg/L)

d. Calcium Hardness (mg/L)

e. Magnesium Hardness (mg/L)

f. Alkalinity (mg/L)

g. Chloride (mg/L)

h. Silica (mg/L)

i. Microbiological Limits

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories for the following products:

1. Centrifugal separators.

B. Shop Drawings: Pretreatment and chemical treatment equipment showing tanks, mainte-nance space required, and piping connections to HVAC systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power and control wiring.

C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that water filtration units and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Include the following:

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and lo-cate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For sensors, injection pumps, water filtration units, and controllers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

E. Other Informational Submittals:

1. Water-Treatment Program: Written sequence of operation on an annual basis for the application equipment required to achieve water quality defined in the "Performance Requirements" Article above.

2. Water Analysis: Illustrate water quality available at Project site.


A. HVAC Water-Treatment Service Provider Qualifications: An experienced HVAC water-treatment service provider capable of analyzing water qualities, installing water-treatment equipment, and applying water treatment as specified in this Section.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

1.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Scope of Maintenance Service: Provide chemicals and service program to maintain water conditions required above to inhibit corrosion, scale formation, and biological growth for all condenser-water and chilled-water piping and equipment. Services and chemicals shall be provided for a period of one year from date of Substantial Completion, and shall include the following:

1. Initial water analysis and HVAC water-treatment recommendations.

2. Startup assistance for Contractor to flush the systems, clean with detergents, and ini-tially fill systems with required chemical treatment prior to operation.

3. Periodic field service and consultation.

4. Customer report charts and log sheets.

5. Laboratory technical analysis.

6. Analyses and reports of all chemical items concerning safety and compliance with government regulations.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 NON-CHEMICAL WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM

1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


a. Pulse Pure by Evapco.

2. The Non-Chemical Water Treatment System shall have the ability to maintain the fol-lowing re-circulated water parameters:

a. Conductivity range of 300 to 5,000 μS/cm.

b. pH range of 6.5 to 9.0.

c. Total bacteria count (TBC) of less than 10,000 CFU’s/ml.

d. Keep condenser water system scale free and corrosion to levels acceptable by AWT guidelines.

3. The Non-Chemical Water Treatment System shall meet the following electrical re-quirements:

a. The system shall operate on a single 120V single, 1 Ø input as standard.

b. The system shall have a Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) of less than 15%.

c. The system shall meet UL and cUL specifications for electrical components.

d. The system shall have a shielded cable to minimize susceptibility to external electro-magnetic field interference.

e. The system shall meet FCC requirements for electromagnetic emissions per Title 47 CFR part 18 for Industrial, Scientific and Medical Equipment.

f. The coil assemblies shall be enclosed in a water resistant shell and be provided with indicator lights that signify the system is on and operational.

g. All water sensors for conductivity shall be torodial type.

4. The Non-Chemical Water Treatment System shall meet the following construction re-quirements:

a. The Electrical Pulse Panel shall be a NEMA 4X-304 stainless steel enclosure. The use of cooling fans to remove heat from the electrical pulse panel shall not be acceptable.

b. The system shall have remote start-up and monitoring capabilities via a control relay wired from the pump or through the building management system using the appropriate BACnet or MODBUS protocol.

c. The Chamber shall contain two separate coil sections housing a minimum of four low frequency and two high frequency coils per chamber.

d. The Conductivity controller shall be integral to the chamber control panel to allow for simplified calibration and single source power. This single panel shall have a USB port which allows up to 60 days of operational data to be downloaded.

1) Bleed Valve

2) Panel operation

3) Output contact

4) System Conductivity

5) Make-up/bleed metering

e. This single control panel shall have the capability of receiving input from local make-up and bleed water meters and activating a 120 volt contact.

5. The Non-Chemical Water Treatment System provides physical water treatment by:


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


a. Changing surface scale formation to bulk solution powder formation.

b. Keeping the system free from mineral scale on all heat transfer surfaces (includ-ing fill, coils, pipes, heat exchangers, valves and other components in the sys-tem).

c. Controlling the population of microorganisms such as bacteria to 10,000 CFU/ml or below when measured using plate count agar at 35°C.

d. In addition, the non-chemical water treatment system shall provide:

1) A system operating with a reduced blow down volume resulting in water and energy savings.

2) Blow down containing no added chemicals and conforms to all sewer dis-charge regulations.

3) FIFRA compliance per EPA requirements for Pesticide Programs of Title 40 CFR Subchapter E.

2.2 MANUAL CHEMICAL-FEED EQUIPMENT

A. Bypass Feeders: Steel, with corrosion-resistant exterior coating, minimum 3-1/2-inch fill opening in the top, and NPS 3/4 bottom inlet and top side outlet. Quarter turn or threaded fill cap with gasket seal and diaphragm to lock the top on the feeder when exposed to sys-tem pressure in the vessel.

1. Capacity: 2 gal.

2. Minimum Working Pressure: 125 psig.

2.3 CHEMICAL TREATMENT TEST EQUIPMENT

A. Corrosion Test-Coupon Assembly: Constructed of corrosive-resistant material, complete with piping, valves, and mild steel and copper coupons. Locate copper coupon downstream from mild steel coupon in the test-coupon assembly.

1. Two-station rack for closed-loop systems.

2. Two-station rack for open systems.

2.4 CHEMICALS

A. Chemicals shall be as recommended by water-treatment system manufacturer that are compatible with piping system components and connected equipment, and that can attain water quality specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article.

2.5 FILTRATION EQUIPMENT

A. Centrifugal Separators:

1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:

a. LAKOS; a div. of Claude Laval Corporation.

b. Griswold Water Filtration Systems.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


2. Description: Simplex separator housing with baffles and chambers for removing parti-cles from water by centrifugal action and gravity.

3. Housing: With manufacturer's proprietary system of baffles and chambers.

a. Construction: Fabricate and label steel separator housing to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

b. Inlet: Designed with tangential entry to produce centrifugal flow of feedwater.

c. Vortex Chamber: Designed for downward vortex flow and gravity separation of particles.

d. Collection Chamber: Designed to hold separated particles.

e. Outlet: Near top of unit.

f. Purge: At bottom of collection chamber.

g. Pipe Connections NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded according to ASME B1.20.1.

h. Pipe Connections NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Steel, Class 150 flanges according to ASME B16.5 or grooved according to AWWA C606. Provide stainless-steel flanges if tank is stainless steel.

4. Motorized Purge Valve: Gate or plug pattern valve.

a. Motorized Valves: Butterfly-type, flanged or grooved-end, ductile-iron body, with EPDM valve seat and stem seal; with ASTM B 148 aluminum bronze disc.

5. Strainer: Stainless-steel basket type mounted on pump suction.

6. Piping: ASTM B 88, Type L copper water tube, copper-alloy solder-joint fittings, and brazed, flanged, or grooved joints.

7. Circulating Pump: Overhung impeller, close coupled, single stage, end suction, cen-trifugal. Comply with UL 778 and with HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3.

a. Casing: Radially split, cast iron.

b. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum.

c. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, closed, and keyed to shaft.

d. Shaft and Shaft Sleeve: Steel shaft, with copper-alloy shaft sleeve.

e. Seal: Mechanical.

f. Motor: TEFC motor supported on the pump-bearing frame. General require-ments for motors are specified in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Require-ments for HVAC Equipment."

8. Controls: Shall include timeclock and provide for automatic control of circulating pump and separator purge; factory wired for single electrical connection.

a. Panel: NEMA 250, Type 4 enclosure.

b. Pump: Automatic and manual switching; manual switch position bypasses safe-ties and controls.

c. Separator Purge: Automatic and manual.

d. TDS Controller Interlock: Open separator purge valve with bleed-off control.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


9. Support: Skid mounting.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 WATER ANALYSIS

A. Perform an analysis of supply water to determine quality of water available at Project site.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install chemical application equipment on concrete bases, level and plumb. Maintain manu-facturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices that require servicing are accessible.

B. Install seismic restraints for equipment and floor-mounting accessories and anchor to build-ing structure. Refer to Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for seismic restraints.

C. Install water testing equipment on wall near water chemical application equipment.

D. Install interconnecting control wiring for chemical treatment controls and sensors.

E. Mount sensors and injectors in piping circuits.

F. Non-Chemical Water Treatment System:

1. For open tower systems the components shall be mounted by the mechanical con-tractor. Power panel shall be installed with factory provided stainless steel brackets.

2. Supply all components (coils, transformers, conductivity meters, blowdown valves etc) necessary for a completely automated stand alone system. Blowdown valves shall be motorized ball valves power open, spring return.

3. The Non Chemical Water Treatment System representative will supervise all piping and electrical hook-ups associated with the treatment program and will also give di-rections to the contractor as to the various sampling, monitoring and the blow down required to ensure water chemistry of the system.

4. Immediately after hydrostatic testing of piping is completed, systems shall be drained, flushed, cleaned and. Subsequent to the cleaning process, each system shall be re-filled with clean water prior to the system being placed into operation. Once filled the condenser water pump and cooling tower fans shall be operated until conductivity set point is achieved.

5. Monitoring and Service:

a. The performance of the system will be monitored every month for the first twelve months of operation by the non-chemical water treatment system representative.

b. Each site visits from the non-chemical water treatment system representative shall include the following:

1) Perform make-up and cooling water analysis as described below.

2) Inspection of the systems for functionality.

3) Inspection of the blow down system for functionality.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


4) Calibration and cleaning of conductivity probes or other instrumentation re-lated to blow down.

5) Visual inspection of overall system condition (service visits may be timed to coincide with the opening of certain system components such as a chiller)

c. Prior to shipment the manufacturer of the device shall provide a make-up water analysis and approval letter detailing conductivity set point and recommended cycles of concentration. An analysis of the following water chemistry parameters will be performed within 30 days of installation and every 30-45 days for first year of operation at no charge to the customer for both make-up and basin water sources:

1) pH

2) Conductivity

3) Chloride

4) Alkalinity

5) Hardness

6) Heterotrophic Plate Count

d. The above parameters will be evaluated at a local commercial laboratory or using field-tests kits. Copy of reports shall be submitted to owner’s representative and the cooling tower manufacturer with 7 days of testing.

G. Bypass Feeders: Install in closed hydronic systems, including chilled water, and equipped with the following:

1. Install bypass feeder in a bypass circuit around circulating pumps, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

2. Install water meter in makeup water supply.

3. Install test-coupon assembly in bypass circuit around circulating pumps, unless oth-erwise indicated on Drawings.

4. Install a gate or full-port ball isolation valves on inlet, outlet, and drain below feeder inlet.

5. Install a swing check on inlet after the isolation valve.

3.3 CONNECTIONS


B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

C. Make piping connections between HVAC water-treatment equipment and dissimilar-metal piping with dielectric fittings. Dielectric fittings are specified in Division 23 Section "Com-mon Work Results for HVAC."

D. Install shutoff valves on HVAC water-treatment equipment inlet and outlet. Metal general-duty valves are specified in Division 23 Section "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping."


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


E. Refer to Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for backflow preventers required in makeup water connections to potable-water systems.

F. Confirm applicable electrical requirements in Division 26 Sections for connecting electrical equipment.

G. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

H. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to in-spect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including con-nections. Report results in writing.


1. Inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and electrical connections.

2. Inspect piping and equipment to determine that systems and equipment have been cleaned, flushed, and filled with water, and are fully operational before introducing chemicals for water-treatment system.

3. Place HVAC water-treatment system into operation and calibrate controls during the preliminary phase of HVAC systems' startup procedures.

4. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is tested and satisfactory test results are achieved.

5. Test for leaks and defects. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

6. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, and replaced water piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or con-cealed before it has been tested and approved.

7. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow test pressure to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects.

8. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping until no leaks exist.

C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

D. At eight-week interval following Substantial Completion, perform separate water analyses on hydronic systems to show that automatic chemical-feed systems are maintaining water quality within performance requirements specified in this Section. Submit written reports of water analysis advising Owner of changes necessary to adhere to Part 1 "Performance Re-quirements" Article.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


E. Comply with ASTM D 3370 and with the following standards:

1. Silica: ASTM D 859.

2. Steam System: ASTM D 1066.

3. Acidity and Alkalinity: ASTM D 1067.

4. Iron: ASTM D 1068.

5. Water Hardness: ASTM D 1126.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC water-treatment systems and equipment. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."

B. Training: Provide a "how-to-use" self-contained breathing apparatus video that details ex-act operating procedures of equipment.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 23 31 13 - METAL DUCTS

PART 1 -GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings.

2. Single-wall round ducts and fittings.

3. Sheet metal materials.

4. Duct liner.

5. Sealants and gaskets.

6. Hangers and supports.

7. Seismic-restraint devices.


1. Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjust-ing, and balancing requirements for metal ducts.

2. Division 23 Section "Nonmetal Ducts" for fibrous-glass ducts, thermoset fiber-reinforced plastic ducts, thermoplastic ducts, PVC ducts, and concrete ducts.

3. Division 23 Section "HVAC Casings" for factory- and field-fabricated casings for me-chanical equipment.

4. Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.


A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements and design criteria indicated. All ductwork above roof is required to be constructed of 22 gauge sheet metal for acoustical requirements.

1. Static-Pressure Classes: a. Supply Ducts: 4-inch wg for AHU-1 and 2-inch wg for ductwork in new mechani-

cal room. b. Return Ducts (Negative Pressure): 3-inch wg and 2-inch wg for ductwork in new

mechanical room. c. Exhaust Ducts (Negative Pressure): 2-inch wg.

2. Leakage Class: a. Round Supply-Air Duct 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1.5-inch wg. b. Rectangular Supply-Air Duct: 6 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg. c. Flexible Supply-Air Duct: 6 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


3. Retain seismic options and design criteria in paragraph below that are approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

4. Structural Performance: Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment per the SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems 1991 Edition. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment per the 2007 California Building Code Seismic Category D.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of the following products:

1. Acoustical Liners and adhesives.

2. Sealants and gaskets.

3. Seismic-restraint devices.

B. Field quality-control reports.

C. Contractor to provide shop drawings submitted to the engineer for approval before duct-work fabrication. Shop drawings of ductwork will include duct size, insulation type, support points and sheet metal gauge.

D. Contractor to provide structural calculations for ductwork hangers and supports stamped by

a professional structural engineer.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum," for aluminum supports. AWS D9.1M/D9.1, "Sheet Metal Weld-ing Code," for duct joint and seam welding.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports.

2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum," for aluminum supports.

3. AWS D9.1M/D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated. All ductwork above roof is required to be constructed of 22 gauge sheet metal for acoustical requirements.

B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-4, "Transverse (Girth) Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support in-tervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


Flexible."

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-5, "Longitudinal Seams - Rectangu-lar Ducts," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Stan-dards - Metal and Flexible."

D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 2, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, appli-cable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." All ductwork above roof is required to be constructed of 22 gauge sheet metal for acoustical require-ments.

2.2 SINGLE-WALL ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on in-dicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers of-fering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. McGill AirFlow LLC. b. SEMCO Incorporated. c. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc. d. Spiral Manufacturing Co., Inc.

B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Transverse Joints - Round Duct," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

1. Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60 Inches in Diameter: Flanged.

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Seams - Round Duct and Fit-tings," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

D. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Con-struction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-5, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, mate-rials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Con-struction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2.3 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Stan-dards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct con-struction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60 .

2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.

3. Coating Materials: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use on ducts listed and labeled by an NRTL for compliance with UL 181, Class 1.

4. All ductwork above roof is required to be constructed of 22 gauge sheet metal for acoustical requirements.

C. Carbon-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, with oiled, matte finish for ex-posed ducts.

D. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209 Alloy 3003, H14 temper; with mill finish for concealed ducts, and standard, one-side bright finish for duct surfaces exposed to view.

E. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

1. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket mate-rials.

F. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.4 DUCT LINER

A. Accoustical Duct Liner: Comply with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B; and with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers of-fering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. CertainTeed Corporation; Insulation Group. b. Johns Manville. c. Knauf Insulation. d. Owens Corning.

2. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: a. Type I, Flexible: 0.125 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F R-8 at 75 deg F mean tem-

perature. b. Type II, Rigid: 0.125 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F R-8 at 75 deg F mean tempera-

ture.

3. Water-Based Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with ASTM C 916.

B. Natural-Fiber Duct Liner: 85 percent cotton, 10 percent borate, and 5 percent polybinding fibers, treated with a microbial growth inhibitor and complying with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.

1. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: 0.125 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean temperature when tested according to ASTM C 518.

2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to ASTM E 84; certified by an NRTL.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


3. Liner Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer and complying with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.

C. Insulation Pins and Washers:

1. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.135-inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-steel washer.

2. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick galvanized steel or aluminum; with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.

D. Shop Application of Duct Liner: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Stan-dards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-19, "Flexible Duct Liner Installation."

1. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent ad-hesive coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with mul-tiple layers of duct liner is prohibited.

2. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metal nosing.

3. Butt transverse joints without gaps, and coat joint with adhesive.

4. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted-edge overlapping.

5. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts, unless duct size and dimensions of standard liner make longitudinal joints nec-essary.

6. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 2500 fpm .

7. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners and at intervals not ex-ceeding 12 inches transversely; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 18 inches longitudinally.

8. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have either channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge facings at the following locations: a. Fan discharges. b. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct. c. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are higher than

2500 fpm or where indicated.

9. Secure insulation between perforated sheet metal inner duct of same thickness as specified for outer shell. Use mechanical fasteners that maintain inner duct at uniform distance from outer shell without compressing insulation. a. Sheet Metal Inner Duct Perforations: 3/32-inch diameter, with an overall open

area of 23 percent.

10. Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to fire-damper sleeves, dampers, turn-ing vane assemblies, or other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other buildout means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct walls with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds.

2.5 SEALANT AND GASKETS

A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.

B. Two-Part Tape Sealing System:

1. Tape: Woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, air-tight seal.

2. Tape Width: 4 inches.

3. Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic.

4. Water resistant.

5. Mold and mildew resistant.

6. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg , positive and negative.

7. Service: Indoor and outdoor.

8. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F .

9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum.

C. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:

1. Application Method: Brush on.

2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent.

3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20.

4. Water resistant.

5. Mold and mildew resistant.

6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water).

7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg , positive and negative.

8. Service: Indoor or outdoor.

9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum sheets.

D. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.

1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric.

2. Type: S.

3. Grade: NS.

4. Class: 25.

5. Use: O.

2.6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.

B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electro galvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.

C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 4-1 , "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 4-2,


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


"Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."

D. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.

E. Steel Cables for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 492.

F. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.

G. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compati-ble with duct materials.

H. Trapeze and Riser Supports:

1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.

2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates.

3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc chro-mate.




2. Ductmate Industries, Inc.

3. Hilti Corp.



6. TOLCO; a brand of NIBCO INC.

7. Unistrut Corporation; Tyco International, Ltd.

B. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and applica-tions shall be as defined in reports an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.


C. Channel Support System: Shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of slotted steel channels rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces and with accessories for at-tachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end. In-clude matching components and corrosion-resistant coating.

D. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603, galvanized ASTM A 492, stainless-steel cables with end connections made of cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts de-signed for restraining cable service; and with an automatic-locking and clamping device or double-cable clips.

E. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted connections Reinforcing steel angle clamped to hanger rod.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


F. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design con-siderations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings.

B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install round ducts in maximum practical lengths.

D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections.

F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and per-pendicular to building lines.

G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and per-manent enclosure elements of building.

H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch , plus allowance for insulation thickness.

I. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures.

J. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are ex-posed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches .

K. Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire damp-ers. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers.

L. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materi-als. Comply with SMACNA's "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines."

3.2 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING

A. Seal duct seams and joints for duct static-pressure and leakage classes specified in "Per-formance Requirements" Article, according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Stan-dards - Metal and Flexible," Table 1-2, "Standard Duct Sealing Requirements," unless oth-erwise indicated.

1. For static-pressure classes 2-inch wg, comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construc-tion Standards - Metal and Flexible," Seal Class for 2-inch wg:


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland



A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chap-ter 4, "Hangers and Supports."

B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fas-teners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete.

2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.

3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches thick.

4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.

5. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.

C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 4-1 , "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 4-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection.

D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.

E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum in-tervals of 16 feet .

F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

3.4 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT-DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Install ducts with hangers and braces designed to support the duct and to restrain against seismic forces required by applicable building codes. Comply with SMACNA's "Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems." SEI/ASCE 7.

1. Space lateral supports a maximum of o.c., and longitudinal supports a maximum of 80 feet o.c.

2. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet .

B. Select seismic-restraint devices with capacities adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads.


D. Install cable restraints on ducts that are suspended with vibration isolators.

E. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to au-thorities having jurisdiction.

F. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing and re-straints to structure, to flanges of beams, to upper truss chords of bar joists, or to concrete


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


members.

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.

3.6 PAINTING

A. Paint interior of metal ducts that are visible through registers and grilles and that do not have duct liner. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex paint over a compatible galvanized-steel primer. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 09 painting Sections.



B. Leakage Tests:

1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual."

2. Test the following systems: a. Supply air. b. Return air. c. Exhaust air.

3. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testing and for compliance with test requirements.

4. Test for leaks before insulation application.

5. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section being tested. If static-pressure classes are not indicated, test entire system at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum de-sign operating pressure. Give seven days' advance notice for testing.

C. Duct System Cleanliness Tests:

1. Visually inspect duct system to ensure that no visible contaminants are present.

2. Test sections of metal duct system, chosen randomly by Owner, for cleanliness ac-cording to "Vacuum Test" in NADCA ACR, "Assessment, Cleaning and Restoration of HVAC Systems." a. Acceptable Cleanliness Level: Net weight of debris collected on the filter media

shall not exceed 0.75 mg/100 sq. cm.

D. Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.8 DUCT CLEANING

A. Clean new duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


B. Use service openings for entry and inspection.

1. Create new openings and install access panels appropriate for duct static-pressure class if required for cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated or lined duct. Patch insulation and liner as recommended by duct liner manufacturer. Comply with Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for access panels and doors.

2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection.

3. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process.

C. Particulate Collection and Odor Control:

1. When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97 percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron-size (or larger) particles.

2. When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed from HVAC system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and other points of entry into building.

D. Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits:

1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers).

2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling sup-ply and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies.

3. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehu-midifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains.

4. Coils and related components.

5. Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling plenums and mechanical equipment rooms.

6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes.

7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems.

E. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:

1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contami-nants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building.

2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Con-nect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under negative pressure.

3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories.

4. Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct liner to get wet. Replace fibrous-glass duct liner that is damaged, deteriorated, or de-laminated or that has friable material, mold, or fungus growth.

5. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan opera-tional. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and straighten fins.

6. Provide drainage and cleanup for wash-down procedures.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland




CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 23 33 00 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 -GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Backdraft and pressure relief dampers.

2. Manual volume dampers.

3. Combination fire and smoke dampers.



1. Division 23 Section "HVAC Gravity Ventilators" for roof-mounted ventilator caps.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


1. For duct silencers, include pressure drop and dynamic insertion loss data. Include breakout noise calculations for high transmission loss casings.


A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

B. Comply with AMCA 500-D testing for damper rating.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for ac-ceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60.

2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.

C. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209 , Alloy 3003, Temper H14; with mill finish for concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.

D. Extruded Aluminum: Comply with ASTM B 221 , Alloy 6063, Temper T6.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


E. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on gal-vanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.

F. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches .

2.2 BACKDRAFT AND PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS


1. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.

2. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.

3. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc.

4. Duro Dyne Inc.

5. Nailor Industries Inc.

6. NCA Manufacturing, Inc.

7. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc.

8. Ruskin Company.

9. Vent Products Company, Inc.

B. Description: Gravity balanced.

C. Maximum Air Velocity: 2000 fpm .

D. Maximum System Pressure: 2-inch wg .

E. Blade Action: Parallel.

F. Blade Seals: Felt.

G. Blade Axles:

1. Material: Nonferrous metal.

2. Diameter: 0.20 inch .

H. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

I. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.

J. Bearings: Steel ball or synthetic pivot bushings.

K. Accessories:

1. Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure.

2. Counterweights and spring-assist kits for vertical airflow installations. 1. Screen Mounting: Front mounted in sleeve.

a. Sleeve Thickness: 20-gage minimum. b. Sleeve Length: 4 inches minimum.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


2.3 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS

A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers of-fering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. b. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc. c. McGill AirFlow LLC. d. METALAIRE, Inc. e. Nailor Industries Inc. f. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc. g. Ruskin Company. h. Vent Products Company, Inc.

2. Standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream.

3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.

4. Frames: a. Hat-shaped, galvanized steel channels, 0.064-inch minimum thickness. b. Mitered and welded corners. c. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.

5. Blades: a. Multiple or single blade. b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design. c. Stiffen damper blades for stability. d. Galvanized -steel, 0.064 inch thick.

6. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

B. Jackshaft:

1. Size: 1-inch diameter.

2. Material: Galvanized-steel pipe rotating within pipe-bearing assembly mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies.

3. Length and Number of Mountings: As required to connect linkage of each damper in multiple-damper assembly.

C. Damper Hardware:

1. Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch- thick zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut.

2. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size.

3. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.

2.4 COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS


1. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


2. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc.

3. Nailor Industries Inc.

4. Ruskin Company.

B. Type: Static and dynamic; rated and labeled according to UL 555 and UL 555S by an NRTL.

C. Closing rating in ducts up to 4-inch wg static pressure class and minimum 4000-fpm veloc-ity.

D. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 and 3 hours.

E. Frame: Curtain type with blades inside airstream; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inch- thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.

F. Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated, fusible links.

G. Smoke Detector: Integral, factory wired for single-point connection.

H. Damper Motors two-position action.

I. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and effi-ciency requirements for motors specified in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Require-ments for HVAC Equipment."

1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

2. Permanent-Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Motors: With oil-immersed and sealed gear trains.

3. Spring-Return Motors: Equip with an integral spiral-spring mechanism where indi-cated. Enclose entire spring mechanism in a removable housing designed for service or adjustments. Size for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque rating of 150 in. x lbf .

4. Outdoor Motors and Motors in Outdoor-Air Intakes: Equip with O-ring gaskets de-signed to make motors weatherproof. Equip motors with internal heaters to permit normal operation at minus 40 deg F .

5. Nonspring-Return Motors: For dampers larger than 25 sq. ft. , size motor for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque rating of 300 in. x lbf .

6. Electrical Connection: 115 V, single phase, 60 Hz.

J. Accessories:

1. Auxiliary switches for signaling.

2. Momentary test switch , mounted.

2.5 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS


1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


2. Duro Dyne Inc.

3. Ventfabrics, Inc.

B. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics.

C. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.

D. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with weatherproof, synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone.

1. Minimum Weight: 24 oz./sq. yd. .

2. Tensile Strength: 530 lbf/inch in the warp and 440 lbf/inch in the filling.

3. Service Temperature: Minus 50 to plus 250 deg F .

E. Thrust Limits: Combination coil spring and elastomeric insert with spring and insert in com-pression, and with a load stop. Include rod and angle-iron brackets for attaching to fan dis-charge and duct.

1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation effi-ciency.

2. Outdoor Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load.




6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.

7. Coil Spring: Factory set and field adjustable for a maximum of 1/4-inch movement at start and stop.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construc-tion Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.

B. Install backdraft dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible to exhaust fan unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel.

1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts.

D. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

E. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


F. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.

G. Install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on both sides of equipment. Attach thrust limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4-inch movement during start and stop of fans.


A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement. 2. Operate fire, smoke, and combination fire and smoke dampers to verify full range of

movement and verify that proper heat-response device is installed.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 23 37 13 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES

PART 1 -GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Adjustable bar registers.

2. Fixed face grilles.


1. Division 08 Section "Fence Panels & Screening System and Louvers" for fixed and adjustable louvers and wall vents, whether or not they are connected to ducts.

2. Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for volume-control dampers not integral to registers and grilles.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include the following:

1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and per-formance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings.

2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 REGISTERS AND GRILLES

A. Adjustable Bar Register

1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Titus.

b. Nailor Industries Inc.

c. Price Industries.

d. Krueger.

2. Material: Aluminum.

3. Finish: Aluminum.

4. Face Blade Arrangement: Vertical spaced 3/4 inch apart.

5. Rear-Blade Arrangement: Horizontal spaced 3/4 inch apart.

6. Frame: 1-1/4 inches wide.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


7. Mounting: Countersunk screw.

B. Fixed Face Grille:

1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Titus.

b. Nailor Industries Inc.

c. Price Industries.

d. Krueger.

2. Material: Aluminum.

3. Finish: Aluminum.

4. Face Arrangement: 1/2-by-1/2-by-1/2-inch grid.

5. Core Construction: Integral.

6. Frame: 1-1/4 inches wide.

7. Mounting: Countersunk screw.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas where registers and grilles are to be installed for compliance with require-ments for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install registers and grilles level and plumb.

B. Install registers and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and main-tenance of dampers.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, adjust registers and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 23 57 00 - HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC

PART 1 -GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes plate heat exchangers.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and ac-cessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, re-quired clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

1. Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: Details and design calculations for seismic restraints for heat exchangers.


A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For heat exchanger, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.


2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Heat Exchanger: Identify center of gravity and lo-cate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of heat exchanger anchorage devices on which certification is based and their installation requirements.

B. Source quality-control reports.

C. Field quality-control reports.

D. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For heat exchangers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.6 WARRANTY


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of domestic-water heat exchangers that fail in materials or workman-ship within specified warranty period.


a. Structural failures including heat exchanger and supports.

b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.

2. Warranty Periods: From date of Substantial Completion.

a. Plate, Domestic-Water Heat Exchangers:

1) Plate-and-Frame Type: One year.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Division 01 Sec-tion "Quality Requirements," to design seismic restraints for heat exchangers.

B. Seismic Performance: Heat exchangers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7 and California Building Code 2007 requirements.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."

2.2 GASKETED-PLATE HEAT EXCHANGERS


1. Alfa Laval Inc.

2. API Heat Transfer Inc.

3. APV; a brand of SPX Corporation.

4. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.

5. Delta T Heat Exchangers.

6. ITT Corporation; Bell & Gossett.

7. Mueller, Paul, Company.

8. Polaris Plate Heat Exchangers.

9. SEC Heat Exchangers.

10. TACO Incorporated.

11. Thermo Dynamics Ltd.

12. Tranter, Inc.

B. Configuration: Freestanding assembly consisting of frame support, top and bottom carrying and guide bars, fixed and movable end plates, tie rods, individually removable plates, and one-piece gaskets.

C. Construction: Fabricate and label heat exchangers to comply with ASME Boiler and Pres-sure Vessel Code, Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels," Division 1.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


D. Frame:

1. Capacity to accommodate 35 percent additional plates.

2. Painted carbon steel with provisions for anchoring to support.

E. Top and Bottom Carrying and Guide Bars: Stainless steel.

1. Fabricate attachment of heat-exchanger carrying and guide bars with reinforcement strong enough to resist heat-exchanger movement during seismic event when heat-exchanger carrying and guide bars are anchored to building structure.

F. End-Plate Material: Painted carbon steel.

G. Tie Rods and Nuts: Steel or stainless steel.

H. Plate Material: 0.40 mm thick before stamping; Type 304 stainless steel.

I. Gasket Materials: Glue free Nitrile rubber.

J. Piping Connections: Connection material shall match plate material.

1. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for stainless-steel flanges.

K. Capacities and Characteristics:

1. Refer to Equipment Schedule.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Hangers and Supports:

1. Custom, steel supports for mounting on slab.

2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Factory Tests: Test and inspect heat exchangers according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels," Division 1. Affix ASME label.

B. Hydrostatically test heat exchangers to minimum of one and one-half times pressure rating before shipment.

C. Heat exchangers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and for struc-tural rigidity, strength, anchors, and other conditions affecting performance of heat ex-changers.

B. Examine roughing-in for heat-exchanger piping to verify actual locations of piping connec-tions before equipment installation.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland



3.2 GASKETED-PLATE HEAT-EXCHANGER INSTALLATION

A. Install gasketed-plate heat exchanger on slab anchored to structure as indicated on Draw-ings.

B. Install metal shroud over installed gasketed-plate heat exchanger according to manufac-turer's written instructions.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indi-cate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for plate removal, service, and mainte-nance.

C. Install piping adjacent to heat exchangers to allow space for service and maintenance of heat exchangers. Arrange piping for easy removal of heat exchangers.

D. Install shutoff valves at heat-exchanger inlet and outlet connections.

E. Install thermometers on heat-exchanger inlet and outlet piping. Comply with requirements for thermometers specified in Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping."

F. Install pressure gages on heat-exchanger inlet and outlet piping. Comply with requirements for pressure gages specified in Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping."


A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized ser-vice representative:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and re-test until no leaks exist.

2. Performance Test: Actual working capacity shall be confirmed to be within 5% of de-sign capacity shown in Equipment Schedule.

B. Heat exchanger will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.5 CLEANING

A. After completing system installation, including outlet fitting and devices, inspect exposed fin-ish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain heat exchangers.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 23 64 16 - CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLERS

PART 1 -GENERAL


A. Drawings, Equipment Schedules, and Division 1 Specification Section, Purchase Order General Terms and Conditions apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Packaged, water-cooled, electric-motor-driven centrifugal chillers.



2. Division 26 Section “Variable-Frequency Motor Controllers” for remote, chiller manu-facturer provided VFC.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BAS: Building automation system.

B. COP: Coefficient of performance. The ratio of the rate of heat removal to the rate of en-ergy input using consistent units for any given set of rating conditions.

C. EER: Energy-efficiency ratio. The ratio of the cooling capacity given in terms of Btu/h to the total power input given in terms of watts at any given set of rating conditions.

D. IPLV: Integrated part-load value. A single-number part-load efficiency figure of merit calcu-lated per the method defined by ARI 550/590 and referenced to ARI standard rating condi-tions.

E. kW/Ton: The ratio of total power input of the chiller in kilowatts to the net refrigerating ca-pacity in tons at any given set of rating conditions.

F. NPLV: Nonstandard part-load value. A single-number part-load efficiency figure of merit calculated per the method defined by ARI 550/590 and intended for operating conditions other than ARI standard rating conditions.

G. VFC: Variable frequency controller.


A. Seismic Performance: Centrifugal chillers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7 and California Building Code 2007 requirements.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


B. Condenser-Fluid Temperature Performance:

1. Startup Condenser-Fluid Temperature: Chiller shall be capable of starting with an en-tering condenser-fluid temperature of 50 deg F and providing stable operation until the system temperature is elevated to the minimum operating entering condenser-fluid temperature.

2. Minimum Operating Condenser-Fluid Temperature: Chiller shall be capable of con-tinuous operation over the entire capacity range indicated with an entering condenser-fluid temperature of 65 deg F.

3. Make factory modifications to standard chiller design if necessary to comply with per-formance indicated.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide all data requested below and per the equipment schedule for each type of product indicated. Include refrigerant, rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

1. Performance at ARI standard conditions and at conditions indicated.

2. Performance at ARI standard unloading conditions.

3. Minimum evaporator flow rate.

4. Refrigerant capacity of chiller.

5. Oil capacity of chiller.

6. Fluid capacity of evaporator, condenser.

7. Characteristics of safety relief valves.

8. Minimum entering condenser-fluid temperature.

9. Performance at varying capacities with constant design condenser-fluid temperature. Repeat performance at varying capacities for different condenser-fluid temperatures from design to minimum in 5 deg F increments.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights including center of gravity, point loads and load distribution, required clearances, method of field assem-bly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Certificates: For certification required in "Quality Assurance" Article.

D. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For chillers, accessories, and components, from manu-facturer.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland




E. Source quality-control reports.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each chiller to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

G. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. ARI Certification: Certify chiller according to ARI 550 certification program.

B. ARI Rating: Rate chiller performance according to requirements in ARI 550/590.

C. ASHRAE Compliance:

1. ASHRAE 15 for safety code for mechanical refrigeration.

2. ASHRAE 147 for refrigerant leaks, recovery, and handling and storage requirements.

D. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1

E. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label chillers to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. For chillers charged with R-134a refrigerant, include an ASME U-stamp and nameplate certifying compliance.

F. Comply with NFPA 70.

G. Comply with requirements of UL and UL Canada, and include label by a qualified testing agency showing compliance.

H. Green Seal Compliance: Signed by manufacturer certifying compliance with GS-31.


A. Ship chillers from the factory fully charged with refrigerant.

B. Ship each oil-lubricated chiller with a full charge of oil installed in chiller.

C. Package chiller for export shipping in totally enclosed crate with bagging.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of chillers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified war-ranty period.

1. Warranty shall include, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Complete chiller including refrigerant and oil charge.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


b. Complete compressor and drive assembly.

c. Parts and labor.

d. Loss of refrigerant charge for any reason.


PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 VARIABLE SPEED CENTRIFUGAL CHILLERS


1. Trane; a division of American Standard.

2. Carrier Corporation; a United Technologies company.

3. YORK International Corporation.

4. Approved equal at discretion of A/E.

B. Description: Factory-assembled and tested chiller complete with compressor, compressor motor, compressor motor controller, lubrication system evaporator, condenser, controls, in-terconnecting unit piping and wiring, and indicated accessories.

C. Fabricate chiller mounting base with reinforcement strong enough to resist chiller movement during a seismic event when chiller is anchored to field support structure.

D. Compressor Drive Assembly:

1. Description: Single-stage or multistage, variable-displacement, centrifugal-type com-pressor driven by an electric motor.

2. Casing: Cast iron, precision ground.

3. Impeller: High-strength cast aluminum or cast-aluminum alloy on carbon- or alloy-steel shaft.

4. Drive: Direct- or gear-drive, open or hermetic design using an electric motor as the driver.

a. Gear Drives: For chillers with gear drives, provide single- or double-helical gear design continuously coated with oil while chiller is operating. Gears shall comply with American Gear Manufacturer Association standards.

b. Drive Coupling: For chillers with open drives, provide flexible disc with all-metal construction and no wearing parts to ensure long life without the need for lubrica-tion.

c. Seals: Seal drive assembly to prevent refrigerant leakage.

E. Compressor Motor:

1. Continuous-duty, squirrel-cage, induction-type, two-pole motor with energy efficiency required to suit chiller energy efficiency indicated.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


2. Factory mounted, aligned, and balanced as part of compressor assembly before ship-ping.

3. Motor shall be of sufficient capacity to drive compressor throughout entire operating range without overload and with sufficient capacity to start and accelerate compressor without damage.

4. For chillers with open drives, provide motor with open-dripproof enclosure.

5. Provide motor with thermistor or RTD in each of three-phase motor windings to moni-tor temperature and report information to chiller control panel.

6. Provide motor with thermistor or RTD to monitor bearing temperature and report in-formation to chiller control panel.

7. Provide open-drive motor with internal electric heater, internally powered from chiller power supply.

F. Vibration Balance: Balance chiller compressor and drive assembly to provide a precision balance that is free of noticeable vibration over the entire operating range.

1. Overspeed Test: 25 percent above design operating speed.

G. Service: Easily accessible for inspection and service.

1. Compressor's internal components shall be accessible without having to remove compressor-drive assembly from chiller.

2. Provide lifting lugs or eyebolts attached to casing.

H. Economizers: For multistage chillers, provide interstage economizers.

I. Capacity Control: Modulating, variable-inlet, guide-vane assembly.

1. Maintain stable operation that is free of surge, cavitation, and vibration throughout range of operation. Configure to achieve most energy-efficient operation possible.

2. Operating Range: From 100 to 20 percent of design capacity.

3. Condenser-Fluid Unloading Requirements over Operating Range: Drop-in entering condenser-fluid temperature of 2.5 deg F for each 10 percent in capacity reduction .

4. Chillers with variable frequency controllers shall modulate compressor speed with variable-inlet, guide-vane control to achieve optimum energy efficiency.

J. Oil Lubrication System: Consisting of pump, filtration, heater, cooler, factory-wired power connection, and controls.

1. Provide lubrication to bearings, gears, and other rotating surfaces at all operating, startup, coastdown, and standby conditions including power failure.

2. Thermostatically controlled oil heater properly sized to remove refrigerant from oil.

3. Oil filter shall be the easily replaceable cartridge type, minimum 0.5-micron efficiency, with means of positive isolation while servicing.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


4. Refrigerant- or water-cooled oil cooler.

5. Factory-installed and pressure-tested piping with isolation valves and accessories.

6. Oil compatible with refrigerant and chiller components.

7. Positive visual indication of oil level.

2.2 REFRIGERATION

A. Refrigerant

1. Description:

a. Type: R-123 or R-134a; ASHRAE 34, Class A1 or Class B1.

b. Compatibility: Chiller parts exposed to refrigerants shall be fully compatible with refrigerants, and pressure components shall be rated for refrigerant pressures.

2. Refrigerant Flow Control: Manufacturer's standard refrigerant flow-control device sat-isfying performance requirements indicated.

3. Pressure Relief Device:

a. Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 15, 2007 California Mechanical Code, Chapter 11, and in applicable portions of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

b. For Chillers Using R-123: Rupture disc constructed of frangible carbon spring-loaded, pressure relief valve; single- or multiple-reseating type.

c. For Chillers Using R-134a: ASME-rated, spring-loaded, pressure relief valve; single or multiple-reseating type. Pressure relief valve(s) shall be provided for each heat exchanger. Condenser shall have dual valves with one being redun-dant and configured to allow either valve to be replaced without loss of refriger-ant.

4. Refrigeration Transfer: Provide service valves and other factory-installed accessories required to facilitate transfer of refrigerant from chiller to a remote refrigerant storage and recycling system. Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 15 and ASHRAE 147.

5. Refrigerant Isolation for Chillers Using R-134a: Factory install positive shutoff, man-ual isolation valves in the compressor discharge line to the condenser and the refrig-erant liquid line leaving the condenser to allow for isolation and storage of full refriger-ant charge in the chiller condenser shell. In addition, provide isolation valve on suc-tion side of compressor from evaporator to allow for isolation and storage of full refrig-erant charge in the chiller evaporator shell.

6. Purge System:

a. For chillers operating at subatmospheric pressures (using R-123 refrigerant), fac-tory install an automatic purge system for collection and return of refrigerant and lubricating oil and for removal of noncondensables including, but not limited to, water, water vapor, and noncondensable gases.

b. System shall be a thermal purge design, refrigerant or air cooled, equipped with a carbon filter that includes an automatic regeneration cycle.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


c. Factory wire to chiller's main power supply and system complete with controls, piping, and refrigerant valves to isolate the purge system from the chiller.

d. Construct components of noncorrodible materials.

e. Controls shall interface with chiller control panel to indicate modes of operation, set points, data reports, diagnostics, and alarms.

f. Efficiency of not more than 0.02 lb of refrigerant per pound of air when rated ac-cording to ARI 580.

g. Operation independent of chiller per ASHRAE 147.

7. Positive-Pressure System:

a. For chillers operating at subatmospheric pressures (using R-123 refrigerant), fac-tory install an automatic positive-pressure system.

b. During nonoperational periods, positive-pressure system shall automatically maintain a positive pressure for atmosphere in the refrigerant pressure vessel of not less than 0.5 psig (adjustable) up to a pressure that remains within the vessel design pressure limits.

c. System shall be factory wired and include controller, electric heat, pressure transmitter, or switch.

2.3 EVAPORATOR

A. Description: Shell-and-tube design with water in tubes and refrigerant surrounding tubes within shell. Shell is separate from condenser.

B. Shell Material: Carbon-steel rolled plates with continuously welded seams or seamless pipe.

C. Designed to prevent liquid refrigerant carryover from entering compressor.

D. Provide evaporator with sight glass or other form of positive visual verification of liquid-refrigerant level.

E. Tubes:

1. Individually replaceable from either end and without damage to tube sheets and other tubes.

2. Mechanically expanded into end sheets and physically attached to intermediate tube sheets.

3. Material: Copper, copper-nickel alloy, stainless steel, or titanium .

4. Nominal OD: 3/4 or 1 inch.

5. Minimum Wall Thickness: Manufacturer's choice.

6. External Finish: Manufacturer's standard.

7. Internal Finish: Enhanced or smooth.

F. End Tube Sheets: Continuously welded to each end of shell; drilled and reamed to ac-commodate tubes with positive seal between fluid in tubes and refrigerant in shell.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


G. Intermediate Tube Sheets: Installed in shell and spaced along length of tube at intervals required to eliminate vibration and to avoid contact of tubes resulting in abrasion and wear.

H. Water Box:

1. Cast-iron or carbon-steel construction; arranged to provide visual inspection and cleaning of tubes from either end without disturbing refrigerant in shell.

2. Marine type for water box with piping connections. Standard type for water box with-out piping connections.

3. Provide water boxes and marine water-box covers with lifting lugs or eyebolts.

4. Hinged or davited marine water-box covers.

5. Nozzle Pipe Connections: Grooved for mechanical-joint coupling.

6. Thermistor or RTD temperature sensor factory installed in each nozzle.

7. Fit each water box with 3/4- or 1-inch drain connection at low point and vent connec-tion at high point, each with threaded plug.

2.4 CONDENSER

A. Description: Shell-and-tube design with water in tubes and refrigerant surrounding tubes within shell. Shell is separate from evaporator.

B. Shell Material: Carbon-steel rolled plates with continuously welded seams or seamless pipe.

C. Designed to prevent direct impingement of high-velocity hot gas from compressor discharge on tubes.

D. Provide condenser with sight glass or other form of positive visual verification of refrigerant charge and condition.

E. Tubes:


2. Mechanically expanded into end sheets and physically attached to intermediate tube sheets.

3. Material: Copper, copper-nickel alloy, stainless steel, or titanium .

4. Nominal OD: 3/4 or 1 inch.

5. Minimum Wall Thickness: Manufacturer's choice.

6. External Finish: Manufacturer's standard.

7. Internal Finish: Enhanced or smooth.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


8. End Tube Sheets: Continuously welded to each end of shell; drilled and reamed to accommodate tubes with positive seal between fluid in tubes and refrigerant in shell.

9. Intermediate Tube Sheets: Installed in shell and spaced along length of tube at inter-vals required to eliminate vibration and to avoid contact of tubes resulting in abrasion and wear.

10. Water Box:

a. Cast-iron or carbon-steel construction; arranged to provide visual inspection and cleaning of tubes from either end without disturbing refrigerant in shell.

b. Marine type for water box with piping connections. Standard type for water box without piping connections.

c. Provide water boxes and marine water-box covers with lifting lugs or eyebolts.

d. Hinged or davited marine water-box covers.

e. Nozzle Pipe Connections: Grooved for mechanical-joint coupling.

f. Thermistor or RTD temperature sensor factory installed in each nozzle.

g. Fit each water box with 3/4- or 1-inch drain connection at low point and vent con-nection at high point, each with threaded plug.

2.5 INSULATION

A. Closed-cell, flexible elastomeric thermal insulation complying with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.

1. Thickness: 3/4 inch.

2. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.

3. Factory-applied insulation over all cold surfaces of chiller capable of forming conden-sation. Components shall include, but not be limited to, evaporator shell and end tube sheets, evaporator water boxes including nozzles, refrigerant suction pipe from evaporator to compressor, cold surfaces of compressor, refrigerant-cooled motor, and auxiliary piping.

a. Apply adhesive to 100 percent of insulation contact surface.

b. Before insulating steel surfaces, prepare surfaces for paint, and prime and paint as indicated for other painted components. Do not insulate unpainted steel sur-faces.

c. Seal seams and joints to provide a vapor barrier.

d. After adhesive has fully cured, paint exposed surfaces of insulation to match other painted parts.

2.6 ELECTRICAL

A. Factory installed and wired, and functionally tested at factory before shipment.

B. Single-point, field-power connection to nonfused disconnect switch. Minimum withstand rat-ing shall be as required by electrical power distribution system, but not less than 65,000 A.

1. Branch power circuit to each motor, electric heater, dedicated electrical load, and con-trols.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


a. NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, fusible switch with rejection-type fuse clips rated for fuses. Select and size fuses to provide Type 2 protection according to IEC 60947-4-1.

b. NEMA AB 1, motor-circuit protector (circuit breaker) with field-adjustable, short-circuit-trip set point.

C. NEMA ICS 2-rated motor controller for auxiliary motors, hand-off-auto switch, and overcur-rent protection for each motor. Provide variable frequency controller for each variable-speed motor furnished.

D. Control-circuit transformer with primary and secondary side fuses.

E. Terminal blocks with numbered and color-coded wiring to match wiring diagram. Spare wir-ing terminal block for connection to external controls or equipment.

F. Factory-installed wiring outside of enclosures shall be in metal raceway except make termi-nal connections with not more than a 24-inch length of liquidtight conduit.

2.7 VARIABLE FREQUENCY CONTROLLER

A. Motor controller shall be factory provided, remote mounted and wired on the chiller to pro-vide a single-point, field-power termination to the chiller and its auxiliaries. Controller shall meet all Division 26 requirements.

B. Description: NEMA ICS 2; listed and labeled as a complete unit and arranged to provide variable speed by adjusting output voltage and frequency.

C. Enclosure: Unit mounted, NEMA 250, Type 12, with hinged full-front access door.

D. Integral Disconnecting Means: Door-interlocked, NEMA AB 1, instantaneous-trip circuit breaker with lockable handle. Minimum withstand rating shall be as required by electrical power distribution system, but not less than 65,000 A.

E. Technology: Pulse width modulated (PWM) output with insulated gate bipolar transistors (IGBT); suitable for variable torque loads.

F. Controller shall consist of a rectifier converter section, a digital/analog driver regulator sec-tion, and an inverter output section.

1. Rectifier section shall be a full-wave diode bridge that changes fixed-voltage, fixed-frequency, ac line power to a fixed dc voltage. Silicon controller rectifiers, current source inverters, and paralleling of devices are unacceptable. Rectifier shall be in-sensitive to phase rotation of the ac line.

2. Regulator shall provide full digital control of frequency and voltage.

3. Inverter section shall change fixed dc voltage to variable-frequency, variable ac volt-age, for application to a squirrel-cage motor. Inverter shall produce a sine-coded, pulse width modulated (PWM) output wave form and shall conduct no radio-frequency interference back to the input power supply.

G. Output Rating: Three phase; with voltage proportional to frequency throughout voltage range.

H. Operating Requirements:


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


1. Input AC Voltage Tolerance: Plus 10 and minus 15 percent of VFC input voltage rat-ing.

2. Input AC Voltage Unbalance: Not exceeding 3 percent.

3. Input Frequency Tolerance: Plus or minus 3 percent of VFC frequency rating.

4. Minimum Efficiency: 97 percent at 60 Hz, full load.

5. Minimum Displacement Primary-Side Power Factor: 98 percent under any load or speed condition.

6. Minimum Short-Circuit Current (Withstand) Rating: 65 kA.

7. Ambient Temperature Rating: Not less than 14 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F.

8. Ambient Storage Temperature Rating: Not less than minus 4 deg F and not exceed-ing 140 deg F

9. Humidity Rating: Less than 95 percent (noncondensing).

10. Altitude Rating: Not exceeding 3300 feet.

11. Vibration Withstand: Comply with IEC 60068-2-6.

12. Overload Capability: 1.1 times the base load current for 60 seconds; minimum of 1.8 times the base load current for three seconds.

13. Starting Torque: Minimum 100 percent of rated torque from 3 to 60 Hz.

14. Speed Regulation: Plus or minus 5 percent.

15. Output Carrier Frequency: Selectable; 0.5 to 15 kHz.

16. Stop Modes: Programmable; includes fast, free-wheel, and dc injection braking.

I. Internal Adjustability Capabilities:

1. Minimum Speed: 5 to 25 percent of maximum rpm.

2. Maximum Speed: 80 to 100 percent of maximum rpm.

3. Acceleration: 0.1 to 999.9 seconds.

4. Deceleration: 0.1 to 999.9 seconds.

5. Current Limit: 30 to minimum of 150 percent of maximum rating.

J. Self-Protection and Reliability Features: Subjecting the controller to any of the following conditions shall not result in component failure or the need for replacement:

1. Overtemperature.

2. Short circuit at controller output.

3. Ground fault at controller output. Variable frequency controller shall be able to start a grounded motor.

4. Open circuit at controller output.

5. Input undervoltage.

6. Input overvoltage.

7. Loss of input phase.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


8. Reverse phase.

9. AC line switching transients.

10. Instantaneous overload, line to line or line to ground.

11. Sustained overload exceeding 100 percent of controller rated current.

12. Starting a rotating motor.

K. Motor Protection: Controller shall protect motor against overvoltage and undervoltage, phase loss, reverse phase, overcurrent, overtemperature, and ground fault.

L. Automatic Reset and Restart: Capable of three restarts after controller fault or on return of power after an interruption and before shutting down for manual reset or fault correction. Controller shall be capable of automatic restart on phase-loss and overvoltage and under-voltage trips.

M. Visual Indication: On face of controller enclosure or chiller control enclosure; indicating the following conditions:

1. Power on.

2. Run.

3. Overvoltage.

4. Line fault.

5. Overcurrent.

6. External fault.

7. Motor speed (percent).

8. Fault or alarm status (code).

9. DC-link voltage.

10. Motor output voltage.

11. Input kilovolt amperes.

12. Total power factor.

13. Input kilowatts.

14. Input kilowatt-hours.

15. Three-phase input voltage.

16. Three-phase output voltage.

17. Three-phase input current.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


18. Three-phase output current.

19. Three-phase input voltage total harmonic distortion.

20. Three-phase input current total harmonic distortion.

21. Output frequency (Hertz).

22. Elapsed operating time (hours).

23. Diagnostic and service parameters.

N. Operator Interface: At controller or chiller control panel; with start-stop and auto-manual se-lector with manual-speed-control potentiometer.

O. Control Signal Interface:

1. Electric Input Signal Interface: A minimum of two analog inputs (0 to 10 V or 0/4-20 mA) and six programmable digital inputs.

P. Active Harmonic Distortion Filter: Factory mounted and wired to limit total voltage and cur-rent distortion to 5 percent.

Q. Cooling: Air, refrigerant, or water cooled.

R. Accessories: Devices shall be factory installed in controller enclosure unless otherwise in-dicated.

1. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable time-delay relays.

S. Chiller Capacity Control Interface: Equip chiller with adaptive control logic to automatically adjust the compressor motor speed and the compressor pre-rotation inlet vane position in-dependently to achieve maximum part-load efficiency in response to sensor inputs that are integral to the chiller controls.

2.8 CONTROLS

A. Control: Standalone and microprocessor based, with all memory stored in nonvolatile memory so that reprogramming is not required on loss of electrical power.

B. Enclosure: Unit mounted, NEMA 250, Type 12 , hinged or lockable; factory wired with a single-point, field-power connection and a separate control circuit.

C. Operator Interface: Multiple-character digital or graphic display with dynamic update of in-formation and with keypad or touch-sensitive display located on front of control enclosure. In either imperial or metric units selectable through the interface, display the following in-formation:

1. Date and time.

2. Operating or alarm status.

3. Fault history with not less than last 10 faults displayed.

4. Set points of controllable parameters.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


5. Trend data.

6. Operating hours.

7. Number of chiller starts.

8. Outdoor-air temperature or space temperature if required for chilled-water reset.

9. Entering- and leaving-fluid temperatures of evaporator and condenser.

10. Difference in fluid temperatures of evaporator and condenser.

11. Fluid flow of evaporator and condenser.

12. Fluid pressure drop of evaporator and condenser.

13. Refrigerant pressures in evaporator and condenser.

14. Refrigerant saturation temperature in evaporator and condenser shell.

15. Compressor refrigerant suction and discharge temperature.

16. Compressor bearing temperature.

17. Motor bearing temperature.

18. Motor winding temperature.

19. Oil temperature.

20. Oil discharge pressure.

21. Phase current.

22. Percent of motor rated load amperage.

23. Phase voltage.

24. Demand power (kilowatts).

25. Energy use (kilowatt-hours).

26. Power factor.

27. For chillers equipped with variable frequency controllers and harmonic filters, include the following:

a. Output voltage and frequency.

b. Voltage total harmonic distortion for each phase.

c. Supply current total demand distortion for each phase.

d. Inlet vane position.

e. Controller internal ambient temperature.

f. Heatsink temperature.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


28. Purge suction temperature if purge system is provided.

29. Purge elapsed time if purge system is provided.

D. Control Functions:

1. Manual or automatic startup and shutdown time schedule.

2. Entering and leaving chilled-water temperatures, control set points, and motor load limits. Evaporator fluid temperature shall be reset based on appropriate signal from BAS.

3. Current limit and demand limit.

4. Condenser-fluid temperature.

5. External chiller emergency stop.

6. Variable evaporator flow.

7. Thermal storage.

8. Heat reclaim.

E. Manually Reset Safety Controls: The following conditions shall shut down chiller and re-quire manual reset:

1. Low evaporator pressure or temperature; high condenser pressure.

2. Low evaporator fluid temperature.

3. Low oil differential pressure.

4. High or low oil pressure.

5. High oil temperature.

6. High compressor-discharge temperature.

7. Loss of condenser-fluid flow.

8. Loss of evaporator fluid flow.

9. Motor overcurrent.

10. Motor overvoltage.

11. Motor undervoltage.

12. Motor phase reversal.

13. Motor phase failure.

14. Sensor- or detection-circuit fault.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


15. Processor communication loss.

16. Motor controller fault.

17. Extended compressor surge.

18. Excessive air-leakage detection for chillers using R-123 refrigerant.

F. Trending: Capability to trend analog data of up to five parameters simultaneously over an adjustable period and frequency of polling.

G. Security Access: Provide electronic security access to controls through identification and password with at least three levels of access: view only; view and operate; and view, oper-ate, and service.

H. Control Authority: At least four conditions: Off, local manual control at chiller, local auto-matic control at chiller, and automatic control through a remote source.

I. Communication Port: RS-232 port, USB 2.0 port, or equivalent connection capable of con-necting a printer and a notebook computer.

J. BAS Interface: Factory-installed hardware and software to enable the BAS to monitor, con-trol, and display chiller status and alarms.

1. Hardwired Points:

a. Monitoring: On-off status, common trouble alarm electrical power demand (kilo-watts) electrical power consumption (kilowatt-hours) power factor

b. Control: On-off operation, chilled-water, discharge temperature set-point adjust-ment electrical power demand limit.

2. ASHRAE 135 (BACnet) communication interface with the BAS shall enable the BAS operator to remotely control and monitor the chiller from an operator workstation. Control features and monitoring points displayed locally at chiller control panel shall be available through the BAS.

2.9 FINISH

A. Paint chiller, using manufacturer's standard procedures, except comply with the following minimum requirements:

1. Provide at least one coat of primer with a total dry film thickness of at least 2 mils.

2. Provide at least two coats of alkyd-modified, vinyl enamel epoxy or polyurethane finish with a total dry film thickness of at least 4 mils.

3. Paint surfaces that are to be insulated before applying the insulation.

4. Paint installed insulation to match adjacent uninsulated surfaces.

5. Color of finish coat to be manufacturer's standard.

B. Provide Owner with quart container of paint used in application of topcoat to use in touchup applications after Project Closeout.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


2.10 ACCESSORIES

A. Flow Switches:

1. Chiller manufacturer shall furnish a switch for each evaporator and condenser and verify field-mounting location before installation.

2. Paddle Flow Switches:

a. Vane operated to actuate a double-pole, double-throw switch with one pole field wired to the chiller control panel and the other pole field wired to the BAS.

b. Contacts: Platinum alloy, silver alloy, or gold-plated switch contacts with a rating of 10 A at 120-V ac.

c. Pressure rating equal to pressure rating of heat exchanger.

d. Construct body and wetted parts of Type 316 stainless steel.

e. House switch in a NEMA 250, Type 4 enclosure constructed of die-cast alumi-num.

f. Vane length to suit installation.

3. Tool Kit: Chiller manufacturer shall assemble a tool kit specially designed for use in serving the chiller(s) furnished. Include special tools required to service chiller com-ponents not readily available to Owner service personnel in performing routine main-tenance. Place tools in a lockable case with hinged cover. Provide a list of each tool furnished and attach the list to underside of case cover.

4. Capacities and Characteristics:

a. See equipment schedule.

b. Maximum Noise Rating: 85dBA “A” weighted sound pressure level when meas-ured @ 1 meter according to ARI 575. Provide factory-installed sound treatment if necessary to achieve the performance indicated.


A. Perform functional run tests of chillers before shipping.

B. Factory performance test chillers, before shipping, according to ARI 550/590.

1. Test the following conditions:

a. Design conditions indicated.

b. Reduction in capacity from design to minimum load in steps of 10 with varying entering condenser-fluid temperature from design to minimum conditions in 5 deg F increments.

2. Prepare test report indicating test procedures, instrumentation, test conditions, and results. Submit copy of results within one week of test date.

C. For chillers using R-134a refrigerant, factory test and inspect evaporator and condenser according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

D. For chillers using R-123 refrigerant, factory test and inspect evaporator and condenser according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. Pressure


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


test fluid side of heat exchangers, including water boxes, to 1.5 times the rated pressure. Pressure proof test refrigerant side of heat exchangers to a minimum of 45 psig. Vacuum and pressure test for leaks.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine chillers before accepting delivery. Reject chillers that are damaged.

B. Examine roughing-in for equipment support, anchor-bolt sizes and locations, piping, and electrical connections to verify actual locations, sizes, and other conditions affecting chiller performance, maintenance, and operations before equipment installation.

1. Final chiller locations indicated on Drawings are approximate. Determine exact loca-tions before roughing-in for piping and electrical connections.


3.2 CHILLER INSTALLATION

A. Install chillers on support structure indicated.

B. Equipment Mounting: Install chiller on concrete bases using elastomeric pads. Comply with requirements for concrete bases specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Con-crete ." Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

1. Minimum Deflection: 1 inch, with 1/8” tolerance.

2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indi-cated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.




C. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance.

D. Install separate devices furnished by manufacturer and not factory installed.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping" and Division 23 Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to chiller to allow service and maintenance.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


C. Evaporator Fluid Connections: Connect to evaporator inlet with shutoff valve, flexible con-nector, thermometer, and plugged tee with pressure gage. Connect to evaporator outlet with shutoff valve, flexible connector, flow switch, thermometer, plugged tee with shutoff valve and pressure gage, and drain connection with valve. Make connections to chiller with a flange or mechanical coupling.

D. Condenser-Fluid Connections: Connect to condenser inlet with shutoff valve, flexible con-nector, thermometer, and plugged tee with pressure gage. Connect to condenser outlet with shutoff valve, flexible connector, flow switch, thermometer, plugged tee with shutoff valve and pressure gage, and drain connection with valve. Make connections to chiller with a flange or mechanical coupling.

E. Refrigerant Pressure Relief Device Connections: For chillers installed indoors, extend separate vent piping for each chiller to the outdoors without valves or restrictions. Comply with ASHRAE 15. Connect to chiller pressure relief device with flexible connector and dirt leg with drain valve.

F. Connect each chiller drain connection with a union and drain pipe, and extend pipe, full size of connection, to floor drain. Provide a shutoff valve at each connection.

3.4 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.


2. Verify that refrigerant charge is sufficient and chiller has been leak tested.

3. Verify that pumps are installed and functional.

4. Verify that thermometers and gages are installed.

5. Operate chiller for run-in period.

6. Check bearing lubrication and oil levels.

7. Verify that refrigerant pressure relief device is vented outside.

8. Verify proper motor rotation.

9. Verify static deflection of vibration isolators, including deflection during chiller startup and shutdown.

10. Verify and record performance of fluid flow and low-temperature interlocks for evapo-rator and condenser .

11. Verify and record performance of chiller protection devices.

12. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.

B. Inspect field-assembled components, equipment installation, and piping and electrical con-nections for proper assembly, installation, and connection.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


C. Prepare test and inspection startup reports.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain chillers. Video record the training sessions.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 23 64 26 - ROTARY-SCREW WATER CHILLERS

PART 1 -GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Packaged, water-cooled, single-compressor and multiple-compressor chillers.

1.3 DEFINITIONS


B. COP: Coefficient of performance. The ratio of the rate of heat removal to the rate of en-ergy input using consistent units for any given set of rating conditions.

C. EER: Energy-efficiency ratio. The ratio of the cooling capacity given in terms of Btu/h to the total power input given in terms of watts at any given set of rating conditions.

D. IPLV: Integrated part-load value. A single-number part-load efficiency figure of merit calcu-lated per the method defined by ARI 550/590 and referenced to ARI standard rating condi-tions.

E. kW/Ton : The ratio of total power input of the chiller in kilowatts to the net refrigerating ca-pacity in tons at any given set of rating conditions.

F. NPLV: Nonstandard part-load value. A single-number part-load efficiency figure of merit calculated per the method defined by ARI 550/590 and intended for operating conditions other than ARI standard rating conditions.


A. Seismic Performance: Chillers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions deter-mined according to ASCE/SEI 7 and California Building Code 2007 requirements.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to applicable seismic forces specified."

B. Condenser-Fluid Temperature Performance:

1. Startup Condenser-Fluid Temperature: Chiller shall be capable of starting with an en-tering condenser-fluid temperature of 50 deg F and providing stable operation until the system temperature is elevated to the minimum operating entering condenser-fluid temperature.

2. Minimum Operating Condenser-Fluid Temperature: Chiller shall be capable of con-tinuous operation over the entire capacity range indicated with an entering condenser-fluid temperature of 65 deg F.

3. Make factory modifications to standard chiller design if necessary to comply with per-formance indicated.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide all data requested below and per the equipment schedule for each type of product indicated. Include refrigerant, rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

1. Performance at ARI standard conditions and at conditions indicated.

2. Performance at ARI standard unloading conditions.

3. Minimum evaporator flow rate.

4. Refrigerant capacity of chiller.

5. Oil capacity of chiller.

6. Fluid capacity of evaporator.

7. Characteristics of safety relief valves.

8. Fluid capacity of condenser.

9. Minimum entering condenser-fluid temperature.

10. Performance at varying capacities with constant-design entering condenser-fluid tem-perature. Repeat performance at varying capacities for different condenser-fluid tem-peratures from design to minimum in 5 deg F increments.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights including center of gravity, point loads and load distribution, required clearances, method of field assem-bly, components, and location and size of each field connection.


3. Access requirements, including working clearances for mechanical controls and elec-trical equipment, and tube pull and service clearances.

C. Certificates: For certification required in "Quality Assurance" Article.

D. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For chillers, accessories, and components, from manu-facturer.




E. Source quality-control reports.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each chiller to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

G. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. ARI Certification: Certify chiller according to ARI 550 certification program(s).


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


B. ARI Rating: Rate chiller performance according to requirements in ARI 550/590.

C. ASHRAE Compliance:

1. ASHRAE 15 for safety code for mechanical refrigeration.

2. ASHRAE 147 for refrigerant leaks, recovery, and handling and storage requirements.

D. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1

E. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label chiller to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1, and include an ASME U-stamp and nameplate certi-fying compliance.


G. Comply with requirements of UL and UL Canada and include label by a qualified testing agency showing compliance.


A. Ship chillers from the factory fully charged with refrigerant.

B. Ship each oil-lubricated chiller with a full charge of oil installed in chiller.

C. Package chiller for export shipping in totally enclosed crate and bagging.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Standard Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of chillers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified war-ranty period.

1. Warranty shall include, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Complete chiller including refrigerant and oil charge.

b. Complete compressor and drive assembly.

c. Parts and labor.

d. Loss of refrigerant charge for any reason.


PART 2 -PRODUCTS


1. Trane; a division of American Standard.

2. Carrier Corporation; a United Technologies company.


4. Approved equal at discretion of A/E.

B. Description: Factory-assembled and run-tested chiller with compressor, compressor motor, compressor motor controller, lubrication system, evaporator, condenser, controls, intercon-necting unit piping and wiring, and indicated accessories.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


C. Fabricate chiller mounting base with reinforcement strong enough to resist chiller movement during a seismic event when chiller is anchored to field support structure.

D. Compressor:

1. Description: Semi-hermetic or open, positive displacement, and oil lubricated.

2. Casing: Cast iron, precision machined for minimum clearance about periphery of ro-tors.

3. Rotors: Manufacturer's standard one-, two-, or three-rotor design.

4. Drive Coupling: For chillers with open drives, provide flexible disc with all-metal con-struction and no wearing parts to ensure long life without the need for lubrication.

5. Seals: Seal drive assembly to prevent refrigerant leakage.

E. Compressor Motor:

1. Continuous-duty, squirrel-cage, induction-type motor with energy efficiency required to suit chiller energy efficiency indicated.

2. Factory mounted, aligned, and balanced as part of compressor assembly before ship-ping.

3. Motor shall be of sufficient capacity to drive compressor throughout entire operating range without overload and with sufficient capacity to start and accelerate compressor without damage.

4. For chillers with open drives, provide motor with open-dripproof enclosure.

5. Provide motor with thermistor or RTD in each of three-phase motor windings to moni-tor temperature and report information to chiller control panel.

6. Provide motor with thermistor or RTD to monitor bearing temperature and report in-formation to chiller control panel.

7. Provide open-drive motor with internal electric heater, internally powered from chiller power supply.

F. Vibration Balance: Balance chiller compressor and drive assembly to provide a precision balance that is free of noticeable vibration over the entire operating range.

1. Overspeed Test: 25 percent above design operating speed.

G. Service: Easily accessible for inspection and service.

1. Compressor's internal components shall be accessible without having to remove compressor-drive assembly from chiller.

2. Provide lifting lugs or eyebolts attached to casing.

H. Capacity Control: Modulating slide-valve assembly and port unloaders, if necessary, to achieve performance indicated. Hot-gas bypass is not acceptable.

1. Maintain stable operation throughout range of operation. Configure to achieve most energy-efficient operation possible.

2. Operating Range: From 100 to 15 percent of design capacity.

3. Condenser-Fluid Unloading Requirements over Operating Range: Drop-in entering condenser-fluid temperature of 2.5 deg F drop for each 10 percent in capacity reduc-tion .


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


I. Oil Lubrication System: Consisting of pump if required, filtration, heater, cooler, factory-wired power connection, and controls.

1. Provide lubrication to bearings, gears, and other rotating surfaces at all operating, startup, shutdown, and standby conditions including power failure.

2. Thermostatically controlled oil heater properly sized to remove refrigerant from oil.

3. Oil filter shall be the easily replaceable cartridge type, minimum 0.5-micron efficiency, with means of positive isolation while servicing.

4. Refrigerant- or water-cooled oil cooler.

5. Factory-installed and pressure-tested piping with isolation valves and accessories.

6. Oil compatible with refrigerant and chiller components.

7. Positive visual indication of oil level.

J. Refrigerant Circuit:

1. Refrigerant Type: R-134a. Classified as Safety Group A1 according to ASHRAE 34.

2. Refrigerant Compatibility: Chiller parts exposed to refrigerants shall be fully compati-ble with refrigerants, and pressure components shall be rated for refrigerant pres-sures.

3. Refrigerant Circuit: Each shall include a thermal- or electronic-expansion valve, re-frigerant charging connections, a hot-gas muffler, compressor suction and discharge shutoff valves, a liquid-line shutoff valve, a replaceable-core filter-dryer, a sight glass with moisture indicator, a liquid-line solenoid valve, and an insulated suction line.

4. Refrigerant Flow Control: Manufacturer's standard refrigerant flow-control device sat-isfying performance requirements indicated.

5. Pressure Relief Device:

a. Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 15 and in applicable portions of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

b. ASME-rated, spring-loaded pressure relief valve; single- or multiple-reseating type. Pressure relief valve(s) shall be provided for each heat exchanger. Con-denser shall have dual valves with one being redundant and configured to allow either valve to be replaced without loss of refrigerant.

6. Refrigeration Transfer: Provide service valves and other factory-installed accessories required to facilitate transfer of refrigerant from chiller to a remote refrigerant storage and recycling system. Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 15 and ASHRAE 147.

7. Refrigerant Isolation: Factory install positive shutoff isolation valves in the compres-sor discharge line to the condenser and the refrigerant liquid line leaving the con-denser to allow for isolation and storage of full refrigerant charge in the chiller con-denser shell. In addition, provide isolation valve on suction side of compressor from evaporator to allow for isolation and storage of full refrigerant charge in the chiller evaporator shell.

K. Evaporator:

1. Description: Direct expansion flooded shell-and-tube designs with water in tubes and refrigerant surrounding tubes within shell. Shell is separate from condenser.

2. Shell Material: Carbon-steel rolled plates with continuously welded seams or seam-less pipe.

3. Designed to prevent liquid refrigerant carryover from entering compressor.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


4. Provide evaporator with sight glass or other form of positive visual verification of liq-uid-refrigerant level.

5. Tubes:

a. Individually replaceable from either end and without damage to tube sheets and other tubes.

b. Mechanically expanded into end sheets and physically attached to intermediate tube sheets.

c. Material: Copper or copper-nickel alloy.

d. Nominal OD: 3/4 or 1 inch.

e. Minimum Wall Thickness: Manufacturer's choice.

f. External Finish: Manufacturer's standard.

g. Internal Finish: Enhanced or smooth.



8. Water Box:


a. Standard type for water box with piping connections. Standard type for water box without piping connections.

b. Provide water boxes with lifting lugs or eyebolts.

c. Hinged or davited water boxes.

d. Nozzle Pipe Connections: Grooved for mechanical-joint coupling .

e. Thermistor or RTD temperature sensor factory installed in each nozzle.

f. Fit each water box with 3/4- or 1-inch drain connection at low point and vent con-nection at high point, each with threaded plug.

L. Condenser:

1. Description: Shell-and-tube design with water in tubes and refrigerant surrounding tubes within shell. Shell is separate from evaporator.

2. Shell Material: Carbon-steel rolled plates with continuously welded seams or seam-less pipe.

3. Designed to prevent direct impingement of high-velocity hot gas from compressor dis-charge on tubes.

4. Provide condenser with sight glass or other form of positive visual verification of re-frigerant charge and condition.

5. Tubes:


a. Mechanically expanded into end sheets and physically attached to intermediate tube sheets.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


b. Material: Copper or copper-nickel alloy.

c. Nominal OD: 3/4 or 1 inch.

d. Minimum Wall Thickness: Manufacturer's choice.

e. External Finish: Manufacturer's standard.

f. Internal Finish: Enhanced or smooth.



9. Water Box:


a. Standard type for water box with piping connections. Standard type for water box without piping connections.

b. Provide water boxes with lifting lugs or eyebolts.

c. Hinged or davited water boxes.

d. Hinged davited marine water-box covers.

e. Nozzle Pipe Connections: Grooved for mechanical-joint coupling .

f. Thermistor or RTD temperature sensor factory installed in each nozzle.

g. Fit each water box with 3/4- or 1-inch drain connection at low point and vent con-nection at high point, each with threaded plug.

M. Electrical Power:

1. Factory installed and wired, and functionally tested at factory before shipment.

2. Single-point, field-power connection to nonfused disconnect switch. Minimum with-stand rating shall be as required by electrical power distribution system, but not less than 42,000 A.

a. Provide branch power circuit to each motor, electric heater, dedicated electrical load, and controls.

b. NEMA- and ICS 2-rated motor controller for auxiliary motors, hand-off-auto switch, and overcurrent protection for each motor. Provide variable frequency controller for each variable-speed motor furnished.

c. Control-circuit transformer with primary and secondary side fuses.

3. Terminal blocks with numbered and color-coded wiring to match wiring diagram. Spare wiring terminal block for connection to external controls or equipment.

4. Factory-installed wiring outside of enclosures shall be in metal raceway except make connections to each motor and heater with not more than a 24-inch length of liquid-tight conduit.

5. Factory install and wire capacitor bank for the purpose of power factor correction to 0.95 at all operating conditions.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


a. If capacitors are mounted in a dedicated enclosure, use same NEMA enclosure type as motor controller. Provide enclosure with service entrance knockouts and bushings for conduit.

b. Capacitors shall be non-PCB dielectric fluid, metallized electrode design, low loss with low-temperature rise. The kVAr ratings shall be indicated and shall not ex-ceed the maximum limitations set by NFPA 70. Provide individual cells as re-quired.

c. Provide each cell with current-limiting replaceable fuses and carbon-film dis-charge resistors to reduce residual voltage to less than 50 V within 1 minute after de-energizing.

d. Provide a ground terminal and a terminal block or individual connectors for phase connection.

N. Motor Controller:

1. Enclosure: Factory installed, unit mounted, NEMA 250 , Type 12 , with hinged full-front access door.

2. Control Circuit: Obtained from integral control power transformer with a control power source of adequate size to provide enough capacity to operate connected con-trol devices.

3. Overload Relay: Shall be sized according to UL 1995 or shall be an integral compo-nent of chiller control microprocessor.

4. Star-Delta, Reduced-Voltage Controller: NEMA ICS 2, closed transition.

5. Accessories: Devices shall be factory installed in controller enclosure unless other-wise indicated.

a. Externally Operated, Door-Interlocked Disconnect: Nonfused disconnect switch. Minimum withstand rating shall be as required by electrical power distribution system, but not less than 42,000 A.

b. Push-Button Stations, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: NEMA ICS 2, heavy-duty type.

c. Stop and Lockout Push-Button Station: Momentary-break, push-button station with a factory-applied hasp arranged so padlock can be used to lock push button in depressed position with control circuit open.

d. Control Relays: Time-delay relays.

e. Elapsed-Time Meters: Numerical readout in hours on face of enclosure.

f. Number-of-Starts Counter: Numerical readout on face of enclosure.

g. Meters: Panel type, 2-1/2 inches with 270-degree scale and 1 percent accuracy. Where indicated, provide transfer device with an off position. Meters shall indi-cate the following:

1) Ammeter: Output current for each phase, with current sensors rated to suit application.

2) Voltmeter: Output voltage for each phase.

3) Frequency Meter: Output frequency.

4) Real-time clock with current time and date.

5) Total run time.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


h. Multifunction Digital-Metering Monitor: Microprocessor-based unit suitable for three- or four-wire systems and with the following features:

1) Selectable, digital display of the following:

a) Phase Currents, Each Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent. b) Phase-to-Phase Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent. c) Phase-to-Neutral Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent. d) Three-Phase Real Power: Plus or minus 2 percent. e) Three-Phase Reactive Power: Plus or minus 2 percent. f) Power Factor: Plus or minus 2 percent. g) Frequency: Plus or minus 0.5 percent. h) Integrated Demand with Demand Interval Selectable from 5 to 60 Minutes:

Plus or minus 2 percent. i) Accumulated energy, in megawatt hours (joules), plus or minus 2 percent;

stored values unaffected by power outages for up to 72 hours.

2) Mounting: Display and control unit flush or semi recessed in instrument compartment door.

i. Phase-Failure, Phase-Reversal, Undervoltage Relays: Solid-state sensing circuit with adjustable undervoltage setting and isolated output contacts for hardwired connection.

j. Power Protection: Chiller shall shut down within six cycles of power interruption.

O. Controls:

1. Standalone and microprocessor based with all memory stored in nonvolatile memory so that reprogramming is not required on loss of electrical power.

2. Enclosure: Unit mounted, NEMA 250, Type 12, hinged or lockable; factory wired with a single-point, field-power connection and a separate control circuit.

3. Operator Interface: Multiple-character digital or graphic display with dynamic update of information and with keypad or touch-sensitive display located on front of control enclosure. In either imperial or metric units, display the following information:

a. Date and time.

b. Operating or alarm status.

c. Fault history with not less than last 10 faults displayed.

d. Set points of controllable parameters.

e. Trend data.

f. Operating hours.

g. Number of chiller starts.

h. Outdoor-air temperature or space temperature if required for chilled-water reset.

i. Temperature and pressure of operating set points.

j. Entering- and leaving-fluid temperatures of evaporator and condenser.

k. Difference in fluid temperatures of evaporator and condenser.

l. Fluid flow of evaporator and condenser.

m. Fluid pressure drop of evaporator and condenser.

n. Refrigerant pressures in evaporator and condenser.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


o. Refrigerant saturation temperature in evaporator and condenser.

p. Pump status.

q. Anticycling timer status.

r. Percent of maximum motor amperage.

s. Current-limit set point.

t. Compressor bearing temperature.

u. Motor bearing temperature.

v. Motor winding temperature.

w. Oil temperature.

x. Oil discharge pressure.

y. Phase current.

z. Percent of motor rated load amperes.

aa. Phase voltage.

bb. Demand power (kilowatts).

cc. Energy use (kilowatt-hours).

dd. Power factor.

4. Control Functions:

a. Manual or automatic startup and shutdown time schedule.

b. Entering and leaving chilled-water temperatures, control set points, and motor load limits. Evaporator fluid temperature shall be reset based on appropriate signal from BAS.

c. Current limit and demand limit.

d. Condenser-fluid temperature.

e. External chiller emergency stop.

f. Anticycling timer.

g. Variable evaporator flow.

h. Thermal storage.

i. Heat reclaim.

5. Manually Reset Safety Controls: The following conditions shall shut down chiller and require manual reset:

a. Low evaporator pressure or temperature; high condenser pressure.

b. Low evaporator fluid temperature.

c. Low oil differential pressure.

d. High or low oil pressure.

e. High oil temperature.

f. High compressor-discharge temperature.

g. Loss of condenser-fluid flow.

h. Loss of evaporator-fluid flow.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


i. Motor overcurrent.

j. Motor overvoltage.

k. Motor undervoltage.

l. Motor phase reversal.

m. Motor phase failure.

n. Sensor- or detection-circuit fault.

o. Processor communication loss.

p. Motor controller fault.

q. Extended compressor surge.

6. Trending: Capability to trend analog data of up to five parameters simultaneously over an adjustable period and frequency of polling.

7. Security Access: Provide electronic security access to controls through identification and password with at least three levels of access: view only; view and operate; and view, operate, and service.

8. Control Authority: At least four conditions: Off, local manual control at chiller, local automatic control at chiller, and automatic control through a remote source.

9. Communication Port: RS-232 port or equivalent connection capable of connecting a printer and a notebook computer.

10. BAS Interface: Factory-installed hardware and software to enable the BAS to monitor, control, and display chiller status and alarms.

a. Hardwired Points:

1) Monitoring: On-off status, common trouble alarm electrical power demand (kilowatts) electrical power consumption (kilowatt-hours) power factor .

2) Control: On-off operation, chilled-water, discharge temperature set-point adjustment electrical power demand limit .

b. ASHRAE 135 (BACnet) communication interface with the BAS shall enable the BAS operator to remotely control and monitor the chiller from an operator work-station. Control features and monitoring points displayed locally at chiller control panel shall be available through the BAS.

P. Insulation:

1. Material: Closed-cell, flexible elastomeric, thermal insulation complying with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.

2. Thickness: 3/4 inch minimum.

3. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer and applied to 100 percent of insulation contact surface. Seal seams and joints.

4. Factory-applied insulation over cold surfaces of chiller capable of forming condensa-tion. Components shall include, but not be limited to, evaporator shell and end tube sheets, evaporator water boxes including nozzles, refrigerant suction pipe from evaporator to compressor, cold surfaces of compressor, refrigerant-cooled motor, and auxiliary piping.

a. Before insulating steel surfaces, prepare surfaces for paint, and prime and paint as indicated for other painted components. Do not insulate unpainted steel sur-faces.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


b. Seal seams and joints to provide a vapor barrier.

c. After adhesive has fully cured, paint exposed surfaces of insulation to match other painted parts.

Q. Finish:

1. Paint chiller, using manufacturer's standard procedures, except comply with the fol-lowing minimum requirements:

a. Provide at least one coat of primer with a total dry film thickness of at least 2 mils.

b. Provide at least two coats of alkyd-modified vinyl enamel, epoxy, or polyurethane finish with a total dry film thickness of at least 4 mils.

c. Paint surfaces that are to be insulated before applying the insulation.

d. Paint installed insulation to match adjacent uninsulated surfaces.

e. Color of finish coat to be manufacturer's standard.

2. Provide Owner with quart container of paint used in application of topcoat to use in touchup applications after Project Closeout.

R. Accessories:

1. Flow Switches:

a. If required and not factory installed, chiller manufacturer shall furnish a switch for each evaporator and condenser and verify field-mounting location before instal-lation.

1) Paddle Flow Switches:

2) Vane operated to actuate a double-pole, double-throw switch with one pole field wired to the chiller control panel and the other pole field wired to the BAS.

3) Contacts: Platinum alloy, silver alloy, or gold-plated switch contacts with a rating of 10 A at 120-V ac.

4) Pressure rating equal to pressure rating of heat exchanger.

5) Construct body and wetted parts of Type 316 stainless steel.

6) House switch in a NEMA 250, Type 4 enclosure constructed of die-cast aluminum.

7) Vane length to suit installation.

2. Tool Kit: Chiller manufacturer shall assemble a tool kit specially designed for use in serving the chiller(s) furnished. Include special tools required to service chiller com-ponents not readily available to Owner service personnel in performing routine main-tenance. Place tools in a lockable case with hinged cover. Provide a list of each tool furnished and attach the list to underside of case cover.

S. Capacities and Characteristics:

1. See equipment schedule.

2. Maximum Noise Rating: 85dBA “A” weighted sound pressure level when measured @ 1 meter according to ARI 575. Provide factory-installed sound treatment if necessary to achieve the performance indicated.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland



A. Perform functional run tests of chillers before shipping.

B. Factory performance test chillers, before shipping, according to ARI 550/590.

1. Test the following conditions:

a. Design conditions indicated.

b. Reduction in capacity from design to minimum load in steps of 10 with varying entering condenser-fluid temperature from design to minimum conditions in 5 deg F increments.

2. Prepare test report indicating test procedures, instrumentation, test conditions, and results. Submit copy of results within one week of test date.

C. For chillers using R-134a refrigerant, factory test and inspect evaporator and condenser ac-cording to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine chillers before accepting delivery. Reject chillers that are damaged.

B. Examine roughing-in for equipment support, anchor-bolt sizes and locations, piping, and electrical connections to verify actual locations, sizes, and other conditions affecting chiller performance, maintenance, and operations before equipment installation.

1. Final chiller locations indicated on Drawings are approximate. Determine exact loca-tions before roughing-in for piping and electrical connections.


3.2 CHILLER INSTALLATION

A. Install chillers on support structure indicated.

B. Equipment Mounting: Install chiller on concrete piers using elastomeric pads. Comply with requirements for concrete bases specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete ." Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

1. Minimum Deflection 1/2 inch, with 1/16” tolerance.

2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete pier to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indi-cated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.




C. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


D. Install separate devices furnished by manufacturer and not factory installed.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping". Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to chiller to allow service and maintenance.

C. Evaporator Fluid Connections: Connect to evaporator inlet with shutoff valve, flexible con-nector, thermometer, and plugged tee with pressure gage. Connect to evaporator outlet with shutoff valve, flexible connector, flow switch, thermometer, plugged tee with shutoff valve and pressure gage, and drain connection with valve. Make connections to chiller with a flange or mechanical coupling.

D. Condenser Fluid Connections: Connect to condenser inlet with shutoff valve, flexible con-nector, thermometer, and plugged tee with pressure gage. Connect to condenser outlet with shutoff valve, balancing valve, flexible connector, flow switch, thermometer, plugged tee with shutoff valve and pressure gage, and drain connection with valve. Make connec-tions to chiller with a flange or mechanical coupling.

E. Refrigerant Pressure Relief Device Connections: For chillers installed indoors, extend separate vent piping for each chiller to the outdoors without valves or restrictions. Comply with ASHRAE 15. Connect vent to chiller pressure relief device with flexible connector and dirt leg with drain valve.

F. Connect each chiller drain connection with a union and drain pipe, and extend pipe, full size of connection, to floor drain. Provide a shutoff valve at each connection.

3.4 STARTUP SERVICE



2. Verify that refrigerant charge is sufficient and chiller has been leak tested.

3. Verify that pumps are installed and functional.

4. Verify that thermometers and gages are installed.

5. Operate chiller for run-in period.

6. Check bearing lubrication and oil levels.

7. For chillers installed indoors, verify that refrigerant pressure relief device is vented outdoors.

8. Verify proper motor rotation.

9. Verify static deflection of vibration isolators, including deflection during chiller startup and shutdown.

10. Verify and record performance of fluid flow and low-temperature interlocks for evapo-rator and condenser.

11. Verify and record performance of chiller protection devices.

12. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


B. Inspect field-assembled components, equipment installation, and piping and electrical con-nections for proper assembly, installation, and connection.

C. Prepare test and inspection startup reports.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain chillers. Video record the training sessions.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland




CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 23 65 00 - COOLING TOWERS

PART 1 -GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Open-circuit, induced-draft, counterflow cooling towers.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BMS: Building management system.

B. FRP: Fiber-reinforced polyester.


A. Structural Performance: Cooling tower support structure shall withstand the effects of grav-ity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to SEI/ASCE 7 and California Building Code 2007 requirements.

B. Seismic Performance: Cooling towers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions de-termined according to SEI/ASCE 7 and California Building Code 2007 requirements.


C. Acoustical Performance: Cooling tower sound power levels shall not exceed any of the val-ues shown in the following table:

Octave Band Sound Power Level (Lw dB re 1x10e-12 W)

63 Hz 99 125 Hz 97 250 Hz 89 500 Hz 87 1 kHz 84 2 kHz 80 4 kHz 76 8 kHz 77 dBA 90

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide all data requested below and per the equipment schedule for each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, pressure drop, fan performance data, rating curves with selected points indicated, furnished specialties, and accessories.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


1. Maximum flow rate.

2. Minimum flow rate.

3. Drift loss as percent of design flow rate.

4. Sound power levels in eight octave bands for operation with fans off, fans at minimum, and design speed.

5. Performance curves for the following:

a. Varying entering-water temperatures from design to minimum.

b. Varying ambient wet-bulb temperatures from design to minimum.

c. Varying water flow rates from design to minimum.

d. Varying fan operation (off, minimum, and design speed).

6. Fan airflow, brake horsepower, and drive losses.

7. Motor amperage, efficiency, and power factor at 100, 75, 50, and 25 percent of name-plate horsepower.

8. Electrical power requirements for each cooling tower component requiring power.

B. Shop Drawings: Complete set of manufacturer's prints of cooling tower assemblies, control panels, sections and elevations, and unit isolation. Include the following:

1. Assembled unit dimensions.

2. Weight and load distribution including center of gravity.

3. Required clearances for maintenance and operation.

4. Sizes and locations of piping and wiring connections.


C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each cooling tower to include in emergency, opera-tion, and maintenance manuals.

D. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Certified by CTI.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."

D. CTI Certification: Cooling tower thermal performance according to CTI STD 201, "Certifica-tion Standard for Commercial Water-Cooling Towers Thermal Performance."


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


E. FMG approval and listing in the latest edition of FMG's "Approval Guide."

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace the following components of cooling towers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period:

1. Fan assembly including fan, drive, and motor.


PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 OPEN-CIRCUIT, INDUCED-DRAFT, COUNTERFLOW COOLING TOWERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the follow-ing:

1. Evapco Inc.; Model UT.

2. Baltimore Aircoil Company; Model PT2.

3. SPX Cooling Technologies, Marley; Model MD.

B. Fabricate cooling tower mounting base with reinforcement strong enough to resist cooling tower movement during a seismic event when cooling tower is anchored to field support structure.

C. Cooling tower designed to resist wind load of 60 lbf/sq. ft.

D. Casing and Frame:

1. Casing Material: 304 Stainless steel.

2. Frame Material: 304 Stainless steel.

3. Fasteners: 304 Stainless steel.

4. Joints and Seams: Sealed watertight.

5. Welded Connections: Continuous and watertight.

E. Collection Basin:

1. Material: Type 316 Stainless steel.

2. Strainer: Removable type 316 stainless-steel strainer with openings smaller than nozzle orifices.

3. Overflow and drain connections.

4. Makeup water connection.

5. Outlet Connection: ASME B16.5, Class 150 flange.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


6. Basin Sweeper Distribution Piping and Nozzles:

a. Pipe Material: PVC .

b. Nozzle Material: Plastic .

c. Configure piping and nozzles to minimize sediment from collecting in the collec-tion basin.

F. Electric/Electronic, Collection Basin Water-Level Controller with Solenoid Valve:

1. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X.

2. Sensor: Solid-state controls with multiple electrode probes and relays factory wired to a terminal strip to provide control of water makeup valve, low- and high-level alarms, and output for shutoff of pump on low level.

3. Electrode Probes: Stainless steel.

4. Water Stilling Chamber: Stainless steel.

5. Solenoid Valve: Slow closing with stainless-steel body; controlled and powered through level controller in response to water-level set point.

6. Electrical Connection Requirements: 120 V, single phase, 60 Hz.

G. Pressurized Water Distribution Piping: Main header and lateral branch piping designed for even distribution over heat-exchanger coil or fill throughout the flow range without the need for balancing valves and for connecting individual, removable, nonclogging spray nozzles.

1. Pipe Material: PVC .

2. Spray Nozzle Material: PVC.

3. Piping Supports: Corrosion-resistant hangers and supports to resist movement during operation and shipment.

H. Fill:

1. Materials: PVC, resistant to rot, decay, and biological attack; with maximum flame-spread index of 5 according to ASTM E 84.

2. Fabrication: Fill-type sheets, fabricated, formed, and bonded together after forming into removable assemblies that are factory installed by manufacturer.

I. Drift Eliminator:

1. Material: PVC; resistant to rot, decay, and biological attack; with maximum flame-spread index of 5 according to ASTM E 84.

2. UV Treatment: Inhibitors to protect against damage caused by UV radiation.

3. Configuration: Multipass, designed and tested to reduce water carryover to achieve performance indicated.

J. Air-Intake Louvers:


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


1. Material: PVC or Matching casing.

2. UV Treatment: Inhibitors to protect against damage caused by UV radiation.

3. Louver Blades: Arranged to uniformly direct air into cooling tower, to minimize air re-sistance, and to prevent water from splashing out of tower during all modes of opera-tion including operation with fans off.

K. Air-Intake Screens: Stainless-steel wire mesh.

L. Axial Fan: Balanced at the factory after assembly.

1. Blade Material: FRP.

2. Hub Material: FRP.

3. Blade Pitch: Field adjustable.

4. Protective Enclosure: Removable, galvanized-steel, wire-mesh screens, complying with OSHA regulations.

5. Fan Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning ball or roller bearings with moisture-proof seals and premium, moisture-resistant grease suitable for temperatures between minus 20 and plus 300 deg F. Bearings designed for an L-10 life of 75,000 hours.

6. Bearings Grease Fittings: Extended lubrication lines to an easily accessible location.

M. Belt Drive:

1. Service Factor: 1.15 based on motor nameplate horsepower.

2. Sheaves: Fan and motor shafts shall have taper-lock sheaves fabricated from corro-sion-resistant materials.

a. Belt: One-piece, multigrooved, solid-back belt.

b. Belt Material: Oil resistant, nonstatic conducting, and constructed of neoprene polyester cord.

c. Belt-Drive Guard: Comply with OSHA regulations.

N. Fan Motor:

1. General Requirements for Fan Motors: Comply with NEMA designation and tempera-ture-rating requirements specified in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Require-ments for HVAC Equipment" and not indicated below.

2. Motor Enclosure: Totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC).

3. Energy Efficiency: NEMA Premium Efficient.

4. Service Factor: 1.15.

5. Insulation: Class F.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


6. Variable-Speed Motors: Inverter-duty rated per NEMA MG-1, Section IV, "Perform-ance Standard Applying to All Machines," Part 31, "Definite-Purpose, Inverter-Fed, Polyphase Motors."

7. Motor Location: Mounted outside of cooling tower casing and cooling tower discharge airstream.

8. Severe-duty rating with the following features:

a. Rotor and stator protected with corrosion-inhibiting epoxy resin.

b. Double-shielded, vacuum-degassed bearings lubricated with premium, moisture-resistant grease suitable for temperatures between minus 20 and plus 300 deg F

c. First subparagraph below requires a separate, single-phase, field-power connec-tion for heater operation.

d. Internal heater automatically energized when motor is de-energized.

9. Motor Base: Adjustable, or other suitable provision for adjusting belt tension.

O. Fan Discharge Stack: Material shall match casing.

1. Stack Termination: Wire-mesh, stainless steel screens; complying with OSHA regula-tions.

P. Vibration Switch: For each fan drive.

1. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X.

2. Vibration Detection: Sensor with a field-adjustable, acceleration-sensitivity set point in a range of 0 to 1 g and frequency range of 0 to 3000 cycles per minute. Cooling tower manufacturer shall recommend switch set point for proper operation and protection.

3. Provide switch with manual-reset button for hardwired connection to fan motor electri-cal circuit.

4. Switch shall, on sensing excessive vibration, signal an alarm through the BMS and shut down the fan.

Q. Control Package: Factory installed and wired, and functionally tested at factory before shipment.

1. NEMA 250, Type 4X enclosure with removable internally mount backplate.

2. Control-circuit transformer with primary and secondary side fuses.

3. Terminal blocks with numbered and color-coded wiring to match wiring diagram. Spare wiring terminal block for connection to external controls or equipment.

4. Microprocessor-based controller for automatic control of fan based on cooling tower leaving-water temperature with control features to improve operating efficiency based on outdoor ambient wet-bulb temperature by using adaptive logic.

5. Fan motor sequencer for multiple-cell and two-speed applications with automatic lead stage rotation.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


6. Collection basin level controller complying with requirements in "Ultrasonic Collection Basin Water-Level Controller with Solenoid Valve" Paragraph.

7. Vibration switch for each fan, complying with requirements in "Vibration Switch" Para-graph.

8. Single-point, field-power connection to a nonfused disconnect switch.

a. Branch power circuit to each motor and electric basin heater and to controls.

b. NEMA-rated motor controller, hand-off-auto switch, and overcurrent protection for each motor. Provide variable frequency controller with manual bypass and line reactors for each variable-speed motor indicated.

9. Factory-installed wiring outside of enclosures shall be in metal raceway, except make connections to each motor and electric basin heater with liquidtight conduit.

10. Visual indication of status and alarm with momentary test push button for each motor.

11. Audible alarm and silence switch.

12. Visual indication of elapsed run time, graduated in hours for each motor.

13. Cooling tower shall have hardware to enable BMS to remotely monitor and display the following:

a. Operational status of each motor.

b. Position of dampers.

c. Cooling tower leaving-fluid temperature.

d. Fan vibration alarm.

e. Oil-level alarm.

f. Collection basin high- and low-water-level alarms.

R. Personnel Access Components:

1. Doors: Large enough for personnel to access cooling tower internal components. Doors shall be operable from both sides of the door.

2. External Ladder: Stainless-steel, fixed ladder with ladder extensions to access exter-nal platforms and top of cooling tower from adjacent grade without the need for port-able ladders. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.27.


A. Verification of Performance: Test and certify cooling tower performance according to CTI STD 201, "Certification Standard for Commercial Water-Cooling Towers Thermal Perform-ance."

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine cooling tower before accepting delivery. Reject cooling towers that are damaged.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


B. Before cooling tower installation, examine roughing-in for tower support, anchor-bolt sizes and locations, piping, and electrical connections to verify actual locations, sizes, and other conditions affecting tower performance, maintenance, and operation.

1. Cooling tower locations indicated on Drawings are approximate. Determine exact lo-cations before roughing-in for piping and electrical connections.


D. Install cooling towers on support structure indicated. Cooling tower ships in two sections. Lower section shall be installed on support structure before upper section is installed and the sections are connected together. Cooling tower sections shall be connected exactly per manufacturer’s written instructions including all required gaskets, and fasteners, etc.

E. Equipment Mounting: Install cooling tower on concrete bases using restrained spring iso-lators. Comply with requirements in Division03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete ." Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

1. Minimum Deflection: 4 inches.




F. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance.

G. Loose Components: Install electrical components, devices, and accessories that are not factory mounted.

3.2 CONNECTIONS


B. Install piping adjacent to cooling towers to allow service and maintenance.

C. Install flexible pipe connectors at pipe connections of cooling towers mounted on vibration isolators.

D. Provide drain piping with valve at cooling tower drain connections and at low points in pip-ing.

E. Connect cooling tower overflows and drains, and piping drains to sanitary sewage system.

F. Domestic Water Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 22 Section "Do-mestic Water Piping." Connect to water-level control with shutoff valve and union, flange, or mechanical coupling at each connection.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


G. Supply and Return Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping." Connect to entering cooling tower connections with shutoff valve, balanc-ing valve, thermometer, plugged tee with pressure gage, and drain connection with valve. Connect to leaving cooling tower connection with shutoff valve. Make connections to cool-ing tower with a flange, or mechanical coupling.



B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to per-form field tests and inspections.

C. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

D. Tests and Inspections: Comply with CTI ATC 105, "Acceptance Test Code for Water Cool-ing Towers."

E. Cooling towers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.4 STARTUP SERVICE


B. Inspect field-assembled components, equipment installation, and piping and electrical con-nections for proper assemblies, installations, and connections.

C. Obtain performance data from manufacturer.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instruc-tions and perform the following:

a. Clean entire unit including basins.

b. Verify that accessories are properly installed.

c. Verify clearances for airflow and for cooling tower servicing.

d. Check for vibration isolation and structural support.

e. Lubricate bearings.

f. Verify fan rotation for correct direction and for vibration or binding and correct problems.

g. Adjust belts to proper alignment and tension.

h. Verify proper oil level in gear-drive housing. Fill with oil to proper level.

i. Operate variable-speed fans through entire operating range and check for har-monic vibration imbalance. Set motor controller to skip speeds resulting in ab-normal vibration.

j. Check vibration switch setting. Verify operation.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


k. Verify water level in tower basin. Fill to proper startup level. Check makeup wa-ter-level control and valve.

l. Verify operation of basin heater and control.

m. Verify that cooling tower air discharge is not recirculating air into tower or HVAC air intakes. Recommend corrective action.

n. Replace defective and malfunctioning units.

D. Start cooling tower and associated water pumps. Follow manufacturer's written starting procedures.

E. Prepare a written startup report that records the results of tests and inspections.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Set and balance water flow to each tower inlet.

B. Adjust water-level control for proper operating level.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance person-nel to adjust, operate, and maintain cooling towers.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 23 73 13 - CUSTOM AIR HANDLING UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

A. This specification is a specification for AC Transit 1600 Franklin Street, General Office Facility, in Oakland, California.

B. Air handling unit shall be designed and manufactured to the specific requirements of this project. Air handler shall be delivered to the job sight for storage and provided with a weather tight enclosure that is easily removable.

C. Air handling unit will use Andover control components furnished by EMCOR Integrated Solutions and installed at the factory of the unit manufacturer.

D. As the air flow is at your back all access doors, VFD enclosure and coil pull access will be located on the right side of the Air Handler only, with the exception of the coil connections and drain connection, they will be on the left side.


A. The following shall be used as selection criteria and shall be as specified: airflow rates, external static pressures, water flow rates. The following are to be equaled or bettered: coil face velocities, filter face velocities, casing leakage rates, casing and base deflection. The following shall be met within 10% of specified values: water pressure drop.

B. Units shall be produced by a recognized manufacturer who maintains a local service agency and parts stock.

C. Air handling units and major components shall be products of manufacturing firms regularly engaged in production of such equipment whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years.

D. Fans shall conform to AMCA bulletins regarding testing and construction.

E. Coils shall be ARI certified.

F. Filter media shall be ULC listed.

G. Units with factory wiring shall be factory approved and labeled. Failure to comply with this requirement will necessitate the manufacturer, at his expense, to have a certified representative inspect the equipment prior to affixing a label.

H. Air handling units shall be provided with air flow monitoring stations for supply, return and minimum outside air.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


I. Air handling unit will use Andover control components furnished by EMCOR Integrated Solutions and installed at the factory of the unit manufacturer. No field wiring at the project site of Andover control components on the Air Handler inside or outside will be allowed. The temperature control panel will be located inside the VFD enclosure.

1.3 APPROVED MANUFACTURES

A. The following manufacturers are approved in principle subject to meeting the specifications: Bases of design based on Haakon Industries. Acceptable alternatives are Johnson Controls Pace York International, and Energy Labs, using Andover controls installed at the factory.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data shall include dimensions, weights, capacities, certifications, component performance, electrical characteristics, casing construction details, and control wiring interconnections, power wiring interconnections, gauges and material finishes.

B. The submittal shall provide all technical information relevant to the product being provided, including but not limited to, all the information shown in the schedules of this specification. It is the responsibility of the supplier to highlight any variances his equipment has with the requirements of this specification whether or not pre-approval has been obtained. Information shall be provided in the same measurement units as indicated elsewhere in this specification.

C. The submittal shall provide fan curves [not fan tables], with specified operating points clearly plotted.

D. The submittal shall provide coil selection worksheets, clearly showing proper consideration for altitude, air density, glycol corrections and indicate coil tube fin and casing construction.

E. The submittal shall provide filter information, including: initial APD, final APD, dust spot efficiency, final dust holding capacity, filter media description, filter frame details, and filter removal details.

F. The manufacturer shall submit sound power levels for both air handling unit inlet, outlet and radiated at rated capacity. If the unit exceeds sound power levels at scheduled conditions, the manufacturer must provide sound attenuators and meet specified BHP.

G. The manufacturer shall submit electrical requirements for power supply wiring including wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring, clearly indicating factory-installed and field-installed at the project site power wiring.

H. The manufacturer shall submit the manufacturers recommended installation instructions.

I. Omission of any of the above information will cause shop drawings to be immediately returned without review.

1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


A. The manufacturer shall submit operation and maintenance data.

B. The manufacturer shall include instructions for lubrication, filter replacement, motor and drive replacement, spare parts lists, and wiring diagrams.

1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Units shall not be operated for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings lubricated, and the fan has been test run under observation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. The manufacturer shall provide the factory assembled air handling unit in configurations indicated on the drawings. The unit shall include all specified components installed at the factory. Field fabrication of units and their components will not be accepted.

B. The unit shall be designed for base rail anchorage to an external support platform.

C. Units too large to be legally shipped by truck may be shipped to the site in sections. Otherwise units shall be shipped in one piece.

2.2 CASING

A. Walls and roofs shall be constructed of 12 gauge aluminum 4 in thick acoustic thermal panels. The inner liner shall be 18 gauge aluminum. Insulation shall be 4 in thick 3 lbs/cubic ft. rigid fibre insulation All permanently joined flanged panel surfaces shall be sealed with an individual strip of 0.12 in x 0.38 in tape sealer. Tape sealer shall be LEED qualified. Wall seams shall be turned inward to provide a clean flush exterior finish. All panel seams shall be sealed during assembly to produce an airtight unit.

B. Outdoor units shall have roof panels broken outward to provide a lapped joint watertight seal. Outdoor roofs shall be sloped a minimum of 0.62 in away from the access side.

C. All insulation edges shall be joined on 8 in centers using cadmium plated TEK screws or metal clinches.

D. All insulation edges shall be protected with metal lagging. Insulation systems using stickpins or adhesives are not acceptable.

E. Stiffeners of angle steel shall be supplied as required to maintain casing deflection criteria of 1/200 at 1.5 times the working pressure. If panels cannot meet this deflection, add additional internal reinforcing.

F. Acoustical Performance:

1. The housing shall have been tested for acoustical performance by an independent laboratory that is accredited.

2. Test methods and facilities used to establish sound transmission loss values shall conform explicitly with the ASTM designation E90-85 and E413-73.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


3. Sound Transmission Loss DB ASTM E-90 & E413-73 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 4 “ Walls 20 20 28 41 51 56 55 57 STC=40

4. Test methods and facilities used to establish sound absorption values shall conform explicitly with the requirements of the ASTM Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Method: ASTM C423-84A and E795-83 Sound Absorption ASTM C423-84A & E795-83 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 4 “ Walls .40 .65 1.38 1.28 1.09 1.05 1.02 1.02 STC=40

5. Submit the lab report for approval.

2.3 BASE CONSTRUCTION

A. Units shall be constructed from structural steel C-channel iron around the perimeter of the unit, with intermediate channel and angle iron supports. Units less than or equal to 20 ft long shall have a minimum 4 in channel, and units greater than 20 ft shall have a minimum 6 inch channel.

B. A 0.120 in aluminum checker plate floor shall be installed on the base. Floor shall be flat reinforced from below, with all seams continuously welded. Drive screw attachment and caulking are not acceptable. Base shall be provided with lifting lugs, a minimum of four (4) per unit section. The base shall be insulated with 3 in insulation and sheeted with a 20 gauge gauge galvanized steel liner. Floors that "oil can" are not acceptable.

C. Provide a 1.5 in perimeter collar around the entire unit, and around each floor opening to ensure the unit is internally watertight. The entire base shall act as an auxiliary drain pan and hold up to 1.5 in of water.

D. Provide auxiliary 1.25 in drains in fan sections downstream of cooling coils and in mixing sections.

E. All drain connections on floor mounted air handling units shall terminate at the left side of the unit.

F. Maximum base deflection shall be 0.25 in on 240 in unsupported span.

2.4 ACCESS DOORS

A. Access doors shall be manufactured from 12 gauge . The doors shall be double wall construction with 18 gauge liner on the inside. Corners of the doors shall be continuously welded for rigidity. 4 in 3 lbs/cubic ft density insulation shall be sandwiched between the 12 gauge outer layer and the 18 gauge inner layer. Doors MUST be the same thickness as the unit casing to maximize thermal and acoustical resistance. A 12 in hermetically sealed Double Glazed Laminated glass window shall be provided in each door. Hinges shall be continuous piano type stainless steel.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


B. Two chrome plated "Ventlok" Model #310 high pressure latches operable from either side of the door shall be provided. Door opening shall be fully gasketed with continuous 0.5 in closed cell hollow round black gasket and a metal encapsulated reinforcing backing that mechanically fastens to the door frame. Door frames shall be made from 12 gauge with the outside of the door flush with the unit. Minimum door opening size shall be 18 in x 70 in (where height permits). Fan compartments must have a door of minimum width to remove the motor.

C. C. All access doors will be installed on the right side of the unit. All access doors must swing against the air pressure (i.e. positive pressure plenum doors must swing in).

2.5 NON-SCROLLED FANS - PLENUM TYPE

A. Fans shall be airfoil as indicated in the schedule or the fans shall be centrifugal plenum [plug] type, designed without a scroll type housing. Fans shall incorporate a wheel; heavy gauge reinforced steel inlet plate with removable spun inlet cone, structural steel frame, and shaft and bearings in AMCA Arrangement 3 configuration as an entire assembly. Fan drives are required to be direct drive plenum fans with VFD drive [no belts allowed].

B. All fan wheels shall have tapered spun wheel cones or shrouds providing stable flow and high rigidity. The wheels shall be non-overloading type.

C. The blades shall be continuously-welded, die-formed Airfoil type, designed for maximum efficiency and quiet operation. Partial welding will not be acceptable on airfoil blades.

D. Impellers shall be statically and dynamically balanced and the complete fan assembly shall be test balanced at the operating speed prior to shipment.

E. Shafts shall be of AISI C-1018, 1040 or 1045 hot rolled steel accurately turned, ground, polished, and ring gauged for accuracy.

F. Shafts shall be sized for first critical speed of at least 1.43 times the maximum speed for the class. Bearings shall be heavy duty, grease lubricated, anti-friction ball or roller, self aligning, pillow block type and selected for minimum average bearing life [AFBMA L-50] in excess of 200,000 hours at the maximum class RPM.

G. Cantilevered vane blades shall be used through Size 490 to minimum air performance insertion losses and noise. The operating mechanism shall be outside the inlet air stream.

H. The plenum fan assembly MUST have an enclosed safety screen as per OSHA Standards.

I. All fans shall be furnished with a transducer to send a digital control signal.

2.6 VIBRATION ISOLATION

A. An integral all welded steel vibration isolation base shall be provided for the fan and motor.

B. Isolators shall be free standing with sound deadening pads and leveling bolts.

C. The spring diameter to compressed operating height ratio shall be 1 to 1.

D. The spring deflection shall be 2 inch.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


E. Isolators shall have earthquake restraints.

F. The unit shall be designed for base rail anchorage to an external support platform. This will provide exterior vibration isolation under the entire unit. Twenty-two isolators on each side. Ten field installed Snubbers on each side.

2.7 MOTORS AND DRIVES

A. Fan motors shall be mounted and isolated on the same integral base as the fan.

B. Fan motors shall comply with NEMA MG 1-2007 unless otherwise indicated, operable at 208 volts, 60Hz, 3-phase. Provide TEFC Premium Efficiency 4-pole 1800 rpm motors.

C. Provide VFD drives for all fan motors.

2.8 COILS

A. Fins shall have collars drawn, belled and firmly bonded to the tubes by means of mechanical expansion of the tubes. No soldering or tinning shall be used in the bonding process. Coils shall be mounted in the unit casing to be accessible for service. Capacities, pressure drops and selection procedure shall be certified in accordance with ARI Standard 410.

B. Coils shall be fully enclosed within the casing and cooling coils shall be on mounted 304 stainless steel angle racks manufactured to allow coils to slide out individually. Coils will slide out the right side of the unit only. Exterior coil piping connections will be on the left side.

C. Removable coil access panels on the right side of the unit will be provided for removal of coils through the casing wall. "Coils shall be individually removable away from the access side. Coils must be individually racked, removable through the right side access panels. Exterior coil piping connections will be on the left side.

D. "The manufacturer shall provide drain pans for all cooling coils. Drain pans shall be continuously welded. The coil section must have intermediate drain pans and shall be interconnected with 1 in stainless steel drain lines. Drain pans shall be IAQ sloped and fully drainable. Exterior drain piping connections will be on the left side.

E. On cooling coils using vertically corrugated fins or spiral wound fins, provide moisture eliminators on the downstream side of cooling coils when the face velocity exceeds 600. On cooling coils using horizontally corrugated fins, provide moisture eliminators when the face velocity exceeds 500. Moisture eliminators shall be galvanized steel, 3-break type draining directly into the cooling coil drain.

F. Coils shall be designed for chilled water.

G. All coil and drain pipe connections shall be on the left side of the unit, extended through the casing for ease of connection.

H. Water coils handling recently mixed air, or direct outside air, shall be fully drainable by removing a single threaded plug for each coil row.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


I. The primary surface shall be round seamless 0.62 in .020 O.D. copper tubes on 1 in centers, staggered in the direction of airflow. All joints shall be brazed.

J. The secondary surface shall consist of rippled Aluminum plate fins for higher capacity and structural strength. Fins shall have full drawn collars to provide a continuous surface cover over the entire tube for maximum heat transfer. Bare copper tube shall not be visible between fins and the fins shall have no openings or holes which might accumulate lint and dirt. Tubes shall be mechanically expanded into the fins to provide a continuous primary to secondary compression bond over the entire finned length for maximum heat transfer rates.

K. The casings shall be constructed of continuous Galvanized. Coil side plates shall be of reinforced flange type.

L. The coil connection locations shall permit mounting of the coil for airflow having equal pressure drop through all circuits. Coils shall be circuited for counter flow heat transfer to provide the maximum mean effective temperature difference for maximum heat transfer rates.

M. Headers on water coils shall be seamless copper tubing. The headers shall have intruded tube holes to provide a large brazing surface for maximum strength and inherent flexibility.

N. The complete 5W coil core shall be tested with 315 lbs air pressure under warm water and be suitable for operation at 250 psi working pressures. Individual tube and core tests before installation of headers are not considered satisfactory. Hydrostatic tests alone will not be acceptable. Water cooling coils shall be circuited for drain ability.

O. Provide removable bolted coil blank-off.

2.9 FILTERS

A. Prefilters shall be 30% efficient, pleated and disposable. Each filter shall consist of non-woven cotton and synthetic fabric media, media support grid and enclosing frame. The filter shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories as Class 2.

B. Prefilters shall be installed in a prefabricated channel rack.

C. Prefilters shall be lift-out where on the right side of the unit upstream of the filter, or slide out when access is not available.

2.10 FINAL FILTERS

A. Final filters shall be high performance, deep pleated, totally rigid and disposable. Each filter shall consist of high density microfine glass fiber media; media support grid, contour stabilizer and enclosing frame.

B. The final filter media shall be of high density microfine glass fibers laminated to a nonwoven synthetic backing to form a lofted filter blanket. The filter media shall have an average of 90-95% on the ASHRAE Test Standard [52-76] and an average arrestance of not less than 99% on that standard. Filters shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories as Class 2.

C. Holding frames shall be factory fabricated of 16 gauge galvanized steel and shall be equipped with gaskets and 2 heavy duty positive sealing fasteners. Each fastener shall be


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


capable of withstanding 25 lbs pressure without deflection and be attached or removed without the use of tools.

D. Final filters shall be lifted out on the right side of the unit upstream of the filter, or equipped with a side slide out when access is not available.

2.11 FILTER GAUGES

A. The manufacturer shall provide Dwyer 2000 Magnehelic gauges.

B. Magnehelic gauges shall be accurate to +/- 2% of full range.

C. One gauge shall be provided for each filter bank.

D. Gauges shall be recessed into the cabinet casing on the right side of the unit.

2.12 LIGHTS

A. Compact fluorescent, complete with duplex receptacles, shall be installed on the wall across from the access doors. A switch with an indicator light shall be installed on the unit. Electrical power shall be 120V/1/60. This is a separate circuit in addition to the 208V power circuit to the air handler. The disconnect for power will be located on the right side of the unit.

2.13 FINISH

A. The unit shall be finish painted with two components, etch bond primer and alkyd enamel. The color shall be selected by the Owner. All uncoated steel shall be painted with grey enamel. All metal surfaces shall be prepainted with vinyl wash primer to ensure paint bonds to metal. All outdoor units shall be finish coated with polyurethane paint.

2.14 LOUVERS

A. Louver blades of extruded aluminum construction shall be fixed on a 45 angle and on 4 in centers.

B. Frames shall be of extruded aluminum, minimum 4 in wide.

C. Bird screen shall be galvanized mesh with 0.5 in x 0.5 in openings and shall be fixed to the rear with cadmium plated screws.

D. The finish shall be natural mill finish.

2.15 ALUMINUM AIRFOIL DAMPERS

A. Aluminum airfoil frames and blades shall be a minimum of 12 gauge extruded aluminum. Blades shall be of a single unit airfoil design 6 in wide.

B. Frames shall be extruded aluminum channel with grooved inserts for vinyl seals. Standard frames shall be 2 in x 4 in x 0.62 in on the linkage side, 1 in x 4 in x 1 in on the other 3 sides.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


C.

D. Pivot rods shall be 0.44 in hexagon extruded aluminum interlocking into the blade section. Bearings shall be of a double sealed type with a Celcon inner bearing on a rod within a Polycarbonate outer bearing inserted into the frame to prevent the outer bearing from rotating.

E. The bearing shall be designed so there are no metal-to-metal or metal-to-bearing riding surfaces. The interconnecting linkage shall have a separate Celcon bearing to eliminate friction inside the linkage.

F. Blade linkage hardware shall be installed in a frame outside the air stream. All hardware shall be of non-corrosive, reinforced cadmium plated steel.

G. Damper seals shall be designed for minimum air leakage by means of overlapping seals.

H. Jack shaft assemblies shall be provided for multiple damper installations.

2.16 DAMPER OPERATORS

A. The manufacturer shall install electric damper operators with all linkage and hardware internally mounted furnished by Emcor using Andover control components.

B. Ensure operators are mounted in easily accessible sections of the air handling unit.

2.17 AIR FLOW TESTING

A. The unit manufacturer shall factory test each unit to ensure it meets the specified air flow requirements.

B. The test shall be carried out in accordance with the guidelines set forth in the SMACNA HVAC AIR TEST MANUAL.

C. An officer of the manufacturing company shall certify test results and forward copies of certified test results to the consultant.

2.18 AIR LEAKAGE TESTING

A. The unit manufacturer shall factory pressure test each air handling unit to ensure the leakage rate of the casing does not exceed 1.0% of the unit air flow at 1.5 times the rated static pressure. A leakage test shall be performed with VFD and humidifier panels installed.

B. The test shall be conducted in accordance with SMACNA duct construction manual. A calibrated orifice shall be used to measure leakage airflow.

C. An officer of the manufacturing company shall certify test results and forward copies of the certified test results to the consultant.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


D. Positive pressure plenums shall be tested positively and negative pressure plenums shall be tested negatively.

2.19 SOUND TESTING

A. Air handling unit sound power levels shall not exceed the levels shown on the schedule.

B. The manufacturer shall furnish sound power levels at the supply air connection, return air connection, outside air opening, relief air openings and casing radiation for each air handling unit. Test data shall show sound power levels are 10-12 watts for each of eight octave band center frequencies.

2.20 FLOOD TESTING

A. All unit bases shall be flooded to a level of 1.5 in after manufacturing to assure there is no leakage through the floor and the perimeter water barrier. The results of the flood test shall be certified by the manufacturer.

2.21 DRAINS

A. The manufacturer shall provide 3 in capped floor drain connections on the left side of the unit for complete drain ability of the base pan for the following sections:

1. Fresh air plenums

2. Fan sections

3. Sections upstream and downstream of coils

2.22 CONTROLS

A. The air handler shall have the following control components installed at the factory. Air handling unit will use Andover control components furnished by EMCOR Integrated Solutions and installed at the factory of the unit manufacturer. The temperature control panel will be located inside the VFD enclosure.

Inputs Notes

Supply Air Temperature 24' Averaging Mixed air Temperature 24' Averaging Return Air Temperature 9" Bulb Outside Air Temperature 9" Bulb Return Air Humidity 0-100% R.H. Outside Air Humidity 0-100% R.H. Return Air CO2 0-2000ppm Outside Air CO2 0-2000ppm

Auditorium CO2 0-2000ppm (provided and installed by Controls Contractor)

Supply Air Static Pressure 0-5" w.c. (provided and installed by Controls Contractor)

Discharge Air Plenum Static Pressure 0-10" w.c. Filter Pressure Drop 0-2.5" w.c. Supply Air Flow? 0-xx" w.c. (typical for 6)


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


Return Air Flow? 0-xx" w.c. (typical for 4) Supply Fan VFD Run Status VFD auxiliary contact, typical for 6 Return Fan VFD Run Status VFD auxiliary contact, typical for 4 Supply Fan Isolating Damper Open Status End Switch (typical for 6), (Life Safety) Supply Fan Isolating Damper Shut Status End Switch (typical for 6), (Life Safety) Return Fan Isolating Damper Open Status End Switch (typical for 4), (Life Safety) Return Fan Isolating Damper Shut Status End Switch (typical for 4), (Life Safety) Economizer Dampers Open Status End Switch (typical for 8), (Life Safety) Economizer Dampers Shut Status End Switch (typical for 8), (Life Safety)

Outputs Notes Supply Fan VFD Start/Stop Typical for 6 Return Fan VFD Start/Stop Typical for 4 Supply Fan Speed 0-10vdc / 4-20ma (typical for 6) Return Fan Speed 0-10vdc / 4-20ma (typical for 4) Chilled Water Valve 0-10vdc / 4-20ma (typical for 2) Outside Air Dampers 0-10vdc / 4-20ma (typical for 1) return exhaust air dampers 0-10vdc / 4-20ma (typical for 1) Supply Fan VFD Override On Typical for 1 (Life Safety) Return Fan VFD Override On Typical for 1 (Life Safety) Economizer Dampers Override Open Life Safety (typical for 1) Economizer Dampers Override Shut Life Safety (typical for 1)

BacNet Communications Notes Air Handler Controller Typical for 1 Supply Fan VFD Typical for 6 Return Fan VFD Typical for 4



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 23 82 19 - FAN COIL UNITS

PART 1 -GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes fan-coil units and accessories.

1.3 DEFINITIONS


1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.


1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that fan-coil units, ac-cessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 23 Section "Vi-bration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Include the following:


a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."



D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fan-coil units to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Maintenance schedules and repair part lists for motors, coils, integral controls, and fil-ters.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 - "Sys-tems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."

C. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Fan-Coil-Unit Filters: Furnish one spare filter for each filter installed.

2. Fan Belts: Furnish one spare fan belts for each unit installed.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 DUCTED FAN-COIL UNITS


1. Trane.

2. Carrier Corporation.


B. Description: Factory-packaged and -tested units rated according to ARI 440, ASHRAE 33, and UL 1995.

C. Coil Section Insulation: 1-inch thick foil-faced glass fiber complying with ASTM C 1071 and attached with adhesive complying with ASTM C 916.

1. Fire-Hazard Classification: Insulation and adhesive shall have a combined maximum flame-spread index of 25 and smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to ASTM E 84.

2. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with require-ments in ASHRAE 62.1-2004.

D. Drain Pans: Plastic. Fabricate pans and drain connections to comply with ASHRAE 62.1-2004.

E. Chassis: Galvanized steel where exposed to moisture, with baked-enamel finish and re-movable access panels.

F. Cabinets: Steel with baked-enamel finish in manufacturer's standard paint color.

G. Filters: Minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1, and a minimum efficiency report-ing value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2.

1. Pleated Cotton-Polyester Media: 90 percent arrestance and 7 MERV.

H. Hydronic Coils: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer than 0.1 inch , rated for a minimum working pressure of 300 psig and a maximum entering-water temperature of 200 deg F . Include manual air vent and drain.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


I. Belt-Driven Fans: Double width, forward curved, centrifugal; with permanently lubricated, single-speed motor installed on an adjustable fan base resiliently mounted in the cabinet. Aluminum or painted-steel wheels, and painted-steel or galvanized-steel fan scrolls.

1. Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Require-ments for HVAC Equipment."

J. Factory, Hydronic Piping Package: ASTM B 88, Type L copper tube with wrought-copper fittings and brazed joints. Label piping to indicate service, inlet, and outlet.

1. Two-way, modulating control valve for chilled-water coil.

2. Two-Piece Ball Valves: Bronze body with full-port, chrome-plated bronze ball; PTFE or TFE seats; and 600-psig minimum CWP rating and blowout-proof stem.

3. Calibrated-Orifice Balancing Valves: Bronze body, ball type; 125-psig working pres-sure, 250 deg F maximum operating temperature; with calibrated orifice or venturi, connections for portable differential pressure meter with integral seals, threaded ends, and equipped with a memory stop to retain set position.

4. Automatic Flow-Control Valve: Brass or ferrous-metal body; 300-psig working pres-sure at 250 deg F ; with removable, corrosion-resistant, tamperproof, self-cleaning piston spring; factory set to maintain constant indicated flow with plus or minus 10 percent over differential pressure range of 2 to 80 psig .

5. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.

K. Basic Unit Controls:

1. Control voltage transformer.

2. Wall-mounting temperature sensor.

3. Unoccupied-period-override push button.

4. Data entry and access port.

5. Controller shall have volatile-memory backup.

L. BAS Interface Requirements:

1. DDC Controller for scheduled operation.

2. Interface relay to provide indication of fault at the central workstation.

3. Provide BACnet interface for central BAS workstation for the following functions:

a. Adjust set points.

b. Fan-coil-unit start, stop, and operating status.

c. Data inquiry including supply- and room-air temperature, and coil position.

M. Electrical Connection: Factory wire motors and controls for a single electrical connection.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive fan-coil units for compliance with requirements for installation tol-erances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in for piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations before fan-coil-unit installation.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland



3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install fan-coil units level and plumb.

B. Install fan-coil units to comply with NFPA 90A.

C. Verify locations of sensors with Drawings and room details before installation. Install de-vices 48 inches above finished floor.

D. Install new filters in each fan-coil unit within two weeks after Substantial Completion.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indi-cate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. Specific connection require-ments are as follows:

1. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.

2. Connect piping to fan-coil-unit factory hydronic piping package. Install piping package if shipped loose.

B. Connect supply and return ducts to fan-coil units with flexible duct connectors specified in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories." Comply with safety requirements in UL 1995 for duct connections.

C. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

D. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

3.4 PROGRAMMING

A. Program temperature set points and sequence of operation.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fan-coil units. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 26 05 00 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

PART 1 -GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Electrical equipment coordination and installation.

2. Sleeves for raceways and cables.

3. Sleeve seals.

4. Grout.

5. Common electrical installation requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For sleeve seals.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment:

1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce headroom are indicated.

2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other installations.

3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope.

4. So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear of obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place con-crete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind finished surfaces or otherwise concealed. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."."


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.

B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel.

1. Minimum Metal Thickness:

a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side more than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch.

b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or more than, 50 inches and 1 or more sides equal to, or more than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.

2.2 SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space be-tween sleeve and raceway or cable.


a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.

b. Calpico, Inc.

c. Metraflex Co.

d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.

3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element.

4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

2.3 GROUT

A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic ag-gregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for appli-cation and a 30-minute working time.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall-mounting items.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, ar-range and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom con-sistent with these requirements.

D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of compo-nents of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.

E. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.

3.2 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, or busways penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.

B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.

C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assem-blies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construc-tion of floor or wall.

E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.

F. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level.

G. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable, unless indicated otherwise.

H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry

1. Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool ex-posed surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing.

I. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." Where water tight installation is indicated provide product that meets the UL Water Leakage Test – Class 1 Requirements

J. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceil-ings, and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable penetration sleeves with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

K. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

L. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space be-tween pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


A. Install to seal exterior wall penetrations.

B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechani-cal sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for electrical instal-lations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and in-stallation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

B. Where water tight installation is indicated provide product that meets the UL Water Leakage Test – Class 1 Requirements



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 26 05 19 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 -GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less.

2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.



A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by UL, a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the follow-ing:

1. Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division.

2. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company.

3. General Cable Corporation.

4. Senator Wire & Cable Company.

5. Southwire Company.

6. Belden

B. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70.

C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THW, THHN-THWN and XHHW.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


D. Variable-frequency AC motor drive output cables. Typically Belden Variable-frequency Drive cables or equal. VFD Cable with (3) Stranded Tinned Copper Conductors, Full-size Insulated Ground, Overall 85% Tinned Cooper Braid Shield, Full-size Drain Wire, XLPE In-sulated Circuit Conductors, PVC Jacket; 1000V UL.

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES


1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.

2. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.

3. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC.

4. 3M; Electrical Products Division.

5. Tyco Electronics Corp.

B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated.

C. Connect and splice wire No. 8 AWG and smaller with self-insulating, wire nut connectors.

D. Joints, taps, and splices of wire above grade shall be made by means of “Ideal-Nut” con-nectors or “3M Scothlok” spring connectors which are resistant to vibration.

E. Taps and splices of wire within in-grade handholes grade shall be made by means of Burndy Type YC-C compression connectors. Each joint, tap and splice in conductor of #8 and larger shall have the connector voids filled with electrical insulation putty and be taped with rubber covered with plastic tape providing insulation not less than one and a half times the thickness of the original insulation with two half-lapped layers each, Scotch #33.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS

A. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

B. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

C. Feeders Concealed in Concrete: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

D. Exposed Branch Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

E. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

G. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.

H. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway or Power-limited cable, concealed in building finishes.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


I. Exposed Branch Circuits between VFC and Motor Loads: Variable-frequency AC motor drive output cables in raceway.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recom-mended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.

D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural mem-bers, and follow surface contours where possible.

E. Support cables according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Sys-tems."

F. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section "Identifica-tion for Electrical Systems."

G. Use no wire smaller than No. 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits, and no smaller than No. 14 AWG for control wiring. Provide minimum of No. 12 AWG for all switch legs. Pro-vide neutral conductor of the same size as the phase conductors to which it is associated.

H. Use No. 10 AWG conductor minimum for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuits longer than 100 feet, and for 20 ampere, 277 volt branch circuits longer than 200 feet.

I. Provide homerun conductors of continuous length without joint or splice from overcurrent device to first outlet.

J. Provide feeder conductors of continuous length without joint or splice for their entire length.

K. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, panelboards, switchgear, motor control centers, wiring gutters, and other equipment using Thomas & Betts "Ty-Wraps." or similar

L. Provide equal conductor lengths for all parallel circuits.

M. Provide individual neutral for branch circuits unless indicated otherwise.

N. Drawings indicate proposed circuiting only, and do not indicate every conductor unless in-tent is unclear and further clarification is required. Provide the necessary travellers for all three-way and four-way switches.

O. Pull all conductors into a raceway at the same time. Use UL listed wire pulling lubricant. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended tension.

P. Install wire in raceway after interior of building has been physically protected from the weather and all mechanical work likely to injure conductors has been completed.

Q. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway system before installing conductors.

R. Remove and discard conductors cut too short or installed in wrong raceway. Do not install conductors which have been removed from a raceway.

S. Do not install conductors in conduit which contains wires already in place.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equiva-lent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.

D. Connectors shall be large enough to enclose and securely fasten all strands of the conduc-tor.

E. Thoroughly clean wires before installing lugs and connectors.

F. Make splices, taps and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors without perceptible temperature rise.

G. Provide joints in branch circuits only where such circuits divide. Where circuits divide, pro-vide one through circuit to which the branch is spliced from the circuit. Do not leave joints in branch circuits for fixture hanger to make. Make all taps and splices with approved type compression connector.

H. Terminate spare conductors with electrical tape.

I. Identify and label all conductor terminations as specified in electrical identification.

J. Properly terminate indicated conductors in equipment furnished and provide properly sized lugs


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.


1. Test insulation resistance of each main feeder and service after the installation is complete but before the connection is made to its source and point of termination.

2. Test insulation resistance using Biddle Megger or equivalent test instrument at a volt-age not less than 1,000 volts DC. Measure resistance from phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground. In circuits where insulation test value is lower than 1 megohm, re-move and replace conductor and retest.

3. Visually inspect connections of every branch circuit for tightness.

4. Ensure that grounding conductor is electrically continuous.

5. Test branch circuits against grounds, shorts or other faults.

6. Inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper installation.

7. Measure ground resistance from system neutral connection at service entrance to convenient ground reference point using suitable ground testing equipment.

8. Test system for stray currents and ground shorts. If stray currents and shorts are de-tected, eliminate or correct as required.

9. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test as indicated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

10. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Fi-nal Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in cables and conductors No. 3 AWG and larger. Remove box and equipment covers so splices are accessible to portable scanner.

a. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each splice 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


b. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

c. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies splices checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies de-tected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

C. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

1. Test procedures used.

2. Test results that comply with requirements.

3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements.

D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland




CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 26 05 23 - CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES

PART 1 -GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. UTP cabling.

2. RS-232 cabling.

3. RS-485 cabling.

4. Low-voltage control cabling.

5. Control-circuit conductors.

6. Identification products.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Basket Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of wire mesh bottom and side rails.

B. Channel Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of a one-piece, ventilated-bottom or solid-bottom channel section.

C. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

D. IDC: Insulation displacement connector.

E. Ladder Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of two longitudinal side rails con-nected by individual transverse members (rungs).

F. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control and signaling power-limited circuits.

G. Open Cabling: Passing telecommunications cabling through open space (e.g., between the studs of a wall cavity).

H. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.

I. Solid-Bottom or Nonventilated Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of integral or separate longitudinal side rails, and a bottom without ventilation openings.

J. Trough or Ventilated Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of integral or separate longitudinal rails and a bottom having openings sufficient for the passage of air and using 75 percent or less of the plan area of the surface to support cables.

K. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland



B. Shop Drawings: For cable tray layout, showing cable tray route to scale, with relationship between the tray and adjacent structural, electrical, and mechanical elements. Include the following:

1. Vertical and horizontal offsets and transitions.

2. Clearances for access above and to side of cable trays.

3. Vertical elevation of cable trays above the floor or bottom of ceiling structure.

4. Load calculations to show dead and live loads as not exceeding manufacturer's rating for tray and its support elements.

C. Qualification Data: For qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspec-tor.

D. Source quality-control reports.

E. Field quality-control reports.

F. Maintenance Data: For wire and cable to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of an NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to su-pervise on-site testing.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.

2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by UL, a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and applica-tion.


A. Test cables upon receipt at Project site.

1. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install UTP and optical fiber cables and con-necting materials until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC sys-tem is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occu-pancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 PATHWAYS


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


A. Support of Open Cabling: NRTL labeled for support of Category 6 cabling, designed to prevent degradation of cable performance and pinch points that could damage cable.

1. Support brackets with cable tie slots for fastening cable ties to brackets.

2. Lacing bars, spools, J-hooks, and D-rings.

3. Straps and other devices.

B. Cable Trays:


a. Cable Management Solutions, Inc.

b. Cablofil Inc.

c. Cooper B-Line, Inc.

d. Cope - Tyco/Allied Tube & Conduit.

e. GS Metals Corp.

2. Cable Tray Materials: Metal, suitable for indoors and protected against corrosion by electroplated zinc galvanizing, complying with ASTM B 633, Type 1, not less than 0.000472 inch (0.012 mm) thick.

a. Basket Cable Trays: 6 inches (150 mm) wide and 2 inches (50 mm) deep. Wire mesh spacing shall not exceed 2 by 4 inches (50 by 100 mm).

b. Trough or Ventilated Cable Trays: Nominally 6 inches (150 mm) wide.

c. Ladder Cable Trays: Nominally 18 inches (455 mm) wide, and a rung spacing of 12 inches (305 mm).

d. Channel Cable Trays: One-piece construction, nominally 4 inches (100 mm) wide. Slot spacing shall not exceed 4-1/2 inches (115 mm) o.c.

e. Solid-Bottom or Nonventilated Cable Trays: One-piece construction, nominally 12 inches (305 mm) wide. Provide with solid covers.

C. Conduit and Boxes: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems."

1. Outlet boxes shall be no smaller than 2 inches (50 mm) wide, 3 inches (75 mm) high, and 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) deep.

2.2 BACKBOARDS

A. Description: Plywood, fire-retardant treated, 3/4 by 48 by 96 inches (19 by 1220 by 2440 mm).

2.3 UTP CABLE


1. Belden CDT Inc.; Electronics Division.

2. Berk-Tek; a Nexans company.

3. CommScope, Inc.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


4. Draka USA.

5. Genesis Cable Products; Honeywell International, Inc.

6. KRONE Incorporated.

7. Mohawk; a division of Belden CDT.

8. Nordex/CDT; a subsidiary of Cable Design Technologies.

9. Superior Essex Inc.

10. SYSTIMAX Solutions; a CommScope, Inc. brand.

11. 3M.

12. Tyco Electronics/AMP Netconnect; Tyco International Ltd.

B. Description: 100-ohm, four-pair UTP, formed into 25-pair binder groups covered with a blue thermoplastic jacket.

1. Comply with ICEA S-90-661 for mechanical properties.

2. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1 for performance specifications.

3. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, Category 6.

4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as com-plying with UL 444 and NFPA 70 for the following types:

a. Communications, General Purpose: Type CM or Type CMG.

b. Communications, Plenum Rated: Type CMP, complying with NFPA 262.

c. Communications, Riser Rated: Type CMR; complying with UL 1666.

d. Communications, Limited Purpose: Type CMX.

e. Multipurpose: Type MP or Type MPG.

f. Multipurpose, Plenum Rated: Type MPP, complying with NFPA 262.

g. Multipurpose, Riser Rated: Type MPR, complying with UL 1666.

2.4 UTP CABLE HARDWARE


1. American Technology Systems Industries, Inc.

2. Dynacom Corporation.

3. Hubbell Premise Wiring.

4. KRONE Incorporated.

5. Leviton Voice & Data Division.

6. Molex Premise Networks; a division of Molex, Inc.

7. Nordex/CDT; a subsidiary of Cable Design Technologies.

8. Panduit Corp.

9. Siemon Co. (The).

10. Tyco Electronics/AMP Netconnect; Tyco International Ltd.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


B. UTP Cable Connecting Hardware: IDC type, using modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of the same category or higher.

C. Connecting Blocks: 110 style for Category 6. Provide blocks for the number of cables ter-minated on the block, plus 25 percent spare; integral with connector bodies, including plugs and jacks where indicated.

2.5 RS-232 CABLE

A. Standard Cable: NFPA 70, Type CM.

1. Paired, two pairs, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned-copper conductors.

2. Polypropylene insulation.

3. Individual aluminum foil-polyester tape shielded pairs with 100 percent shield cover-age.

4. PVC jacket.

5. Pairs are cabled on common axis with No. 24 AWG, stranded (7x32) tinned-copper drain wire.

6. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1581.

B. Plenum-Rated Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP.


2. Plastic insulation.

3. Individual aluminum foil-polyester tape shielded pairs with 100 percent shield cover-age.

4. Plastic jacket.

5. Pairs are cabled on common axis with No. 24 AWG, stranded (7x32) tinned-copper drain wire.

6. Flame Resistance: Comply with NFPA 262.

2.6 RS-485 CABLE

A. Standard Cable: NFPA 70, Type CM.

1. Paired, two pairs, twisted, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned-copper conductors.

2. PVC insulation.

3. Unshielded.

4. PVC jacket.


B. Plenum-Rated Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP.


2. Fluorinated ethylene propylene insulation.

3. Unshielded.

4. Fluorinated ethylene propylene jacket.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


5. Flame Resistance: NFPA 262, Flame Test.

2.7 LOW-VOLTAGE CONTROL CABLE

A. Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMG.

1. One pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded (19x29) tinned-copper conductors.

2. PVC insulation.

3. Unshielded.

4. PVC jacket.


B. Plenum-Rated, Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP.


2. PVC insulation.

3. Unshielded.

4. PVC jacket.

5. Flame Resistance: Comply with NFPA 262.

C. Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMG.


2. PVC insulation.

3. Unshielded.

4. PVC jacket.


D. Plenum-Rated, Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP.


2. Fluorinated ethylene propylene insulation.

3. Unshielded.

4. Plastic jacket.

5. Flame Resistance: NFPA 262, Flame Test.

2.8 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS

A. Class 1 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-THWN, in raceway, complying with UL 83.

B. Class 2 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-THWN, in raceway, power-limited cable, concealed in building finishes or power-limited tray cable, in cable tray, complying with UL 83.

C. Class 3 Remote-Control and Signal Circuits: Stranded copper, Type TW or Type TF, com-plying with UL 83.

2.9 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland



1. Brady Corporation.

2. HellermannTyton.

3. Kroy LLC.

4. Panduit Corp.

B. Comply with UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.

C. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate cables.

B. Factory test UTP and optical fiber cables on reels according to TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

C. Factory test UTP cables according to TIA/EIA-568-B.2.

D. Factory test multimode optical fiber cables according to TIA/EIA-526-14-A and TIA/EIA-568-B.3.

E. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS

A. Cable Trays: Comply with NEMA VE 2 and TIA/EIA-569-A-7.

B. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of bends between pull points.

C. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Sys-tems" for installation of conduits and wireways.

D. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows if possible.

E. Pathway Installation in Equipment Rooms:

1. Position conduit ends adjacent to a corner on backboard if a single piece of plywood is installed or in the corner of room if multiple sheets of plywood are installed around perimeter walls of room.

2. Install cable trays to route cables if conduits cannot be located in these positions.

3. Secure conduits to backboard if entering room from overhead.

4. Extend conduits 3 inches (75 mm) above finished floor.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


5. Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding conductor to grounding system.

F. Backboards: Install backboards with 96-inch (2440-mm) dimension vertical. Butt adjacent sheets tightly and form smooth gap-free corners and joints.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. General Requirements for Cabling:

1. Retain one of first two subparagraphs below for UTP and optical fiber cabling.

2. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

3. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices."

4. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make termi-nations only at indicated outlets, terminals, and cross-connect and patch panels.

5. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches (760 mm) and not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.

6. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.

7. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice ca-ble between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if dam-aged during installation and replace it with new cable.

8. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating.

9. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull tensions.

C. UTP Cable Installation:

1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2.

2. Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated.

3. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch (12 mm) from the point of termination to maintain cable geometry.

D. Installation of Control-Circuit Conductors:

1. Install wiring in raceways. Comply with requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems."

E. Open-Cable Installation:

1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment.

2. Suspend copper cable not in a wireway or pathway a minimum of 8 inches (200 mm) above ceilings by cable supports not more than 60 inches (1525 mm) apart.

3. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or other potentially damaging items.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


F. Installation of Cable Routed Exposed under Raised Floors:

1. Install plenum-rated cable only.

2. Install cabling after the flooring system has been installed in raised floor areas.

3. Coil cable 72 inches (1830 mm) long shall be neatly coiled not less than 12 inches (305 mm) in diameter below each feed point.

G. Separation from EMI Sources:

1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA/EIA-569-A recommendations for separating un-shielded copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources, in-cluding electrical power lines and equipment.

2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches (127 mm).

b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches (305 mm).

c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches (600 mm).

3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and un-shielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches (64 mm).



4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclo-sures shall be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement.



5. Separation between Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches (1200 mm).

6. Separation between Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5 inches (127 mm).

3.3 REMOVAL OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Remove abandoned conductors and cables.

3.4 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS

A. Minimum Conductor Sizes:

1. Class 1 remote-control and signal circuits, No 14 AWG.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


2. Class 2 low-energy, remote-control, and signal circuits, No. 16 AWG.

3. Class 3 low-energy, remote-control, alarm, and signal circuits, No 12 AWG.

3.5 FIRESTOPPING

A. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A, Annex A, "Firestopping."

B. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article.

3.6 GROUNDING

A. For data communication wiring, comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A and with BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter.

B. For low-voltage wiring and cabling, comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling according to TIA/EIA-606-A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."



B. Perform tests and inspections.


1. Visually inspect UTP cable jacket materials for UL or third-party certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations to confirm color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections to confirm compliance with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

2. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equip-ment and patch cords, and labeling of all components.

3. Test UTP cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polar-ity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not after cross connection.

a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-B.2. Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in "Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.

D. Document data for each measurement. Print data for submittals in a summary report that is formatted using Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM as a guide, or transfer the data from the instru-ment to the computer, save as text files, print, and submit.

E. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland




CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland




CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 26 05 26 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 -GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes methods and materials for grounding systems and equipment.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Field quality-control test reports.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include the following in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals:

1. Instructions for periodic testing and inspection of grounding features at test wells, ground rings, grounding connections for separately derived systems based on NETA MTS.

a. Tests shall be to determine if ground resistance or impedance values remain within specified maximums, and instructions shall recommend corrective action if they do not.

b. Include recommended testing intervals.



B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.

2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.

3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.

4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter.

5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.

7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.

C. Grounding Bus: Rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 2 inches and 12 inches long or as indicated on the drawings in cross section, unless otherwise indicated; with insulators.

2.2 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and combi-nations of conductors and other items connected.

B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure-type, with at least two bolts.

1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.

2. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.

B. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping.

C. Mechanical pumps: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each mechanical pump. Bond conductor to piping, connected equipment, and components.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless other-wise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and mainte-nance, except where routed through short lengths of conduit.

1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to pene-trate any adjacent parts.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.

3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp.

C. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:

D. Metallic Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from grounding bus, to bond metallic piping. Connect grounding conductors to metal pipes, using a bolted clamp connector or by bolting a lug-type connector to a pipe flange, using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end. Install bonding jumper to bond across flexible connections to achieve continuity.

E. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland




CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 26 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 -GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.

2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.


1. Division 26 Section "Vibration And Seismic Controls For Electrical Systems" for prod-ucts and installation requirements necessary for compliance with seismic criteria.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.


A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engi-neering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents.

C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

D. Design support and anchorage of floor standing electrical equipment.

E. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads cal-culated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


1. Steel slotted support systems.

B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following:


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components.

2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components.

3. Equipment supports and equipment anchorage. Include Product Data for compo-nents.



A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."


1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Con-crete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03. Coordinate with existing building features.

B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.


a. Allied Tube & Conduit.

b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.

c. ERICO International Corporation.

d. GS Metals Corp.

e. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.

g. Wesanco, Inc.

2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4.

3. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

4. White PVC end caps on all construction channel ends.

B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.

C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and asso-ciated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malle-able iron.

E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:

1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland ce-ment concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufactur-ers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) Hilti Inc.

2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.

3) MKT Fastening, LLC.

4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit.

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appro-priate for supported loads and building materials in which used.

a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufactur-ers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.

2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc.

3) Hilti Inc.

4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.

5) MKT Fastening, LLC.

3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for at-tached structural element.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.

6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.

7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimen-sions of supported equipment.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and plates.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL PLATES

A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel plates with smooth exposed edges.


C. Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel plates.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as scheduled in NECA 1, where its Table 1 lists maximum spac-ings less than stated in NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps or single-bolt conduit clamps or single-bolt conduit clamps using spring friction action for reten-tion in support channel.

D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article.

B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.

C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of sup-ported components plus 200 lb .

D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:

1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.

2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion an-chor fasteners on solid masonry units.

4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.

5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches (100 mm) thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate con-crete or for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.

6. To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock wash-ers and nuts, Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69 or Spring-tension clamps.

7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.

8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, trans-formers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means that meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements.

E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforc-ing bars.

F. Do not fasten supports to piping, ductwork, mechanical equipment, or conduit.

G. Do not drill structural steel members. Where attachment is required to be made to exposed exterior structural members and canopies, provide steel mounting plates rigidly welded to the steel members of sufficient size and thickness for application. Plates shall be provided with welded threaded studs to accommodate the equipment to be supported. Finish of as-sembly to match structural steel.

H. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. Provide additional support as required to adequately support cabinets and panels.

I. Provide additional support as required to adequately support wall mounted interior and ex-terior lighting fixtures and outlet boxes. Conceal support in finished spaces. Install backing in stud walls prior to sheet rocking or installation of exterior wall assembly

J. Install PVC end caps on all exposed channel ends.

K. Install steel channel to span the lower chord of the flutes of steel decks for support of elec-trical equipment.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS

A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for site-fabricated metal supports.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and ele-vation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF METAL PLATES

A. Cut, fit, and place metal plates accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to protect indicated openings.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


B. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fas-tened to existing construction.

C. Set plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After plates have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout.

D. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.

3.5 CONCRETE BASES

A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base. All bases to be level and obtain minimum height specified.

B. Use 4000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete or as indicated on the drawings. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

C. Anchor equipment to concrete base.

1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's set-ting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.


3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.

4. Install leveling channel sills for Motor Control Centers.

3.6 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas imme-diately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply gal-vanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 26 05 33 - RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 -GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wir-ing.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. ENT: Electrical nonmetallic tubing.

C. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

D. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.

E. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

F. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

G. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover en-closures, and cabinets.

B. Shop Drawings: For the following raceway components. Include plans, elevations, sec-tions, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Custom enclosures and cabinets.

C. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items in-volved:

1. Structural members in the paths of conduit groups with common supports.

2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in the paths of conduit groups with common supports.

D. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that enclosures and cabinets and their mounting provisions, including those for internal components, will with-stand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


2. Retain option in first subparagraph below for essential facilities where equipment must operate immediately after an earthquake.

a. The term "withstand" means "the cabinet or enclosure will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will retain its enclosure characteristics, including its interior accessibility, after the seismic event."



E. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency.

F. Source quality-control test reports.




PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING


1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.

2. Alflex Inc.

3. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co.

4. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose.

5. Electri-Flex Co.

6. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex.

7. Maverick Tube Corporation.

8. O-Z Gedney; a unit of General Signal.

9. Wheatland Tube Company.

B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.

C. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit.

1. Comply with NEMA RN 1.

2. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch, minimum.

D. EMT: ANSI C80.3.

E. FMC: Zinc-coated steel.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


F. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.

G. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable: NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and envi-ronment in which installed.

1. Fittings for EMT: Steel or die-cast, set-screw or compression type.

2. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness, 0.040 inch, with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.

H. Joint Compound for Rigid Steel Conduit or IMC: Listed for use in cable connector assem-blies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded raceway joints from corro-sion and enhance their conductivity.

2.2 METAL WIREWAYS


1. Cooper B-Line, Inc.

2. Hoffman.

3. Square D; Schneider Electric.

B. Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 250, Type 1 for interior use, Type 3R for exterior use, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

D. Wireway Covers: Hinged type or Screw-cover type. Flanged-and-gasketed type in exterior, wet, damp or humid locations.

E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.3 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS


1. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc.

2. EGS/Appleton Electric.

3. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company.

4. Hoffman.

5. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. Division.

6. O-Z/Gedney; a unit of General Signal.

7. RACO; a Hubbell Company.

8. Robroy Industries, Inc.; Enclosure Division.

9. Scott Fetzer Co.; Adalet Division.

10. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


11. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

12. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).

13. Woodhead, Daniel Company; Woodhead Industries, Inc. Subsidiary.

B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy or aluminum, Type FD, with gasketed cover.

D. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

E. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, galvanized or cast iron with gasketed cover.

F. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1 for Indoor use, with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

G. Cabinets:

1. NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.

3. Key latch to match panelboards.

4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.

5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.

2.4 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.

B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel with minimum 0.052- or 0.138-inch thickness as indicated and of length to suit application.

D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

2.5 SLEEVE SEALS


1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.

2. Calpico, Inc.

3. Metraflex Co.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

B. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space be-tween sleeve and cable.

1. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.

2. Pressure Plates: Plastic. Include two for each sealing element.

3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: PVC Externally Coated, Rigid steel conduit.

2. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneu-matic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC .

3. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

B. Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. Includes raceways in the following locations:

a. Electrical rooms.

b. Existing Lounge (Break) rooms.

2. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: Rigid steel conduit. Includes raceways in the following locations:

a. Mechanical rooms.

b. Parking structure.

3. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.

4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneu-matic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.

5. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit.

6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4, stainless steel in damp or wet locations.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indi-cated.

2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with that material. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2 except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter.

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

D. Support raceways as specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.

F. Stub-up connections: Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to freestanding equipment with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs and set flush with the finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment with rigid steel conduit; flexible metal conduit may be used 6 inches above the floor. Where equipment connections are not made under this contract, install screwdriver operated threaded flush plugs with floor.

G. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for communications conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed.

H. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indi-cated. In unfinished areas without ceilings, conduit may be run exposed overhead. Install all conduit, including conduit above accessible ceiling, parallel or perpendicular to walls and adjacent piping. Neatly route conduit in a common rack where possible.

I. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow com-pound manufacturer's written instructions.

J. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bush-ings to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

K. Conduits shall be securely fastened to cabinets, boxes and gutters using two locknuts and an insulating bushing or specified insulated connectors. Where joints cannot be made tight, use bonding jumpers to provide electrical continuity of the raceway system. Where termina-tions are subject to vibration, use bonding bushings or wedges to assure electrical continu-ity. Where subject to vibration or dampness, use insulating bushings to protect conductors. Install grounding bushings or bonding jumpers on all conduits terminating at concentric or eccentric knockouts.

L. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire.

M. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of interior to exterior spaces.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

N. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.

1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations.

3.3 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07.

B. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

C. Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness:

1. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side greater than 16 inches , thickness shall be 0.052 inch .

2. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches and 1 or more sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.

D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assem-blies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construc-tion of floor or wall.

E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.

F. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level.

G. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway unless sleeve seal is to be installed or unless seismic criteria require different clearance.

H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.

I. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceil-ings, and floors at raceway penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials. Comply with Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

J. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways with flexible, boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

K. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation require-ments are specified in Division 07.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


3.5 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufac-turer.

2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.

B. Conduits shall be well protected and tightly covered during construction using metallic bush-ings and bushing "pennies" to seal open ends.

C. Use suitable conduit caps to protect installed empty conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture.

D. Provide metallic end caps on all empty metallic conduits passing through fire rated walls or floors, including existing conduits that are abandoned in place for future use.

3.6 EXISTING RACEWAYS

A. Reuse existing raceways where identified and where permitted by local codes. Remove old conductors from raceway. Clean raceway with mandrel followed by clean mop. Rework ex-isting raceways where required. Secure all existing raceways reused which are loose or not properly connected. Paint existing raceways when exposed to view to match surroundings.

B. Clean existing conduit bodies and pull boxes.

C. Fasten existing boxes securely.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 26 05 48 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 -GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Isolation pads.

2. Spring isolators.

3. Restrained spring isolators.

4. Channel support systems.

5. Restraint cables.

6. Hanger rod stiffeners.

7. Anchorage bushings and washers.


1. Division 26 Section "Hangers And Supports For Electrical Systems" for commonly used electrical supports and installation requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. The IBC: International Building Code.


C. OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development for the State of California.


A. Seismic-Restraint Loading:

1. Site Class as Defined in the IBC: D.

2. Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category as Defined in the IBC: II.

a. Component Importance Factor: 1.0.

b. Component Response Modification Factor: see ASCE7-05 tab.13.6-1.

c. Component Amplification Factor: see ASCE7-05 tab.13.6-1.

3. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods (0.2 Second): 1.437.

4. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1.0-Second Period: 1.206.

1.5 SUBMITTALS



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland




a. Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an evaluation service mem-ber of ICC-ES.

b. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with requirements.

3. Restrained-Isolation Devices: Include ratings for horizontal, vertical, and combined loads.


1. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment weight and operation, seismic forces required to select vibration isolators and seismic re-straints.

a. Coordinate design calculations with wind-load calculations required for equip-ment mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other Division 26 Sections for equipment mounted outdoors.

2. Indicate materials and dimensions and identify hardware, including attachment and anchorage devices.

3. Field-fabricated supports.


a. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic restraints. Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads.

b. Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and spacings. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events. Indicate association with vibration isolation devices.

c. Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By an evaluation service member of ICC-ES, showing maximum ratings of restraint items and the basis for ap-proval (tests or calculations).

C. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for electrical components with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and seismic re-straints.

D. Welding certificates.

E. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.

F. Field quality-control test reports.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


A. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are more stringent.

B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

C. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall bear anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD, preapproval by ICC-ES, or preapproval by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maxi-mum seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to rat-ings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified pro-fessional engineer.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS


1. Ace Mountings Co., Inc.









B. Pads: Arrange in multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates, and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment.

1. Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene.

2. Neoprene pad isolators shall be formed of two or more layers of 1/4-inch to 5/16-inch thick ribbed or waffled neoprene, separated by a stainless steel or aluminum plate. These layers shall be permanently adhered together.

3. Neoprene shall be 40 to 50 durometer. The pads shall be sized so that they will be loaded within the manufacturer’s recommended range.

4. A steel top plate equal to the size of the pad shall be provided to transfer the weight of the supported unit to the pads.

C. Spring Isolators : Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring isolators.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland





5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick, rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500 psig (3447 kPa).

6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw to fasten and level equipment.

D. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic or limit-stop restraint.

1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to weight being removed; factory-drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick, neoprene or rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.

2. Restraint: Seismic or limit-stop as required for equipment and authorities having ju-risdiction.










4. Hilti Inc.

5. Loos & Co.; Seismic Earthquake Division.




B. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and applica-tion requirements shall be as defined in reports by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


C. Channel Support System: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of slotted steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosion-resistant coating; and rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.

D. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 492 stainless-steel cables with end connections made of steel assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivels, and bolts designed for restraining cable ser-vice; and with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement.

E. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted connections or Reinforcing steel angle clamped to hanger rod. Do not weld stiffen-ers to rods.

F. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchors and studs.

G. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of attachment devices.

H. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant neoprene, with a flat washer face.

I. Mechanical Anchor: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchors with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. Minimum length of eight times diameter.

J. Adhesive Anchor: Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing polyvinyl or urethane methacrylate-based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid mortar adhesive. Provide anchor bolts and hardware with zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for an-chor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.


A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.

B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested equipment before shipping.


2. All hardware shall be galvanized. Hot-dip galvanize metal components for exterior use.



PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland





3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Secure raceways and cables to trapeze member with clamps approved for application by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES.

B. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Draw-ings to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces.

C. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within specified loading limits.

3.3 VIBRATION PADS

A. Install at mounting points of floor mounted transformers between equipment and structure.

3.4 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Equipment and Hanger Restraints:

1. Install restrained isolators on electrical equipment.

2. Install resilient, bolt-isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance be-tween anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch.

3. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES providing required submittals for component.

B. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to pro-vide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.

C. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.

D. Drilled-in Anchors:





CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


4. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to in-stallation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air pockets in the adhesive.


6. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior applications.


A. Install flexible connections in runs of raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by dif-ferent structural elements, and where they terminate with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one supporting them as they approach equipment.




1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency accept-able to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage device to restrained component (unless postconnection testing has been approved), and with at least seven days' advance notice.

3. Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide tempo-rary load-spreading members.

4. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by Architect.

5. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device.

6. Measure isolator restraint clearance.

7. Measure isolator deflection.

8. Verify snubber minimum clearances.

9. If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until satisfactory results are achieved.

C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.7 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust isolators after isolated equipment is at operating weight.

B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation.

C. Adjust active height of spring isolators.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


D. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 26 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 -GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Identification for raceways.

2. Identification of power and control cables.

3. Identification for conductors.

4. Warning labels and signs.

5. Instruction signs.

6. Equipment identification labels.

7. Miscellaneous identification products.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.

B. Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style, mounting provisions, and graphic features of identification products.

C. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system com-ponents used in identification signs and labels.


A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and IEEE C2.


C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.

E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufac-turer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those re-quired by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations through-out Project.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of sur-faces where devices are to be applied.

C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.

D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 POWER RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway size.

B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less at indoor loca-tions: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

C. Snap-Around Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less at exterior locations: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

D. Specify thicker tags in paragraph below where exposed to damage or to rough service.

E. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.015 inch thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable.

1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer.

2. Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recom-mended by printer manufacturer.

2.2 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size.

B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

C. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable.



D. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

2.3 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils (0.08 mm) thick by 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) wide.

B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

C. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

D. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.

E. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable.



2.4 FLOOR MARKING TAPE

A. 2-inch- wide, 5-mil pressure-sensitive vinyl tape, with black and white stripes and clear vi-nyl overlay.

2.5 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS

A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

B. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs:

1. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application.

2. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting.

3. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches (180 by 250 mm).

C. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:

1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."

2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES (915 MM)."

2.6 INSTRUCTION SIGNS

A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch thick for signs up to 20 sq. inches and 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes.

1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face.

2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equipment.

B. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. Overlay shall pro-vide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.

2.7 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White letters on a dark-gray background for equipment fed by utility power, White letters on a red background for equipment fed by generator backed-up power. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch .

2.8 CABLE TIES

A. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch .

2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F , According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi .

3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F .

4. Color: Black except where used for color-coding.

B. UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior sunlight, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm).

2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F (23 deg C), According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi (82.7 MPa).

3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C).

C. Color: Black. Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, self locking.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch .

2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F , According to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi .

3. UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0.

4. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 284 deg F .

5. Color: Black.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel ma-chine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient view-ing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.

E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate.

F. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color mark-ings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot (15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum in-tervals in congested areas.

G. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below:

1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon.

2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.

H. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for sur-face preparation and paint application.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system leg-end and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows:

1. Standby Power.

B. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase.

1. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded service, feeder and branch-circuit conductors.

a. Color shall be factory applied .

b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Black.

2) Phase B: Red.

3) Phase C: Blue.

c. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Brown.

2) Phase B: Orange.

3) Phase C: Yellow.

2. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a mini-mum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.

C. Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungrounded conductors using adhesive-film-type labels.

D. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach write-on tags to conductors and list source.

E. Wiring Device plates: Engrave face of plate with circuit number to identify source.

F. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections.

1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.

2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.

3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

G. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equip-ment in finished spaces.

H. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Baked-enamel warning signs.

1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.

2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background.

3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.

4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of equipment including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Power transfer switches.

b. Controls with external control power connections.

I. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and main-tenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.

J. Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red background with minimum 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used for power transfer.

K. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Sys-tems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification.

1. Labeling Instructions:


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


a. Indoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless oth-erwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- high letters on 1-1/2-inch- high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high.

b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label .

c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor.

d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with ap-propriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure.

2. Equipment to Be Labeled:

3. Identification labeling of some items listed below may be required by individual Sec-tions or by NFPA 70.

a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panel-board manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be [self-adhesive, engraved] [engraved], laminated acrylic or melamine label.

b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets.

c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.

d. Switchboards.

e. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for the transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary.

f. Emergency system boxes and enclosures.

g. Motor-control centers.

h. Enclosed switches.

i. Enclosed circuit breakers.

j. Enclosed controllers.

k. Variable-speed controllers.

l. Push-button stations.

m. Power transfer equipment.

n. Contactors.

o. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices.

p. Battery-inverter units.

q. Power-generating units.

r. Monitoring and control equipment.

3.3 ELECTRICAL SCHEMATICS

A. Provide copies of electrical schematic single line diagram complete with feeder sizes and equipment ratings. Diagram shall reflect As Built conditions and shall be a reproduced on bond paper at full size of the Contract Drawings.

B. Electrical schematic shall be installed within a metal frame with transparent shatter-free cover to provide protection.

C. Install diagram within main electrical rooms.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland




CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 26 05 73 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY

PART 1 -GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes services necessary to complete the system analysis studies required for computer-based, fault-current, Arc flash hazard analysis and overcurrent protective de-vice coordination studies. Protective devices shall be set based on results of the protective device coordination study.

1. Coordination of series-rated devices is permitted where indicated on Drawings.

2. Short circuit study.

3. Protective device evaluation study.

4. Protective device coordination study.

5. Arc flash hazard analysis

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For computer software program to be used for studies.

B. Product Certificates: For coordination-study and fault-current-study computer software pro-grams, certifying compliance with IEEE 399.

C. Qualification Data: For coordination-study specialist.

D. Other Action Submittals: The following submittals shall be made after the approval process for system protective devices has been completed.

1. Coordination-study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets.

2. Study and Equipment Evaluation Reports.

3. Coordination-Study Report.

4. Arc flash hazard analysis


A. Studies shall use computer programs that are distributed nationally and are in wide use. Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in this Section. Manual calculations are not acceptable.

B. Coordination-Study Specialist Qualifications: An entity experienced in the application of computer software used for studies, having performed successful studies of similar magni-tude on electrical distribution systems using similar devices.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


1. Professional engineer, licensed in the state where Project is located, shall be respon-sible for the study. All elements of the study shall be performed under the direct su-pervision and control of engineer.

C. Comply with IEEE 242 for short-circuit currents and coordination time intervals.

D. Comply with IEEE 399 for general study procedures.

E. The study shall be in accordance with the latest applicable NFPA 70E standards.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 COMPUTER SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS

A. Computer Software Developers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. CGI CYME.

2. EDSA Micro Corporation.

3. ESA Inc.

4. Operation Technology, Inc.

5. SKM Systems Analysis, Inc.

2.2 COMPUTER SOFTWARE PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with IEEE 399.

B. Analytical features of fault-current-study computer software program shall include "manda-tory," "very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in IEEE 399.

C. Computer software program shall be capable of plotting and diagramming time-current-characteristic curves as part of its output. Computer software program shall report device settings and ratings of all overcurrent protective devices and shall demonstrate selective coordination by computer-generated, time-current coordination plots.

1. Optional Features:

a. Arcing faults.

b. Simultaneous faults.

c. Explicit negative sequence.

d. Mutual coupling in zero sequence.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Provide all field investigation and coordinate with equipment vendors to obtain all data re-quired for completion of the study. Coordinate with utility company and generator vendor to determine source characteristics.

B. Examine Project overcurrent protective device submittals for compliance with electrical dis-tribution system coordination requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Devices to be coordinated are indicated on Drawings.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


1. Proceed with coordination study only after relevant equipment submittals have been assembled. Overcurrent protective devices that have not been submitted and ap-proved prior to coordination study may not be used in study.

3.2 POWER SYSTM DATA

A. Gather and tabulate the following input data to support coordination study:

1. Product Data for overcurrent protective devices specified in other Division 26 Sections and involved in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation tags that are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams, over-current protective device submittals, input and output data, and recommended device settings.

2. Impedance of utility service entrance.

3. Electrical Distribution System Diagram: In hard-copy and electronic-copy formats, showing the following:

a. Circuit-breaker and fuse-current ratings and types.

b. Relays and associated power and current transformer ratings and ratios.

c. Transformer kilovolt amperes, primary and secondary voltages, connection type, impedance, and X/R ratios.

d. Generator kilovolt amperes, size, voltage, and source impedance.

e. Cables: Indicate conduit material, sizes of conductors, conductor material, insu-lation, and length.

f. Busway ampacity and impedance.

g. Motor horsepower and code letter designation according to NEMA MG 1.

4. Data sheets to supplement electrical distribution system diagram, cross-referenced with tag numbers on diagram, showing the following:

a. Special load considerations, including starting inrush currents and frequent start-ing and stopping.

b. Transformer characteristics, including primary protective device, magnetic inrush current, and overload capability.

c. Motor full-load current, locked rotor current, service factor, starting time, type of start, and thermal-damage curve.

d. Generator thermal-damage curve.

e. Ratings, types, and settings of utility company's overcurrent protective devices.

f. Special overcurrent protective device settings or types stipulated by utility com-pany.

g. Time-current-characteristic curves of devices indicated to be coordinated.

h. Manufacturer, frame size, interrupting rating in amperes rms symmetrical, am-pere or current sensor rating, long-time adjustment range, short-time adjustment range, and instantaneous adjustment range for circuit breakers.

i. Manufacturer and type, ampere-tap adjustment range, time-delay adjustment range, instantaneous attachment adjustment range, and current transformer ratio for overcurrent relays.

j. Panelboards, switchboards, motor-control center ampacity, and interrupting rat-ing in amperes rms symmetrical.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


B. Drawings and specifications indicate general requirements for motors, motor starter equip-ment, and low voltage equipment. Determine additional specific characteristics of equip-ment furnished in accordance with results of short circuit and protective device coordination study.

1. Submit equipment design discrepancies and proposed corrective modifications, if re-quired, with short circuit and protective device coordination study. Identify variations clearly on shop drawings.

2. Provide equipment, overcurrent devices, field settings, adjustments and minor modifi-cations for conformance with approved short circuit and protective device coordination study.

3. Do not submit equipment shop drawings until short circuit and protective device coor-dination study has been approved.

3.3 FAULT-CURRENT STUDY

A. Calculate the maximum available short-circuit current in amperes rms symmetrical at circuit-breaker positions of the electrical power distribution system. The calculation shall be for a current immediately after initiation and for a three-phase bolted short circuit at each of the following:

1. Switchgear and switchboard bus.

2. Medium-voltage controller.

3. Motor-control center.

4. Distribution panelboard.

5. Branch circuit panelboard.

6. Motor Starters and disconnects

7. Control Panels

B. Study electrical distribution system from normal and alternate power sources throughout electrical distribution system for Project. Include studies of system-switching configurations and alternate operations that could result in maximum fault conditions.

C. Calculate momentary and interrupting duties on the basis of maximum available fault cur-rent.

D. Calculations to verify interrupting ratings of overcurrent protective devices shall comply with IEEE 241 and IEEE 242.

1. Transformers:

a. ANSI C57.12.10.

b. ANSI C57.12.22.

c. ANSI C57.12.40.

d. IEEE C57.12.00.

e. IEEE C57.96.

2. Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers: IEEE 1015 and IEEE C37.20.1.

3. Low-Voltage Fuses: IEEE C37.46.

E. Study Report:


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


1. Show calculated X/R ratios and equipment interrupting rating (1/2-cycle) fault currents on electrical distribution system diagram.

F. Equipment Evaluation Report:

1. For 600-V overcurrent protective devices, ensure that interrupting ratings are equal to or higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.

2. For devices and equipment rated for asymmetrical fault current, apply multiplication factors listed in the standards to 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.

3. Verify adequacy of phase conductors at maximum three-phase bolted fault currents; verify adequacy of equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conduc-tors at maximum ground-fault currents. Ensure that short-circuit withstand ratings are equal to or higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.

3.4 COORDINATION STUDY

A. Perform coordination study using approved computer software program. Prepare a written report using results of fault-current study. Comply with IEEE 399.

1. Calculate the maximum and minimum 1/2-cycle short-circuit currents.

2. Calculate the maximum and minimum interrupting duty (5 cycles to 2 seconds) short-circuit currents.

3. Calculate the maximum and minimum ground-fault currents.

B. Comply with IEEE 241 and IEEE 242 recommendations for fault currents and time intervals.

C. Transformer Primary Overcurrent Protective Devices:

1. Device shall not operate in response to the following:

a. Inrush current when first energized.

b. Self-cooled, full-load current or forced-air-cooled, full-load current, whichever is specified for that transformer.

c. Permissible transformer overloads according to IEEE C57.96 if required by un-usual loading or emergency conditions.

2. Device settings shall protect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.00, for fault cur-rents.

D. Motors served by voltages more than 600 V shall be protected according to IEEE 620.

E. Conductor Protection: Protect cables against damage from fault currents according to ICEA P-32-382, ICEA P-45-482, and conductor melting curves in IEEE 242. Demonstrate that equipment withstands the maximum short-circuit current for a time equivalent to the tripping time of the primary relay protection or total clearing time of the fuse. To determine temperatures that damage insulation, use curves from cable manufacturers or from listed standards indicating conductor size and short-circuit current.

F. Coordination-Study Report: Prepare a written report indicating the following results of coor-dination study:

1. Tabular Format of Settings Selected for Overcurrent Protective Devices:

a. Device tag.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


b. Relay-current transformer ratios; and tap, time-dial, and instantaneous-pickup values.

c. Circuit-breaker sensor rating; and long-time, short-time, and instantaneous set-tings.

d. Fuse-current rating and type.

e. Ground-fault relay-pickup and time-delay settings.

2. Coordination Curves: Prepared to determine settings of overcurrent protective de-vices to achieve selective coordination. Graphically illustrate that adequate time separation exists between devices installed in series, including power utility com-pany's upstream devices. Prepare separate sets of curves for the switching schemes and for emergency periods where the power source is local generation. Show the fol-lowing information:

a. Device tag.

b. Voltage and current ratio for curves.

c. Three-phase and single-phase damage points for each transformer.

d. No damage, melting, and clearing curves for fuses.

e. Cable damage curves.

f. Transformer inrush points.

g. Maximum fault-current cutoff point.

G. Completed data sheets for setting of overcurrent protective devices.

3.5 ARC FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS STUDY

A. An arc flash hazard analysis study shall be performed with the necessary calculations to provide equipment marking to meet the requirements of the latest NEC edition Article 110.16.

B. The study shall be for all normal power and generator backup modes of operation. The study shall include all medium and low voltage classes of equipment from the transformer serving the building and generator service protective devices down to and including the largest rated device in the low voltage panelboards.

C. Tabulate all the data used in the calculations to determine Arc Flash (AF) Boundary, Inci-dent energy, and personal protective equipment (PPE) requirements for each protective de-vice in the system. Working distance shall be assumed to be 18”.

3.6 FIELD MARKING OF FLASH PROTECTION

A. The equipment manufacturer shall provide field marking of equipment indicating arc flash and shock hazard warnings. Marking shall include values, units of measurement and de-scription for the following:

1. Flash hazard boundary.

2. Incident energy and working distance.

3. Personal protective equipment (PPE) category level with requirement.

3.7 PROTECTIVE DEVICE TESTING, CALIBRATION AND ADJUSTMENT


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


A. The equipment manufacturer shall provide the services of a qualified field engineer and necessary tools and equipment to test and calibrate the protective relays, ground fault re-lays and circuit breaker trip devices as recommended in the Study.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland




CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 26 09 23 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

PART 1 -GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following lighting control devices:

1. Time switches.

2. Outdoor and indoor photoelectric switches.

3. Indoor occupancy sensors.


1. Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for wall-box dimmers, wall-switch occupancy sensors, and manual light switches.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. LED: Light-emitting diode.

B. PIR: Passive infrared.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Clearly mark on each data sheet the specific item(s) being submitted and the proposed application.

B. Shop Drawings: Show installation details for occupancy and light-level sensors.

1. Interconnection diagrams showing field-installed wiring.


D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency, op-eration, and maintenance manuals.



1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke detectors, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 TIME SWITCHES



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


1. Area Lighting Research, Inc.; Tyco Electronics.

2. Intermatic, Inc.

3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc.

4. Lightolier Controls; a Genlyte Company.

5. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc.

6. Paragon Electric Co.; Invensys Climate Controls.


8. TORK.

9. Touch-Plate, Inc.

10. Watt Stopper (The).

B. Electronic Time Switches: Electronic, solid-state programmable units with alphanumeric display; complying with UL 917.

1. Contact Rating: 20-A ballast load, 120/240-V ac.

2. Programs: 4 channels; each channel shall be individually programmable with 40 on-off operations per week and an annual holiday schedule that overrides the weekly op-eration on holidays.

3. Circuitry: Allow connection of a photoelectric relay as substitute for on-off function of a program on selected channels.

4. Astronomic Time: Selected channels.

5. Battery Backup: For schedules and time clock.

2.2 OUTDOOR PHOTOELECTRIC SWITCHES


1. Area Lighting Research, Inc.; Tyco Electronics.

2. Grasslin Controls Corporation; a GE Industrial Systems Company.

3. Intermatic, Inc.


5. Novitas, Inc.

6. Paragon Electric Co.; Invensys Climate Controls.


8. TORK.

9. Touch-Plate, Inc.


B. Description: Solid state, with SPST dry contacts rated for 1800-VA tungsten or 1000-VA in-ductive , to operate connected relay, contactor coils, or microprocessor input; complying with UL 773A.

1. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc , with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off levels within that range, and a directional lens in front of photocell to prevent fixed light sources from causing turn-off.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


2. Time Delay: 15-second minimum, to prevent false operation.

3. Surge Protection: Metal-oxide varistor, complying with IEEE C62.41.1, IEEE C62.41.2, and IEEE 62.45 for Category A1 locations.

4. Mounting: Twist lock complying with IEEE C136.10, with base-and-stem mounting or stem-and-swivel mounting accessories as required to direct sensor to the north sky exposure.

2.3 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS


1. Hubbell Lighting.

2. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc.


4. Novitas, Inc.

5. RAB Lighting, Inc.

6. Sensor Switch, Inc.

7. TORK.


B. General Description: Wall- or ceiling-mounting, solid-state units with a separate relay unit.

1. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when covered area is occupied and off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes.

2. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A. Sensor shall be powered from the relay unit.

3. Relay Unit: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Power supply to sensor shall be 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source as defined by NFPA 70.

4. Mounting:

a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box.

b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch knockout in a standard electrical enclosure.

c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged door.

5. Indicator: LED, to show when motion is being detected during testing and normal op-eration of the sensor.

6. Bypass Switch: Override the on function in case of sensor failure.

7. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc ; keep lighting off when se-lected lighting level is present.

C. PIR Type: Ceiling mounting; detect occupancy by sensing a combination of heat and movement in area of coverage.

1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- minimum movement of any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in. .


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


2. Detection Coverage (Room): Detect occupancy anywhere in a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling.

3. Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy within 90 feet when mounted on a 10-foot- high ceiling.

D. Ultrasonic Type: Ceiling mounting; detect occupancy by sensing a change in pattern of re-flected ultrasonic energy in area of coverage.

1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s .

2. Detection Coverage (Small Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 600 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling.

3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling.

4. Detection Coverage (Large Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 2000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling.

5. Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy anywhere within 90 feet when mounted on a 10-foot- high ceiling in a corridor not wider than 14 feet .

E. Dual-Technology Type: Ceiling mounting; detect occupancy by using a combination of PIR and ultrasonic detection methods in area of coverage. Particular technology or combination of technologies that controls on-off functions shall be selectable in the field by operating controls on unit.

1. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology.

2. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- minimum movement of any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in. , and detect a per-son of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s .

3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling.

2.4 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 22 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

C. Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 16 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electri-cal Power Conductors and Cables."

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 SENSOR INSTALLATION

A. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions.

3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


A. Wiring Method: Comply with Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." Minimum conduit size shall be 1/2 inch.

B. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited and nonpower-limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 26 Section "Identifi-cation for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors.

2. Identify circuits or luminaries controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each sensor.

B. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation.


A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been ener-gized, adjust and test for compliance with requirements.

2. Operational Test: Verify operation of each lighting control device, and adjust time de-lays.

B. Lighting control devices that fail tests and inspections are defective work.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Comple-tion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sensors to suit occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Coordinate demonstration of products specified in this Section with demonstration require-ments for low-voltage, programmable lighting control system specified in Division 26 Sec-tion "Network Lighting Controls."

B. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain lighting control devices. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland




CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 26 22 00 - LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

PART 1 -GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following types of dry-type transformers rated 600 V and less, with capacities up to 1000 kVA:

1. Distribution transformers.

2. Drive Isolation transformers

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum clearances, installed devices and features, and performance for each type and size of transformer indicated. Clearly mark on each data sheet the specific item(s) being submitted and the proposed application.



C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that transformers, ac-cessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vi-bration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:


a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."



D. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

E. Source quality-control test reports.

F. Field quality-control test reports.

G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland



A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each transformer type through one source from a single manu-facturer.


D. Comply with IEEE C57.12.91, "Test Code for Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transform-ers."


A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written instructions within the enclosure of each ventilated-type unit, throughout periods during which equip-ment is not energized and when transformer is not in a space that is continuously under normal control of temperature and humidity.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual transformer provided. Cast an-chor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

B. Coordinate installation of wall-mounting and structure-hanging supports with actual trans-former provided.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. ACME Electric Corporation; Power Distribution Products Division.

2. Challenger Electrical Equipment Corp.; a division of Eaton Corp.

3. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Products.

4. General Electric Company.

5. Magnetek Power Electronics Group.

6. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.

7. Sola/Hevi-Duty.


2.2 GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


B. Cores: Grain-oriented, non-aging silicon steel.

C. Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps.

1. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type.

2. Coil Material: Copper.

2.3 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS

A. Comply with NEMA ST 20, and list and label as complying with UL 1561.

B. Provide transformers that are constructed to withstand seismic forces specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

C. Cores: One leg per phase.

1. Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound, sealing out moisture and air.

D. Enclosure: Ventilated.

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.

a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.

b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

c. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids: NEMA 250, Type 12.

E. Taps for Transformers Smaller Than 3 kVA: None.

F. Taps for Transformers 7.5 to 24 kVA: One 5 percent tap above and one 5 percent tap be-low normal full capacity.

G. Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent taps above and four 2.5 per-cent taps below normal full capacity.

H. Insulation Class: 220 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system with a maximum of 150 deg C rise above 40 deg C ambient temperature.

I. Energy Efficiency for Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger:

1. Complying with NEMA TP 1, Class 1 efficiency levels.

2. Tested according to NEMA TP 2.

J. Wall Brackets: Manufacturer's standard brackets.

K. Low-Sound-Level Requirements: Minimum of 3 dBA less than NEMA ST 20 standard sound levels when factory tested according to IEEE C57.12.91.

2.4 DRIVE ISOLATION TRANSFORMERS

A. Transformers 7.5kVA and larger shall be 150oC temperature rise above 40oC ambient. Drive isolation transformers shall have a minimum of 2 - 5% full capacity primary taps, 1 -


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


FCAN and 1 - FCBN, for 230V or 460V primaries. Exact voltages and taps to be as desig-nated on the plans or the transformer schedule.

B. Transformers shall comply with drive rating class B in accord with IEEE Std 597 and shall be suitable for 150% load for 1 minute occurring once per hour.

C. Insulation Class: 220 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system with a maximum of 150 deg C rise above 40 deg C ambient temperature.

D. The maximum temperature of the top of the enclosure shall not exceed 50oC rise above a 40oC ambient.

E. Transformer coils shall be of the continuous wound construction and shall be impregnated with nonhygroscopic, thermosetting varnish

F. All cores to be constructed with low hysteresis and eddy current losses. Magnetic flux den-sities are to be kept well below the saturation point to prevent core overheating caused by harmonic voltage distortion and load current offset. Cores for transformers greater than 660kVA shall be clamped utilizing insulated bolts through the core laminations to ensure proper pressure throughout the length of the core. The completed core and coil shall be bolted to the base of the enclosure but isolated by means of rubber vibration-absorbing mounts. There shall be no metal-to-metal contact between the core and coil and the enclo-sure except for a flexible safety ground strap. Sound isolation systems requiring the com-plete removal of all fastening devices will not be acceptable.

G. Transformers 7.5kVA and larger shall be common core construction. Three phase trans-formers 7.5kVA and larger utilizing more than one core, or Scott-T connections, shall not be acceptable.

H. The core of the transformer shall be visibly grounded to the enclosure by means of a flexi-ble grounding conductor sized in accordance with applicable UL and NEC standards.

I. The transformer enclosures shall be ventilated and be fabricated of heavy gauge, sheet steel construction. The entire enclosure shall be finished utilizing a continuous process con-sisting of degeasing, cleaning and phosphatizing, followed by electrostatic deposition of polymer polyester powder coating and baking cycle to provide uniform coating of all edges and surfaces. The coating shall be UL recognized for outdoor use. The coating color shall be ANSI 49.

J. Sound levels shall be warranted by the manufacturer not to exceed the following:

2.5 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A. Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for each distribution and buck-boost transformer, mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Test and inspect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.91.

B. Factory Sound-Level Tests: Conduct sound-level tests on equipment for this Project.

PART 3 -EXECUTION


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions for compliance with enclosure- and ambient-temperature requirements for each transformer.

B. Verify that field measurements are as needed to maintain working clearances required by NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where transformers will be installed.

D. Verify that ground connections are in place and requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met. Maximum ground resis-tance shall be 5 ohms at location of transformer.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install wall-mounting transformers level and plumb with wall brackets fabricated by trans-former manufacturer.

1. Brace wall-mounting transformers as specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems.

B. Construct concrete bases and anchor floor-mounting transformers according to manufac-turer's written instructions, seismic codes applicable to Project, and requirements in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

B. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."


A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.



1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Ac-ceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

C. Remove and replace units that do not pass tests or inspections and retest as specified above.

D. Infrared Scanning: Two months after Substantial Completion, perform an infrared scan of transformer connections.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


1. Use an infrared-scanning device designed to measure temperature or detect signifi-cant deviations from normal values. Provide documentation of device calibration.

2. Perform 2 follow-up infrared scans of transformers, one at 4 months and the other at 11 months after Substantial Completion.

3. Prepare a certified report identifying transformer checked and describing results of scanning. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and scan-ning observations after remedial action.

E. Test Labeling: On completion of satisfactory testing of each unit, attach a dated and signed "Satisfactory Test" label to tested component.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Record transformer secondary voltage at each unit for at least 48 hours of typical occu-pancy period. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at secondary terminals. Optimum is defined as not exceeding nameplate voltage plus 10 percent and not being lower than nameplate voltage minus 3 percent at maximum load conditions. Submit recording and tap settings as test results.

B. Output Settings Report: Prepare a written report recording output voltages and tap settings.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 26 24 13 - SWITCHBOARDS

PART 1 -GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Distribution switchboards rated 600 V and less.

2. Disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.

3. Instrumentation.

4. Control power.

5. Accessory components and features.

6. Identification.


A. Seismic Performance: Switchboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions de-termined according to SEI/ASCE 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of switchboard, overcurrent protective device, transient volt-age suppression device, ground-fault protector, accessory, and component indicated. In-clude dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes. Clearly mark on each data sheet the specific item(s) being submitted and the proposed application.

B. Shop Drawings: For each switchboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clear-ances and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.

2. Detail enclosure types for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.

3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.

4. Detail short-circuit current rating of switchboards and overcurrent protective devices.

5. Include descriptive documentation of optional barriers specified for electrical insulation and isolation.

6. Detail utility company's metering provisions with indication of approval by utility com-pany.

7. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


8. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components.

9. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent pro-tective device included in switchboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; in-clude selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.

10. Include schematic and wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: Submit certification that switchboards, overcurrent pro-tective devices, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Divi-sion 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the follow-ing:




D. Field Quality-Control Reports:



3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For switchboards and components to include in emer-gency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Routine maintenance requirements for switchboards and all installed components.

2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective de-vices.

3. Time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device included in switchboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers qualified as defined in NEMA PB 2.1 and trained in electrical safety as required by NFPA 70E.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain switchboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for switchboards including clearances between switchboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by UL, a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and applica-tion.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


E. Comply with NEMA PB 2.


G. Comply with UL 891.


A. Deliver switchboards in sections or lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path.

B. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside switchboards and install tem-porary electric heating (250 W per section) to prevent condensation.

C. Handle and prepare switchboards for installation according to NEMA PB 2.1.


A. Installation Pathway: Remove and replace access fencing, doors, lift-out panels, and struc-tures to provide pathway for moving switchboards into place.

B. Environmental Limitations:

1. Do not deliver or install switchboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above switchboards is complete, and tem-porary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless other-wise indicated:

a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C).

b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).

C. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 2, usual service conditions, as follows:

1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified.

2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).

D. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occu-pied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify AC Transit Representative no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service.

2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service.

3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without AC Transit Representa-tive’s written permission.

4. Comply with NFPA 70E.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switchboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equip-ment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Coordinate size and location of steel channel supports with actual equipment provided.

C. Coordinate size and location of housekeeping pads with actual equipment provided.

D. Coordinate conduit stub-up locations with actual equipment provided.

E. Coordinate circuit breaker characteristics with listed Withstand / Closing Ratings for Trans-fer Switches used with specific manufacturer’s Molded Case Circuit Breakers.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.




1. Keys: Two spares for each type of lock.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS


1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.

2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.


4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Front-Connected, Front-Accessible Switchboards:

1. Main Devices: Fixed, individually mounted.

2. Branch Devices: Panel mounted.

3. Sections front and rear aligned.

C. Nominal System Voltage: 208Y/120 V as indicated on the drawings.

D. Main-Bus Continuous: as indicated on the drawings.

E. Seismic Requirements: Fabricate and test switchboards according to IEEE 344 to with-stand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


F. Indoor Enclosures: Steel, NEMA 250, Type 1.

G. Enclosure Finish for Indoor Units: Factory-applied finish in manufacturer's standard gray finish over a rust-inhibiting primer on treated metal surface.

H. Outdoor Enclosures: Type 3R.

1. Finish: Factory-applied finish in manufacturer's standard grey color; undersurfaces treated with corrosion-resistant undercoating.

2. Enclosure: Non-Walk-in style with flat roof; bolt-on rear covers for each section, with provisions for padlocking.

I. Barriers: Between adjacent switchboard sections.

J. Insulation and isolation for main bus of main section and main and vertical buses of feeder sections.

K. Outdoor Enclosures Cubical Space Heaters: Factory-installed electric space heaters of suf-ficient wattage in each vertical section to maintain enclosure temperature above expected dew point.

1. Space-Heater Control: Thermostats to maintain temperature of each section above expected dew point.

2. Space-Heater Power Source: Transformer, factory installed in switchboard.

L. Provide pull section compartment as indicated.

M. Owner Metering Compartment: A separate customer metering compartment and section with front hinged door, metering, and current transformers for each meter. Current trans-former secondary wiring shall be terminated on shorting-type terminal blocks. Include po-tential transformers having primary and secondary fuses with disconnecting means and secondary wiring terminated on terminal blocks.

N. Bus Transition and Incoming Pull Sections: Matched and aligned with basic switchboard.

O. Hinged Front Panels: Allow access to circuit breaker, metering, accessory, and blank com-partments.

P. Buses and Connections: Three phase, four wire unless otherwise indicated.

1. Phase- and Neutral-Bus Material: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity, sil-ver-plated, with tin-plated aluminum or copper feeder circuit-breaker line connections.

2. Load Terminals: Insulated, rigidly braced, of same material as through buses, equipped with compression connectors for outgoing circuit conductors. Provide load terminals for future circuit-breaker positions at full-ampere rating of circuit-breaker po-sition.

3. Ground Bus: Minimum-size required by UL 891, hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity, equipped with compression connectors for feeder and branch-circuit ground conductors.

4. Main Phase Buses and Equipment Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for entire length of switchboard's main and distribution sections. Provide for future extensions from both ends.

5. Neutral Buses: 100 percent of the ampacity of phase buses unless otherwise indi-cated, equipped with compression connectors for outgoing circuit neutral cables.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


Q. Future Devices: Equip compartments with mounting brackets, supports, bus connections, and appurtenances at full rating of circuit-breaker compartment.

R. Bus-Bar Insulation: Factory-applied, flame-retardant, tape wrapping of individual bus bars or flame-retardant, spray-applied insulation. Minimum insulation temperature rating of 105 deg C.

S. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for overcurrent protective devices and other components including instruments and instrument transformers.

2.2 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: for circuit-breaker frame sizes smaller than 250 A. Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous mag-netic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 100 A to 249 A.

2. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger; field-replaceable rating plug or field-replicable electronic trip; and the fol-lowing field-adjustable settings:

a. Instantaneous trip.

b. Long- and short-time pickup levels.

c. Long- and short-time time adjustments.

3. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:

a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.

b. Lugs: Compression style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material.

c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluores-cent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits.

2.3 INSTRUMENTATION

A. Instrument Transformers: IEEE C57.13, NEMA EI 21.1, and the following:

1. Potential Transformers: IEEE C57.13; 120 V, 60 Hz,; disconnecting type with integral fuse mountings. Burden and accuracy shall be consistent with connected metering and relay devices.

2. Current Transformers: IEEE C57.13; 5 A, 60 Hz, secondary winding and secondary shorting device. Burden and accuracy shall be consistent with connected metering and relay devices.

3. Control-Power Transformers: Dry type, mounted in separate compartments for units larger than 3 kVA.

B. Multifunction Digital-Metering Monitor: Microprocessor-based unit suitable for three- or four-wire systems and with the following features:

1. Switch-selectable digital display of the following values with maximum accuracy toler-ances as indicated:


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


a. Phase Currents, Each Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.

b. Phase-to-Phase Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.

c. Phase-to-Neutral Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.

d. Megawatts: Plus or minus 2 percent.

e. Megavars: Plus or minus 2 percent.

f. Power Factor: Plus or minus 2 percent.

g. Frequency: Plus or minus 0.5 percent.

h. Accumulated Energy, Megawatt Hours: Plus or minus 2 percent; accumulated values unaffected by power outages up to 72 hours.

i. Megawatt Demand: Plus or minus 2 percent; demand interval programmable from five to 60 minutes.

j. Contact devices to operate remote impulse-totalizing demand meter.

2. Mounting: Display and control unit flush or semiflush mounted in instrument com-partment door.

2.4 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION DEVICES






5. Insert manufacturer's name.

B. Surge Protection Device Description: IEEE C62.41-compliant, integrally mounted, bolt-on, solid-state, parallel-connected, non-modular type, with sine-wave tracking suppression and filtering modules, UL 1449, second edition, short-circuit current rating matching or exceed-ing the switchboard short-circuit rating, and with the following features and accessories:

1. Fuses, rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity.

2. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring.

3. Integral disconnect switch.

4. Redundant suppression circuits.

5. Redundant replaceable modules.

6. Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and ground bus.

7. LED indicator lights for power and protection status.

8. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed.

9. Form-C contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, one normally open and one normally closed, for remote monitoring of system operation. Contacts shall reverse position on failure of any surge diversion module or on opening of any current-limiting device. Co-ordinate with building power monitoring and control system.

10. Four-digit, transient-event counter set to totalize transient surges.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


C. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 120 kA per mode/240 kA per phase.

D. Withstand Capabilities: 12,000 IEEE C62.41, Category C3 (10 kA), 8-by-20-mic.sec. surges with less than 5 percent change in clamping voltage.

E. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for grounded wye circuits with 208Y/120-V, three-phase, four-wire circuits shall be as follows:

1. Line to Neutral: 400 V for 208Y/120.

2. Line to Ground: 400 V for 208Y/120.

3. Neutral to Ground: 400 V for 208Y/120.

2.5 CONTROL POWER

A. Retain one of first three paragraphs below.

B. Control Circuits: 120-V ac, supplied through secondary disconnecting devices from control-power transformer.

2.6 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES

A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.

2.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Presentation Media: Painted graphics in color contrasting with background color to repre-sent bus and components, complete with lettered designations.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store switchboards according to NEMA PB 2.1.

B. Examine switchboards before installation. Reject switchboards that are moisture damaged or physically damaged.

C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive switchboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install switchboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 2.1.

B. Equipment Mounting: Install switchboards on concrete base, 4-inch (100-mm) nominal thickness. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indi-cated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


2. Install leveled channel sills within concrete base under front and rear for anchorage. Drill and tap sills in accordance with manufacturer’s drawings.



5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to switchboards.

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from switchboard units and components.

D. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibra-tion and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

E. Operating Instructions: Frame and mount the printed basic operating instructions for switchboards, including control and key interlocking sequences and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished wood or metal and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of switchboards.

F. Install filler plates in unused spaces of panel-mounted sections.

G. Install overcurrent protective devices, transient voltage suppression devices, and instru-mentation.

1. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.

H. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identi-fication for Electrical Systems."

B. Switchboard Nameplates: Label each switchboard compartment with a nameplate comply-ing with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

C. Device Nameplates: Label each disconnecting and overcurrent protective device and each meter and control device mounted in compartment doors with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

D. Identify with arc flash data based on recommendations of Section 260573 - Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study.


A. Retain first paragraph below to require Contractor to perform tests and inspections.


B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


1. Test insulation resistance for each switchboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

C. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in accordance with NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

D. Tests and Inspections:

1. Insulated Case/Molded Case - Visual and Mechanical Inspection

a. Compare nameplate data with drawings and specifications.

b. Inspect circuit breaker for correct mounting.

c. Operate circuit breaker to insure smooth operation.

d. Inspect case for cracks or other defects.

e. Verify tightness of accessible bolted connections and/or cable connections by calibrated torque-wrench method in accordance with manufacturer's published data. Perform thermographic survey.

f. Inspect mechanism contacts and arc chutes in unsealed units.

2. Electrical Tests (for all circuit breakers 100A and above )

a. Verify correct operation of any auxiliary features such as trip and pickup indica-tors, zone interlocking, electrical close and trip operation, trip-free, and antipump function.

b. Perform a contact-resistance test.

c. Perform an insulation-resistance test at 1000 volts dc from pole-to-pole and from each pole-to-ground with breaker closed and across open contacts of each phase.

d. Perform insulation resistance test at 1000 volts dc on all control wiring. Do not perform the test on wiring connected to solid state components.

e. Perform adjustments for final settings in accordance with coordination study supplied by owner.

f. Perform long-time delay time-current characteristic tests by passing 300 percent rated current through each pole separately unless series testing is required to de-feat ground fault functions.

g. Determine short-time pickup and delay by primary current injection.

h. Determine ground-fault pickup and time delay by primary current injection.

i. Determine instantaneous pickup current by primary injection using run-up or pulse method.

j. Verify correct operation of any auxiliary features such as trip and pickup indica-tors, zone interlocking, electrical close and trip operation, trip-free, and antipump function.

k. Verify the calibration of all functions of the trip unit by means of secondary injec-tion.

3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each switchboard. Re-move front and rear panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each switchboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

c. Instruments and Equipment:

1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to de-tect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

E. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

1. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

F. Switchboard will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies switchboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, re-medial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as rec-ommended by manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Division 26 Section "Overcur-rent Protective Device Coordination Study."

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat, to maintain temperature according to manufac-turer's written instructions, until switchboard is ready to be energized and placed into ser-vice.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain switchboards, over-current protective devices, instrumentation, and accessories, and to use and reprogram mi-croprocessor-based trip, monitoring, and communication units.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland




CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 26 24 16 - PANELBOARDS

PART 1 -GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Distribution panelboards.

2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating.


A. Seismic Performance: Panelboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions de-termined according to SEI/ASCE 7.


1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimen-sions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes. Clearly mark on each data sheet the specific item(s) being submitted and the proposed application.

B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of in-stalled devices, equipment features, and ratings.

2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.

3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.

4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.


6. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components.

7. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

8. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent pro-tective device included in panelboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; in-clude selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: Submit certification that panelboards, overcurrent protec-tive devices, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Divi-sion 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the follow-ing:




D. Field Quality-Control Reports:




E. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load balancing.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emer-gency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective de-vices.

2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protec-tive device that allows adjustments.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panel-boards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.


D. Comply with NEMA PB 1.

E. Comply with NFPA 70.


A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation.

B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NEMA PB 1.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland



A. Environmental Limitations:

1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and tempo-rary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless other-wise indicated:

a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 23 deg F (minus 5 deg C) to plus 104 deg F (plus 40 deg C).

b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).

B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows:

1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified.

2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).

C. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occu-pied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed inter-ruption of electric service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Construction Manager's written permission.


1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equip-ment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast an-chor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.




1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


2. Circuit Breakers Including GFCI and Ground Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Types: Two spares for each panelboard.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS

A. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

B. Enclosures: Flush- and surface-mounted cabinets.

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.

a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.

b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

c. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids: NEMA 250, Type 12.

2. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged door.

3. Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure; inte-gral with enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel sections.

4. Finishes:

a. Panels and Trim: Steel , factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreat-ing with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat.

b. Back Boxes: Galvanized steel.

c. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for overcurrent protective de-vices and other components.

5. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in metal frame with transparent pro-tective cover.

6. Provide cabinet fronts with concealed hinges, concealed adjustment means and mas-ter keyed flush lock. Finish front in manufacturer's standard gray enamel.

C. Incoming Mains Location: Top and bottom.

D. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.

2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding conductors; bonded to box.

E. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.


2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression type.

3. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Compression type.

4. Feed-Through Lugs: Compression type, suitable for use with conductor material. Lo-cate at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


5. Subfeed (Double) Lugs: Compression type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device.

6. Gutter-Tap Lugs: Compression type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device.

7. Extra-Capacity Neutral Lugs: Designated with "NL" on Drawings. Rated 200 percent of phase lugs mounted on extra-capacity neutral bus. UL listed for nonlinear loads, bearing UL label

F. Future Devices: Full height bussing to accommodate addition of future circuit breakers. Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.

G. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals.

2.2 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS





B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type.

C. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

1. For doors more than 36 inches (914 mm) high, provide two latches, keyed alike.

D. Mains: Circuit breaker or Lugs only as scheduled on the drawings.

E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units..

F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt-on circuit breakers.

2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS





B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.

C. Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs only as scheduled on the drawings.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without dis-turbing adjacent units.

E. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

2.4 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES






B. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Circuit breakers with trip ratings 100 amp and smaller Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous mag-netic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 101 amp through 249 amp.

2. Circuit breakers with trip ratings 101 amps through 249 amps shall be ambient tem-perature compensated, thermal magnetic type unless trip and frame information are identified on the drawings. In the latter cases they shall have solid state electronic trips with true RMS sensing.

3. Circuit breakers with trip ratings 250 amps and above and 101 amps through 800 amps where trip and frame information are identified on the drawings. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or field-replicable elec-tronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings:




d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response (where ground fault indi-cated on the drawings)

4. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip).

5. Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip).

6. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:


b. Lugs: Compression style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor materials.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


d. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.

e. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-breaker handle in on or off position.

2.5 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES

A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have been subjected to water saturation.

C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tol-erances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Equipment Mounting: Install panelboards on concrete bases, 4-inch (100-mm) nominal thickness. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indi-cated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around full perimeter of base.

2. For panelboards, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.


4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to panelboards.

5. Attach panelboard to the vertical finished or structural surface behind the panelboard.

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards.

D. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibra-tion and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

E. Mount top of trim 90 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

F. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box.

G. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.

1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


H. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

I. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after complet-ing load balancing.

J. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads; incor-porate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.

C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with require-ments for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Sys-tems."

D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

E. Identify with arc flash data based on recommendations of Section 260573 - Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study.





1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.




1. Insulated Case/Molded Case - Visual and Mechanical Inspection


b. Inspect circuit breaker for correct mounting.

c. Operate circuit breaker to insure smooth operation.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland









e. Perform adjustments for final settings in accordance with coordination study supplied by owner.












E. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


F. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, re-medial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as rec-ommended by manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Division 26 Section "Overcur-rent Protective Device Coordination Study."

C. Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Ac-ceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes.

1. Measure as directed during period of normal system loading.

2. Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as fax machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment.

3. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load read-ings before and after changes and submit test records.

4. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panel-board, is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum requirement.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufac-turer's written instructions.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 26 24 19 - MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS

PART 1 -GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes MCCs for use with ac circuits rated 600 V and less and having the follow-ing factory-installed components:

1. Incoming main lugs and OCPDs.

2. Full-voltage magnetic controllers.

3. Feeder-tap units.

4. Instrumentation.

5. TVSS

6. Auxiliary devices.

1.3 DEFINITIONS


B. CE: Conformite Europeene (European Compliance).

C. CPT: Control power transformer.

D. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

E. GFCI: Ground fault circuit interrupting.

F. IGBT: Insulated-gate bipolar transistor.

G. LAN: Local area network.

H. LED: Light-emitting diode.

I. MCC: Motor-control center.

J. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker.

K. MCP: Motor-circuit protector.

L. NC: Normally closed.

M. NO: Normally open.

N. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device.

O. PCC: Point of common coupling.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


P. PID: Control action, proportional plus integral plus derivative.

Q. PT: Potential transformer.

R. PWM: Pulse-width modulated.

S. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.

T. SCR: Silicon-controlled rectifier.

U. TDD: Total demand (harmonic current) distortion.

V. THD(V): Total harmonic voltage demand.

W. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.


A. Seismic Performance: MCCs shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.


1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of controller and each type of MCC. Include shipping and op-erating weights, features, performance, electrical ratings, operating characteristics, and fur-nished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For each MCC, manufacturer's approval and production drawings as de-fined in UL 845. In addition to requirements specified in UL 845, include dimensioned plans, elevations, and sections; and conduit entry locations and sizes, mounting arrange-ments, and details, including required clearances and service space around equipment.

1. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following:

a. Each installed unit's type and details.

b. Factory-installed devices.

c. Enclosure types and details.

d. Nameplate legends.

e. Short-circuit current (withstand) rating of complete MCC, and for bus structure and each unit.

f. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of each installed controller and feeder device, and installed devices.

g. Specified optional features and accessories.

2. Schematic and Connection Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring for each installed controller.

3. Nameplate legends.

4. Vertical and horizontal bus capacities.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


5. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of each installed unit.

C. Standard Drawings: For each MCC, as defined in UL 845.

D. Production Drawings: For each MCC, as defined in UL 845.

E. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, drawn to scale, showing dimensioned layout, required working clearances, and required area above and around MCCs where pipe and ducts are prohibited. Show MCC layout and relationships between electrical components and adja-cent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on each support. Indicate field measurements.

F. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For MCCs, accessories, and components, from manu-facturer.




G. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

H. Product Certificates: For each MCC, from manufacturer.

I. Source quality-control reports.

J. Field quality-control reports.

K. Operation and Maintenance Data: For MCCs, all installed devices, and components to in-clude in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's Record Drawings: As defined in UL 845. In addition to requirements specified in UL 845, include field modifications and field-assigned wiring identifica-tion incorporated during construction by manufacturer, Contractor, or both.

2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting circuit breaker and MCP trip settings.

3. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable overload relays.

4. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable timers, controls, and status and alarm points.

L. Load-Current and Overload-Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor nameplate full-load currents.

M. Load-Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after motors have been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that switch settings for motor running overload protection suit actual motors to be protected.

N. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain MCCs and controllers of a single type from single source from single manufacturer.



E. IEEE Compliance: Fabricate and test enclosed controllers according to IEEE 344 to with-stand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."


A. Deliver MCCs in shipping splits of lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery paths.

B. Handle MCCs according to the following:

1. NEMA ICS 2.3, "Instructions for the Handling, Installation, Operation, and Mainte-nance of Motor Control Centers Rated Not More Than 600 Volts."

2. NECA 402, "Recommended Practice for Installing and Maintaining Motor Control Cen-ters."

C. If stored in space that is not permanently enclosed and air conditioned, remove loose pack-ing and flammable materials from inside MCCs; install temporary electric heating, with at least 250 W per vertical section and connect factory-installed space heaters to temporary electrical service.


A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: Less than 0 deg F or exceeding 104 deg F, with an average value exceeding 95 deg F over a 24-hour period.

2. Ambient Storage Temperature: Not less than minus 4 deg F (minus 20 deg C) and not exceeding 140 deg F .

3. Humidity: Less than 95 percent (noncondensing).

B. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service or Distribution Systems: Do not interrupt electrical service to, or distribution systems within, a facility occupied by Owner or others unless per-mitted under the following conditions, and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify AC Transit Representative no fewer than two days in advance of proposed in-terruption of electrical service.

2. Indicate method of providing temporary electrical service.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


3. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without AC Transit Representa-tive’s written permission.


C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for MCCs, including clearances between MCCs and adjacent surfaces and other items.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.

B. Coordinate features of MCCs, installed units, and accessory devices with remote pilot de-vices and control circuits to which they connect.

C. Coordinate features, accessories, and functions of each MCC, each controller, and each in-stalled unit with ratings and characteristics of supply circuits, motors, required control se-quences, and duty cycle of motors and loads.

D. Field verify and coordinate features of MCC’s serving existing equipment with existing op-erational sequence.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.




1. Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.

2. Control Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than two of each size and type.

3. Indicating Lights: Two of each type and color installed.

4. Auxiliary Contacts: Furnish one spare(s) for each size and type of magnetic controller installed.

5. Power Contacts: Furnish three spares for each size and type of magnetic contactor installed.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS


A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Eaton Electrical Inc. Freedom Motor Control Center or comparable product by one of the following:

1. ABB; Control Products.

2. General Electric Company; GE Industrial Systems.

3. Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley Brand.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


4. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.; Power Distribution.


B. General Requirements for MCCs: Comply with NEMA ICS 18 and UL 845.

2.2 FUNCTIONAL FEATURES

A. Description: Modular arrangement of main units, controller units, control devices, feeder-tap units, instruments, metering, auxiliary devices, and other items mounted in vertical sec-tions of MCC.

B. Controller Units: Combination controller units.

1. Install units up to and including Size 3 on drawout mountings with connectors that automatically line up and connect with vertical-section buses while being racked into their normal, energized positions.

2. Equip units in Type B and Type C MCCs with pull-apart terminal strips for external control connections.

C. Feeder-Tap Units: Through 225-A rating shall have drawout mountings with connectors that automatically line up and connect with vertical-section buses while being racked into their normal, energized positions.

D. Future Units: Compartments fully bused and equipped with guide rails or equivalent, ready for insertion of drawout units.

E. Spare Units: Installed in compartments indicated "spare."

F. Direct on-line and reduced voltage magnetic motor starter compartments equipped with HAND-OFF-AUTO selector switch, RUN and OFF pilot lamps.

G. Two-speed magnetic motor starter compartments equipped with HAND-OFF-AUTO selector switch, FAST RUN, SLOW RUN and OFF pilot lamps. motor starter compartment equipped with FAST-SLOW-STOP selector switch in HAND mode.

2.3 INCOMING MAINS

A. Incoming Mains Location: bottom.

B. Main Lugs Only: Conductor connectors suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.


2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression type.

2.4 COMBINATION CONTROLLERS

A. Full-Voltage Controllers:

1. General Requirements for Full-Voltage Enclosed Controllers: Comply with NEMA ICS 2, general purpose, Class A.

2. Magnetic Controllers: Full voltage, across the line, electrically held.

a. Configuration: Nonreversing.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


B. Disconnecting Means and OCPDs:

1. Fusible Disconnecting Means:

a. NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, horsepower-rated, fusible switch with clips or bolt pads to accommodate Class J or Class L fuses based on rating required.

b. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed po-sition.

c. Auxiliary Contacts: NO/NC, arranged to activate before switch blades open.

2. MCP Disconnecting Means:

a. UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents, instantaneous-only circuit breaker with front-mounted, field-adjustable, short-circuit trip coordinated with motor locked-rotor amperes.


c. Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with MCP handle.

d. NC alarm contact that operates only when MCP has tripped.

e. Current-limiting module to increase controller short-circuit current (withstand) rat-ing to 100 kA.

3. MCCB Disconnecting Means:

a. UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents; thermal-magnetic MCCB, with inverse time-current ele-ment for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits.

b. Front-mounted, adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

c. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed po-sition.

d. Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with MCCB handle.

e. NC alarm contact that operates only when MCCB has tripped.

C. Overload Relays:

1. Melting-Alloy Overload Relays:

a. Inverse-time-current characteristic.

b. Class 20 tripping characteristic.

c. Heaters in each phase matched to nameplate full-load current of actual protected motor and with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle.

2. Bimetallic Overload Relays:

a. Inverse-time-current characteristic.

b. Class 20 tripping characteristic.

c. Heaters in each phase matched to nameplate full-load current of actual protected motor and with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle.

d. Ambient compensated.

e. Automatic resetting.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


3. NC isolated overload alarm contact.

4. External overload reset push button.

D. Control Power:

1. Control Circuits: 120-V ac; obtained from integral CPT, with primary and secondary fuses, with CPT of sufficient capacity to operate integral devices and remotely located pilot, indicating, and control devices.

a. CPT Spare Capacity: 100 VA.

2.5 FEEDER-TAP UNITS

A. MCCB: Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: for circuit-breaker frame sizes smaller than 250 A. Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous mag-netic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 100 A and larger.

2. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.; field-replaceable rating plug or field-replicable electronic trip; and the fol-lowing field-adjustable settings:




3. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.

4. MCCB Features and Accessories:


b. Lugs: Compression style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material.


B. Fusible Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, clips to accommodate specified fuses with lockable handle.

C. Fuses are specified in Division 26 Section "Fuses."

2.6 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION DEVICES

A. Surge Protection Device Description: IEEE C62.41-compliant, integrally mounted, bolt-on, solid-state, parallel-connected, non-modular type, with sine-wave tracking suppression and filtering modules, UL 1449, second edition, short-circuit current rating matching or exceed-ing the MCC short-circuit rating, and with the following features and accessories:

1. Fuses, rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity.

2. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring.

3. Integral disconnect switch.

4. Redundant suppression circuits.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


5. Redundant replaceable modules.

6. Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and ground bus.

7. LED indicator lights for power and protection status.

8. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed.

9. Form-C contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, one NO and one NC, for remote monitor-ing of system operation. Contacts shall reverse position on failure of any surge diver-sion module or on opening of any current-limiting device. Coordinate with building power monitoring and control system.

10. Four-digit, transient-event counter set to totalize transient surges.

B. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 120 kA per mode/240 kA per phase.

C. Withstand Capabilities: 12,000 IEEE C62.41, Category C3 (10 kA), 8-by-20-mic.sec. surges with less than 5 percent change in clamping voltage.

D. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for grounded wye circuits with 208Y/120-V, three-phase, four-wire circuits shall be as follows:

1. Line to Neutral: 400 V for 208Y/120.

2. Line to Ground: 400 V for 208Y/120.

3. Neutral to Ground: 400 V for 208Y/120.

2.7 INSTRUMENTATION

A. Instrumentation required at main incoming section.

B. Instrument Transformers: IEEE C57.13, NEMA EI 21.1, and the following:

1. PTs: IEEE C57.13; 120 V, 60 Hz, double secondary; disconnecting type with integral fuse mountings. Burden and accuracy shall be consistent with connected metering and relay devices.

2. Current Transformers: IEEE C57.13; 5 A, 60 Hz, secondary; wound, or bushing or bar or window type;double secondary winding and secondary shorting device. Burden and accuracy shall be consistent with connected metering and relay devices.

3. CPTs: Dry type, mounted in separate compartments for units larger than 3 kVA.

C. Multifunction Digital-Metering Monitor: Microprocessor-based unit suitable for three- or four-wire systems and with the following features:

1. Listed or recognized by a nationally recognized testing laboratory.

2. Inputs from sensors or 5-A current-transformer secondaries, and potential terminals rated to 600 V.

3. Switch-selectable digital display of the following values with the indicated maximum accuracy tolerances:

a. Phase Currents, Each Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.

b. Phase-to-Phase Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.

c. Phase-to-Neutral Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.

d. Three-Phase Real Power (Megawatts): Plus or minus 2 percent.

e. Three-Phase Reactive Power (Megavars): Plus or minus 2 percent.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


f. Power Factor: Plus or minus 2 percent.

g. Frequency: Plus or minus 0.5 percent.

h. Accumulated Energy, Megawatt Hours: Plus or minus 2 percent; accumulated values unaffected by power outages up to 72 hours.

i. Megawatt Demand: Plus or minus 2 percent; demand interval programmable from five to 60 minutes.

j. Contact devices to operate remote impulse-totalizing demand meter.

4. Mounting: Display and control unit flush or semiflush mounted in instrument com-partment door.

2.8 MCC CONTROL POWER

A. Control Circuits: 120-V ac, supplied through secondary disconnecting devices from CPT.

B. Control Power Fuses: Primary and secondary fuses for current-limiting and overload pro-tection of transformer and fuses for protection of control circuits.

C. Control Wiring: Factory installed, with bundling, lacing, and protection included. Provide flexible conductors for No. 8 AWG and smaller, for conductors across hinges, and for con-ductors for interconnections between shipping units.

2.9 ENCLOSURES

A. Indoor Enclosures: Freestanding steel cabinets unless otherwise indicated. NEMA 250, Type 1 unless otherwise indicated to comply with environmental conditions at installed loca-tion.

B. Enclosure Finish for Indoor Units: Factory-applied finish in manufacturer's standard gray finish over a rust-inhibiting primer on treated metal surface.

C. Outdoor Enclosures: Type 3R, non-walk-in aisle.

1. Finish: Factory-applied finish in manufacturer's standard color; undersurfaces treated with corrosion-resistant undercoating.

2. Enclosure: Flat roof; bolt-on rear covers for each section, with provisions for padlock-ing.

D. Space Heaters for Outdoor Units Factory-installed electric space heaters of sufficient watt-age in each vertical section to maintain enclosure temperature above expected dew point.

1. Space-Heater Control: Thermostats to maintain temperature of each section above expected dew point.

2. Space-Heater Power Source: Transformer, factory installed in MCC. Supply voltage shall be 120-V ac.

E. Compartments: Modular; individualdoors with concealed hinges and quick-captive screw fasteners. Interlocks on units requiring disconnecting means in off position before door can be opened or closed, except by operating a permissive release device.

F. Interchangeability: Compartments constructed to allow for removal of units without opening adjacent doors, disconnecting adjacent compartments, or disturbing operation of other units in MCC; same size compartments to permit interchangeability and ready rearrangement of


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


units, such as replacing three single units with a unit requiring three spaces, without cutting or welding.

G. Wiring Spaces:

1. Vertical wireways in each vertical section for vertical wiring to each unit compartment; supports to hold wiring in place.

2. Horizontal wireways in bottom and top of each vertical section for horizontal wiring be-tween vertical sections; supports to hold wiring in place.

2.10 AUXILIARY DEVICES

A. General Requirements for Control-Circuit and Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5; factory installed in controller enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated.

1. Push Buttons, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: Heavy-duty, oiltight type.

a. Selector Switches: Rotary type, HAND-OFF-AUTO.

b. Two-speed Fan Selector Switches in HAND mode: Rotary type, FAST - SLOW.

c. Provide associated red (running) and green (off) indicating lights, semiflush-mounted in front of compartment panel or on draw-out unit, visible through the unit door, to show the "running" and "off" positions of starter. Provide associated amber (running) indicating lamps for SLOW speed on two speed starters.

B. NC/NO contactor auxiliary contacts with 2-N/O and 2-N/C.

C. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable solid-state time-delay relays.

D. Space heaters, with NC auxiliary contacts, to mitigate condensation in enclosures installed outdoors or in unconditioned interior spaces subject to humidity and temperature swings.

E. Cover gaskets for Type 1 enclosures.

F. Spare control-wiring terminal blocks; unwired.

G. Spare-Fuse Cabinet: Identified cabinet with hinged lockable door.

2.11 CHARACTERISTICS AND RATINGS

A. Wiring: NEMA ICS 18, Class I, Type B, for starters above Size 3, Type B-T, for starter Size 3 and below.

B. Control and Load Wiring: Factory installed, with bundling, lacing, and protection included. Provide flexible conductors for No. 8 AWG and smaller, for conductors across hinges, and for conductors for interconnections between shipping units.

C. Nominal System Voltage: 208 V, three phase, three wire.

D. Short-Circuit Current Rating for Each Unit: Fully rated; 42 kA.

E. Short-Circuit Current Rating of MCC: Fully rated with its main overcurrent device; as identi-fied on the drawings.

F. Environmental Ratings:


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


1. Ambient Temperature Rating: Not less than 0 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F, with an average value not exceeding 95 deg F over a 24-hour period.



4. Altitude Rating: Not exceeding 6600 feet, or 3300 feet if MCC includes solid-state de-vices.

G. Main-Bus Continuous Rating: As identified on the drawings.

H. Horizontal and Vertical Bus Bracing (Short-Circuit Current Rating): Match MCC short-circuit current rating.

I. Main Horizontal and Equipment Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for entire length of MCC's main and vertical sections. Provide for future extensions.

J. Vertical Phase and Equipment Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for entire usable height of vertical sections, except for sections incorporating single units.

K. Phase-Bus Material: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity, tin plated.

L. Ground Bus: Minimum size required by UL 845, hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conduc-tivity, equipped with compression connectors for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding conductors.

M. Front-Connected, Front-Accessible MCCs:

1. Controller Units: fixed mounted.

2. Feeder-Tap Units: fixed mounted.

3. Sections front and rear aligned.

N. Owner Metering Compartment: A separate customer metering compartment and section with front hinged door, metering, and current transformers for each meter. Current trans-former secondary wiring shall be terminated on shorting-type terminal blocks. Include po-tential transformers having primary and secondary fuses with disconnecting means and secondary wiring terminated on terminal blocks.

O. Bus Transition and Incoming Pull Sections: Matched and aligned with basic MCC.

P. Future Devices: Equip compartments with mounting brackets, supports, bus connections, and appurtenances at full rating of unit.

Q. Bus-Bar Insulation: Factory-applied, flame-retardant, tape wrapping of individual bus bars or flame-retardant, spray-applied insulation. Minimum insulation temperature rating of 105 deg C.


A. MCC Testing: Inspect and test MCCs according to requirements in NEMA ICS 18.

B. MCCs will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and surfaces to receive MCCs, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine enclosed controllers before installation. Reject enclosed controllers that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of MCCs with other construction including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Floor-Mounting Controllers: Install MCCs on concrete base. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."


2. Install leveled channel sills within concrete base under front and rear of motor control center for anchorage. Drill and tap sills in accordance with manufacturer’s drawings.



C. Seismic Bracing: Comply with requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

D. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

E. Install fuses in each fusible switch.

F. Install fuses in control circuits if not factory installed. Comply with requirements in Divi-sion 26 Section "Fuses."

G. Install heaters in thermal-overload relays. Select heaters based on actual nameplate full-load amperes after motors have been installed.

H. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems" for identification of MCC, MCC components, and control wiring.

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


2. Label MCC and each cubicle with engraved nameplate.

3. Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device.

4. Mark up a set of manufacturer's connection wiring diagrams with field-assigned wiring identifications and return to manufacturer for inclusion in Record Drawings.

B. Operating Instructions: Frame printed operating instructions for MCCs, including control sequences and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished metal, and cover in-structions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of MCCs.

3.4 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring between enclosed controllers and remote devices. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables."

B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.

C. Connect selector switches and other automatic-control selection devices where applicable.

1. Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual- and automatic-control de-vices that have no safety functions when switch is in manual-control position.

2. Connect selector switches within enclosed controller circuit in both manual and auto-matic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors.

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for installation of conduit in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." Drawings indicate general arrangement of conduit, fittings, and specialties.

B. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Sys-tems."



B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to in-spect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including con-nections.

C. Perform tests and inspections.


D. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller, component, connecting sup-ply, feeder, and control circuit.


E. Tests and Inspections:


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


1. Inspect controllers, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. Test and adjust controllers, components, and equipment.

2. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller element, component, connect-ing motor supply, feeder, and control circuits.


4. Verify that voltages at controller locations are within 10 percent of motor nameplate rated voltages. If outside this range for any motor, notify AC Transit Representative before starting the motor(s).

5. Test each motor for proper phase rotation.

6. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

7. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate com-pliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

8. Perform the following infrared (thermographic) scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each multipole enclosed controller. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each multipole enclosed controller 11 months after date of Substantial Comple-tion.

c. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.


10. Mark up a set of manufacturer's drawings with all field modifications incorporated dur-ing construction and return to manufacturer for inclusion in Record Drawings.

F. Enclosed controllers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed con-trollers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, re-medial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.7 STARTUP SERVICE



3.8 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and overload-relay pickup and trip ranges.

B. Adjust overload relay heaters or settings if power factor correction capacitors are connected to the load side of the overload relays.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


C. Adjust the trip settings of MCPs and thermal-magnetic circuit breakers with adjustable, in-stantaneous trip elements. Initially adjust to six times the motor nameplate full-load am-peres and attempt to start motors several times, allowing for motor cool-down between starts. If tripping occurs on motor inrush, adjust settings in increments until motors start without tripping. Do not exceed eight times the motor full-load amperes (or 11 times for NEMA Premium Efficient motors if required). Where these maximum settings do not allow starting of a motor, notify AC Transit Representative before increasing settings.

D. Set the taps on reduced-voltage autotransformer controllers at 65 percent.

E. Set field-adjustable switches and program microprocessors for required start and stop se-quences in reduced-voltage, solid-state controllers.

F. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Division 26 Section "Overcur-rent Protective Device Coordination Study." Install Arc Flash Labeling.

3.9 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufac-turer's written instructions until enclosed controllers are ready to be energized and placed into service.

B. Replace controllers whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids prior to Substantial Completion.

3.10 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain enclosed control-lers.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 26 27 26 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 -GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates.

2. Snap switches.

3. Solid-state fan speed controls.


1. Division 26 Section - 260923 Lighting Control Devices

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.

D. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.

E. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premark-ing wall plates.

C. Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified.

D. Field quality-control test reports.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' pack-ing label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate through one source from a single manufacturer. Insofar as they are available, obtain all wiring de-vices and associated wall plates from a single manufacturer and one source.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by UL, a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manu-facturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:

1. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper).

2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell).

3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton).

4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour).

2.2 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES

A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configura-tion 5-20R, and UL 498.


a. Cooper; 5351 (single), 5352 (duplex).

b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), CR5352 (duplex).

c. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex).

d. Pass & Seymour; 5381 (single), 5352 (duplex).

B. Tamper-Resistant Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL 498.


a. Cooper; TR8300.

b. Hubbell; HBL8300SG.

c. Leviton; 8300-SGG.

d. Pass & Seymour; 63H.

2.3 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. General Description: Straight blade, feed-through type. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator light that is lighted when device is tripped.

B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:


a. Cooper; GF20.

b. Pass & Seymour; 2084.

2.4 SNAP SWITCHES


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


A. Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20.

B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:


a. Cooper; 2221 (single pole), 2222 (two pole), 2223 (three way), 2224 (four way).

b. Hubbell; CS1221 (single pole), CS1222 (two pole), CS1223 (three way), CS1224 (four way).

c. Leviton; 1221-2 (single pole), 1222-2 (two pole), 1223-2 (three way), 1224-2 (four way).

d. Pass & Seymour; 20AC1 (single pole), 20AC2 (two pole), 20AC3 (three way), 20AC4 (four way).

C. Pilot Light Switches, 20 A:


a. Cooper; 2221PL for 120 V and 277 V.

b. Hubbell; HPL1221PL for 120 V and 277 V.

c. Leviton; 1221-PLR for 120 V, 1221-7PLR for 277 V.

d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1-PLR for 120 V.

2. Description: Single pole, with neon-lighted handle, illuminated when switch is "ON."

D. Key-Operated Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:


a. Cooper; 2221L.

b. Hubbell; HBL1221L.

c. Leviton; 1221-2L.

d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1-L.

2. Description: Single pole, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle.

E. Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary Contact, Center-Off Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A; for use with mechanically held lighting contactors.


a. Cooper; 1995.

b. Hubbell; HBL1557.

c. Leviton; 1257.

d. Pass & Seymour; 1251.

F. Key-Operated, Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary Contact, Center-Off Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A; for use with mechanically held lighting contactors, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle.


a. Cooper; 1995L.

b. Hubbell; HBL1557L.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


c. Leviton; 1257L.

d. Pass & Seymour; 1251L.

2.5 FAN SPEED CONTROLS

A. Modular, 120-V, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on-off switches and audible frequency and EMI/RFI filters. Comply with UL 1917.

1. Continuously adjustable slider, 5 A.

2. Three-speed adjustable slider, 1.5 A.

2.6 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.

2. Material for Finished Spaces: 0.035-inch- (1-mm-) thick, satin-finished stainless steel.

3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel.

4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and labeled for use in "wet locations."

B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with type 3R weather-resistant , die-cast aluminum with lockable cover.

C. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Receptacle Cover Plate: Gasketed self-closing hinged While-In-Use cover, gray impact resistant thermoplastic.

2.7 FINISHES

A. Color: Wiring device catalog numbers in Section Text do not designate device color.

1. Wiring Devices: Gray, unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing. Switches, dimmers, and receptacles in all areas except where not available for Industrial heavy duty special receptacles, or where NEMA 4 or NEMA 12 rating is re-quired. Red for receptacles connected to circuits supported by the standby generator power distribution system.

2. NEMA 4 and NEMA 12 switches, self-finished metallic.

3. Device cover plates: As defined in WALL PLATES section above.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless other-wise noted.

B. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall fin-ish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of the boxes.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.

3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.

4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

C. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on devices.

2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.

3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails.

4. Existing Conductors:

a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors.

b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter.

c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large enough.

D. Device Installation:

1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete.

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to con-nect conductors.

3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment.

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length.

5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw.

6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufac-turer.

7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.

8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.

9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

E. Receptacle Orientation:

1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the left.

F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and re-mount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


G. Where switches and other devices are mounted at one location, provide single coverplate to cover all devices. Where switches are located with dimmers, switches shall match dim-mers.

H. Align the tops of all group mounted devices. Install plumb and aligned in the plane of the wall.

I. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension ver-tical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under sin-gle, multigang wall plates.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use ma-chine printing with black-filled lettering on durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.

2. Receptacles: Label device face plate by engraving with circuit number.

3. Receptacles: on standby generator fed circuit shall be provided with the word "Emer-gency" in red color engraved on the steel plate



1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.

2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated LED indicators of measurement.

B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:

1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.

2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not accept-able.

3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.

4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.

5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted.

6. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.

C. Operate switches at least twice.

D. Test every convenience outlet with plug-in device for proper phasing and grounding.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 26 28 13 - FUSES

PART 1 -GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Cartridge fuses rated 600-V ac and less for use in control circuits, enclosed switches, enclosed controllers and motor-control centers.

2. Spare-fuse cabinets.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material, dimensions, descriptions of individual components, and finishes for spare-fuse cabinets. In-clude the following for each fuse type indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature Adjustment Information: If ratings of fuses have been adjusted to accommodate ambient temperatures, provide list of fuses with adjusted ratings.

a. For each fuse having adjusted ratings, include location of fuse, original fuse rat-ing, local ambient temperature, and adjusted fuse rating.

b. Provide manufacturer's technical data on which ambient temperature adjustment calculations are based.

2. Dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, and ratings.

3. Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics.

4. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) and current-limitation curves (instan-taneous peak let-through current) for each type and rating of fuse. Submit on translu-cent log-log graph paper.

5. Coordination charts and tables and related data.

6. Fuse sizes for elevator feeders and elevator disconnect switches.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuses to include in emergency, operation, and main-tenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Main-tenance Data," include the following:

1. Ambient temperature adjustment information.

2. Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics.

3. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) and current-limitation curves (instan-taneous peak let-through current) for each type and rating of fuse. Submit on translu-cent log-log graph paper.

4. Coordination charts and tables and related data.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


A. Source Limitations: Obtain fuses, for use within a specific product or circuit, from single source from single manufacturer.


C. Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses.



A. Where ambient temperature to which fuses are directly exposed is less than 40 deg F (5 deg C) or more than 100 deg F (38 deg C), apply manufacturer's ambient temperature ad-justment factors to fuse ratings.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse size and with system short-circuit current levels.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than two of each size and type.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Cooper Bussmann, Inc.

2. Edison Fuse, Inc.

3. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc.

4. Littelfuse, Inc.

2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES

A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratings consistent with circuit voltages.

2.3 SPARE-FUSE CABINET

A. Characteristics: Wall-mounted steel unit with full-length, recessed piano-hinged door and key-coded cam lock and pull.

1. Size: Adequate for storage of spare fuses specified with 15 percent spare capacity minimum.

2. Finish: Gray, baked enamel.

3. Identification: "SPARE FUSES" in 1-1/2-inch- ) high letters on exterior of door.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


4. Fuse Pullers: For each size of fuse, where applicable and available, from fuse manu-facturer.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine fuses before installation. Reject fuses that are moisture damaged or physically damaged.

B. Examine holders to receive fuses for compliance with installation tolerances and other con-ditions affecting performance, such as rejection features.

C. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of sizes and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment.

D. Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must be ap-plied to fuse ratings.


3.2 FUSE APPLICATIONS

A. Cartridge Fuses:

1. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK5, time delay.

2. Control Circuits: Class CC, time delay.

B. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without re-moving fuse.

C. Install spare-fuse cabinet(s).

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems" and indicating fuse replacement information on inside door of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block, socket, and holder.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland




CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 26 28 16 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 -GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fusible switches.

2. Nonfusible switches.

3. Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs).

4. Molded-case switches.

5. Enclosures.


A. Seismic Performance: Enclosed switches and circuit breakers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.


1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.

1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.

2. Current and voltage ratings.

3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate).


5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components.

6. Include time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. Submit on translucent log-log graph paper.

B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.


C. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


D. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.








F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Divi-sion 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit breakers.

2. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcur-rent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protec-tive device. Submit on translucent log-log graph paper.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for en-closed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adja-cent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.





1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F.

2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.

B. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occu-pied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


1. Notify AC Transit Representative no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service.

2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service.

3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without AC Transit Representa-tive's written permission.


1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and re-quired clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.

2. Fuse Pullers: Two for each size and type.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCHES






B. Type GD, General Duty, Single Throw, 240-V ac, 800 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with cartridge fuse interiors to accommodate indicated fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate indicated fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

D. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; la-beled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Lugs: Compression type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


2.2 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES






B. Type GD, General Duty, Single Throw, 600 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horse-power rated, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

D. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; la-beled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Lugs: Compression type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.

2.3 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS






B. General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupt-ing capacity to comply with available fault currents.

C. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

D. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Field-replaceable rating plug, rms sensing, with the follow-ing field-adjustable settings:

1. Instantaneous trip.

2. Long- and short-time pickup levels.

3. Long- and short-time time adjustments.

4. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


E. Features and Accessories:

1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.

2. Lugs: Compression type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor mate-rial.

3. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge lighting circuits.

4. Ground-Fault Protection: Comply with UL 1053; integrally mounted, self-powered type with mechanical ground-fault indicator; relay with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, internal memory, and shunt trip unit; and three-phase, zero-sequence current transformer/sensor.

2.4 MOLDED-CASE SWITCHES






B. General Requirements: MCCB with fixed, high-set instantaneous trip only, and short-circuit withstand rating equal to equivalent breaker frame size interrupting rating.

C. Features and Accessories:

1. Standard frame sizes and number of poles.

2. Lugs: Compression type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor mate-rial.

3. Ground-Fault Protection: Comply with UL 1053; remote-mounted and powered type with mechanical ground-fault indicator; relay with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, internal memory, and shunt trip unit; and three-phase, zero-sequence current transformer/sensor.

2.5 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.

2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

3. Wash-Down Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for com-pliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibra-tion and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

D. Install fuses in fusible devices.

E. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."


2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.





1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.




1. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers (Insulated Case/Molded Case) - Visual and Mechanical Inspection


b. Inspect device for correct mounting.

c. Operate device to insure smooth operation.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland









e. Perform adjustments for final settings in accordance with coordination study sup-plied by owner.












E. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of defi-ciencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as rec-ommended by manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Division 26 Section "Overcur-rent Protective Device Coordination Study".



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 26 29 13 - ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS

PART 1 -GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes the following enclosed controllers rated 600 V and less:

1. Full-voltage manual.

2. Full-voltage magnetic.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CPT: Control power transformer.

B. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker.

C. CP: Motor circuit protector.

D. N.C.: Normally closed.

E. N.O.: Normally open.

F. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device.

G. SCR: Silicon-controlled rectifier.


A. Seismic Performance: Enclosed controllers shall withstand the effects of earthquake mo-tions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.


1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed controller. Include manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and enclosure types and fin-ishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each enclosed controller. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sec-tions, details, and required clearances and service spaces around controller enclosures.

1. Show tabulations of the following:




CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


c. Nameplate legends.

d. Short-circuit current rating of integrated unit.

e. Listed and labeled for integrated short-circuit current (withstand) rating of OCPDs in combination controllers by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdic-tion.

f. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual OCPDs in combination controllers.



D. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosed controllers, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.





F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed controllers to include in emergency, opera-tion, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Op-eration and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Routine maintenance requirements for enclosed controllers and installed components.

2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting circuit breaker and MCP trip settings.


4. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming reduced-voltage solid-state controllers.

G. Load-Current and Overload-Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor nameplate full-load currents.

H. Load-Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after motors have been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that switch settings for motor running overload protection suit actual motors to be protected.






CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland



D. IEEE Compliance: Fabricate and test enclosed controllers according to IEEE 344 to with-stand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."


A. Store enclosed controllers indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation. Protect enclosed controllers from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical damage.

B. If stored in areas subject to weather, cover enclosed controllers to protect them from weather, dirt, dust, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside controllers; install temporary electric heating, with at least 250 W per controller.



1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F.


B. Interruption of Existing Electrical Systems: Do not interrupt electrical systems in facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify AC Transit Representative no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical systems.

2. Indicate method of providing temporary utilities.

3. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical systems without AC Transit Representa-tive's written permission.


1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of enclosed controllers with other construction including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clear-ances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 FULL-VOLTAGE CONTROLLERS

A. General Requirements for Full-Voltage Controllers: Comply with NEMA ICS 2, general pur-pose, Class A.

B. Motor-Starting Switches: "Quick-make, quick-break" toggle or push-button action; marked to show whether unit is off or on.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland



a. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.

b. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.

c. Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley brand.

d. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.

e. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

2. Configuration: Nonreversing.

3. Surface mounting.

4. Red pilot light.

C. Fractional Horsepower Manual Controllers: "Quick-make, quick-break" toggle or push-button action; marked to show whether unit is off, on, or tripped.








3. Overload Relays: Inverse-time-current characteristics; NEMA ICS 2, Class 10 tripping characteristics; heaters matched to nameplate full-load current of actual protected mo-tor; external reset push button; bimetallic type.


5. Red pilot light.

D. Integral Horsepower Manual Controllers: "Quick-make, quick-break" toggle or push-button action; marked to show whether unit is off, on, or tripped.








3. Overload Relays: Inverse-time-current characteristics; NEMA ICS 2, Class 10 tripping characteristics; heaters and sensors in each phase, matched to nameplate full-load


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


current of actual protected motor and having appropriate adjustment for duty cycle; external reset push button; bimetallic type.


5. Red pilot light.

6. N.O., N.C. auxiliary contact.

E. Combination Magnetic Controller: Factory-assembled combination of magnetic controller, OCPD, and disconnecting means.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers of-fering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: or comparable product by one of the following:






2. Fusible Disconnecting Means:

a. NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, horsepower-rated, fusible switch with clips or bolt pads to accommodate Class J fuses.


3. Auxiliary Contacts: N.O./N.C., arranged to activate before switch blades open.

4. Nonfusible Disconnecting Means:

a. NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, horsepower-rated, nonfusible switch.


c. Auxiliary Contacts: N.O./N.C., arranged to activate before switch blades open.

2.2 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosed Controllers: NEMA ICS 6, to comply with environmental conditions at installed lo-cation.

1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.

2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. General Requirements for Control Circuit and Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5; factory installed in controller enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated.

1. Push Buttons, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: Heavy-duty, oiltight type.

a. Selector Switches: Rotary type, HAND-OFF-AUTO.

b. Provide associated red (running) and green (off) indicating lights, semiflush-mounted in front of compartment panel to show the "running" and "off" positions of starter. .


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


B. NC/NO contactor auxiliary contacts with 2-N/O and 2-N/C.

C. Cover gaskets for Type 1 enclosures.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and surfaces to receive enclosed controllers, with Installer present, for com-pliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine enclosed controllers before installation. Reject enclosed controllers that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Wall-Mounted Controllers: Install enclosed controllers on walls with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight struc-tural-steel channels bolted to wall. For controllers not at walls, provide freestanding racks complying with Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

B. Seismic Bracing: Comply with requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

D. Install fuses in control circuits if not factory installed. Comply with requirements in Divi-sion 26 Section "Fuses."

E. Install, connect, and fuse thermal-protector monitoring relays furnished with motor-driven equipment.

F. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify enclosed controllers, components, and control wiring. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."


2. Label each enclosure with engraved nameplate.



A. Install wiring between enclosed controllers and remote devices. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables."



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


C. Connect selector switches and other automatic-control selection devices where applicable.

1. Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual- and automatic-control de-vices that have no safety functions when switch is in manual-control position.

2. Connect selector switches with enclosed-controller circuit in both manual and auto-matic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors.




1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller, component, connecting sup-ply, feeder, and control circuit.



1. Inspect controllers, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. Test and adjust controllers, components, and equipment.

2. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed-controller element, component, connect-ing motor supply, feeder, and control circuits.


4. Verify that voltages at controller locations are within plus or minus 10 percent of motor nameplate rated voltages. If outside this range for any motor, notify AC Transit Rep-resentative before starting the motor(s).





a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each multi-pole en-closed controller. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each multi-pole enclosed controller 11 months after date of Substantial Comple-tion.



D. Enclosed controllers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


E. Prepare test and inspection reports including a certified report that identifies enclosed con-trollers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, re-medial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and overload-relay pickup and trip ranges.

B. Adjust overload-relay heaters or settings if power factor correction capacitors are connected to the load side of the overload relays.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufac-turer's written instructions until enclosed controllers are ready to be energized and placed into service.

B. Replace controllers whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids prior to Substantial Completion.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain enclosed control-lers.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 26 29 23 - VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS

PART 1 -GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes separately enclosed, pre-assembled, combination VFCs, rated 600 V and less, for speed control of three-phase, squirrel-cage induction motors.

1.3 DEFINITIONS


B. CE: Conformite Europeene (European Compliance).

C. CPT: Control power transformer.

D. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

E. IGBT: Insulated-gate bipolar transistor.

F. LAN: Local area network.

G. LED: Light-emitting diode.

H. MCP: Motor-circuit protector.

I. NC: Normally closed.

J. NO: Normally open.

K. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device.

L. PCC: Point of common coupling.

M. PID: Control action, proportional plus integral plus derivative.

N. PWM: Pulse-width modulated.

O. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.

P. TDD: Total demand (harmonic current) distortion.

Q. THD(V): Total harmonic voltage demand.

R. VFC: Variable-frequency motor controller.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


A. Seismic Performance: VFCs shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.


1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type and rating of VFC indicated. Include features, performance, electrical ratings, operating characteristics, shipping and operating weights, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For each VFC indicated. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, and sec-tions; and conduit entry locations and sizes, mounting arrangements, and details, including required clearances and service space around equipment.

1. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following:



c. Enclosure types and details.

d. Nameplate legends.

e. Short-circuit current (withstand) rating of enclosed unit.

f. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of each VFC and installed devices.

g. Specified modifications.

2. Schematic and Connection Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.


D. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For VFCs, accessories, and components, from manufac-turer.



3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based, and their installation requirements.

E. Product Certificates: For each VFC, from manufacturer.

F. Source quality-control reports.

G. Field quality-control reports.

H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For VFCs to include in emergency, operation, and main-tenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Main-


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


tenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting thermal-magnetic circuit breaker and MCP trip settings.


3. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming micro-processor control modules.

4. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable timers, controls, and status and alarm points.




B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by Underwriters Laboratory (UL), a qualified testing agency, and marked for in-tended location and application.


D. IEEE Compliance: Fabricate and test VFC according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Sys-tems."

E. Provide all equipment from the same manufacturer.


A. If stored in space that is not permanently enclosed and air conditioned, remove loose pack-ing and flammable materials from inside controllers and install temporary electric heating, with at least 250 W per controller.


A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation, capable of driving full load without derating, under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than 14 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F.

2. Ambient Storage Temperature: Not less than minus 4 deg F and not exceeding 140 deg F

3. Humidity: Less than 95 percent (noncondensing).


B. Interruption of Existing Electrical Systems: Do not interrupt electrical systems in facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify AC Transit Representative no fewer than two days in advance of proposed in-terruption of electrical systems.

2. Indicate method of providing temporary electrical service.

3. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical systems without AC Transit Representa-tive written permission.


1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of motors, load characteristics, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following:

1. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.

2. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.

3. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form for parts and labor in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace VFCs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified war-ranty period.


PART 2 -PRODUCTS


A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide ABB ACH550-VCR heating, ventilation and air conditioning equipment compatible drive or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Baldor Electric Company.

2. Danfoss Inc.; Danfoss Drives Div.



5. Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley Brand.



8. Toshiba International Corporation.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


9. Yaskawa Electric America, Inc; Drives Division.

B. General Requirements for VFCs: Comply with NEMA ICS 7, NEMA ICS 61800-2, and UL 508C.

C. Application: variable torque.

D. VFC Description: Variable-frequency power converter (rectifier, dc bus, and IGBT, PWM inverter) factory packaged in an enclosure, with integral disconnecting means and overcur-rent and overload protection; listed and labeled by an NRTL as a complete unit; arranged to provide self-protection, protection, and variable-speed control of one or more three-phase induction motors by adjusting output voltage and frequency.

1. Units suitable for operation of NEMA MG 1, Design A and Design B motors as defined by NEMA MG 1, Section IV, Part 30, "Application Considerations for Constant Speed Motors Used on a Sinusoidal Bus with Harmonic Content and General Purpose Mo-tors Used with Adjustable-Voltage or Adjustable-Frequency Controls or Both."

2. Units suitable for operation of inverter-duty motors as defined by NEMA MG 1, Sec-tion IV, Part 31, "Definite-Purpose Inverter-Fed Polyphase Motors."

3. Listed and labeled for integrated short-circuit current (withstand) rating by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Design and Rating: Match load type, such as fans, blowers, and pumps; and type of con-nection used between motor and load such as direct or through a power-transmission con-nection.

F. Output Rating: Three-phase; 10 to 60 Hz, with voltage proportional to frequency throughout voltage range; maximum voltage equals input voltage.

G. Unit Operating Requirements:

1. Input AC Voltage Tolerance: Plus 10 and minus 15 percent of VFC input voltage rat-ing.

2. Input AC Voltage Unbalance: Not exceeding 3 percent.

3. Input Frequency Tolerance: Plus or minus 3 percent of VFC frequency rating.

4. Minimum Efficiency: 97 percent at 60 Hz, full load.

5. Minimum Displacement Primary-Side Power Factor: 98 percent under any load or speed condition.

6. Minimum Short-Circuit Current (Withstand) Rating: 65 kA.

7. Ambient Temperature Rating: Not less than 14 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F .



10. Altitude Rating: Not exceeding 3300 feet .


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


11. Vibration Withstand: Comply with IEC 60068-2-6.

12. Overload Capability: 1.1 times the base load current for 60 seconds; minimum of 1.8 times the base load current for three seconds.

13. Starting Torque: Minimum 100 percent of rated torque from 3 to 60 Hz.

14. Speed Regulation: Plus or minus 5 percent.

15. Output Carrier Frequency: Selectable; 0.5 to 15 kHz.

16. Stop Modes: Programmable; includes fast, free-wheel, and dc injection braking.

H. Inverter Logic: Microprocessor based, 32 bit, isolated from all power circuits.

I. Isolated Control Interface: Allows VFCs to follow remote-control signal over a minimum 40:1 speed range.

1. Signal: Electrical.

J. Internal Adjustability Capabilities:

1. Minimum Speed: 5 to 25 percent of maximum rpm.

2. Maximum Speed: 80 to 100 percent of maximum rpm.

3. Acceleration: 0.1 to 999.9 seconds.

4. Deceleration: 0.1 to 999.9 seconds.

5. Current Limit: 30 to minimum of 150 percent of maximum rating.

K. Self-Protection and Reliability Features:

1. Input transient protection by means of surge suppressors to provide three-phase pro-tection against damage from supply voltage surges 10 percent or more above nominal line voltage.

2. Loss of Input Signal Protection: Selectable response strategy, including speed default to a percent of the most recent speed, a preset speed, or stop; with alarm.

3. Under- and overvoltage trips.

4. Inverter overcurrent trips.

5. VFC and Motor Overload/Overtemperature Protection: Microprocessor-based thermal protection system for monitoring VFCs and motor thermal characteristics, and for pro-viding VFC overtemperature and motor overload alarm and trip; settings selectable via the keypad; NRTL approved.

6. Critical frequency rejection, with three selectable, adjustable deadbands.

7. Instantaneous line-to-line and line-to-ground overcurrent trips.

8. Loss-of-phase protection.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


9. Reverse-phase protection.

10. Short-circuit protection.

11. Motor overtemperature fault.

L. Automatic Reset/Restart: Attempt three restarts after drive fault or on return of power after an interruption and before shutting down for manual reset or fault correction; adjustable de-lay time between restart attempts.

M. Bidirectional Autospeed Search: Capable of starting VFC into rotating loads spinning in ei-ther direction and returning motor to set speed in proper direction, without causing damage to drive, motor, or load.

N. Torque Boost: Automatically varies starting and continuous torque to at least 1.5 times the minimum torque to ensure high-starting torque and increased torque at slow speeds.

O. Motor Temperature Compensation at Slow Speeds: Adjustable current fall-back based on output frequency for temperature protection of self-cooled, fan-ventilated motors at slow speeds.

P. Integral Input Disconnecting Means and OCPD: NEMA AB 1, instantaneous-trip circuit breaker with pad-lockable, door-mounted handle mechanism.

1. Disconnect Rating: Not less than 115 percent of VFC input current rating.

2. Disconnect Rating: Not less than 115 percent of NFPA 70 motor full-load current rat-ing or VFC input current rating, whichever is larger.

3. Auxiliary Contacts: NO/NC, arranged to activate before switch blades open.

4. Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with circuit-breaker handle.

5. NC alarm contact that operates only when circuit breaker has tripped.

2.2 CONTROLS AND INDICATION

A. Status Lights: Door-mounted LED indicators displaying the following conditions:

1. Power on.

2. Run.

3. Overvoltage.

4. Line fault.

5. Overcurrent.

6. External fault.

B. Panel-Mounted Operator Station: Manufacturer's standard front-accessible, sealed keypad and plain-English language digital display; allows complete programming, program copying, operating, monitoring, and diagnostic capability.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


1. Keypad: In addition to required programming and control keys, include keys for HAND, OFF, and AUTO modes.

2. Security Access: Provide electronic security access to controls through identification and password with at least three levels of access: View only; view and operate; and view, operate, and service.

a. Control Authority: Supports at least four conditions: Off, local manual control at VFC, local automatic control at VFC, and automatic control through a remote source.

C. Historical Logging Information and Displays:

1. Real-time clock with current time and date.

2. Running log of total power versus time.

3. Total run time.

4. Fault log, maintaining last four faults with time and date stamp for each.

D. Indicating Devices: Digital displayand additional readout devices as required, mounted flush in VFC door and connected to display VFC parameters including, but not limited to:

1. Output frequency (Hz).

2. Motor speed (rpm).

3. Motor status (running, stop, fault).

4. Motor current (amperes).

5. Motor torque (percent).

6. Fault or alarming status (code).

7. PID feedback signal (percent).

8. DC-link voltage (V dc).

9. Set point frequency (Hz).

10. Motor output voltage (V ac).

E. Control Signal Interfaces:

1. Electric Input Signal Interface:

a. A minimum of two programmable analog inputs: Operator-selectable "x"- to "y"-mA dc.

b. A minimum of six multifunction programmable digital inputs.

2. Remote Signal Inputs: Capability to accept any of the following speed-setting input signals from the BAS or other control systems:

a. 0- to 10-V dc.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


b. 4- to 20-mA dc.

c. Potentiometer using up/down digital inputs.

d. Fixed frequencies using digital inputs.

3. Output Signal Interface: A minimum of one programmable analog output signal(s) ( operator-selectable "x"- to "y"-mA dc), which can be configured for any of the follow-ing:

a. Output frequency (Hz).

b. Output current (load).

c. DC-link voltage (V dc).

d. Motor torque (percent).

e. Motor speed (rpm).

f. Set point frequency (Hz).

4. Remote Indication Interface: A minimum of two programmable dry-circuit relay out-puts (120-V ac, 1 A) for remote indication of the following:

a. Motor running.

b. Set point speed reached.

c. Fault and warning indication (overtemperature or overcurrent).

d. PID high- or low-speed limits reached.

F. PID Control Interface: Provides closed-loop set point, differential feedback control in re-sponse to dual feedback signals. Allows for closed-loop control of fans and pumps for pressure, flow, or temperature regulation.

1. Number of Loops: One.

G. BAS Interface: Factory-installed hardware and software to enable the BAS to monitor, con-trol, and display VFC status and alarms. Allows VFC to be used with an external system within a multidrop LAN configuration; settings retained within VFC's nonvolatile memory.

1. Network Communications Ports: Ethernet and RS-422/485.

2. Embedded BAS Protocols for Network Communications: ASHRAE 135 BACnet; pro-tocols accessible via the communications ports.

2.3 VFC LINE CONDITIONING AND FILTERING

A. Input Line Conditioning: Based on the harmonic analysis study and report, provide input fil-tering, as required, to limit TDD at input terminals of VFCs to less than 5 percent and THD(V) to 3 percent.

B. EMI/RFI Filtering: CE marked; certify compliance with IEC 61800-3 for Category C2.

2.4 BYPASS SYSTEMS

A. Bypass Operation: Safely transfers motor between power converter output and bypass cir-cuit, manually, automatically, or both. Selector switches set modes and indicator lights indi-cate mode selected. Unit is capable of stable operation (starting, stopping, and running)


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


with motor completely disconnected from power converter.

B. Bypass Mode: Field-selectable automatic or manual, allows local and remote transfer be-tween power converter and bypass contactor and retransfer, either via manual operator in-terface or automatic control system feedback.

C. Bypass Controller: Three-contactor-style bypass allows motor operation via the power con-verter or the bypass controller; with input isolating switch and barrier arranged to isolate the power converter input and output and permit safe testing and troubleshooting of the power converter, both energized and de-energized, while motor is operating in bypass mode.

1. Bypass Contactor: Load-break, IEC-rated contactor.

2. Input and Output Isolating Contactors: Non-load-break, IEC-rated contactors.

3. Isolating Switch: Non-load-break switch arranged to isolate power converter and permit safe troubleshooting and testing of the power converter, both energized and de-energized, while motor is operating in bypass mode; pad-lockable, door-mounted handle mechanism.

D. Bypass Contactor Configuration: Full-voltage (across-the-line) type.

1. NORMAL/BYPASS selector switch.

2. HAND/OFF/AUTO selector switch.

3. NORMAL/TEST Selector Switch: Allows testing and adjusting of VFC while the motor is running in the bypass mode.

4. Contactor Coils: Pressure-encapsulated type.

a. Operating Voltage: Depending on contactor NEMA size and line-voltage rating, manufacturer's standard matching control power or line voltage.

b. Power Contacts: Totally enclosed, double break, and silver-cadmium oxide; as-sembled to allow inspection and replacement without disturbing line or load wir-ing.

5. Control Circuits: 120-V ac; obtained from integral CPT, with primary and secondary fuses, with CPT of sufficient capacity to operate all integral devices and remotely lo-cated pilot, indicating, and control devices.

6. CPT Spare Capacity: 50 VA.

7. Overload Relays: NEMA ICS 2.

a. Solid-State Overload Relays:

1) Switch or dial selectable for motor-running overload protection.

2) Sensors in each phase.

3) Class 10/20 selectable tripping characteristic selected to protect motor against voltage and current unbalance and single phasing.

4) Class II ground-fault protection, with start and run delays to prevent nui-sance trip on starting.

5) Analog communication module.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


b. NC isolated overload alarm contact.

c. External overload reset push button.

2.5 OPTIONAL FEATURES

A. Damper control circuit with end of travel feedback capability.

B. Sleep Function: Senses a minimal deviation of a feedback signal and stops the motor. On an increase in speed-command signal deviation, VFC resumes normal operation.

C. Remote Indicating Circuit Terminals: Mode selection, controller status, and controller fault.

D. Remote digital operator kit.

E. Communication Port: RS-232 port, USB 2.0 port, or equivalent connection capable of con-necting a printer and a notebook computer.

2.6 ENCLOSURES

A. VFC Enclosures: NEMA 250, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

1. Dry and Clean Indoor Locations: Type 1.

B. Plenum Rating: UL 1995; NRTL certification label on enclosure, clearly identifying VFC as "Plenum Rated."

2.7 ACCESSORIES

A. General Requirements for Control-Circuit and Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5; factory installed in VFC enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated.

1. Push Buttons, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: Standard-duty, type.

a. Push Buttons: Shielded types; momentary.

b. Pilot Lights: LED types;.

c. Selector Switches: Rotary type.

B. Reversible NC/NO bypass contactor auxiliary contact(s).

C. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable solid-state time-delay relays.

D. Phase-Failure, Phase-Reversal, and Undervoltage and Overvoltage Relays: Solid-state sensing circuit with isolated output contacts for hard-wired connections. Provide adjustable undervoltage, overvoltage, and time-delay settings.

1. Current Transformers: Continuous current rating, basic impulse insulating level (BIL) rating, burden, and accuracy class suitable for connected circuitry. Comply with IEEE C57.13.


A. Testing: Test and inspect VFCs according to requirements in NEMA ICS 61800-2.

1. Test each VFC while connected to its specified motor.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


2. Verification of Performance: Rate VFCs according to operation of functions and fea-tures specified.

B. VFCs will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, surfaces, and substrates to receive VFCs, with Installer present, for com-pliance with requirements for installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting perform-ance.

B. Examine VFC before installation. Reject VFCs that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

C. Examine roughing-in for conduit systems to verify actual locations of conduit connections before VFC installation.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of VFCs with other construction including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Wall-Mounting Controllers: Install VFCs on walls with tops at uniform height and with dis-connect operating handles not higher than 79 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight structural-steel channels bolted to wall. For controllers not on walls, provide freestanding racks complying with Divi-sion 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

C. Seismic Bracing: Comply with requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

D. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

E. Install fuses in control circuits if not factory installed. Comply with requirements in Divi-sion 26 Section "Fuses."

F. Install, connect, and fuse thermal-protector monitoring relays furnished with motor-driven equipment.

G. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify VFCs, components, and control wiring. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland



2. Label each VFC with engraved nameplate.


B. Operating Instructions: Frame printed operating instructions for VFCs, including control se-quences and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished metal, and cover instruc-tions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of VFC units.


A. Install wiring between VFCs and remote devices and facility's central-control system. Com-ply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables."


C. Connect selector switches and other automatic control devices where applicable.

1. Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual- and automatic control de-vices that have no safety functions when switches are in manual-control position.

2. Connect selector switches with control circuit in both manual and automatic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors.





1. Test insulation resistance for each VFC element, bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.



1. Inspect VFC, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. Test and adjust controllers, components, and equipment.

2. Test insulation resistance for each VFC element, component, connecting motor sup-ply, feeder, and control circuits.


4. Verify that voltages at VFC locations are within 10 percent of motor nameplate rated voltages. If outside this range for any motor, notify AC Transit Representative before starting the motor(s).


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland






a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each VFC. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each VFC 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.



D. VFCs will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies the VFC and describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations made after remedial action.

3.6 STARTUP SERVICE



3.7 ADJUSTING

A. Program microprocessors for required operational sequences, status indications, alarms, event recording, and display features. Clear events memory after final acceptance testing and prior to Substantial Completion.

B. Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and overload-relay pickup and trip ranges.

C. Adjust the trip settings of MCPs and thermal-magnetic circuit breakers with adjustable, in-stantaneous trip elements. Initially adjust to six times the motor nameplate full-load am-peres and attempt to start motors several times, allowing for motor cool-down between starts. If tripping occurs on motor inrush, adjust settings in increments until motors start without tripping. Do not exceed eight times the motor full-load amperes (or 11 times for NEMA Premium Efficient motors if required). Where these maximum settings do not allow starting of a motor, notify AC Transit Representative before increasing settings.

D. Set the taps on reduced-voltage autotransformer controllers.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


E. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Division 26 Section "Overcur-rent Protective Device Coordination Study."

F. Set field-adjustable pressure switches.

3.8 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufac-turer's written instructions until controllers are ready to be energized and placed into ser-vice.

B. Replace VFCs whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids prior to Sub-stantial Completion.

3.9 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, reprogram, and maintain VFCs.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland




CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 26 36 00 - TRANSFER SWITCHES

PART 1 -GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes transfer switches rated 600 V and less, including the following:

1. Automatic transfer switches.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, weights, oper-ating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details showing minimum clearances, conductor entry provisions, gutter space, installed features and devices, and material lists for each switch specified.

C. Retain paragraph and subparagraphs below if required by seismic criteria applicable to Pro-ject. Coordinate with Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Sys-tems."

D. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that transfer switches accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:


a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."



E. Qualification Data: For manufacturer.

F. Retain first paragraph below if Contractor is responsible for field quality-control testing.

G. Field quality-control test reports.

H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency, op-eration, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


2. List of all factory settings of relays; provide relay-setting and calibration instructions, including software, where applicable.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintain a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs within a response period of less than eight hours from time of notification.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain automatic transfer switches through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by UL, a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

D. Comply with NEMA ICS 1.

E. Comply with NFPA 70.

F. Retain one or both of first two paragraphs below if applicable to Project.

G. Comply with UL 1008 unless requirements of these Specifications are stricter.


A. Retain this Article if interruption of existing electrical service is required.

B. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities oc-cupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only af-ter arranging to provide temporary electrical service:

1. Notify AC Transit Representative no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without AC Transit Representa-tive's written permission.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Con-crete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

B. Coordinate circuit breaker characteristics with listed Withstand / Closing Ratings for Trans-fer Switches used with specific manufacturer’s Molded Case Circuit Breakers.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Contactor Transfer Switches:

a. Caterpillar; Engine Div.

b. Emerson; ASCO Power Technologies, LP.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


c. Generac Power Systems, Inc.

d. GE Zenith Controls.

e. Kohler Power Systems; Generator Division.

f. Onan/Cummins Power Generation; Industrial Business Group.

g. Russelectric, Inc.

h. Spectrum Detroit Diesel.

2. Transfer Switches Using Molded-Case Switches or Circuit Breakers:

a. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer.

b. GE Zenith Controls.

c. Hubbell Industrial Controls, Inc.

2.2 GENERAL TRANSFER-SWITCH PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

A. Indicated Current Ratings: Apply as defined in UL 1008 for continuous loading and total system transfer, including tungsten filament lamp loads not exceeding 30 percent of switch ampere rating, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Tested Fault-Current Closing and Withstand Ratings: Adequate for duty imposed by protective devices at installation locations in Project under the fault conditions indi-cated, based on testing according to UL 1008.

a. Where transfer switch includes internal fault-current protection, rating of switch and trip unit combination shall exceed indicated fault-current value at installation location.

B. Solid-State Controls: Repetitive accuracy of all settings shall be plus or minus 2 percent or better over an operating temperature range of minus 20 to plus 70 deg C.

C. Resistance to Damage by Voltage Transients: Components shall meet or exceed voltage-surge withstand capability requirements when tested according to IEEE C62.41. Compo-nents shall meet or exceed voltage-impulse withstand test of NEMA ICS 1.

D. Electrical Operation: Accomplish by a nonfused, momentarily energized solenoid or elec-tric-motor-operated mechanism, mechanically and electrically interlocked in both directions.

E. Switch Characteristics: Designed for continuous-duty repetitive transfer of full-rated current between active power sources.

1. Switch Action: Double throw; mechanically held in both directions.

2. Contacts: Silver composition or silver alloy for load-current switching. Conventional automatic transfer-switch units, rated 225 A and higher, shall have separate arcing contacts.

F. Neutral Switching. Where four-pole switches are indicated, provide neutral pole switched simultaneously with phase poles.

G. Factory Wiring: Train and bundle factory wiring and label, consistent with Shop Drawings, either by color-code or by numbered or lettered wire and cable tape markers at termina-tions. Color-coding and wire and cable tape markers are specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


1. Designated Terminals: Pressure type, suitable for types and sizes of field wiring indi-cated.

2. Power-Terminal Arrangement and Field-Wiring Space: Suitable for top, side, or bot-tom entrance of feeder conductors as indicated.

3. Control Wiring: Equipped with lugs suitable for connection to terminal strips.

2.3 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES

A. Switching Arrangement: Double-throw type, incapable of pauses or intermediate position stops during normal functioning, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Manual Switch Operation: Under load, with door closed and with either or both sources en-ergized. Transfer time is same as for electrical operation. Control circuit automatically dis-connects from electrical operator during manual operation.

C. Signal-Before-Transfer Contacts: A set of normally open/normally closed dry contacts op-erates in advance of retransfer to normal source. Interval is adjustable from 1 to 30 sec-onds.

D. Transfer Switches Based on Molded-Case-Switch Components: Comply with NEMA AB 1, UL 489, and UL 869A.

E. Automatic Transfer-Switch Features:

1. Undervoltage Sensing for Each Phase of Normal Source: Sense low phase-to-ground voltage on each phase. Pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal, and dropout voltage is adjustable from 75 to 98 percent of pickup value. Factory set for pickup at 90 percent and dropout at 85 percent.

2. Adjustable Time Delay: For override of normal-source voltage sensing to delay trans-fer and engine start signals. Adjustable from zero to six seconds, and factory set for one second.

3. Voltage/Frequency Lockout Relay: Prevent premature transfer to generator. Pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal. Factory set for pickup at 90 percent. Pickup frequency shall be adjustable from 90 to 100 percent of nomi-nal. Factory set for pickup at 95 percent.

4. Time Delay for Retransfer to Normal Source: Adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes, and factory set for 10 minutes to automatically defeat delay on loss of voltage or sustained undervoltage of emergency source, provided normal supply has been restored.

5. Test Switch: Simulate normal-source failure.

6. Switch-Position Pilot Lights: Indicate source to which load is connected.

7. Source-Available Indicating Lights: Supervise sources via transfer-switch normal- and emergency-source sensing circuits.

a. Normal Power Supervision: Green light with nameplate engraved "Normal Source Available."

b. Emergency Power Supervision: Red light with nameplate engraved "Emergency Source Available."

8. Unassigned Auxiliary Contacts: Two normally open, single-pole, double-throw con-tacts for each switch position, rated 10 A at 240-V ac.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


9. Transfer Override Switch: Overrides automatic retransfer control so automatic trans-fer switch will remain connected to emergency power source regardless of condition of normal source. Pilot light indicates override status.

10. Engine Starting Contacts: One isolated and normally closed, and one isolated and normally open; rated 10 A at 32-V dc minimum.

11. Engine Shutdown Contacts: Instantaneous; shall initiate shutdown sequence at re-mote engine-generator controls after retransfer of load to normal source.

12. Engine Shutdown Contacts: Time delay adjustable from zero to five minutes, and fac-tory set for five minutes. Contacts shall initiate shutdown at remote engine-generator controls after retransfer of load to normal source.

13. Engine-Generator Exerciser: Solid-state, programmable-time switch starts engine generator and transfers load to it from normal source for a preset time, then retrans-fers and shuts down engine after a preset cool-down period. Initiates exercise cycle at preset intervals adjustable from 7 to 30 days. Running periods are adjustable from 10 to 30 minutes. Factory settings are for 7-day exercise cycle, 20-minute running pe-riod, and 5-minute cool-down period. Exerciser features include the following:

a. Exerciser Transfer Selector Switch: Permits selection of exercise with and with-out load transfer.

b. Push-button programming control with digital display of settings.

c. Integral battery operation of time switch when normal control power is not avail-able.


A. Factory test and inspect components, assembled switches, and associated equipment. En-sure proper operation. Check transfer time and voltage, frequency, and time-delay settings for compliance with specified requirements. Perform dielectric strength test complying with NEMA ICS 1.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Design each fastener and support to carry load indicated by seismic requirements and ac-cording to seismic-restraint details. See Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Con-trols for Electrical Systems."

B. Floor-Mounting Switch: Anchor to floor by bolting.

1. Concrete Bases: 4 inches high, reinforced, with chamfered edges. Extend base no more than 4 inches in all directions beyond the maximum dimensions of switch, unless otherwise indicated or unless required for seismic support. Construct concrete bases according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Sys-tems."

C. Identify components according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

D. Set field-adjustable intervals and delays, relays, and engine exerciser clock.

3.2 CONNECTIONS


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


A. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

B. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."



1. After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.


3. Measure insulation resistance phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with insulation-resistance tester. Include external annunciation and control circuits. Use test volt-ages and procedure recommended by manufacturer. Comply with manufacturer's specified minimum resistance.

a. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits.

b. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and integrity of barriers, covers, and safety features.

c. Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed.

d. Perform manual transfer operation.

4. After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational function for each switch at least three times.

a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches and of emergency source with normal source available.

b. Simulate loss of phase-to-ground voltage for each phase of normal source.

c. Verify time-delay settings.

d. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of control set-tings.

e. Test bypass/isolation unit functional modes and related automatic transfer-switch operations.

f. Perform contact-resistance test across main contacts and correct values exceed-ing 500 microhms and values for 1 pole deviating by more than 50 percent from other poles.

g. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting, transfer time delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power, and engine cool-down and shutdown.

5. Ground-Fault Tests: Coordinate with testing of ground-fault protective devices for power delivery from both sources.

a. Verify grounding connections and locations and ratings of sensors.

B. Testing Agency's Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland



3. Measure insulation resistance phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with insulation-resistance tester. Include external annunciation and control circuits. Use test volt-ages and procedure recommended by manufacturer. Comply with manufacturer's specified minimum resistance.

a. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits.

b. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and integrity of barriers, covers, and safety features.

c. Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed.

d. Perform manual transfer operation.

4. After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational function for each switch at least three times.

a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches and of emergency source with normal source available.

b. Simulate loss of phase-to-ground voltage for each phase of normal source.

c. Verify time-delay settings.

d. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of control set-tings.

e. Test bypass/isolation unit functional modes and related automatic transfer-switch operations.

f. Perform contact-resistance test across main contacts and correct values exceed-ing 500 microhms and values for 1 pole deviating by more than 50 percent from other poles.

g. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting, transfer time delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power, and engine cool-down and shutdown.

5. Ground-Fault Tests: Coordinate with testing of ground-fault protective devices for power delivery from both sources.

a. Verify grounding connections and locations and ratings of sensors.

C. Coordinate tests with tests of generator and run them concurrently.

D. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured insulation and contact resistances and time delays. Attach a label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.

E. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

F. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Ac-ceptance, perform an infrared scan of each switch. Remove all access panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

1. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each switch 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

2. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


3. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies switches checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies de-tected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain transfer switches and related equipment as specified be-low. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."

B. Coordinate this training with that for generator equipment.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 26 51 00 - INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts.

2. Emergency lighting units.

3. Exit signs.

4. Lighting fixture supports.

5. Exterior luminaires mounted on exterior surfaces of buildings and structures 1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BF: Ballast factor.

B. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

C. CRI: Color-rendering index.

D. HID: High-intensity discharge.

E. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.

F. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.

G. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided. 1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. In-clude data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:

1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions.

2. Emergency lighting units including battery and charger.

3. Ballast, including BF.

4. Energy-efficiency data.

5. Sound Performance Data: For air-handling lighting fixtures. Indicate sound power level and sound transmission class in test reports certified according to standards specified in Division 23 Section "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles."

6. Life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data for lamps.

7. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying with IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing & Calculation Guides, of each lighting fixture type. The adjustment factors shall be for lamps, ballasts, and accessories identical to


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


those indicated for the lighting fixture as applied in this Project. a. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated fixtures, photometric data shall be

certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remain-ing fixtures shall be certified by manufacturer.

b. Manufacturer Certified Data: Photometric data shall be certified by a manufac-turer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Labo-ratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

B. Samples: For each lighting fixture indicated in the Interior Lighting Fixture Schedule. Each Sample shall include the following:

1. Lamps and ballasts, installed.

2. Cords and plugs.

3. Pendant support system.

C. Installation instructions.

D. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from in-stallers of the items involved:

1. Lighting fixtures.

2. Suspended ceiling components.

3. Partitions and millwork that penetrate the ceiling or extends to within 12 inches (305 mm) of the plane of the luminaires.

4. Ceiling-mounted projectors.

5. Structural members to which suspension systems for lighting fixtures will be attached.

6. Other items in finished ceiling including the following: a. Air outlets and inlets. b. Speakers. c. Sprinklers. d. Smoke and fire detectors. e. Occupancy sensors. f. Access panels.

7. Perimeter moldings.

E. Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bi-level and dimmer-controlled fixtures, from manufacturer.

F. Field quality-control reports.

G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in emer-gency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes.

H. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


NFPA 70, by UL, a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and applica-tion.


C. FM Global Compliance: Lighting fixtures for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by FM Global.

D. Mockups: Provide interior lighting fixtures for room or module mockups, complete with power and control connections.

1. Obtain Architect's approval of fixtures for mockups before starting installations.

2. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work.

3. Approved fixtures in mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other con-struction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

B. Coordinate fixture mounting assembly with surface where the fixture is to be mounted. Pro-vide mounting assembly to suit surface accepting fixture. Provide steel backing plate of suitable dimensions where necessary to mount fixture.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of battery-powered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair or replace com-ponents of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified war-ranty period.

1. Warranty Period for Emergency Lighting Unit Batteries: 10 years from date of Sub-stantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining nine years.

2. Warranty Period for Emergency Fluorescent Ballast and Self-Powered Exit Sign Bat-teries: Seven years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining six years.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products indicated on Drawings.

2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS

A. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable.

B. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


C. Sheet Metal Components: Steel unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

D. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.

E. Diffusers and Globes:

1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yel-lowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch (3.175 mm) minimum unless otherwise indi-

cated. b. UV stabilized.

2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated.

F. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and ballasts. Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place.

1. Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics: a. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type. b. Lamp diameter code (T-4, T-5, T-8, T-12, etc.), tube configuration (twin, quad,

triple, etc.), base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact fluores-cent luminaires.

c. Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED17, BD56, etc.) and coating (clear or coated) for HID luminaires.

d. Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start, etc.) for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires.

e. ANSI ballast type (M98, M57, etc.) for HID luminaires. f. CCT and CRI for all luminaires.

G. Electromagnetic-Interference Filters: Factory installed to suppress conducted electromag-netic interference as required by MIL-STD-461E. Fabricate lighting fixtures with one filter on each ballast indicated to require a filter.

2.3 BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. General Requirements for Electronic Ballasts:

1. Comply with UL 935 and with ANSI C82.11.

2. Designed for type and quantity of lamps served.

3. Ballasts shall be designed for full light output unless another BF, dimmer, or bi-level control is indicated.

4. Sound Rating: Class A.

5. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent.

6. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or bet-ter.

7. Operating Frequency: 42 kHz or higher.

8. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


9. BF: 0.88 or higher.

10. Power Factor: 0.98 or higher.

11. Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts shall comply with ANSI C82.11 and shall be connected to maintain full light output on surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail.

B. Luminaires controlled by occupancy sensors shall have programmed-start ballasts.

C. Electronic Programmed-Start Ballasts for T8 Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.11 and the fol-lowing:

1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit for T5 diameter lamps.

2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement.

D. Electromagnetic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.1; energy saving, high-power factor, Class P, and having automatic-reset thermal protection.

1. Ballast Manufacturer Certification: Indicated by label.

E. Single Ballasts for Multiple Lighting Fixtures: Factory wired with ballast arrangements and bundled extension wiring to suit final installation conditions without modification or rewiring in the field.

F. Ballasts for Low-Temperature Environments:

1. Temperatures 0 Deg F (Minus 17 Deg C) and Higher: Electronic or electromagnetic type rated for 0 deg F (minus 17 deg C) starting and operating temperature with indi-cated lamp types.

2. Temperatures Minus 20 Deg F (Minus 29 Deg C) and Higher: Electromagnetic type de-signed for use with indicated lamp types.

G. Ballasts for Low Electromagnetic-Interference Environments: Comply with 47 CFR 18, Ch. 1, Subpart C, for limitations on electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for consumer equipment.

H. Ballasts for Bi-Level Controlled Lighting Fixtures: Electronic type.

1. Operating Modes: Ballast circuit and leads provide for remote control of the light out-put of the associated lamp between high- and low-level and off. a. High-Level Operation: 100 percent of rated lamp lumens. b. Low-Level Operation: 30 percent of rated lamp lumens.

2. Ballast shall provide equal current to each lamp in each operating mode.

3. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific bi-level control system and lamp type indicated.

2.4 BALLASTS FOR COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. Description: Electronic-programmed rapid-start type, complying with UL 935 and with ANSI C 82.11, designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated:

1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit.

2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


3. Sound Rating: Class A.

4. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent.

5. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or bet-ter.

6. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher.

7. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less.

8. BF: 0.95 or higher unless otherwise indicated.

9. Power Factor: [0.95] [0.98] or higher.

10. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR 18, Ch. 1, Subpart C, for limitations on electro-magnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment.

2.5 EMERGENCY FLUORESCENT POWER UNIT

A. Internal Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, factory mounted within lighting fixture body and compatible with ballast. Comply with UL 924.

1. Emergency Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp(s) continuously at an output of 1100 lumens each. Connect unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to fixture ballast.

2. Test Push Button and Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening fixture or entering ceiling space. a. Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power

and demonstrates unit operability. b. Indicator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle

charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

3. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type.

4. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type with sealed power trans-fer relay.

5. Remote Test: Switch in hand-held remote device aimed in direction of tested unit ini-tiates coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory-installed infrared receiver in tested unit triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply, providing visual con-firmation of either proper or failed emergency response.

2.6 EXIT SIGNS

A. General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, lumi-nance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Internally Lighted Signs:

1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life.

2. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Integral automatic charger in a self-contained power pack. a. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. b. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. c. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit voltage

drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is re-stored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically re-charged and floated on charger.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


d. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability.

e. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

f. Remote Test: Switch in hand-held remote device aimed in direction of tested unit initiates coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory-installed infrared re-ceiver in tested unit triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply, provid-ing visual confirmation of either proper or failed emergency response.

2.7 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS

A. General Requirements for Emergency Lighting Units: Self-contained units complying with UL 924.

1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, lead-acid type.

2. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay.

3. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power-supply circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.

4. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability.

5. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

6. Wire Guard: Heavy-chrome-plated wire guard protects lamp heads or fixtures.

7. Remote Test: Switch in hand-held remote device aimed in direction of tested unit ini-tiates coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory-installed infrared receiver in tested unit triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply, providing visual con-firmation of either proper or failed emergency response.

2.8 FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. T8 rapid-start lamps, rated 32 W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches (1220 mm), 2800 ini-tial lumens (minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated.

B. T8 rapid-start lamps, rated 17 W maximum, nominal length of 24 inches (610 mm), 1300 ini-tial lumens (minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated.

C. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: 4-Pin, CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, average rated life of 10,000 hours at three hours operation per start[, and suitable for use with dim-ming ballasts] unless otherwise indicated.

1. 13 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 900 initial lumens (minimum).



4. 32 W: T4, triple tube, rated 2400 initial lumens (minimum).



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland



7. 70 W: T4, triple tube, rated 5200 initial lumens (minimum). 2.9 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel- and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling can-opy. Finish same as fixture.

C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture.

D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage (2.68 mm).

E. Wires for Damp, Wet and Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless steel, 12 gage (2.68 mm).

F. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch (5-mm) minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.

PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Lighting fixtures:

1. Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated.

2. Install lamps in each luminaire.

B. Temporary Lighting: If it is necessary, and approved by AC Transit Representative, to use permanent luminaires for temporary lighting, install and energize the minimum number of luminaires necessary. When construction is sufficiently complete, remove the temporary luminaires, disassemble, clean thoroughly, install new lamps, and reinstall.

C. Remote Mounting of Ballasts: Distance between the ballast and fixture shall not exceed that recommended by ballast manufacturer. Verify, with ballast manufacturers, maximum distance between ballast and luminaire.

D. Wall mount exit fixtures where shown above doors. Coordinate fixture location with actual door arrangement as indicated. Connect exit fixtures to unswitched power source as indi-cated.

E. Connect fixtures designated as night lights to unswitched circuit and burn continuously.

F. Install emergency lighting test switches flush mounted at normally accessible locations no higher than 10 feet above the finished floor.

G. Install unswitched line conductor to maintain charge on self-contained emergency and EXIT lighting units.

H. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support:

1. Pendants and Rods Install suspended luminaires using pendants supported from swivel hangers. Provide pendant length required to suspend at indicated height. In-


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


stall plumb and adjust to align with building lines and with each other. In areas sub-ject to wind driven motion, such as exterior canopies or interior areas adjacent to large openings and vehicle doors and where longer than 48 inches provide fixed pendants or brace to limit swinging and prevent wind driven motion.

2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers.

3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end.

4. Do not use grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to building structure.

I. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

3.2 EXTERIOR BUILDING INSTALLATION

A. Install suspended luminaires using pendants and rods supported from swivel hangers. Pro-vide pendant length required to suspend at indicated height. Install plumb and adjust to align with building lines and with each other. In areas subject to wind driven motion, such as exterior canopies and where longer than 48 inches provide fixed pendants or brace to limit swinging and prevent wind driven motion.

B. Install additional concealed support backing in stud walls prior to sheet rocking or installa-tion of exterior wall panels as required to adequately support wall mounted interior and ex-terior lighting fixtures and outlet boxes.

C. Install waterproofing at exterior building mounted luminaries. At exterior wall, and roof penetrations, completely seal clearances around the conduit and outlet boxes and make watertight. Joint sealant shall be suitable for exterior use, UV and mold resistant and suit-able for the environmental temperature changes for the project location.

D. Install joint sealant applied to the mounting plate of all building mounted exterior fixtures prior to mounting on the finished surface in accordance with manufacturers instructions.

E. Install joint sealant all around the intersection of the building mounted exterior fixture and the exterior building façade. Sealant shall be selected to color match the material of the building façade.

F. Install steel backing plate of suitable dimensions where necessary to mount fixture to ex-posed structural steel.

G. Coordinate installation with canopy shop drawings. Provide all brackets and mounting plates necessary to enable luminaire manufacturer’s mounting configuration, surface or pendant, to attach to structure. Provide manufacturer’s adaptor bracket to accommodate the surface to which the luminaire is mounted, including assemblies to allow luminaires with flat surface mounting elements to mount to curved structures.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels with panel and circuit numbers on concealed junction and outlet boxes. Com-ply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Ver-ify transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal.

B. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate com-pliance with standards.

C. Align luminaires and clean lenses and diffusers at completion of work. Clean paint splat-ters, dirt and debris from installed luminaires.

3.5 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Burn-in all lamps that require specific aging period to operate properly, prior to occupancy by Owner. Burn-in fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps intended to be dimmed, for at least 100 hours at full voltage.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Comple-tion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting aimable luminaires to suit actual occupied con-ditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose. Some of this work may be required after dark.

1. Adjust aimable luminaires in the presence of AC Transit Representative.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


SECTION 28 35 00 - REFRIGERANT DETECTION AND ALARM

PART 1 -GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes refrigerant monitors and notification appliances.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. LCD: Liquid-crystal display.

B. LED: Light-emitting diode.

C. PIR: Photoacoustic infrared.


A. Product Data:

1. For each type of refrigerant monitor, include refrigerant sensing range in ppm, tem-perature and humidity range, alarm outputs, display range, furnished specialties, in-stallation requirements, and electric power requirement.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Air-Sampling Tubing: Size, routing, and termination including elevation above finished floor.



A. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For refrigerant monitoring equipment to include in emer-gency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate refrigerant detection and alarm system with refrigerant contained in refrigeration equipment for compatibility.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


1. One calibration kit including clean air calibration gas bottle for zero calibration and specific refrigerant calibration gas for span calibration, minimum 58-L capacity, pres-sure regulator, and tubing.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 PIR REFRIGERANT MONITOR

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. Trane; a division of American Standard

2. Chillgard Refrigerant Monitors; MSA; Instrument Division.

3. Haloguard Monitors; Thermal Gas Systems, Inc.

B. Description: Sensor shall be factory tested, calibrated, and certified to continuously meas-ure and display the specific gas concentration and shall be capable of indicating, alarming, and automatically activating purge exhaust system.

1. Provide manual purge exhaust system control via clearly identified switch of the break-glass type providing “on” control immediately adjacent to and outside of each refrigeration machinery room exit.

2. Provide colored and labeled indicator lamps for ventilation (green), purge (amber) , and no-flow conditions (red).

C. Monitoring system shall comply with 2007 California Mechanical Code, Chapter 11 and ASHRAE 15.

D. Performance:

1. Refrigerant to Be Monitored: R-123 and R-134a.

2. Range: 0 to 1000 ppm.

3. Sensitivity:

a. Minimum Detectability: 1 ppm.

b. Accuracy: 0 to 50 ppm; plus or minus 5 ppm. 51 to 1000 ppm; plus or minus 10 percent of reading.

c. Repeatability: Plus or minus 1 percent of full scale.

d. Response: Maximum 10 seconds per sample.

e. Detection Level Set Points:

1) Detection Level 1: 50 ppm.

2) Detection Level 2 : 150 ppm.

3) Detection Level 3 : 300 ppm.

4. Operating Temperature: 32 to 104 deg F .

5. Relative Humidity: 20 to 95 percent, noncondensing over the operating temperature range. Compensate sensor for relative humidity.

E. Input/Output Features:

1. Maximum Power Input: 120-V ac, 60 Hz, 75 W.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


2. Number of Air-Sampling Points: Two minimum per refrigerant.

3. Air-Sampling Point Inlet Filter: 0.10-micron filter element for each sampling point.

4. Air-Sampling Point Analog Output: 0- to 10-V dc into 2k ohms, or 4- to 20-mA into 1k ohms matched to sensor output.

5. Alarm Relays: Minimum 3 relays at a minimum of 5-A resistive load each.

6. Alarm Set Points: Displayed and adjustable through keypad on front of meter.

7. Alarm Silence Switch: Mount in the front panel of the monitor to stop audible and vis-ual notification appliances, but alarm LED remains illuminated.

8. Alarm Manual Reset: Momentary-contact push button in the front panel of the monitor stops audible and visual notification appliances, extinguishes alarm LED, and returns monitor to detection mode at current detection levels.

9. Display: Alphanumeric LCD, LED indicating lights for each detection level; acknowl-edge switch and test switch mounted on front panel; alarm status LEDs and service fault/trouble LEDs.

10. Audible Output: Minimum 75 dB at 10 feet.

11. Visible Output: Strobe light.

12. Sensor Analog Output: 0- to 10-V dc into 2k ohms, or 4- to 20-mA into 1k ohms.

13. Serial Output: RS-232 or RS-485 compatible with HVAC controls.

14. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1, with locking quarter-turn latch and key.

2.2 MONITOR ALARM SEQUENCE

A. Detection Level 1: Notify HVAC control workstation of detection in the refrigeration equip-ment room on a rise or fall of refrigerant concentration to this level. Cycle blue strobe lights.

B. Detection Level 2 : Notify the HVAC control workstation of the detection in the refrigeration equipment room on a rise or fall of refrigerant concentration to this level. Run ventilation system at high speed on a rise in concentration to this level, and change to low speed on a reduction in concentration below this level. Operate the ventilation system at high speed for a minimum of five minutes. Cycle amber strobe lights.

C. Detection Level 3 : Notify the HVAC control workstation of the detection in the refrigeration equipment room on a rise or fall of refrigerant concentration to this level. Sound alarm horns and cycle red strobe lights inside and outside refrigeration equipment room. Provide manual reset for this detection level.

D. Sensor Fault/Trouble: Notify HVAC control workstation of fault/trouble detection in monitor.

2.3 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

A. Horns: Comply with UL 464; electric-vibrating-polarized type, listed by a qualified testing agency with provision for housing the operating mechanism behind a grille. Horns shall produce a sound-pressure level of 85 dBA, measured 10 feet from the horn.

B. Visible Alarm Devices: Comply with UL 1971; three color xenon strobe lights, with clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The words "REFRIGERANT DETECTION" printed in minimum 1/2-inch- high letters on the lens. Rated light output is 75 candela.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland


2.4 AIR-SAMPLING TUBING

A. Annealed-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with 2007 California Mechanical Code, Chapter 11 and ASHRAE 15.

B. Install air-sampling inlets, or diffusion type monitors in pits, tunnels, or trenches in machin-ery room that are accessible to personnel.

C. Floor mount diffusion-type monitor, sensor/transmitters, or air-sampling inlets on slotted channel frame 12 to 18 inches above the floor in a location near the refrigerant source or between the refrigerant source and the ventilation duct inlet.

D. Wall mount air-sampling multiple-point monitors with top of unit 60 inches above finished floor.

E. Run air-sampling tubing from monitor to air-sampling point, in size as required by monitor manufacturer. Install tubing with maximum unsupported length of 36 inches, for tubing ex-posed to view. Terminate air-sampling tubing at sampling point with filter recommended by monitor manufacturer.

F. Install air-sampling tubing with sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of tubing and movement of equipment.

G. Purge air-sampling tubing with dry, oil-free compressed air before connecting to monitor.

H. Number-code or color-code air-sampling tubing for future identification and service of air-sampling multiple-point monitors.

I. Extend air-sampling tubing from exhaust part of multiple-point monitors to outside.

J. Install warning signs, labels, and nameplates to identify detection devices according to Divi-sion 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

K. Place warning signs inside and outside each door to the refrigeration equipment room. Sample wording: "AUDIBLE AND VISUAL ALARM SOUNDING INDICATES REFRIGERANT DETECTION - ENTRY REQUIRES SCBA."

L. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install at each entry door to refrigeration equipment room, and position not less than 6 inches below the ceiling. Install horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind a grille.

M. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm horn at each entry door to refrigeration equipment room, and position at least 6 inches below the ceiling.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to in-spect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including con-nections. Report results in writing.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland



1. Inspect field-assembled components, equipment installation, and electrical connec-tions for compliance with requirements.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties.

3. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

a. Test procedures used.

b. Test results that comply with requirements.

c. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements.

C. Repair or replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

3.3 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain refrigerant detection devices.



CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC Transit Oakland




CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC TRANSIT OAKLAND


SECTION 31 20 00 - EARTH MOVING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Excavating and backfilling trenches for utilities and pits for buried utility structures.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: Soil material or controlled low-strength material used to fill an excavation.

1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe.

2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.

B. Bedding Course: Aggregate layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.

C. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.

D. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated.

E. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.

F. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, conglomerate deposits, and boulders of rock material 3/4 cu. yd. or more in volume that exceed a standard penetration resistance of 100 blows/2 inches when tested by a geotechnical testing agency, according to ASTM D 1586.

G. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface.

H. Subgrade: Uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, drainage course, or topsoil materials.

I. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings.


A. Product Data: For each type of the following manufactured products required:

1. Geotextiles.

2. Warning tapes.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC TRANSIT OAKLAND


B. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in sizes indicated below:

1. Geotextile: 12 by 12 inches

2. Warning Tape: 12 inches long; of each color.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

B. Material Test Reports: For each on-site and borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill as follows:

1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487.

2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 698.

C. Preexcavation Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by earth moving operations. Submit before earth moving begins.


1. Blasting: Not permitted.

B. Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 and ASTM D 3740 for testing indicated.

C. Preexcavation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Utility Locator Service: AC Transit is not a party to or a participant in the Underground Service Alert (USA). AC Transit will not be providing any field marking service, protecting, and warning the Contractor of the underground facilities

1. Refer to specification section 01 15 40 – PROTECTION OF PROPERTY for additional contract requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations.

B. Satisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches in any dimension for native material and 1” for import fill, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.

1. Liquid Limit: liquid limit (LL) of less than 25

2. Plasticity Index: plasticity index (PI) of less than 12.

C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC TRANSIT OAKLAND


1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction.

D. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

E. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

F. Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and natural sand; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a 1-inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 4 sieve.

G. Sand: ASTM C 33; fine aggregate.

H. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state.

2.2 GEOTEXTILES

A. Subsurface Drainage Geotextile: Nonwoven needle-punched geotextile, manufactured for subsurface drainage applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation greater than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods referenced:

1. Geotextile fabric: Non-biodegradable, woven; 600X manufactured by Mirafi or approved equivalent.

B. Separation Geotextile: Woven geotextile fabric, manufactured for separation applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation less than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods referenced:

1. Filter fabric: Non-biodegradable, non-woven; 140NC manufactured by Mirafi or approved equivalent.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility; colored as follows:

1. Red: Electric.

2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials.

3. Orange: Telephone and other communications.

4. Blue: Water systems.

5. Green: Sewer systems.

B. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide and 4 thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep; colored as follows:

1. Red: Electric.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC TRANSIT OAKLAND


2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials.

3. Orange: Telephone and other communications.

4. Blue: Water systems.

5. Green: Sewer systems.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth moving operations.

B. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls during earth moving operations.

C. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from freezing temperatures and frost. Remove temporary protection before placing subsequent materials.

3.2 DEWATERING

A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.

B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation.

1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches.

3.3 EXPLOSIVES

A. Explosives: Do not use explosives. Explosives and blasting are not permitted.

3.4 EXCAVATION, GENERAL

A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions.

1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.

2. Remove rock to lines and grades indicated to permit installation of permanent construction without exceeding the following dimensions: a. 6 inches (150 mm) beneath bottom of concrete slabs-on-grade. b. 6 inches (150 mm) beneath pipe in trenches, and the greater of 24 inches (600

mm) wider than pipe or 42 inches (1065 mm) wide.

B. Classified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations. Material to be excavated will be classified as earth and rock. Do not excavate rock until it has been classified and cross sectioned by Architect. The Contract Sum will be adjusted for rock excavation according to


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC TRANSIT OAKLAND


unit prices included in the Contract Documents. Changes in the Contract Time may be authorized for rock excavation.

1. Earth excavation includes excavating pavements and obstructions visible on surface; underground structures, utilities, and other items indicated to be removed; together with soil, boulders, and other materials not classified as rock or unauthorized excavation. a. Intermittent drilling; blasting, if permitted; ram hammering; or ripping of material

not classified as rock excavation is earth excavation.

2. Rock excavation includes removal and disposal of rock. Remove rock to lines and subgrade elevations indicated to permit installation of permanent construction without exceeding the following dimensions: a. 6 inches (150 mm) beneath bottom of concrete slabs-on-grade. b. 6 inches (150 mm) beneath pipe in trenches, and the greater of 24 inches (600

mm) wider than pipe or 42 inches (1065 mm) wide.

3.5 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES

A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.

B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches (300 mm) higher than top of pipe or conduit unless otherwise indicated.

1. Clearance: 12 inches (300 mm) each side of pipe or conduit.

C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp objects along trench subgrade.

1. For pipes and conduit less than 6 inches (150 mm) in nominal diameter, hand-excavate trench bottoms and support pipe and conduit on an undisturbed subgrade.

2. For pipes and conduit 6 inches (150 mm) or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of trench to support bottom 90 degrees of pipe or conduit circumference. Fill depressions with tamped sand backfill.

3. For flat-bottomed, multiple-duct conduit units, hand-excavate trench bottoms and support conduit on an undisturbed subgrade.

4. Excavate trenches 6 inches (150 mm) deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course.

D. SUBGRADE INSPECTION

E. Notify AC Transit Representative when excavations have reached required subgrade.

F. If AC Transit Representative determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed.

G. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by AC Transit Representative, without additional compensation.

3.6 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC TRANSIT OAKLAND


A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi (17.2 MPa), may be used when approved by AC Transit Representative

1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction, pipe, or conduit as directed by AC Transit Representative.

3.7 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS

A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.

3.8 BACKFILL

A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following:

1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation.

2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents.

3. Testing and inspecting underground utilities.

4. Removing trash and debris.

5. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting.

6. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls.

B. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

3.9 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL

A. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits.

C. Backfill voids with satisfactory soil while removing shoring and bracing.

D. Place and compact initial backfill of subbase material satisfactory soil, free of particles larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in any dimension, to a height of 12 inches (300 mm) over the pipe or conduit.

1. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both sides and along the full length of piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.

E. Controlled Low-Strength Material: Place initial backfill of controlled low-strength material to a height of 12 inches (300 mm) over the pipe or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.

F. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC TRANSIT OAKLAND


G. Controlled Low-Strength Material: Place final backfill of controlled low-strength material to final subgrade elevation.

H. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches (300 mm) below finished grade, except 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade under pavements and slabs.

3.10 SOIL FILL

A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material.

B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:

1. Under building slabs, use engineered fill.

C. Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

3.11 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL

A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.

1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice.

2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight.

3.12 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS

A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches (200 mm)in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches (100 mm) in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.

B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure.

C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698:

1. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 85 percent.


A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections:

1. Determine prior to placement of fill that site has been prepared in compliance with requirements.

2. Determine that fill material and maximum lift thickness comply with requirements.

3. Determine, at the required frequency, that in-place density of compacted fill complies with requirements.

B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform tests and inspections.


CONTRACT# 2010-1090

AC TRANSIT OAKLAND


C. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earth moving only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements.

D. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following locations and frequencies:

1. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least one test for every 150 feet (46 m) or less of trench length, but no fewer than two tests.

E. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil materials to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.

3.14 PROTECTION

A. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.

1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.

3.15 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

B. Transport surplus satisfactory soil to designated storage areas on Owner's property. Stockpile or spread soil as directed by Architect.

1. Remove waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
